Вы находитесь на странице: 1из 532

NC CENTURION 7

Instruction manual
Version 3.5

November 2005.

1400 Mill Lane Waconia,MN 55,387


952 - 442-1410 952-442-1401 Technical Support 952-442-1418 Parts Department

http://www.milltronics.net/

Milltronics Manufacturing, 2000. All rights reserved

INTRODUCTION
This guide describes the principles of this device Centurion 5, 6 and 7. From an operator perspective, there is no visible difference. The functionality of the same in all of these machines. Equipment Centurion 7 offers increased performance, more memory and expedited processing of data. When referring to Centurion 7 in this guide is also meant Centurion 5 and 6. Centurion 7 in the base configuration with five controlled axes: X, Y, Z, A and B. This guide assumes that the tool moves relative to the workpiece. Part of this guide devoted to programming, is divided into two sections: the text dialog programming and programming. The section of the dialog programming is designed to, first, to explain the different menus, screen messages, and the general sequence of operations. Detailed explanations of each function are described in the section on codes of M & G, background information should be viewed in this section.

ii

TABLE OF CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION ..........................................................................................................................ii TABLE OF CONTENTS ..............................................................................................................iii DETERMINATION OF AXES ......................................................................................................1 INTRODUCTION ..........................................................................................................................2 INTRODUCTION ..........................................................................................................................3 INTRODUCTION ..........................................................................................................................4 SECTION 1 - CONFIGURATION SOFTWARE ..........................................................................5 Block ...........................................................................................................................................5 Program .......................................................................................................................................6 SECTION 1 - CONFIGURATION SOFTWARE ..........................................................................6 The main program, program, and standard routines ...................................................................6 Ranges format commands............................................................................................................7 SECTION 1 - CONFIGURATION SOFTWARE..........................................................................7 Format commands for the axes: M and G codes..........................................................................8 SECTION 2 - FRONT PANEL OPERATION ...............................................................................9 The front panel of Centurion 7 ..................................................................................................10 F1 (Home) Home Screen - The starting position.......................................................................13 F10 (Here) Starting position - current position..........................................................................13 F2 (JOG) Main screen - pulsatory movement............................................................................14 F3 (HDW) Main screen - Flywheel ..........................................................................................15 F4 (Run) Main screen - Implementation....................................................................................19 F9 (Halt / Resum) Main screen - Implementation - Stop / Resume ..........................................22 F2 (Old) Main-Run-Old (Main screen - Implementation - Existing Program) ........................22 F3 (Block) Main-Run-Block (main screen - Implementation - Block).....................................22 F4 (OStop) Main-Run-OStop (Main screen - Implementation - Additional Stop)....................22 F5 (BSkip) Main-Run-BSkip (Main screen - Implementation - Pass Block) ...........................22 F6 (Displ) Main-Run-Displ (Main screen - Implementation - mapping) .................................23 F1 (Dist) Main-Run-Displ-Dist (Main screen - Implementation - mapping - Distance)...........24 F2 (Error) Main-Run-Displ-Error (Main screen - Implementation - mapping - Bug) ..............24 F3 (Graph) Main-Run-Displ-Graph (Main screen - Implementation - mapping - Graphical display).......................................................................................................................................25 F1 (Rot) Main-Run-Displ-Graph-Rot (Main screen - Implementation - Display - Graphic display - Turn) ...........................................................................................................................26 F2 (Pan) Main-Run-Displ-Graph-Pan (Main screen - Implementation - Display - Graphic display - Pan) ............................................................................................................................27 F3 (Wind) Main-Run-Displ-Graph-Wind (The main screen - Implementation - Display Graphic display - Create window).............................................................................................28 F4 (Auto) Main-Run-Displ-Graph-Auto (Main screen - Implementation - Display - Graphic display - Auto-scaling) ..............................................................................................................29 F5 (Zoom-) Main-Run-Displ-Graph-Zoom-(Main screen - Implementation - Display - Graphic display - zoom out)....................................................................................................................29 F6 (Zoom +) Main-Run-Displ-Graph-Zoom + (main screen - Implementation - Display Graphic display - zoom).............................................................................................................29 F7 (Limit) Main-Run-Displ-Graph-Limit (Main screen - Implementation - Display - Graphic display - Borders).......................................................................................................................29

iii

TABLE OF CONTENTS
F8 (Zone) Main-Run-Displ-Graph-Zone (Main screen - Implementation-Display - Graphic display - security zone)..............................................................................................................29 F9 (Coord) Main-Run-Displ-Graph-Coord (Main screen - Implementation - Display - Graphic display - coordinate) .................................................................................................................29 F10 (Fresh) Main-Run-Displ-Graph-Fresh (Main screen - Implementation - Display - Graphic display - Update) .......................................................................................................................29 Help (Clear) (Help (Clear)) Main-Run-Displ-Graph-Clear (Main screen - Implementation Display - Graphic display - Clear).............................................................................................30 F4 (Diag) Main-Run-Displ-Diag (main screen - Implementation - mapping - Diagnostics) ...30 F7 (OBS) Main-Run-Displ-Obs (Main screen - Implementation - mapping - Vnutriplatny switch)........................................................................................................................................31 F9 (Shell) Main-Run-Displ-Shell (Main screen - Implementation - mapping - InExit to the shell)...........................................................................................................................................31 F7 (Menu) Main-Run-Menu (main screen - Implementation - Menu) .....................................32 F8 (Dry) Main-Run-Dry (Main screen - Implementation - Idle)...............................................33 F10 (HDW) Main-Run-HDW (Main screen - Implementation - Flywheel)..............................33 Help (TlSet) Main-Run-TlSet (Main screen - Implementation - Configuration tool)...............34 F5 (MDI) Main-MDI (Main Screen - Manual data entry).........................................................34 F1 (Gcode) Main-MDI-Gcode (Main Screen - Manual data entry - G-codes) .........................35 F2 (Mcode) Main-MDI-Mcode (Main Screen - Manual data entry - M-codes)........................37 F6 (Displ) Main-Displ (Main Screen - Display)........................................................................38 F7 (Parms) Main-Parms (Main screen - Options) .....................................................................39 F1 (Setup) Main-Parms-Setup (main screen - Options - Settings) ...........................................40 F2 (Prec) Main-Parms-Setup-Prec (Main screen - Options - Settings - Accuracy) ..................42 F3 (Power) Main-Parms-Setup-Power (Main screen - Options - Settings - Power) .................43 SECTION 2 - FRONT PANEL OPERATION...........................................................................139 Tool Changer Information (information about the structure of the tool change)......................47 SECTION 2 - FRONT PANEL OPERATION.............................................................................10 F4 (Axis) Main-Parms-Setup-Axis (main screen - Options - Preferences - Axis)....................50 F5 (Misc) Main-Parms-Setup-Misc (Main screen - Options - Settings - Other).......................57 Basic Machine Info (Basic information about the machine) ....................................................58 Software Options (Options software)........................................................................................64 CAD Parameters (Parameters CAD).........................................................................................67 Post M codes Table (Table future M-code)...............................................................................67 European Code Parameter and Operation Descriptions (descriptions of the parameters and the functioning of European codes).................................................................................................68 F4 (FdOvr) Main-Parms-Setup-OVRs-FdOvr (Main screen - Options - Settings - Correction Correction of the feed rate)........................................................................................................70 Exit = Exit..................................................................................................................................72 F5 (HwOvr) Main-Parms-Setup-OVRs-HwOvr (Main screen - Options - Settings - Correction - Correction of the flywheel)......................................................................................................72 Exit = Exit.................................................................................................................................73 F6 (SpOvr) Main-Parms-Setup-OVRs-SpOvr (Main screen - Options - Settings - Correction Correction of the spindle)..........................................................................................................73 Exit = Exit..................................................................................................................................74

iv

TABLE OF CONTENTS
F7 (BSC) Main-Parms-Setup-BSC (Home Screen - Options - Settings - Correction to the ballscrew pair)..................................................................................................................................74 F9 (DOS) Main-Parms-Setup-DOS (Main screen - Options - Preferences - Tip DOS)............75 F2 (Coord) Main-Parms-Coord (Main screen - Options - Contact)..........................................76 F3 (TOOL) Main-Parms-Tool (main screen - Options - Tools)................................................78 F4 (D Off) Main-Parms-D Off (Home Screen - Options - Correction in diameter)..................79 F5 (H Off) Main-Parms-H Off (Home Screen - Options - length compensation).....................80 F6 (Save) Main-Parms-Save (Home Screen - Options - Save)..................................................80 F7 (Load) Main-Parms-Load (Main screen - Options - Load)..................................................81 F8 (Prog) Main-Parms-Prog (Main screen - Options - Program) .............................................81 F9 (CTRL) Main-Parms-CTRL (Main screen - Options - CTRL)............................................85 Serial Port Data (serial data)......................................................................................................89 Digitizing Parameters (Parameters digitizing)...........................................................................91 F10 (User) Main-Parms-User (main screen - Options - User) ..................................................93 F8 (Prog) Main-Prog (main screen - the Program) ...................................................................94 F1 (Text) Main-Prog-Text (main screen - Program - Text mode).............................................95 F1 (Edit) Main-Prog-Text-Edit (main screen - Program - Text mode - Edit)...........................96 Terms of text editing..................................................................................................................96 Writing and editing text.............................................................................................................96 Definitions of keys.....................................................................................................................98 F1 (Block) Main-Prog-Text-Edit-Block (main screen - Program - Text mode - Edit - Block). 98 F2 (Cursr) Main-Prog-Text-Edit-Cursr (Main screen - Program - Text mode - Editing Cursor).......................................................................................................................................99 F3 (Words) Main-Prog-Text-Edit-Words (Main Screen - Program - Text mode - Editing Word) ........................................................................................................................................99 F4 (Misc) Main-Prog-Text-Edit-Misc (Main Screen - Program - Text mode - Editing - Other) ..................................................................................................................................................100 F5 (Ins) Main-Prog-Text-Edit-Ins (main screen - Program - Text mode - Edit - Paste).........102 F6 (Del) Main-Prog-Text-Edit-Del (Main Screen - Program - Text mode - Edit - Delete) . . .102 HELP (Verf) Main-Prog-Text-Edit-Verf (Main Screen - Program - Text mode - Edit - Check) ..................................................................................................................................................102 F2 (New) Main-Prog-Text-New (Home Screen - Program - Text mode - New) ...................103 F3 (Old) Main-Prog-Text-Old (Main Screen - Program - Text mode - Old) .........................103 F4 (Any) Main-Prog-Text-Any (Home Screen - Program - Text mode - Any) .....................103 F7 (Menu) Main-Prog-Text-Menu (main screen - Program - Text mode - Menu).................104 F2 (Conv) Main-Prog-Conv (Main Screen - Program - Interactive Mode).............................105 F1 (Edit) Main-Prog-Conv-Edit (main screen - Program - Interactive mode-Edit)................106 Definitions of Key editing ......................................................................................................107 Definitions of key conservation / I...........................................................................................110 F2 (New) Main-Prog-Conv-New (Home Screen - Program - Interactive mode - New).........111 F3 (Old) Main-Prog-Conv-Old (Main Screen - Program - Interactive mode - Old) ..............111 F4 (Any) Main-Prog-Conv-Any (Home Screen - Program - Interactive mode - Any)...........111 Main-Prog-Conv (Main Screen - Program - Interactive Mode)..............................................111 F7 (Menu) Main-Prog-Conv-Menu (main screen - Program - Interactive mode - Menu)......113 F9 (Verf) Main-Verf (Main screen - Check) ..........................................................................114

TABLE OF CONTENTS
F3 (Block) Main-Verf-Block (Main Screen - Checking - Power) ..........................................118 F4 (OStop) Main-Verf-OStop (Main screen - Testing - Additional Stop)..............................118 F5 (BSkip) Main-Verf-BSkip (Main Screen - Check - Missing the block).............................118 F6 (Displ) Main-Verf-Displ (Main Screen - Check - Displays) .............................................118 F1 (Next) Main-Verf-Displ-Dist (Main Screen - Check - Displays - Distance)......................119 F2 (Error) Main-Verf-Displ-Error (Home Screen - Check - Displays - Error) ......................119 F3 (Graph) Main-Verf-Displ-Graph (Main Screen - Check - Displays - Graphic display) ....119 F4 (Diag) Main-Verf-Disp-Diag (main screen - Check - Displays - Diagnostics) .................120 F8 (Dry) Main-Verf-Dry (Main Screen - Check - Idle) ..........................................................120 F9 (Halt) Main-Verf-Halt (Main Screen - Checking - Stop) F9 (Resum) Main-Verf-Resum (Main screen - Validity - Renewal) ......................................120 F10 (Util) Main-Util (Main Screen - Utilities) .......................................................................121 F1 (Probe) Main-Util-Probe (Home Screen - Utilities - Sensor).............................................121 F2 (XyDig) Main-Util-XyDig (Main Screen - Utilities - Digitize XY)..................................123 F3 (Files) Main-Util-Files (Main Screen - Utilities - Files) ...................................................124 F1 (Load) Main-Util-Files-Load (Main Screen - Utilities - Downloads - Download) ...........124 F2 (Save) Main-Util-Files-Save (Home Screen - Utilities - Downloads - Conservation).......126 F3 (Rename) Main-Util-Files-Rename (Main Screen - Utilities - Files - Rename) ...............126 F4 (Copy) Main-Util-Files-Copy (Home Screen - Utilities - Files - Copy)............................126 F5 (Ram) Main-Util-Files- Ram (The main screen - Utilities - Files - RAM) ...................126 F9 (Erase) Main-Util-Files-Erase (Main Screen - Utilities - Files - Erase).............................126 F4 (RS232) Main-Util-RS232 (Main Screen - Utilities - RS232) ..........................................126 F1 (COM1 or COM 2).............................................................................................................126 F5 (Send) Main-Util-RS232-Send (Home Screen - Utilities - RS232 - Send)........................127 F6 (Recev) Main-Util-RS232-Recev (Main Screen - Utilities - RS232 - Get)........................127 F7 (Ram) Main-Util-RS232-Ram (The main screen - Utilities - RS232 - RAM) ..........128 F5 (Tlchg) Main-Util-Tlchg (Main Screen - Utilities - Tool change).....................................128 F6 (DNC) Main-Util-DNC (Main Screen - Utilities - DNC) .................................................129 F3 (Fast) Main-Util-DNC-Fast (Home Screen - Utilities - DNC - Fast mode).......................130 F1 (RS232)...............................................................................................................................131 F2 (File) (File)..........................................................................................................................131 F3 (Disk) (Disk).......................................................................................................................131 F4 (Any) (Any)........................................................................................................................131 F5 (Old) (Existing)...................................................................................................................131 F6 (Ram ) (RAM) ...................................................................................................................131 F1 (First) (First).......................................................................................................................131 F2 (Block) (Block)...................................................................................................................131 F3 (Tool) (tool)........................................................................................................................131 F4 (Cont) (Continued) .............................................................................................................131 F9 (Skip) (Skip).......................................................................................................................131 F10 (Mirr) (Mirror)..................................................................................................................132 F3 (Fast) (Fast Track) .............................................................................................................132 F4 (Run) Main-Util-DNC-Run (Home Screen - Utilities - DNC - Implementation)..............133 F9 (Verf) Main-Util-DNC-Verf (Main Screen - Utilities - DNC - Check).............................133 F8 (Info) Main-Util-Info (Home Screen - Utilities - Information)..........................................134

vi

TABLE OF CONTENTS
F1 (Std) Main-Util-Info-Std (Home Screen - Utilities - Statistics - Standard) .......................134 F2 (Sys) Main-Util-Info-Sys (Main Screen - Utilities - Statistics - System) ..........................135 F3 (Fp) Main-Util-Info-Fp (Main Screen - Utilities - Details-Front) .....................................136 F4 (Path) Main-Util-Info-Path (Main Screen - Utilities - Information - Directions) .............137 F5 (Time) Main-Util-Info-Time (Home Screen - Utilities - Statistics - Time) ......................138 F6 (Ram) Main-Util-Info-Ram (The main screen - Utilities - Statistics - RAM)....................139 F7 (Diag) Main-Util-Info-Diag (main screen - Utilities - Statistics - Diagnosis) ...................139 F9 (Blank) Main-Util-Blank (Home Screen - Utilities - Blank)..............................................140 F10 (Command) Main-Util-Command (Home Screen - Utilities - Team) .............................140 Help (AugRv) Main-Util-AugRV (Main Screen - Utilities - Reverse the screw) ..................140 SECTION 3 - display a dialog INPUT DATA ...........................................................................141 Installing the software..............................................................................................................143 F1 (Pos) Main-Prog-Conv-Pos (main screen - Program - Interactive mode - the Regulations) ..................................................................................................................................................144 F2 (Mill) Main-Prog-Conv-Mill (Home Screen - Program - Interactive mode - Milling)......145 F1 (Start) Mill-Start (Milling - Start) ......................................................................................145 F2 (Geom) Mill-Geom (Milling - Geometry) .........................................................................147 F1 (Line) Mill-Geom-Line (Milling - Geometry - Line) ........................................................148 F2 (Arc) Mill-Geom-Arc (Milling - Geometry - Doug)..........................................................152 F3 (Tangs) Mill-Geom-Tangs (Milling - Geometry - Tangent) .............................................155 F4 (CGen) Mill-Geom-CGen (Milling - Geometry - Generator circles).................................157 F7 (Islnd) Mill-Geom-Islnd (Milling - Geometry - Island) ....................................................158 F8 (E-Isl) Mill-Geom-E-Isl (Milling - Geometry - End of treatment of the island)................159 F3 (Misc) Mill-Misc (Milling - More options)........................................................................165 F4 (End) Mill-End (Milling - End) .........................................................................................165 F5 (Pockt) Mill-Pockt (Milling - Deep excavation) ...............................................................177 F1 (Setup) Mill-Pockt-Setup (Milling - Deep groove - Installation) ......................................177 F2 (Circ) Mill-Pockt-Circ (Milling - Deep groove - Round) ..................................................178 F1 (Clear) Mill-Pockt-Circ-Clear (Milling - Deep groove - Round - Clean) .........................179 F2 (Fin) Mill-Pockt-Circ-Fin (Milling - Deep groove - Round - Finishing) ..........................180 F3 (Rect) Mill-Pockt-Rect (Milling - Deep groove - Rectangular) ........................................180 F1 (Clear) Mill-Pockt-Rect-Clear (Milling - Deep groove - Rectangular - Clean) ................181 F2 (Fin) Mill-Pockt-Rect-Fin (Milling - Deep groove - Rectangular - Finishing) .................182 F3 (Face) Mill-Pockt-Rect-Face (Milling - Deep groove - Rectangular - Ends) ....................182 F4 (Manul) Mill-Pockt-Manul (Milling - Deep groove - Clean by hand)...............................183 F5 (Polyg) Mill-Pockt-Polyg (Milling - Deep groove - Polygonal) .......................................184 F6 (Frame) Mill-Frame (Milling - Frame) ..............................................................................185 F1 (Setup) Mill-Frame-Setup (Milling - Frame - Installation) ...............................................185 F2 (Circ) Mill-Frame-Circ (Milling - Frame - Round) ...........................................................186 F3 (Rect) Mill-Frame-Rect (Milling - Frame - Rectangle) .....................................................187 F5 (Poly) Mill-Frame-Poly (Milling - Frame - Polygon) .......................................................187 F7 (3dPkt) Mill-3dPkt (Milling - Sweep in 3 dimensions)......................................................188 F1 (Start) Mill-3dPkt-Start (Milling - Sweep in 3 dimensions - Home) .................................188 F4 (End) Mill-3dPkt-End (Milling - Sweep in 3 dimensions - End) ......................................190 F5 (3dArc) Mill-3dPkt-3dArc (Milling - Sweep in 3 dimensions - three-dimensional arc) ...193

vii

TABLE OF CONTENTS
F8 (CAD) Mill-CAD (milling - CAD) ....................................................................................197 F9 (Thred) Mill-Thred (Milling - Thread) ..............................................................................200 F3 (Drill) Drill (Drill) .............................................................................................................201 Boring .................................................................................................................................202 Drilling / Pause....................................................................................................................203 Drill / drill bits with a periodic output ................................................................................203 Struzhkolomnoe drilling .....................................................................................................204 Boring..................................................................................................................................205 Boring / Pause......................................................................................................................206 Boring 2...............................................................................................................................206 Accelerated boring...............................................................................................................207 Fine boring...........................................................................................................................207 Contact boring .....................................................................................................................208 Boring manual......................................................................................................................209 Tsekovanie ..........................................................................................................................210 Drilling holes to screw (Drill-Start-Tap).............................................................................211 Drilling holes for soft tapping on the right .........................................................................211 Drilling holes for soft tapping on the left.............................................................................212 Drilling holes for rigid tapping on the right.........................................................................213 Drilling holes for rigid tapping on the left...........................................................................213 Drilling holes for rigid tapping on the right with a periodic output bits..............................214 Drilling holes for rigid tapping on the left with the conclusion of the periodic drills.........215 F2 (Pos) Drill-Pos (Drilling-positioning), F3 (Misc) Drill-Misc (Drilling - Options), F4 (Call) Drill-Call (Drilling - Call) .......................................................................................................215 F5 (End) (End) ........................................................................................................................219 F6 (CAD) Drill-CAD (Drilling - CAD) ..................................................................................219 F4 (Bolt) (Bolt) .......................................................................................................................228 F5 (TChng) Change Tool ........................................................................................................246 F6 (Misc) (Additional Functions) ...........................................................................................249 F7 (Call) (Call) ........................................................................................................................250 F8 (Spec) (Specifications) .......................................................................................................251 F1 (Parms) Spec-Parms (Specifications - Options) ................................................................252 F2 (Tools) Spec-Tools (Specifications - Tools) ......................................................................252 SECTION 3 - display a dialog INPUT DATA...........................................................................142 F4 (Scale) Spec-Scale (Specification - Scale) ........................................................................255 F5 (Rot) Spec-Rot (Specifications - Turn)...............................................................................256 F6 (Mirr) Spec-Mirr (Specs - Mirror) .....................................................................................258 F7 (Flz) Spec-Flz (Specifications - Floating zero)..................................................................259 F8 (Text) Spec-Text (Specifications - Text) ...........................................................................260 F9 (Subs) (Sub) .......................................................................................................................261 F1 (Gosub) Subs-Gosub (Sub - Jump to a subroutine) ...........................................................262 SECTION 3 - display a dialog INPUT DATA...........................................................................143 F2 (Start) Subs-Start (Sub - Run) ...........................................................................................263 F3 (End) Subs-End (Sub - Conclusion) ..................................................................................263 Example programs using subprograms ...................................................................................264

viii

TABLE OF CONTENTS
End of program .......................................................................................................................267 PART 4 - PRE-FUNCTION (G-CODES)...................................................................................268 G-codes ...................................................................................................................................268 Interpolation functions ............................................................................................................271 Positioning (G00) with rapid movement (modal) ...................................................................271 Positioning (G01) Movement of feed (modal) ........................................................................272 Determination of polar ............................................................................................................273 Circular interpolation (G02, G03)............................................................................................274 Corner rounding (, R)...............................................................................................................287 Bevel angle (, C)......................................................................................................................288 Contact Line ............................................................................................................................289 Screw cutting (G02, G03)........................................................................................................291 The team paused (G04)............................................................................................................292 Exact Stop (G09)......................................................................................................................292 Data Set incl. / Off. (G10, G11)...............................................................................................293 Cleaning the floating zero (G12).............................................................................................293 The plane XY (modal) (G17)...................................................................................................293 The plane XZ (modal) (G18)...................................................................................................293 The plane YZ (modal) (G19)...................................................................................................293 Inch size mode (Modal) (G20).................................................................................................293 Metric size mode (Modal) (G21).............................................................................................294 Enable / disable the safe zone (G22, G23)...............................................................................294 Automatic standard programs .................................................................................................294 Cleaning the round deep recesses (G24)..................................................................................295 Internal finishing round of deep grooves (G25)......................................................................296 Outdoor finishing round of deep grooves (G26)......................................................................298 Return to the zero point (G28, G29, G30)...............................................................................300 Z to the gap (G31)....................................................................................................................302 Z to the tool change (G32).......................................................................................................302 The processing cycle ends (G33).............................................................................................302 Cleaning deep rectangular grooves (G34)...............................................................................302 Internal finishing of deep rectangular grooves (G35)..............................................................304 Outdoor finishing deep rectangular grooves (G36).................................................................307 Tapping (G39)..........................................................................................................................308 The cycle performance of the polygons (G666)......................................................................309 Correction of the cutting tool (G40, G41, G42).......................................................................312 The inner "V"-shaped correction to the cutting tool................................................................316 Test sample details...................................................................................................................316 How to make a correction to the cavity...................................................................................321 Blocking the movement (G65).................................................................................................322 PART 4 - PRE-FUNCTION (G-CODES)..................................................................................269 Automatic correction of the cutting tool (G45, G46, G47)......................................................328 Examples of programs.............................................................................................................329 Tool length compensation (G43, G44, G49)...........................................................................331 Cancel scaling (G50) Set scaling (G51)...................................................................................332

ix

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Coordinate Systems ................................................................................................................334 The coordinate system of the machine (G53)..........................................................................334 Work coordinate system (G54 - G59) (G5 # 0 ... G5 # 9).......................................................335 The local coordinate system (G52)..........................................................................................335 One-way or one-time accelerated positioning (G60)...............................................................337 Exact stop mode (modal) (G61)...............................................................................................337 Tapping mode (modal) (G63)..................................................................................................337 Cutting mode (modal) (G64)...................................................................................................337 Calling the program (G65 P)....................................................................................................337 Rotate the coordinate system (G68) Cancel the rotation (G69)...............................................338 Turn in 3 dimensions (G0, G1, G2, G3, G68 and G69)...........................................................341 Scalable and then turns the part...............................................................................................342 Rotatable and scalable, then the item ......................................................................................343 Cancel mirroring (G70)............................................................................................................344 Install a mirrored display (G71)...............................................................................................344 Group cycles ...........................................................................................................................345 Execute bolt holes (G72).........................................................................................................351 The cycle of high-speed drill bits with a periodic output (G73)..............................................354 The cycle of the soft tapping on the left (G74)........................................................................355 Tsekovanie (G75).....................................................................................................................356 Cycle finish boring (G76)........................................................................................................357 Specialized drilling cycle (G77)..............................................................................................358 The cycle of boring manual (G78)...........................................................................................359 Cancellation of group cycle (G80)...........................................................................................359 Drilling cycle (G81).................................................................................................................360 Drilling cycle / pause (G82).....................................................................................................360 Drilling cycle with periodic withdrawal of the drill (G83)......................................................361 The cycle of the soft tapping on the right (G84)......................................................................362 Boring Cycle (G85)..................................................................................................................363 The cycle accelerated boring (G86).........................................................................................364 Boring feedback loop (G87)....................................................................................................365 Rigid tapping cycle (G88)........................................................................................................367 Boring Cycle / Pause (G89).....................................................................................................369 PART 4 - PRE-FUNCTION (G-CODES)..................................................................................384 Absolute / incremental mode...................................................................................................372 Absolute mode (modal) (G90).................................................................................................372 Incremental mode (modal) (G91)............................................................................................373 Floating zero (G92)..................................................................................................................374 Feed mode with a time delay (G93).........................................................................................376 Submission of a minute (G94).................................................................................................376 Feed per revolution (G95)........................................................................................................377 Returning to the original level or the level of R (G98/G99)....................................................377 On. / Off. cylindrical display (G107).......................................................................................377 G271 (cleaning deep cavities) .................................................................................................380 Save / Restore Settings (G990/G991)......................................................................................383

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Read byte parameters (G995)..................................................................................................384 Write byte parameters (G996).................................................................................................384 Calling error (G997)................................................................................................................385 Beep (G998) ............................................................................................................................385 Special G-codes ......................................................................................................................385 SECTION 5 - ADDITIONAL FEATURES (L-CODES) ...........................................................386 Stop the program (M00)...........................................................................................................389 An optional stop (M01)............................................................................................................389 Skipping the block (/)...............................................................................................................389 Completion of the program (M02, M30, M99)........................................................................389 Spindle incl. / Off. (M03, M04, M05) ....................................................................................390 Tool change (M06) .................................................................................................................390 Coolant inc. / Off. (M07, M08, M09)......................................................................................390 Clip for rotary table (M10) .....................................................................................................390 Decompression on the turntable (M11)...................................................................................390 Tool changing device codes (M19-M28).................................................................................391 Lock Drive (M31)....................................................................................................................391 Canal (M32).............................................................................................................................391 Various M-codes (M65/75, M67/77, M68/78, M69/79, M50/60)...........................................391 Enable / disable graphics (M90, M91).....................................................................................391 Enable / disable scanning in 3 dimensions (M93, M94)..........................................................391 SECTION 5 - ADDITIONAL FEATURES (L-CODES)...........................................................388 Tapered wall (M95).................................................................................................................393 SECTION 5 - ADDITIONAL FEATURES (L-CODES)...........................................................387 Rounded walls (M96)..............................................................................................................396 Cleaning the deep recesses (M97)...........................................................................................401 Subroutine call (M98)..............................................................................................................402 The completion routines (M99)...............................................................................................402 Training routines .....................................................................................................................403 Performing routines.................................................................................................................404 Specialized M-codes ...............................................................................................................405 SECTION 6 - PARAMETRIC PROGRAMMING ....................................................................407 Parametric link.........................................................................................................................407 Parametric team assignment ...................................................................................................407 PB (byte option) ......................................................................................................................407 Arithmetic Operators ..............................................................................................................408 Relational Operators ...............................................................................................................408 The operators of functions ......................................................................................................409 Mathematical expressions .......................................................................................................410 Conditionals ............................................................................................................................410 IF-THEN..................................................................................................................................410 WHILE-WEND.......................................................................................................................411 Operators of transfer ...............................................................................................................411 GOTO statements ....................................................................................................................412 CALL statement ......................................................................................................................412

xi

TABLE OF CONTENTS
GOSUB and RETURN............................................................................................................413 Computational functions .........................................................................................................414 Time team ...............................................................................................................................417 Additional commands .............................................................................................................419 SECTION 6 - PARAMETRIC PROGRAMMING....................................................................427 IPIN..........................................................................................................................................424 OPIN........................................................................................................................................424 Teams check details and digitizing .........................................................................................424 Contact Line.............................................................................................................................425 MOD (modulo operation)........................................................................................................426 SECTION 6 - PARAMETRIC PROGRAMMING....................................................................408 ORIGIN (start address)............................................................................................................426 HOME (starting position)........................................................................................................427 SECTION 7 - EXAMPLES OF PROGRAMS ...........................................................................430 SECTION 7 - EXAMPLES OF PROGRAMS...........................................................................431 SECTION 7 - EXAMPLES OF PROGRAMS...........................................................................484 APPENDIX .................................................................................................................................486 Error Messages.........................................................................................................................486 APPENDIX .................................................................................................................................487 Byte parameters ......................................................................................................................503 APPENDIX .................................................................................................................................508 The actual parameters..............................................................................................................510 APPENDIX .................................................................................................................................518 APPENDIX .................................................................................................................................511

xii

DETERMINATION OF AXES
All directions are oriented relative to the tool. The figure below shows the direction of X, Y and Z.

INTRODUCTION
The group of commands sent to the CNC work on the machine, called a program. With the help of a specific command tool is moved in a straight line or arc, and run the machine functions such as switching on / off coolant, tool change, or turn on / off spindle. The function of the tool along straight lines and arcs is called interpolation. Linear interpolation Circular interpolation

When you run the tool at a desired position of the CNC moves the tool in this situation by a regime of linear or circular interpolation. The position is given as a coordinate value in a rectangular Cartesian coordinate system. Coordinates

INTRODUCTION
There are following types of coordinate systems. A. The system of the machine

Two. Working coordinate system

3. The local coordinate system

INTRODUCTION
The command to move the tool to the desired position is performed using the values of the coordinates, based in one of the above coordinate systems. Coordinate value is a single component of each axis, X, Y and Z. The coordinate values can be entered in absolute and incremental mode in. In absolute mode, the tool moves to the point the programmed distance from the zero point coordinate system. In incremental mode, the tool moves to the point the programmed distance from the current position of the tool.

Absolute mode

Incremental backup is

SECTION 1 - CONFIGURATION SOFTWARE


By definition, the program - a set of commands sent to the CNC machine operation. By choosing the tool moves in a straight line or arc, or switched on and off the motor spindle. The program must specify the command in the sequence of movements of real instruments. Block Block Block Block Program Tool movement sequence . . . Block

A set of commands at each stage of the sequence is called block. The program consists of a group of blocks for a series of movements of the machine. An additional number to identify each movement is block numberAnd the number of serving for the title of each program, called program number. Unit and the program has the following configuration. Block

Each unit begins with an additional accommodation and ends <CR> (carriage return).

SECTION 1 - CONFIGURATION SOFTWARE


Program
NUMBER OF PROGRAMS BLOCK BLOCK BLOCK

END OF PROGRAM

Typically, the program number is specified at the beginning of the program and graduation from the program code (M99, M02, M30) - at the end of the program. They are not mandatory, however, may be advantageous to omit the code to the end of the programs that are used as a subroutine. Code completion of the program is supposed to enter at the end of the main program. The main program, program, and standard routines

If you want to process on the same path in several places on the details necessary to create a program path. It is called subroutine. If the main program there is "M98" or "Call" (subroutine call), the team routines are executed before executing the next block of the main program. Routines can be used to create libraries of frequently used paths machining, they can be stored anywhere in memory.

SECTION 1 - CONFIGURATION SOFTWARE


Ranges format commands The base address and range of values of the commands listed in the table below. It should be borne in mind that these figures indicate the maximum limit for the numerical control. These limits will always be greater than or equal to the physical limits of the machine. Limits are set using the machine parameters in the settings of the machine in the control unit. Ranges format commands FEATURES Subroutine number and number of the program Sequence number Preparations for the function * The size of the words Pause Feed rate * Spindle speed * Tool The auxiliary function Repeat or loop LETTER OF THE TEAM O N G XYZUVWQ ABCIJKRP P F S T M L ENTER IN INCHES 1 - 9999 1 - 99999 0 - 999 0 999.9999 0.01 - 9999.99 0.1 - 999.9 1 - 99999 0 - 99 0 - 999 0 - 999 Enter the metric system 1 - 9999 1 - 99999 0 - 999 0 9999.9999 0.01 - 9999.99 0.1 - 9999 1 - 99999 0 - 99 0 - 255 0 - 999

* These functions have the election decimal places. It can be any number of integer and decimal places, while the total number of digits to be placed in the field.

SECTION 1 - CONFIGURATION SOFTWARE


Format commands for the axes: M and G codes The commands for the axes can be programmed in the format of the calculator. Do not want to zeros before or after the comma. Integers can be programmed without the decimal point. Decimal point can be used with the values expressed in mm, inches or seconds. Location of the decimal point as follows. Z15.0 F10.0 G04 P1 Z15 Z15 millimeters or inches 10 mm / min or 10 inches / minute Pause for one second (Same as Z15) (Same as F10) (The same as the G4 P1)

The following addresses can be used with a decimal point: X, Y, Z, U, V, W, A, B, C, I, J, K, R, F, P, Q, AA, AB, XC, YC, ZC, E, H, L, N, O, S and T. Min / max values for the axes of the standard systems Metric system The English system Degrees The smallest increment of Maximum 0.001 mm 99999.999 mm 0.0001 inch 99999.9999 in. 0.001 degrees 99999.999 degrees

The provisions of the axes are stored in floating point, so the digital team of more than 8 will be accepted.

SECTION 2 - FRONT PANEL OPERATION


The front of the Centurion have two 16-key keypad and 12 function keys. Keyboards are used to enter alphanumeric data requested by the CNC. The upper keyboard is used primarily for entering text characters. To enter a character to another register, simply press and release the key ShiftAnd then character. Once a symbol has been entered, the control unit automatically returns to the set of characters with no case. Key Shift works in the same manner on the bottom or the numeric keypad. Gaps between the teams of data entry is not required, but you must click on Enter to complete the data lines or move to the next function. The work of 12 function keys change when displayed on the display of various menus. In the following sections, each function key is described in detail. The lower part of the panel refers to the cycles of the machine in manual mode. At the extreme left of the panel has an electronic hand wheel, which, when in manual mode, allows the movement of the selected axis. Next to the flywheel are filing for adjustment of the handle of the machine axes manually. By turning the handle feedrate override changes the current flow rate of the machine to a specified percentage. Pressing the button Feedhold (Stop feeding) will lead to the cessation of movement along the axes. To resume the motion of the axes, you must again click on Feedhold, And then click Cycle Start (Beginning of cycle). On the button Cycle Start to be pressed when you need to run the machine. Cycle Start flashes when it will be necessary to press it. The next part of the panel refers to the spindle and coolant control devices. Dial adjustment spindle speed changes the current spindle speed for the selected percentage. If the machine is not equipped with optional variable speed spindle rotation speed adjustment switch will have no effect on the spindle. Use the spindle CCW (Counterclockwise),CW (Clockwise) and Stop (Stop) blocked the current command control unit and the operator can make corrections in a fully manual mode. At the operational status of the spindle will be illuminated to indicate the button. Buttons coolant (Mist (Oil mist) and Flood (Coolant splash)) Work the same way as the buttons CW and CCW. When they burn, the function is active, however, the coolant will not turn on until the spindle is running. Button Tool Reset (Reset tool) is only active when you run M6. This button is a safety interlock. It prevents the launch of the spindle with manual tool change.It lights up when changing the tool, and it must be pressed after the tool change before resume program. When you click Emergency Stop (Emergency stop) immediately cease all actions of the machine. When the button Emergency Stop pressed, the button Reset (Reset) will flash, indicating that it is necessary to press, before any movement on the machine. The control unit is always in a state of emergency stop after the power supply. Below is a diagram of the front panel of the CNC Centurion.

SECTION 2 - FRONT PANEL OPERATION


The front panel of Centurion 7

CNC 7200/8200

10

SECTION 2 - FRONT PANEL OPERATION


Scheme of the main screen

2 3

4 5 6 7 8

RunTime (run time) During the test period, the program displays the estimated time of execution of production parts. When working in the program, it shows how much time has passed since the start of the program. All data on the periods of implementation of programs stored in the parameter "Job Time" ("time of manufacturing the same parts") (F7 Parms - F9 Ctrl). History Line (Story) History Line shows where you are in the program and how you got there. If you change the spreadsheet tool, history will show the Main-Parms-Tool-Edit. Active Program (active program) Active Program indicates the program in which you work or you are testing. If you are editing a program, it will show that the activated editing program. If you send a file via RS232, it will show that the program has been sent. Current Position (current position) Current Position - a position relative to the zero adjustment of the working Next Position (next position) If you are running a program or check out her next position (Next Position) is the position into which the machine. Distance (distance) Distance - the distance that machine is left to go until the completion of the action. The Function Keys (function keys) Illuminated function keys are active or available. Status Window (status window) The status window displays detailed information about the state of the control system. A detailed description is given below.

11

SECTION 2 - FRONT PANEL OPERATION

The scheme of the Status Window A 2 3 Button "\" changes to "/" to "\" every time the status window is updated. Comp: Correction to the tool radius (Left (Left), Right (R) or Cancelled (repealed)) Tool: The first two digits indicate the number of the active tool. The second two numbers in parentheses indicate the number of expected instrument. If you do not T14 M6, the expected number of tools will be 14. 4 The length of the tool. 5 The radius of the tool. 6 Plane and work offset (and the working plane correction): The plane can be XY (G17), ZX (G18) or YZ (G19). Working correction shows the current working correction G54 (0) ... G59 (9). 7 The gap, or plane R. 8 Interpolation Linear (Feed) (linear (feed)), Linear (Rapid) (linear (accelerated movement)), Circular (CW) (a circular (clockwise)) or Circular (CCW) (circular (counterclockwise)) 9 Feedrate: programmed feed rate and its unit of measurement (flow per minute in English system) ipm (inches / min) (flow per minute in the metric system) mmpm (mm / min), (feed per revolution in the English system) ipr (inches v / v), (feed per revolution of the metric system) mmpr (mm / rev) or (reverse flow) / minute or / sec (If the machine is in an accelerated mode, the units will always be in / min or mm / min.) 10 Feedrate override (feedrate override): Position switch feedrate and the resulting flow rate. If the machine is programmed to move faster than its maximum value, you will see the speed limit and the feed icon "*" next to the%. 11 Units (Units) (absolute) Abs or (incremental) Inc, and English (the English system of measurement) or Metric (Metric)

12

SECTION 2 - FRONT PANEL OPERATION


12 Cycle (Cycle): If the cycle is activated, or a group program with automatic start, in this line it will be displayed. 13 Dwell (pause): If you pause, her time will be counted in the reverse order to zero. 14 Spindle (Spindle): The programmed number of revolutions per minute. 15 Correction of the frequency and direction of rotation of the spindle: Switch position correction and the resulting rotation of the spindle speed (if there is no spindle encoder) or actual speed (if the sensor stem.) This line is also displayed, whether disabled or spindle is rotated in a clockwise direction (CW) or counterclockwise (CCW). 16 Spindle load sensor indicates the load on the spindle. He is getting longer and the color changes from blue to green to yellow to red with increasing load. 17 Coolant (Coolant), Off (disabled), Mist (oil mist), Flood (irrigation) or Mist / Flood (oil mist / watering) 18 Readout of parts increases each time the program ends normally. They will not increase if the program is interrupted, or the program contains an error. They do not increase at idle, when checking or manual data entry. They do not increase with modes RUN, DNC-Run and the DNC-Fast. The parameter number used for the counter - P699 (it can be used for engraving or anything else). You can increase the value of the counter at any number. The option to increase - P698. To install it, there is no place to perform and should be entered manually P698 = #. Can be reset to increase or decrease the value of the counter with the following: Shift-F1 (reset / reset) Shift-F2 (decrease) (will not decrease below zero) Shift-F3 (increase) Press and hold the Shift key when you press F. The remainder of this section provides an explanation of each function that can be done using the front panel. F1 (Home) Home Screen - The starting position After switching off the power control unit must always be set to its original position after setting the machine to zero. Each axis will look for the limit switch installed in the initial position and momentum of a marker on the sensor. Upon completion of this procedure will be determined by the zero position of the machine, which will be called again until the next power outage. To start the installation process to its original position, press the ESC, and until you reach the main screen, then press the F1 (starting position). The message of the need to press the button Cycle Start (The first cycle), and flashes. When you click on Cycle Start start the installation process to its original position upon completion will return to the main screen. The parameters set the starting position can be adjusted in the parameters of the axis. F10 (Here) Starting position - current position F10 (current position) is activated only if the settings were correct password is entered. The machine can be set to zero without moving the axis. Press the key F10 (current position), when it is highlighted, then press the Cycle Start (Start of cycle). The position of the machine will be perceived as a zero position.

13

SECTION 2 - FRONT PANEL OPERATION


Note: If the machine has a line of glass used for quill removal, F1 (quill) will reset the position of sleeve. See more information on the scale of quill on page 60, Section 2. F2 (JOG) Main screen - pulsatory movement Before moving the jog the machine must be set to zero. F2 (pulsatory movement) is used to move the machine in manual mode to determine the zero points and alignment of parts. Pressing the F2 (pulsatory move) the following screen appears. Note: F5 and F6 can be modified to preserve the provisions in the G92, the correction of the floating zero.

RunTime = Period Main-Jog = Main screen - pulsatory movement Active = Active Current = current next Next = Distance = the distance ipm = inch / min Correction: canceled Instrument: Length: Diameter: Plane: Clearance: Interpolation: linear (feed) Submission: Units: absolute / English system Cycle: canceled Pause: (sec = seconds) Spindle: (rpm = r / min) Coolant: Disabled Number details: Slow = slow; Fast = fast; Dist = distance; Tool = Tool; Exit = exit

With the help of the function buttons at the bottom of the screen to select the desired mode jog move. Use the F1 (slowly) selects a slow jog. Adjust the feed rate is activated, it can accelerate 14

SECTION 2 - FRONT PANEL OPERATION


or slow jogging speed of movement. Use the F2 (quickly) selected rapid jog. The manufacturer of the machine determines the slow and fast flow rate and can change the values of each of them in the axial parameters. When you press F3 () Mode is selected as the continuous jog feed. Pulsatory movement of the default continues, if you pressed F3 (.) In continuous mode, the selected axis continues to move until the user releases the key to the axis, or until it reaches a preset limit. When submitting an incremental value of the axis moves to the selected increments and stops each time the user presses and releases a key axis. Once the operator presses the key F4 (distance), the control unit gives a hint about the need to introduce the desired increments. The diagram shows the direction of the keyboard, in which the axis moves when pressed the corresponding key on the numeric keypad. To exit the incremental supply is necessary to press F3 (.) Depending on the size of the auxiliary parameter "rather than the use of FLZ G54", F5 and F6 keys perform the G54 or G92 for X or Y in the current state of the machine. It can be seen as a challenge to this position ". # # # # # #". F7 key used to set the tool length, the operator are given clues as to the axis of Z. If the user wants to exit the jog mode is done by pressing the ESC (exit), the control unit returns to the main screen. F3 (HDW) Main screen - Flywheel Before you operate the machine with a flywheel, you must set the machine to zero. Flywheel mode is used for movement of the machine with an electronic handwheel. Its main purpose: setting the correction to the length of the tool, the installation and alignment corrections job details. Pressing the F3 (flywheel), the following screen appears.

RunTime = Period Main-HDW = Main screen - Flywheel Active = Active Current = current next Next = Distance = the distance Correction: canceled Instrument: Length: Diameter:

15

SECTION 2 - FRONT PANEL OPERATION


Plane: Clearance: Interpolation: linear (feed) Submission: Units: absolute / English system Cycle: canceled Pause: (sec = seconds) Spindle: (rpm = r / min) Coolant: Disabled Number details: Tool = Tool; Exit = exit

Note: F8 can be modified to preserve the correct position in the G92. F keys at the bottom of the screen are used to choose which axis will move when you turn the flywheel. With the switch feedrate determined the distance that will move each axis of the handwheel one click. With illuminated keys axis is determined, which will move the axis. F6 (Z-tool) used to set the correct length of the Z-axis tool in the tool table, or table Hparameters. In the flywheel can be placed in the tool spindle and move the zero point Z. You can then click on the button F6, which indicates an intention to enter the current position of Z as Hparameter correction of the length of the tool. CNC will give a clue as to position Z. After pressing the Enter (Enter), the current Z position is used for the length of the tool. Depending on the size of the auxiliary parameter "rather than the use of FLZ G54", G54 executes F8 key or the G92 for X or Y or Z in the current state of the machine. The operator shall be issued with respect to the axis of clues. It can be seen as "a challenge that position '. # # # # # #'." Note: The indicated distance refers to how the machine will move in one click flywheel.

16

SECTION 2 - FRONT PANEL OPERATION


The installation procedure is the correction to the length of the instrument Note: there is an alternative method to adjust the lengths of instruments with.34. Tool length is used to compensate for the difference between the zero point of the Z-axis and the surface parts (zero parts). Install a floating zero on the Z axis is not recommended. To set the adjustment to the length of the tool download the tool number 1 in the spindle, doing manual entry T1M6. Use the handwheel or jog feed for contact details of the instrument in a certain place. Select F6 (Z-tool). The control unit will prompt the need to enter the installed position of Z. Tool length compensation for the number 1 tool set. Now when the tool number 1 (H1) is programmed in the position, he will be positioned relative to the zero point of detail. Repeat this procedure for each instrument. Tool length can be set by entering a value in the table of tool offsets. The value can be measured by touching the details of the instrument and seeing the current position of the axis Z. If between the tool and the workpiece is used pad, its size should be added to the value of the correction. To enter to select F7 (Settings) - F3 (Tool). Next, enter a value in the form of a negative number. The F8 key on-screen flywheel is used to set the floating ground or working on the coordinates of the selected axis in the current state of the machine. F8 (G54-X), F8 (G54-Y), F8 (G54-Z) mean the same thing as setting the coordinates of the G54 working in the current state of the machine. F9 key is used to select the operating system of coordinates. With the F9 key to changing the working coordinate on key F8. There are six different options, G54-59.

17

SECTION 2 - FRONT PANEL OPERATION


The procedure to install the correct working Working shifts the zero-point correction of X and Y axes to the desired position (edge details.) Thus, the item can be programmed from its zero point. In order to determine and set an example see the work of correction.

With kromkoiskatelya diameter "on the X axis to move by hand wheel or jog feed to the edge of the details and press F8 (G54-X). Define a positive or a negative value kromkoiskatelya the desired zero point. Enter -0.25 for position X. The current position will be read as X -0,25. Repeat this procedure to the axis Y. To test the null value of the work of correction to choose F5 (manual data entry), type G0 (rapid movement) X0 Y0 (X and Y position to 0). Press Enter (Enter)And then Cycle Start (Start of cycle). The machine will be the current working position correction. Please note: Moving the machine will run in accelerated mode. The tool should be above all the parts, clutches, etc. For more information on floating zero, see p. 374, Section 4.

18

SECTION 2 - FRONT PANEL OPERATION


F4 (Run) Main screen - Implementation (Before running the machine must be set to zero) The key F4 (Implementation) is used to perform an active program. When you press the F4 (Implementation) the following screen appears.

RunTime = Period Main-Run = Main screen - Perform Active = active Current = current next Next = Distance = the distance Correction: canceled Instrument: Length: Diameter: Plane: Clearance: Interpolation: linear (feed) Submission: Units: absolute / English system Cycle: canceled Pause: (sec = seconds) Spindle: (rpm = r / min) Coolant: Disabled Number details: Start = start; Old = the existing program; Block = block; Ostop = extra stops; Bskip = pass block; Displ = map; Menu = menu; Dry = idle; HDW = flywheel; Esc = exit; TlSet = configuration tool

When you see the above screen, press the F1 (Start), the following screen. (Note: if the machine is equipped with an automatic tool change, the operator receives a request for verification of the tool room, located in the spindle).

19

SECTION 2 - FRONT PANEL OPERATION

RunTime = Period Main-Run-Start = Main screen - Running-Start Active = Active Current = Next = current next Press the Cycle Start (beginning of the cycle) to start the program from the beginning. Correction: canceled Instrument: Length: Diameter: Plane: Clearance: Interpolation: linear (feed) Submission: Units: absolute / English system Cycle: canceled Pause: (sec = seconds) Spindle: (rpm = r / min) Coolant: Disabled Number details: First = first; Block = block; Tool = Tool; Abort = abort

F1 (first) is selected automatically when you receive this screen. So, if you want to run an active program from the beginning, press only Cycle Start (Start of cycle). Pressing the F2 (block) device management request to enter the desired number of blocks or sequences, and then click on Enter (Enter). If the button is pressed Cycle Start (The first cycle), an active program will start from the selected block. When you click on F3 (Tool), the control unit requests the tool number. After entering the number, clicking on the tool and Enter, Click on Cycle Start, And an active program will start with the number you want the tool, the following screen. Note: If the requested block number or tool is not found in the active program, the following window appears.

20

SECTION 2 - FRONT PANEL OPERATION


Block N657 is not found. Press the Cycle Start (Start of cycle) to start the program from the beginning.

When you click on Cycle Start (Start of cycle) program runs from the beginning.

RunTime = Period Main-Run = Main screen - Perform Active = Active Current = current next Next = Distance = the distance Correction: the left by / Instrument: Length: Diameter: Plane: Clearance: Interpolation: linear (accelerated movement) Submission: Units: absolute / English system Cycle: canceled Pause: (sec = seconds) Spindle: (rpm = r / min) Coolant: Disabled Number details: Block = block; Ostop = extra stops; Bskip = pass block; Displ = display; Halt = Stop; HDW = flywheel; Esc = exit

This screen is the main startup screen with two new additions: the map unit number and F9 (Stop). It shows the current block to be executed by the program. Key F9 (Stop) is similar

21

SECTION 2 - FRONT PANEL OPERATION


Feedhold (Stop feeding) that when pressed, the machine stops. However, in contrast to FeedholdBy F9 (Stop) can exit the Run (Execute) and start a new program. F9 (Halt / Resum) Main screen - Implementation - Stop / Resume If the program was stopped, resume function is activated. Now on the screen Run (Execute) to display the key F9 (Resum) (Renewal). The program can be renewed, if not carried out any of the following functions: F9 (Verf) (check), F5 (MDI) (Manual data entry), F1 (Home) (starting position), or Emergency Stop (emergency stop). F9 (Resum) is also canceled when any parameter is changed. If you do not perform other functions on the axes can be performed Jog feeding or management with the flywheel, regardless of the work, the spindle can be turned on and off, and F9 (Resum) will remain active. While the resume function is activated, the F9 key on the screen Run (Execute) will show a Resume (Resume). If the resume function is selected, an active program to be launched since the shutdown. First, the Z-axis will be assigned to the tool change position during the entire renewal cycle. Second, the X and Y axis will move in accelerated mode to break point. Once the X and Y will be set in position, will again be prompted for Cycle Start (Start of cycle). When you click on Cycle Start Z-axis will be moved at an accelerated rate in the plane R; then it will be submitted to its previous depth. The program execution continues as if nothing had happened. Pressing Feedhold (Stop feeding) simply stops the movement of the axes, while it is pressed again, and then also pressed Cycle Start (Start of cycle). F2 (Old) Main-Run-Old (Main screen - Implementation - Existing Program) F2 (Old) (existing program) allows the entry - of the message box - the text to an existing program. After entering the number, the control unit checks the text of the program on the subject of whether there is among them a program with this number. If so, this program is activated. If not, a message appears stating that the program was not found. After pressing the ESC (Exit), you can enter another number. Press the F3, F4, F5 and F8 the screen Run (Execute) is established for the operation of the program. When these buttons are illuminated, the functions are active in any current program or any program to be executed. F3 (Block) Main-Run-Block (main screen - Implementation - Block) When the switch is activated F3 (Block) (Block), the program stops at the end of each block. Each time you press the Cycle Start (Start of cycle) is satisfied another block. F4 (OStop) Main-Run-OStop (Main screen - Implementation - Additional Stop) When the button is enabled an additional stop, F4 (OStop), the program will stop at each team M01. When you click on Cycle Start (Start of cycle) will continue the program. F5 (BSkip) Main-Run-BSkip (Main screen - Implementation - Pass Block) When the button is activated crossing block, F5 (BSkip), the program will skip all the blocks, beginning with a / (slash). For example: / M5

22

SECTION 2 - FRONT PANEL OPERATION


When the button is activated crossing block, M5 (spindle off the team) will not run. F6 (Displ) Main-Run-Displ (Main screen - Implementation - mapping) Access to key F6 (Displ) (map) is available on many screens. The screen below shows access to the F6 (Displ) from the screen RUN (Running). All display functions and screens are identical, regardless of point of entry into the program. Differ only in the cusps on the basis of the original entry point. When you press F6 (Displ) (map), the following screen appears.

RunTime = Period Main-Run-Displ = Main screen - Implementation-Display Active = Active Current = current next Next = Distance = the distance Correction: Left res \ Instrument: Length: Diameter: Plane: Clearance: Interpolation: linear (accelerated movement) Submission: Units: absolute / English system Cycle: canceled Pause: (sec = seconds) Spindle: (rpm = r / min) Coolant: Disabled Number details: Dist = distance; Error = error; Graph = graphical display; Diag = diagnosis; Obs = vnutriplatny switch; Shell = output in the shell; Esc = exit

Note: F7 and F9 appears only in protected mode.

23

SECTION 2 - FRONT PANEL OPERATION


F1 (Dist) Main-Run-Displ-Dist (Main screen - Implementation - mapping - Distance) When the key is activated by F1 (Dist) (distance), the screen displays the current position, next position and the distance it takes to pass. F2 (Error) Main-Run-Displ-Error (Main screen - Implementation - mapping - Bug) Error error refers to the delay of the servo system. Pressing the F2 (Error) (Error), the screen displays the current position, next position, and the mismatch error. Displays the following error is intended to help in setting up the machine, or find and fix faults on the line. Pressing the F2 (Error) (Error), the following screen appears.

RunTime = Period Main-Run-Displ = Main screen - Displays the Running-Active = Active Current = Next = current next Following Error = error error Correction: canceled Instrument: Length: Diameter: Plane: Clearance: Interpolation: linear (feed) Submission: Units: absolute / English system Cycle: canceled Pause: (sec = seconds) Spindle: (rpm = r / min) Coolant: Disabled Number details: Dist = distance; Error = error; Graph = graphical display; Diag = diagnosis; Esc = exit

24

SECTION 2 - FRONT PANEL OPERATION


F3 (Graph) Main-Run-Displ-Graph (Main screen - Implementation - mapping - Graphical display) If you press F3 (Graph) (graphic display), the control unit switches to display text on a graphic display of the active part program. The following screen appears.

RunTime = Period Main-Run-Displ-Graph = Main Screen-Display-Running-Graphical Active = Active Correction: canceled Instrument: Diameter: Length: Submission: Rotation: Coolant: Disabled Number details: Rot = rotation; Pan = Pan; Wind = creation of a window; Auto = automatic scaling; Zoom-= zoom out; Zoom + = zoom in; Limit = limits; Zone = safe zone; Coord = coordinate; Fresh = update; Exit = output; Clear = clear

Graphs in the NC are fully three-dimensional and displayed in the graphics area as long as the control device is in graphics mode. At the request of other maps in the graphics area of the window will appear with the requested data. At the end of the window with these features disappear, and the graphical display will be restored. The scales at the bottom and the left side of the screen used to control the size of the parts. If you change the scale on the lines dividing the screen will change accordingly. Division in the rulers expressed in units of the machine, in imperial system equal to the largest division of about one inch. In the metric system of dividing up the largest 10 mm. Parameter Runtime (Period), the top screen is essentially a timer that starts when the command is run Run Program (program implementation), and stops at the end of the program or when the program is terminated.

25

SECTION 2 - FRONT PANEL OPERATION

F1 (Rot) Main-Run-Displ-Graph-Rot (Main screen - Implementation - Display - Graphic display - Turn)

Length: Rotation: Coolant: Disabled Number details: Done = done

(F1-XY, F2-XZ, F3-Y2, F4-ISO) Press the F1, F2, F3 and F4 produced four standard turning parts: XY top, XZ Front, YZ side and isometric views. The index of orientation in the lower left corner of the screen indicates the current orientation of the parts. By pressing the keys F1 through F4 Index orientation is moved to its new position. Keys F5 to F10 are used to turn any of the selected axis in increments of 5 . Again, if a key is pressed, the index of the orientation is rotated to indicate the orientation of the display items. With the F5 and F6 turns the axis of X , using F7 and F8 - axis Y , and using the F9 and F10 - axis Z .

26

SECTION 2 - FRONT PANEL OPERATION


Note: The screen is scaled automatically displaying the new orientation. F2 (Pan) Main-Run-Displ-Graph-Pan (Main screen - Implementation - Display - Graphic display - Pan) Key F2 (Pan) (Pan) is used to select the pan, through which the operator can pan around the item. The following screen appears.

RunTime = Period Main-Run-Displ-Graph-Pan = Main Screen-Display-Running-Graphical-Pan Active = Active Correction: canceled Instrument: Diameter: Length: Submission: Rotation: Coolant: Disabled Number details: Block = block; Enter = input; Done = done

Crosshair that appears on the screen can be moved using the numeric keys or the arrow keys F7 F10. To perform the pan to move the cursor to a point on the screen, ie to the desired center of the screen and click on the F5 (Enter) (Enter) or Enter (Enter) key on your keyboard. The screen will shift to a new position, panning can be resumed. Use the ESC (Exit) cancels the pan function and returns to the screen Graph (graphic display). Crosshairs can also be used to verify the origin items to be displayed on the screen.

27

SECTION 2 - FRONT PANEL OPERATION


F3 (Wind) Main-Run-Displ-Graph-Wind (The main screen - Implementation - Display Graphic display - Create window) Use the F3 (Wind) (Creation of the window) is selected by a window function, which enables the operator to create a window in a specific area of detail. When you select F3 (Wind) (Creating a window) the following screen appears.

RunTime = Period Main-Run-Displ-Graph-Wind = Main Screen-Display-Running-Graphical-Create Windows Active = Active Correction: canceled Total Dist = total distance Instrument: XDist = distance to the axis X Diameter: YDist = distance to the Y axis Length: Submission: Rotation: Coolant: Disabled Number details: Enter = input; Done = done

Crosshair that appears on the screen can be moved using the numeric keys or the arrow keys F7 F10 (as well as in the pan). In order to increase through the window to move the cursor to the first corner of the window and press the F5 (Enter) (Enter) or click Enter (Enter). Then move the cursor up until the desired region of the details do not fall into a rectangular block as shown on the screen. Then click on Enter. The area enclosed in the block will now be displayed in full screen. After clicking on Enter window closes and you return to the graphical mode. Cross can be used to verify the origin and the distance between the elements in detail. XY coordinates in the lower left of the screen indicates the position of the cursor relative to the zero point of detail. XY coordinates in the bottom right indicate the size of the window. These numbers can be used for quick reference on the amount and details of the parameters.

28

SECTION 2 - FRONT PANEL OPERATION


F4 (Auto) Main-Run-Displ-Graph-Auto (Main screen - Implementation - Display - Graphic display - Auto-scaling) Use the F4 (Auto) is selected auto-scaling. This function is performed auto-scaling and centering all the details on the screen. F5 (Zoom-) Main-Run-Displ-Graph-Zoom-(Main screen - Implementation - Display Graphic display - zoom out) Use the F5 (Zoom) function is selected to reduce the scale by which the size is reduced by half the details are currently displayed on the screen. Basically, this function is used to view much of the detail. F6 (Zoom +) Main-Run-Displ-Graph-Zoom + (main screen - Implementation - Display Graphic display - zoom) Use the F6 (Zoom) function is selected to increase the scale, doubling the size of the items displayed on the screen. Basically, this function is used to increase the specific area of detail that allows the operator to see more details. F7 (Limit) Main-Run-Displ-Graph-Limit (Main screen - Implementation - Display Graphic display - Borders) Pressing F7 (Limit) (Borders) features a block on the screen corresponding to the limits of the machine axes. This allows you to display the item on the transition of the machine limits. If the item is beyond the scope of this unit, it can not be processed on the machine, without making any corrections of measures to change the job of corrections. The extreme limits of axes are set from the pages of parameters. When programming parts outside the block error message "Axis software limit overtravel" (Go for the specified boundary line). Note: To display the actual position within the need to set the zero point and the details of the length of the instrument. F8 (Zone) Main-Run-Displ-Graph-Zone (Main screen - Implementation-Display - Graphic display - security zone) Pressing F8 (Zone) is drawn on the screen of the block corresponding to the security zone axis. This zone, which can not enter the tool. If the tool is programmed in the block when the function of the security zone (G23), an error message "Attempted to move into safe zone" (Trying to move into the security zone). G22 disables the security zone. F9 (Coord) Main-Run-Displ-Graph-Coord (Main screen - Implementation - Display Graphic display - coordinate) Use the F9 (Coord) is drawn through the axis of the coordinate X0, Y0, Z0. This gives a visual guide to the location of the zero-point detail. F10 (Fresh) Main-Run-Displ-Graph-Fresh (Main screen - Implementation - Display Graphic display - Update) When you press the F9 (Fresh) updates the details of the current image on the screen.

29

SECTION 2 - FRONT PANEL OPERATION


Help (Clear) (Help (Clear)) Main-Run-Displ-Graph-Clear (Main screen - Implementation Display - Graphic display - Clear) Use the F10 (Clear) clears the current image buffer. After the command to clear the screen did not show up to verify or re-run the program. F4 (Diag) Main-Run-Displ-Diag (main screen - Implementation - mapping - Diagnostics) The key F4 (Diag) is mainly used to configure the machine or troubleshooting functions of the machine. Diagnostic screens download all the external bits of I / O connected to the CNC. The state of each bit is displayed on the screen, and, as they are changed on the machine, the screen is updated. With the help of the function keys F1 through F6 illustrates the different axes involved in TNC. If you select X, Y, Z, etc. load the corresponding I / O channels axes. Display "0" on the screen means that the I / O channel is not active. "1" indicates an activity. The next screen provides information issued by the choice of different axes.

RunTime = Period Main-Run-Displ-Diag = Main Screen-Display Performance-Diagnostics-Active = Active Enter the X-axis The output of the X axis Correction: canceled 01 Emergency Stop 01 Program Emergency Stop Instrument: Connecting rod 02 is turned off 02 coolant in the form of oil mist Length: Connecting rod 03 is included 03 Coolant splash Diameter: 04 Acceleration The rotation of the spindle 04 in a Plane: 05 Change Tool clockwise direction Clearance: 06 Failure of lubrication system The rotation of the spindle 05 Interpolation: linear (feed) 07 Waiting for the channel counterclockwise Submission: 08 Zero Speed The spindle 06 in the order Units: absolute / English system 09 Faulty Drive 07 The inclusion of a connecting rod Cycle: canceled 10 Rear Spindle 08 Change Tool Pause: (sec = seconds) 11 Digitization Resolution 09 relief Spindle: (rpm = r / min) The switch 12 of the original Conclusion 10 X 10 Coolant: Disabled Marker pulse 11 Locking Spindle Number details: Marker of the spindle 12 swivel clip

30

SECTION 2 - FRONT PANEL OPERATION


Counter spindle speed Esc = exit

Note: The diagnostic screens will be different for machines with various options. The text appearing on screen - from the files and INP.XXX OUT.XXX, where XXX - this extension is to display the desired language on the screen. Files INP.XXX OUT.XXX and the base of the machine without options are located in the ROM (ROM). Files that match the options that may be on the machine, will be in the memory (RAM). The control unit first check the directory memory (RAM). If no files are found in it, the control unit will use the default files in the directory the ROM (ROM). Each axis has inputs and outputs, by pressing the F1 ... F6 buttons are shown, the inputs and outputs for the corresponding axis. Note: In machines with tool changer, etc. there are other diagnostic screens. F7 (OBS) Main-Run-Displ-Obs (Main screen - Implementation - mapping - Vnutriplatny switch) The key F7 (Vnutriplatny switch) will be displayed only on the access level 2 and above. F7 (Vnutriplatny switch) will be highlighted, it is only available if the current mapping - F1 (Next) or F2 (distance). It displays information about the motion control boards. F7 (Vnutriplatny switch) appears only in protected mode. F9 (Shell) Main-Run-Displ-Shell (Main screen - Implementation - mapping - InExit to the shell) Key F9 (Exit to the shell) is available if the control device is located at the access level 2 and above. It will be released into the system DOS. To return to the machines to print exit (exit). F9 (Exit to the shell) appears only in protected mode.

31

SECTION 2 - FRONT PANEL OPERATION


F7 (Menu) Main-Run-Menu (main screen - Implementation - Menu) Use the F7 (Menu), selected from the screens Run (Execute) or Verify (test) window appears containing a list of all available programs that can be performed. The screen shown below appears when you request the software menu.

RunTime = Period Main-Run-Menu = Main screen - Implementation - Menu Active = Active Current = current next Next = Distance = the distance Conversational file Centurion = File Correction: canceled Dialog Centurion Instrument: Length: Diameter: Plane: Clearance: Interpolation: linear (feed) Submission: (ipm = inches / min) Units: absolute / English system Cycle: canceled Pause: (sec = seconds) Spindle: (rpm = r / min) Coolant: Disabled Number details: Verf = check; Enter = avodah; Togle = shift; PgUp = Page Up; PgDn = page down; Abort = interrupt; Drive = CD

To activate one of the programs listed in the window, use the arrow keys and page turning to move the cursor to the desired program and press the F5 (input) or on the button Enter (Enter) key on your keyboard. The function menu can be accessed from other screens, but it works the same everywhere. When calling from the screens Run (Execute) or Verify (Test) selected program becomes active. When invoked with the selected program editing screen becomes editable. With the help of F1 (check) graphically checked the item on which the cursor is positioned. When you press F6 (switch) is displayed file size, date and time of last modification,

32

SECTION 2 - FRONT PANEL OPERATION


and seven characters for file name. The names of the subdirectories are defined as <DIR>. ".." Determine the parent directory to the current. Pressing the HELP (CD), a list of available drives. Note: The file name is enclosed in brackets. If the first block there are no brackets, file name is the first unit. Pressing the "D" appears in the menu to "Full Dos Filenames" (Complete file names in the Dos), and from it. Pressing the "N" function is called sort files by name and description. F8 (Dry) Main-Run-Dry (Main screen - Implementation - Idle) When activated, F8 (Idle), all the programmed feed rate will work in supply at idle. Note: Teams spindle at idle can be ignored when setting the parameter. Switch to Dry Run (Idle) and vice versa can be done at run time. The machine must first be set to stop F9 (Halt), switched to idle or back F8 (Dry), and then work the machine shall be resumed F9 (Resum). Key F8 (Dry) (Idle) will not be displayed during program execution. F10 (HDW) Main-Run-HDW (Main screen - Implementation - Flywheel) When the key is activated F10 (HDW) (flywheel), moving along the axes of the program will apply to electronic handwheel rotation. The feed rate (feed / rev or feed / min) will influence the distance covered in one click flywheel. Four different parameters that influence the distance covered in one click flywheel are listed below. A. Peripheral flywheel sensor data The number of aftershocks / rev electronic handwheel. This value must be equal to 400 for our existing systems.

Two. Starting min / rev The total number of minutes of normal time, the program must comply with one turn the flywheel. The increase in supply (in inches / min) due to this factor will lead to the filing, in inches / turn the flywheel. This value must be approximately .0010 to our existing systems. Three. Start, max. inch / min This limits the flow rate, but it is run manually for valid response to the programmed low feed rates. Regulation of other parameters may cause flywheel mismatch error on the situation at speeds greater than 100 inches / min. This value must be equal to about 100 in our current system. 4. The coefficient on startup The coefficient for each click flywheel should be about 100 for our current system.

The coefficient of the start / Number of minutes / circulation at start proportional to the maximum allowable flow rate when manually started.

33

SECTION 2 - FRONT PANEL OPERATION


In manual mode, and idle distance covered in one click flywheel true for the Dry Run Feed (feed at idle). When you switch from manual to automatic message for the operator to press "Start cycle". If the operator is in manual mode, and the cycle starts tapping, a message appears "Tapping cycle will not be in handwheel mode. Press any key to continue" (The cycle of tapping does not work in manual mode. To continue to press any key.). The machine will perform tapping and return to manual mode. Help (TlSet) Main-Run-TlSet (Main screen - Implementation - Configuration tool) If you are not running any programs, help button (TlSet) (Setting tool) serves as a key tool settings. Help button Help (TlSet) is similar to F1 (Start) (Start). If you click it sought Cycle Start (Start of cycle). A. The operator requested an installation height of the fire. Two. The operator is requested to install the tool number correction. The machine performs the tool on the tool with this number. Three. The operator manually brings cutting edge tools to size or butt part. He then clicks on Enter (Enter). 4. The operator requested the radius of the tool. Five. Go to number 2. During the procedure, setting the table tool is loaded with the appropriate values. After downloading the tool offset operator can press the ESC (stop) to exit the setup tool. Note: This program can be changed for specific applications (automatic device configuration tools, a variety of devices tool change, etc.). F5 (MDI) Main-MDI (Main Screen - Manual data entry) Use the F5 (MDI) (Manual data entry) in the main menu, select the function of manual data entry. With it, any machine function can be performed as a function or a block at once. If you select the manual input of data, the following screen appears.

34

SECTION 2 - FRONT PANEL OPERATION

RunTime = Period Main-MDI = Main Screen - Manual data entry Active = Active Current = current next Next = Distance = the distance Correction: canceled Instrument: Length: Diameter: Plane: Clearance: Interpolation: linear (feed) Submission: (ipm = inches / min) Units: absolute / English system Cycle: canceled Pause: (sec = seconds) Spindle: (rpm = r / min) Coolant: Disabled Number details: MDI = Manual data entry GCode = G-codes; MCode = M-codes; Displ = map; Done = done

When you type functions, they are displayed in the MDI line at the bottom of the screen. After entering data, you must click on the Enter (Enter) to complete the unit. At a given point of beginning of the loop will execute a string MDI. In manual data entry by pressing the ESC (Exit), you can cancel any command MDI. With the F6 is called a normal graphic image, which was described above. If in manual data entry include graphics, display the extent of implementation will be graphically displayed all the action. F1 (Gcode) Main-MDI-Gcode (Main Screen - Manual data entry - G-codes) Use the F1 (Gcode), the list of allowed G-code and a brief description of each. Pressing the F1 (Gcode) appears the following list of G-code. 00 Linear Rapid (Linear accelerated motion) 02 CW Arc 35 01 Linear Feed (Line feed) 03 CCW Arc

SECTION 2 - FRONT PANEL OPERATION


(Clockwise arc) (Counterclockwise arc) 04 Dwell 09 One-Shot Exact Stop (Pause) (Single precision stop) 10 Set Data Mode 11 Clear Data Mode (Setup mode data) Mode (data cleansing) 12 Clear Floating Zero 17 XY Plane (Clearing the floating zero) (Plane XY) 18 XZ or ZX Plane 19 YZ Plane (Plane XZ or ZX) (Plane YZ) 20 English 21 Metric (English) (Metric) 22 Safe zone check off 23 Safe zone check on (Check off the safe zone) (Include verification of safe zones) 24 Circ Pocket Clear 25 Circ Finish Inside (Clear round deep recesses) (inchickpeas. clean. Rec. circle. depth. seizures) 26 Circ Finish Outside 28 Reference Return (Naruzh. clean. processing cycle. the deep recesses) (Back to the zero point) 29 Return From Ref 30 2nd-4th Ref Return (Return to zero) (2-4-th return to the zero point) 31 Z to Clearance 32 Z to Tool Change (Z in the gap) (Z to change the tool) 33 Facing Cycle 34 Rect Pocket Clear (Loop ends) (Cleaning pryamoug. the deep recesses) 35 Rect Finish Inside 36 Rect Finish Outside (Inchickpeas. clean. pryamoug processing. depth. seizures) (naruzh. clean. Rec. straight. depth. seizures) 39 Threading Cycle 40 CutterComp Off (Loop threading) (Off correction in the dir. tool) 41 Left CutterComp On 42 Right CutterComp On (Including correction of the cutting tool on the left) (Including the correctionI was on scene. Tools For. right) 43 + H Offset Dir 44 - H Offset Dir (H + direction correction) (- The direction of the correction H) 45 Left Auto Comp On 46 Right Auto Comp On (Incl. autom. Correction dir. Tools For. Left) (Incl. auth. Correction. On scene. Instr. Right) 47 Auto Comp Off 49 Cancel Tool Offsets (Disable auto-correction) (Cancellation of corrections to the tool) 50 Scaling Off 51 Scaling On (Off scale) (plant scale) 52 Local Coordinate 53 Machine Coordinates (Local coordinate) (the coordinates of the machine) 54 Worksystem a 55 Worksystem 2 (Operating system 1) (Operating System 2) 56 Worksystem 3 57 Worksystem 4

36

SECTION 2 - FRONT PANEL OPERATION


(Operating system 3) 58 Worksystem 5 (Operating system 5) 60 One-Shot Rapid Move (One-time accelerated course) 63 Tapping Mode On (Including mode tapping) 65 Move Lockout Block (Blocking traffic) 69 Rotation Off (AboutTmenov rotation) 71 Mirror Image On (Installation of mirroring) 73 Woodpecker Drill (Drilling with periodic withdrawal of the drill) 76 Fine Bore (Final boring) 80 Canned Cycle Cancel (Abolition of the loop group) 82 Drill / Dwell (Drilling / pause) 84 Tap (Narezanie thread) 86 Fast Bore (Accelerated boring) 88 Hard Tap (option) (Rigid tapping (optional)) 90 Absolute (Absolute size) 92 Set Floating Zero (Installation of a floating zero) 94 Inches per Minute (Inches per minute) 98 Ret to Initial Level (Return to the initial level) (Operating system 4) 59 Worksystem 6 (Operating system 6) 61 Exact Stop Mode (Exact stop mode) 64 Tapping Mode Off (Off mode groove. Tapping) 68 Rotation On (installation of the turn) 70 Mirror Image Off (FromNames mirroring) 72 Bolt hole (Hole bolt) 74 Left Tap (narezanie thread on the left) 78 Manual Bore (Boring manual) 81 Drill (Drilling) 83 Peck / Drill (Periodic withdrawal of the drill / drill) 85 Bore (boring) 87 Back Bore (the reverse bore) 89 Bore / Dwell (Boring / pause) 91 Incremental (Incrementale size) 93 Inverse Time Feed (Supply with delay) 95 Inches per Revolution (Inches per revolution) 99 Return to R-plane (Back to the plane of R)

Note: A text file showing the allowed G-codes on the screen, - Gcodes.XXX, where XXX is the extension for that language. The device management first looks in the directory Gcodes.XXX RAM (memory). If the file is not found, he searched in the catalog ROM (ROM). F2 (Mcode) Main-MDI-Mcode (Main Screen - Manual data entry - M-codes) Use the F2 (Mcode), a list of allowed M-codes with a brief description of each. 00 Program Stop (Stop the program) 02 End of Program 01 Optional Stop (Optional stop) 03 Spindle On CW

37

SECTION 2 - FRONT PANEL OPERATION


(Completion program) (Including the rotation of the spindle on the hour. Wise) 04 Spindle On CCW 05 Spindle Off (Including the rotation of the spindle against the hour. Arrows) (Rotation of the spindle off) 06 Tool Change 07 Mist On (Tool change) (Including coolant in the form of oil. Fog) 08 Flood On 09 Coolant Off (Including coolant splash) (Off coolant) 30 Spindle Off, End of Program 90 Graph Off (Off the spindle, the completion of the program) (Off chart) 91 Graph On 93 3D Sweep Off (Graphics included) (Off 3D scanning) 94 3D Sweep On 95 Tapered Wall (Including 3D scanning) (Cone wall) 96 Rounded Wall 97 Pocket Clear (Rounded side) (treatment of deep grooves) 98 Call Jump 99 End of Program (Calling program) (completion of the program) Note: A text file showing the allowed M-codes on the screen, - Mcodes.XXX, where XXX is the extension for that language. The device management first looks in the directory Mcodes.XXX RAM (memory). If the file is not found, he searched in the catalog ROM (ROM). Depending on the options allowed by the machine M codes may vary. File in the directory Mcodes.XXX ROM (ROM) refers to the basic machine without options. F6 (Displ) Main-Displ (Main Screen - Display) See the description of F6 (Displ) Main-Run-Displ (Main screen - Implementation - mapping) on page 23, Section 2. In this function you can access from multiple screens.

38

SECTION 2 - FRONT PANEL OPERATION


F7 (Parms) Main-Parms (Main screen - Options) Use the F7 (Parms) on the main screen is displayed next page with parameters.

RunTime = Period Main-Parms = Main screen - Options Active = Active Current = current next Next = Distance = the distance Correction: canceled Instrument: Length: Diameter: Plane: Clearance: Interpolation: linear (feed) Submission: (ipm = inches / min) Units: absolute / English system Cycle: canceled Pause: (sec = seconds) Spindle: (rpm = r / min) Coolant: Disabled Number details: Setup = setup; Coord = coordinates; Tool = Tool; D off = correction in diameter; H off = correction in the length; Save = save; Load = load; Prog = Programme; User = user; Done = done

39

SECTION 2 - FRONT PANEL OPERATION


F1 (Setup) Main-Parms-Setup (main screen - Options - Settings) Use the F1 (Setup) displays the parameters that ensure the uniqueness of the control device for a specific machine or application. Pressing the F1 (Setup) the following screen appears.

RunTime = Period Main-Parms-Setup = Main screen - Settings - Configure Active = Active Current = current next Next = Distance = the distance Correction: canceled Instrument: Length: Diameter: Plane: Clearance: Interpolation: linear (feed) Submission: (ipm = inches / min) Units: absolute / English system Cycle: canceled Pause: (sec = seconds) Spindle: (rpm = r / min) Coolant: Disabled Number details: Level = level; Prec = accuracy; Power = power; Axis = axis; Misc = other; OVRs = correction; BSC = correction in the ball-screw pair; DOS = prompt DOS; Done = done

Note: The keys to F2 (Prec) to F9 (DOS) are displayed only if the control device is in secure mode prescribed by the code authentication. Machines require ID Authentication and Access levels for a number of display resolution or change the settings of the machine. ID authentication and access level can provide the manufacturer of the machine.

40

SECTION 2 - FRONT PANEL OPERATION

RunTime = Period Main-Parms-Setup-Level = Main screen - Options - Settings-level Active = active Current = current next Next = Distance = the distance VALIDATION CODE = code authentication Correction: canceled Instrument: Length: Diameter: Plane: Clearance: Interpolation: linear (feed) Submission: (ipm = inches / min) Units: absolute / English system Cycle: canceled Pause: (sec = seconds) Spindle: (rpm = r / min) Coolant: Disabled Number details: Abort = elimination

Note: The parameters in the configuration sections are usually installed by the manufacturer of the machine. Changing these parameters can affect many functions and performance of the machine, it can be done only by qualified service personnel. Subject to entering the correct code, you can choose the following page.

41

SECTION 2 - FRONT PANEL OPERATION


F2 (Prec) Main-Parms-Setup-Prec (Main screen - Options - Settings - Accuracy) Pressing the F2 (Prec) (machine precision), the following screen appears.

RunTime = Period Main-Parms-Setup-Prec = Main screen - Options - Settings-Precision Active = Active Current = current next Next = Distance = the distance Decimal precision Correction: canceled English Metric Instrument: Leading Leading End End Length: Cartesian Diameter: The angular Plane: Spindle Clearance: Feed Interpolation: linear (feed) Submission: (ipm = inches / min) Units: absolute / English system Cycle: canceled Pause: (sec = seconds) Spindle: (rpm = r / min) Coolant: Disabled Number details: Edit = edit; Done = done

The keys are displayed in the mode of Edit (Edit)

The screen above shows some typical settings for the leading and trailing zeros for different coordinate systems. The number of the leading and trailing zeros are not limited, but there are some practical limits. If the numbers get too large, they will not fit in the space allotted to them on the screen. If they are smaller than the elements of feedback, they will not cause displacement. To change the setting press the F1 (Edit) (Edit). A number of the arrow keys, use 42

SECTION 2 - FRONT PANEL OPERATION


them to move the cursor to the desired option and enter a new number. Once all numbers have been edited, press the key ESC (Exit) (Exit) to confirm the new number and a return to the previous screen. These settings apply to all numbers that are entered into the control device, except for the axles, which are set separately in the F4 (Axis) (Axis). F3 (Power) Main-Parms-Setup-Power (Main screen - Options - Settings - Power) Power options - are the parameters that relate directly to the machine configuration, and is usually installed by the manufacturer of the machine. Note: When you edit or enter the parameter values (or any other numeric values in the control device) you can use the built-in calculator. For example: Instead of 0.3750 can be introduced 3/8 Instead, you can enter 1.3750 1 + 3/8 To change the current value can be used. "," As the current value. If the current value is 0.358, and 0.002 must be added, should be introduced. +0.002 (0.360 instead of typing). With the F3 key parameters of the power output by default, as shown on the next screen.

RunTime = Period Main-Parms-Setup-Power = Main screen - Options - Settings-Power Active = Active Current = current next Next = Distance = the distance Changes in this section affect the inclusion of power Correction: canceled Type the front ... STANDARD Instrument: Panel UL ... no Length: The opening front panel (Cent7) Diameter: Video Mode Plane: The action items ... G20, the English system Clearance: Number of axles Interpolation: linear (feed) Keyboard with daisy ... no Submission: (ipm = inches / min)

43

SECTION 2 - FRONT PANEL OPERATION


The feed rate when the power is The axis of the spindle The axis of the primary flywheel sensor (Cent6 and above) Axis 2 of the second flywheel sensor (Cent6 and above) The axis of the third flywheel sensor (Cent6 and above) The new Remote flywheel ... no RW30 new remote handwheel (Cent6) ... no Remote Sensor flywheel PgUp = Page Up; PgDn = page down; Esc = exit Units: absolute / English system Cycle: canceled Pause: (sec = seconds) Spindle: (rpm = r / min) Coolant: Disabled Number details:

Front Panel Type: (A type of front panel) UL Panel: (Panel UL) FP Control Port (Cent 7): (Aperture control front panel (Cent7)) Video Mode: (Video) Initial Units are: (Proactive units) Number of Axes: (Axles) Serial Keyboard: (Keyboard consistent connection)

Standard or with membrane keys Mini-Series


No or Yes if you have a protective relay emergency stop The hole for the front of the 1552 standard systems Cent 7

Default settings: 640 x 350 for CRT and 800 x 600 for LCD monitors G20, the English system of measurement, or G21, the metric system to activate the inch or metric system. It can be from 1 to 5. Enables or disables the serial keyboard with daisy

The keyboard will transfer through the interface CLK / DATA, and not through the RS-232 interface. This means that the PC will recognize that the keyboard is present when you reboot and hangs with a message such as <PRESS F1 TO RESUME> (Press the F1 to resume.) The keyboard will always recognize the commands via RS-232 or CLK / DATA. If the appropriate command, which does not contain errors, obtained via an RS-232, will transfer via RS-232, rather than CLK / DATA. Similarly, you can switch back to the interface CLK / DATA. If the appropriate command, which does not contain errors, obtained via CLK / DATA, will transfer through the interface CLK / DATA, not the RS-232. Since the RS-232 interface is not so interlocked, as the interface CLK / DATA, the following additional requirements are placed in the RS-232 protocol. A. System administration commands are allowed only in response to the transfer, set the keyboard.

44

SECTION 2 - FRONT PANEL OPERATION


Two. To pass the keyboard, it waits for the transfer, and then there is a delay for another two milliseconds before re-checking the keyboard buffer. This delay allows time for the system administration team retransmission or other commands, such as the inclusion of lighting. Since the transfer of a single character takes about one millisecond at 9600 baud, it gives the system of about 1 millisecond of time for data processing. Three. In order for the system was able to send commands, the keyboard will periodically send a strobe signal. Strobe signal is just a symbol EAh. This symbol is transferred, if the keyboard is not otherwise involved in approximately 30 milliseconds. Then the system can send a command in response to the strobe signal instead of having to wait for the next keystroke. Hardware and Software Keyboard with a serial connection is required board keyboard controller REV E with built-in version 1.21 or higher. Firmware for the motherboard REV E can not be used with previous versions of motherboards and vice versa. CNC Software Version should be * .86 or higher. Keyboard with a serial connection using COM2. Therefore, if used the keyboard with a serial connection, the secondary serial port parameter input and output must be installed on none (no). The secondary serial port parameter input and output can be removed in future versions. On machines that are configured to use a keyboard with a serial connection, the cable will be modified in a box store. Previously, the incoming cable is split in two, and was brought to the video card and the controller board. Now the cable is split soda and has a 9-pin D-Sub connector for connecting the input-output board. The connector on the input-output board must be configured for COM2 (for supply it is usually configured as COM1). Enabling the keyboard with a serial connection NC program will use the keyboard interface with a serial connection, if the parameter is set to turn the keyboard Yes (Yes), if the program is executed without command line options. Otherwise, the program will use the CNC keyboard interface with a serial connection, if the parameter is set to the keyboard Yes (Yes), and the letter "S" appears as an option on the command line. Keyboard with serial connection is active in the following examples, if the option is also installed on the keyboard yes (Yes). CNC CNC s (only the keyboard with a serial connection) CNC fs (lights the front panel keypad with a serial connection) CNC as (cycles acroloop, keyboard, serial connection) CNC afs (However, as the lack of options)

45

SECTION 2 - FRONT PANEL OPERATION


Keyboard with serial connection is deactivated in the following examples: CNC n (demo mode) CNC f (lights the front panel) CNC a (cycles acroloop) CNC af (acroloop cycles and lights the front panel) CNC b (Network management unit, Cent 6) CNC bf (The control unit is a network of tubes and the front panel) Power-On Feedrate: (Feed rate for the power is on) Spindle Axis: (Spindle axis) It can be any number up to a maximum flow rate. From 1 to 5 1 = X, 2 = Y, 3 = Z, 4 = A. . . etc. Usually set to 3 for the axis Z.

Primary HDW Encoder Sensor for use with a primary flywheel. Axis (Cent 6 and up) 7 for standard systems Cent 6, 8 for standard systems (AboutSubscribe the primary sensor Cent 7. Flywheel (Cent6 and above)) 2nd Handwheel Used for optional dual flywheel system Encoder Axis: (4 if there is an option) (AboutSubscribe 2nd sensor flywheel) 3rd Handwheel Used for optional dual flywheel system Encoder Axis: (5 if there is an option). (AboutSubscribe third sensor flywheel) New remote handwheel: Yes (yes)If you have the option of a new remote handwheel. (New remote flywheel) Remote HDW Encoder: Sensor for use with a remote fly-wheel. (Remote Sensor flywheel) 100% Rapid in Run: No (no) means that the correction of the feed rate will (100% faster impact on the accelerated movement. at work) Yes (yes) means that the correction of the feed rate will not impact on the accelerated movement of in operation. The accelerated movement of up to 100%. 100% Rapid in Dry-Run: No (no) means that the correction of the feed rate will (100% acceleration in the impact on the rapid move to idle mode. idle) Yes (yes) means that the correction of the feed rate has no effect on the accelerated move to idle mode. The accelerated movement of up to 100%

46

SECTION 2 - FRONT PANEL OPERATION


Spindle on in Dry-Run: No (no) means that the spindle will not be included in the (Turning the spindle idle. idle) Yes (yes) means that the spindle will be included in idle. Tool Tables by: The radius or diameter (Tables instrument for) Don't Load Canned No (no) means that the group will load cycles. Cycles: Yes (yes) means that the group will not load cycles; (Do not download Group cycles (drilling, cutting, frame, etc.) occupy group cycles) approximately 39K of memory. Block Skip On: If there is a Yes (yes), Skipping the block is activated when (Inclusion of missing power-up. block) Optional Stop On: If there is a Yes (yes), A conditional stop is activated when (The conditional power-up. stop) Safe Zone On: If there is a Yes (yes), Is activated when the safety zone (Activation zone power-up. security) With the G22 security zone is turned off. With the G23 security zone is activated. Foreign Extensions:
(Foreign expansion)

Refers to the extension for data files. The current currently expanding are listed below. CES CHN NED DAT FRN GRM ITA SPN TRK CZECH (Czech) CHINESE (Chinese) DUTCH (Dutch) ENGLISH (English) FRENCH (French) GERMAN (German) ITALIAN (Italian) SPANISH (Spanish) TURKISH (Turkish)

Tool Changer Information (information about the structure of the tool change) Machine Type: (Type of machine) ATC Type is: (Type of device changer tool) ATC tool (pocket count): (An instrument device changer (Number of nests)) Enter VMD 30 .... Manual / Avanti, Milltronics, or other

The number of slots in the tool changer

47

SECTION 2 - FRONT PANEL OPERATION


Spindle orient delay (MS): The delay of the orientation pin (use 0 for (orientation of the delay rolling pin or by e-orientation) spindle) M6 (Tool Change) Macro: The path and name of the program used for M6 (M6 macro (change instrument)) Put Pot down on Yes (yes) means that the slot will be omitted for the pending swing arm tool changers: tool. (Lowering of the jacks on the No (no) means that it will be raised. devices change tool with swing arm) Check drawbar switch: Yes (yes) for a new machine with switches traction (Check the switch rod. traction rod) Milltronics ATC is: Plunger, The Maltese 2-stage, Maltese 1 (Changer landmark, or with a rotary hand tool Milltronics) Milltronics CW Coast: On the tool changer with Maltese (Coasting mechanism uses a Partner clockwise) Milltronics CW Brake: parameters to set the term indexing and (Inhibition of braking device in the direction of the tool change clockwise) clockwise and counterclockwise. Milltronics CCW Coast: (Coasting Estimated value of - 110 to move out of inertia and counter-clockwise) 60 for braking. Milltronics CCW Brake: (Inhibition against clockwise) Check Air Pressure: If this parameter is set to yes (yes) and pressure (Check pressure low (input Y # 1), the machine will be set to air) emergency stop, and will display an error 448 "Air Pressure Error. Check air hose connection "(Error air pressure. Check pneumatic hose). Drawbar Delay: Used for tool changer Partner, as (Delay delay (in seconds) after turning the traction rod traction rod) and before the head is lifted to remove the instrument to prevent the tension of the tool holder. Custom M and G code Tables (Tables of specialized codes M and G) Custom G code O9010 Custom G code O9011 Custom G code O9012 Custom G code = special G-code

48

SECTION 2 - FRONT PANEL OPERATION


Custom G code O9013 Custom G code O9014 Custom G code O9015 Custom G code O9016 Custom G code O9017 Custom G code O9018 Custom G code O9019 Custom M code O9020 Custom M code O9021 Custom M code O9022 Custom M code O9023 Custom M code O9024 Custom M code O9025 Custom M code O9026 Custom M code O9027 Custom M code O9028 Custom M code O9029 Parameter file version: (Version control file) Use Small Soft keys: (Use of small Multifunction keys) Notes on the parameters Note 1:To change the setting press the F1 (Edit) (Edit) and enter a new number. Note 2:After changing any parameter of the power back to the main menu before you turn off and back on food. Note 3:Once any of the parameters of power has changed, the machine must be powered off and then on again. These options will only be read after power up.

You can not get a special G-code for G0

Custom code = M M-code to a specialized

You can not get a special code for the M-M0

Should always be a Must be installed on no (no) for 12 "CRT monitors

49

SECTION 2 - FRONT PANEL OPERATION


F4 (Axis) Main-Parms-Setup-Axis (main screen - Options - Preferences - Axis) When you click on F4 (Axis) (Axis), the following screen appears.

RunTime = Period Main-Parms-Setup-Axis = The main screen - Options - Settings-Axis Active = Active Current = current next Next = Distance = the distance Label the axis address Correction: canceled The number of pulses per unit Instrument: Multiplier detector Length: Home position Diameter: Reference direction Plane: Velocity in the direction of the source Clearance: Velocity in the direction from the starting position Interpolation: linear (feed) The speed in the direction of the marker pulse Submission: (ipm = inches / min) Units: absolute / English system Cycle: canceled Label the axis of the address: Pause: (sec = seconds) Spindle: (rpm = r / min) Coolant: Disabled Number details: Edit = edit; PgUp = Page Up; PgDn = page down; Esc = exit

The keys are displayed in the mode F1 (Edit) (Edit)

Press the PgUp (page up), PgDn (page down) and the arrows to scroll through the table at the top of the screen. At the bottom of the screen shows how to change the data associated with the position of the cursor at the top of the screen. To edit the values in these tables the cursor is moved using the arrow keys on the desired option from the top of the screen. When you press the 50

SECTION 2 - FRONT PANEL OPERATION


F1 (Edit) (Edit), the cursor moves to the bottom of the screen. Next, move the cursor with the arrow keys on the desired axis or option and enter new values on the keyboard. After entering new values press the button ESC (Exit). The new value is entered and the cursor will return to the top of the screen, then you can resume the selection process. Some details may refer to the position of the machine. To edit these settings, or download using the key F4 (Mach), whereby the position X, Y and Z are loaded into the options. Use F5 (M-XY) for X and Y, or press F6 (MZ) for the axis Z. Below is a list of all selected parameters are displayed in this mode, and a description of their functions. Axis Address Label (Address label axis) X 88.0000 Y 89.0000 Z 90.0000 Pulses Per Unit (The number of pulses per unit) X 10000.0000 Y 10000.0000 Z 10000.0000 Encoder Multiplier (Multiplier detector) X 02.0000 Y 01.0000 Z 01.0000 Home Position (Starting position) X 00.0000 Y 00.0000 Z 00.0000 Home Direction (Initial direction) X 00.0000 Y 00.0000 Z 00.0000 Velocity Toward Home (The speed in the direction initial position) X 60.0000 Y 60.0000 Z 60.0000 Code ASCII, assigned to each axis

The number of pulses issued by the feedback per unit of displacement

Sets the number of embedded multipliers pulses coming from the sensor. 0 - 1 time, 1 - 2 times and 2 - 4 times

The size limit for the zero position of the machine or source of

Determines the direction of rotation of the engine at team set the starting position Clockwise = 00.0000 anticlockwise = 01.0000 Sets the feed rate at which the axis of seeking limit switch starting position

51

SECTION 2 - FRONT PANEL OPERATION


Velocity Away From Home (The speed in the direction from the starting position) X 12.0000 Y 12.0000 Z 12.0000 Velocity Toward Marker (The speed in the direction marker pulse) X 02.0000 Y 02.0000 Z 02.0000 Home Sequence (The cycle reset position) X 02.0000 Y 02.0000 Z 01.0000 Positive Limit (Positive limit) X 00.0000 Y 00.0000 Z 00.0000 Negative Limit (Negative limit) X -31.0000 Y -18.0000 Z - 6.5000 Maximum Feed (Maximum feed rate) X 200.0000 Y 200.0000 Z 200.0000 Dry Run Feed (Feed speed at idle course) X 75.0000 Y 75.0000 Z 75.0000 Sets the speed at which the axis moves away from limit switch starting position

Sets the speed at which the axis of seeking marker pulse sensor

These numbers determine the order of axes in the return starting position: First number1, then number 2, etc. Axis with the same number back to its original position together. 0 axis is not returning to its original position. The distance from the zero position of the machine, which there is a positive pre-programmed limit

The distance from the zero position of the machine, which there is a negative programmed limit

Sets the maximum feed rate of G01 in inches / min or mm / min

Sets the flow rate at idle in inches / min or mm / min

52

SECTION 2 - FRONT PANEL OPERATION


Rapid Velocity (Express delivery) X 800.0000 Y 800.0000 Z 800.0000 Sets the maximum feed rate of G00 in inches / min or mm / min

Acc / Dec (Acceleration / deceleration) X 20.0000 Y 20.0000 time. Z 20.0000

Acceleration / deceleration - a number that determines value at which the axis speed increases or decreases with respect to motions filing. Than lower the number, the longer the acceleration / deceleration Acceleration and deceleration in the NC are linear. Units are expressed as inches / sec .

Rapid Acc / Dec Faster acceleration / deceleration - a number that (Acceleration / deceleration in specifies the amount at which the axis speed accelerated movement) increases or decreases relative to X 20.0000 accelerated movement. The smaller the number, the Y 20.0000 longer acceleration / deceleration time. Dispersal and Z 20.0000 inhibition in the NC are linear. Units are expressed as inches / sec . Feed S-Curve Acc The units are identical (linear) acceleration / (Cent 7 and up) inhibition. They are used when s-curves (S-curve acceleration and deceleration activated by movement submission. feeding (Cent 7 and above)) Rapid S-Curve Acc The units are identical (linear) acceleration / (Cent 7 and up) inhibition. They are used when s-curves (S-curve acceleration and deceleration activated with accelerated movement. the accelerated movement of (Cent 7 and above)) Slow Jog Velocity (Jog feed on slow speed) X 50.0000 Y 50.0000 Z 50.0000 The rate in inches / min or mm / min.

53

SECTION 2 - FRONT PANEL OPERATION


Fast Jog Velocity (Jog feed on high speed) X 200.0000 Y 200.0000 Z 200.0000 Jog Key Direction (Direction buttons jog feed) X 00.0000 Y 00.0000 Z 00.0000 In Position (In position) X 00.0050 Y 00.0050 Z 00.0050 G00 Unidirectional (Unidirectional G00) X 00.0000 Y 00.0000 Z 00.0000 The rate in inches / min or mm / min.

Determines whether the Jog to the feed movement or the movement of the tool table. "1" changes direction.

After any rapid movement of the machine will wait until the axis will not be in a given position before starting the next block

Sets the distance in inches or mm, which axis will take place after a given position in one direction before the change direction so that the machine will always be positioned on one direction. Active only in G00.

P1

P2

The distance in one direction G60 Unidirectional (Unidirectional G60) X 00.0000 Y 00.0000 Z 00.0000 Backlash (Gap) X 00.0000 Y 00.0000 Z 00.0000 The same as the G00, only active in block G60

Sets the distance in inches or mm. The control unit will carry out the correction backlash in the reverse axis. Active in all modes.

54

SECTION 2 - FRONT PANEL OPERATION


Excess Error Sets the distance in inches or mm. (Error error) The machine can keep up with the CNC. NC disconnect X 00.2500 system because of the mismatch errors. Y 00.2500 = 00.0000 is never an error mismatch. Z 00.2500 Rotary = Linear = 0 1 Specifies whether the axis be circular or (Pie = 0, linear = 1) linear. In the circular axis of the feed rate is expressed X 01.0000 in degrees / minutes, not in inches / min. For a rotary axis Y 01.0000 do not need to convert between inches and Z 01.0000 the metric system. Handwheel Normal = 0 Invert = 1 "1" changes the direction of rotation of the flywheel. (Flywheel, normal = 0; reverse = 1) X +00.0000 Y +00.0000 Z +00.0000 English Leading (The senior ranks English) X 02.0000 Y 02.0000 Z 02.0000 Sets the number of digits to the left of the decimal point for the inch system, only for the specified axis

English Trailing (Least significant bit, English) axis X 04.0000 Y 04.0000 Z 04.0000 Metric Leading (The senior ranks Metric) X 03.0000 Y 03.0000 Z 03.0000 Metric Trailing (Least significant bit, Metric) X 03.0000 Y 03.0000 Z 03.0000

Sets the number of digits to the right of the decimal point for the inch system, only for the specified

Same as the senior ranks in the British system, except for the fact that the metric system

Same as the Junior ranks in the British system, except for the fact that the metric system

55

SECTION 2 - FRONT PANEL OPERATION


Home Switch = Marker = 0 1 Specifies whether the axis of the search for the final (Switch source switch the starting position, then the marker status = 0, a marker pulse, or look for the closest marker pulse. pulse = 1) X 00.0000 Y 00.0000 Z 00.0000 Max Handwheel Error When an error is the error reaches a given (Maximum error of the flywheel) value, the pulses from the flywheel are ignored. X 01.0000 Error is expressed in inches or mm. Y 01.0000 Z 01.0000 Tool Change (Changing the tool) X + 00.0000 Y + 00.0000 Z + 00.0000 Z moves to this position at the command G32 (Z up tool changer) or M6 (change of tool). This position is specified in inches or mm and refers to the zero position. Position Tool change the Y axis is used for longitudinal milling machines. X and Y are used in the tool changer handling type

Tool Changer Spacing (arm style) It is used to avoid placing large (Intervals changer instruments close to each other in the changing devices tool) with a rotary hand tool (With the swing arm) Gain Proportional (KP) (Proportional gain) mismatch. X + 08.0000 Y + 08.0000 Z + 08.0000 Gain Velocity (KV) (Growth rate) X + 250.0000 Y + 250.0000 velocity Z + 250.0000 KP in terms of stages of DAC errors

KV in terms of steps per unit of speed DACs. These units involve a 16-bit DAC (1 bit sign, 15 bits of amplitude), while the four lower bits do not carry a special significance. The units of in this case are the units / pulse, with a single pulse is 3/4096-nyh seconds. Higher values reduce the mismatch error. Valid values range from 50 to 327.

56

SECTION 2 - FRONT PANEL OPERATION


Handwheel Gain (KP) (Enhancement of the flywheel) X 04.0000 Y 04.0000 Z 04.0000 The same as the proportional gain. Smaller values are used to mitigate traffic flywheel. Valid values are within from 2 to 8.

F5 (Misc) Main-Parms-Setup-Misc (Main screen - Options - Settings - Other) Use the F5 (Misc) (Other) displays a variety of settings related to the spindle, and M-codes. Pressing the F5 (Misc) the following screen appears.

RunTime = Period Main-Parms-Setup-Misc = Main screen - Options - Settings-Other Active = Active Current = current next Next = Distance = the distance Basic information about the machine Correction: canceled Type of machine Instrument: Version of the machine Length: Version of a mechanical system Diameter: Revision of the electrical system Plane: The serial number of the machine Clearance: Increasing the spindle from the front ... no Interpolation: linear (feed) Checking the acceleration signal (M3/M4) ... no Submission: (ipm = inches / min) Checking the zero speed (M5) ... no Units: absolute / English system The number of pulses / rev encoder spindle 1 Cycle: canceled The number of pulses / rev encoder spindle 2 Pause: (sec = seconds) The number of pulses / rev encoder handwheel Spindle: (rpm = r / min) Range of spindle speed 1 Coolant: Disabled Range of spindle speed 2 Number details: Range of spindle speed 3 Range of spindle speed 4 Edit = edit; PgUp = Page Up; PgDn = page down; Esc = exit

57

SECTION 2 - FRONT PANEL OPERATION


Other parameters are edited in the same manner as the power settings. The following is a list and brief description of other parameters. Basic Machine Info (Basic information about the machine) Machine Type Enter VMD30, etc. (Type of the machine) Machine Version The model (Version of the machine) Mechanical Version This version of the mechanical system (Version of the mechanical system) Electrical version This version of the electrical system (Version of the electrical system) Machine serial number The serial number of the machine (The serial number of the machine) Force FP Spindle Yes (yes) for earlier models of Centurion Vs, (Strengthening of the spindle deduced that the analog signal from the spindle the front panel) the front panel. Check Up to Speed (Check the acceleration signal) In (M3/M4) control device will wait acceleration signal from the controller's spindle before you continue on the M3 (spindle rotation clockwise) and M4 (the rotation of the spindle anti-clockwise). From fast moving before filing it expects acceleration signal whenever the switch from G0 to G1. It works well when using a constant cutting speed. Specifies the axis for the acceleration signal. Specifies the input for overclocking. The control unit will wait for a signal of zero spindle speed of the controller before you proceed on the M5 (spindle off) The number of pulses / rev Spindle used for the option, rigid tapping and display speed on the transfer of a

Up to Speed Axis (The axis of acceleration) Up to Speed Input (Signal input acceleration) Check Zero Speed (M5) (Check zero speed) Spindle Encoder PPU1 (The number of pulses / rev spindle sensor 1)

Spindle encoder PPU2 Number pulses / rev Spindle used for the (The number of pulses / rev option, rigid tapping and spindle sensor 2) display speed on the transfer of two Handwheel Encoder PPU (The number of pulses / rev flywheel sensor) The number of pulses / rev flywheel must be 400 for these systems

58

SECTION 2 - FRONT PANEL OPERATION


Spindle Range A (Frequency range Spindle 1) Spindle Range 2 (Frequency range Spindle 2) . Spindle Range 8 (Frequency range spindle 8) Spindle Range (Frequency range spindle) Maximum Spindle Speed (The maximum frequency spindle) Max. spindle speed for the transfer A

Max. spindle speed for the transfer 2 . . Max. spindle speed for the transfer 8

Speed range, which is set Spindle: 1 to 8. It is assumed in the range of Based on the programmed speed, an appropriate voltage. Captures the overall frequency of rotation of the spindle. It is used to limit the number of revolutions per minute in high gear, while leaving a large range of velocities in the lower gears.

Spindle Ramp Time 1 (sec) Stagnation point with tapping (Acceleration Time 1 spindle adjusted based on the speed (S)) wpindelya, pitch and spindle acceleration time not to exceed a preset depth. It dates back to the inhibition of spindle, expressed in seconds, before reaching 0 / min from full speed to transfer a. 2 Spindle Ramp Time (sec) Stagnation point with tapping (Acceleration spindle 2 adjusted based on the speed (S)) wpindelya, pitch and spindle acceleration time not to exceed a preset depth. It dates back to the inhibition of spindle, expressed in seconds, before reaching 0 / min from full speed to the transmission 2. 2 Gear Yaskawa M5 Spindle Motor (2-stage motor Spindle Yaskawa M5) Electronic Spindle Gear (Electronic transfer of spindle) Spindle Gear Box (Transmission of spindle) Yes (yes) for the new drive spindle M5 with 2 step-motor spindle. Spindle is not need to stop to switch. Yes (yes) will activate the electronic switch gear spindle. Yes (yes) to RW30 with a manual transmission spindle.

59

SECTION 2 - FRONT PANEL OPERATION


Hard Tap Fudge Factor (The configuration parameter rigid tapping tapping) Feed Back on Mitutoyo Scale (Feedback on the scale Mitutoyo) Feed Back on Quill Scale (Feedback on the line Quill) Quill Epsilon (Epsilon sleeve) Used to adjust the depth of the loop rigid tapping. Higher values will lower the amount of excess at the bottom of each holes. Yes (yes) enables feedback on the situation in Z-axis of the scale options Mitutoyo. Yes (yes) enables the glass line for options quill axis Z. If the value is zero, the analysis is not conducted errors on the movement of quill. If the value is not zero, moving the sleeve monitored during program execution. If the quill moves, the control unit goes into block mode and displays an error 666 "Quill motion detected, return the quill to it's original position -12.3456" (Quill movement is found, return the quill to its original position - 12.3456). The program execution will not proceed until such time until the quill will not be returned to its original position. Position sleeve at the start (and when changing the tool) is retained and used to compensate for the Z position during program execution. Sensor for use with glass line for options quill axis Z. The number of pulses / inch for the sensor bar sleeve. If the input gear busting detected and indicated Yes (Yes), the outputs for motion in a clockwise direction and counterclockwise direction reversed. 015 for systems with pay-CAT900, 0 for other Yes (yes)If the drives Yaskawa (Yaskawa Drives give a signal of willingness to drive instead of drive signals a fault)

Quill Scale Encoder (The sensor bar sleeve) Quill Scale PPU Back Gear Reverse (The number of pulses / inch line of Quill, change of gear busting) Keyboard Code (Code keyboard) Yaskawa Drives (Drives Yaskawa)

60

SECTION 2 - FRONT PANEL OPERATION


Feedhold G1 and No Spindle (Stop feeding G1 and no spindle) If set to Yes (yes), and the spindle is turned off during filing the motion, the control unit stops supplying the machine, and displays an error message "Spindle Stopped Feedhold "(The spindle is stopped Stop feeding). When you start the spindle can resume execution of the program (Feed hold off ... Cycle start ... (Disable Stop ... Start feeding cycle) ... and so on, to delete the message.) See notes for European Codes (p. 68) In the end of this section. See notes for European Codes (p. 68) In the end of this section. Additional buttons (Aux) front panel can be used for various functions. For purpose of the button functions Aux1 screw type "001", to assign a button function Aux2 settings, enter "002" in the parameter See notes for European Codes (p. 68) In the end of this section.

Door Open Switch (Switch open doors) European Code (European code) Auger Aux (Cent 7 and up) Setup Aux (Cent 7 and up) (Additional button for screw (Cent 7 and above)) (Additional button for settings (Cent 7 and above) ) Door Open Axis Door Open Input (The axis of the door opening) (Log in opening the door)

Door Open Override Axis See notes for European Codes (p. 68) In the Door Open Override Input end of this section. (The axis of the abolition of the door opening) (Log cancel opening the door) Check Tool Door Open (Checking tool when the door is open) Check Chiller Fault (Check the fault cooling devices) Chiller Fault Axis (Axis Fault cooling devices) If Yes (yes), The input Z 10 is checked prior to issuance Team hand tool change device. If input is not detected within 15 seconds, an error message timeout. If Yes (yes) and there is excess heat, a message about malfunction cooling. Specifies the axis for fault indication cooling devices.

61

SECTION 2 - FRONT PANEL OPERATION


Chiller Fault Input (Login failure cooling devices) Cool-Down Time (Min) (Cent 6 and up) (Cooling time (min) (Cent 6 and above)) Lube Cycle Time (Cent 6 and up) (Cycle time lubrication (Cent 6 and above)) Recycle Pump Time (Secs) (Cent 6 and up) (Time recirculation pump (Sec) (Cent 6 and above)) Max Feed w / Door Open (Maximum flow rate when the door is open) Soft Start Delay (Secs) (Delay starter (s)) Digital Readout in E-Stop (Digital display in emergency-stop mode) Specifies the input signal of malfunction cooling devices. It is used to stem the flow of the cleaning system the air.

It is used on systems of air-oil lubrication spindle.

Used on engines coolant through the spindle.

See notes for European Codes (p. 68) In the end of this section. The delay time to permit movement of the axes After rebooting the machine. If Yes (yes) map position of the axis will be updated even when the emergency stop.

Probe Axis and Probe Specifies the axis and the number of inputs for use with Input commands for the sensor 1 and sensor 2. (The axis of the sensor and sensor input) Cranking Minutes / Rev How many minutes of normal performance (The number of minutes / v at startup) program corresponds to one turn the flywheel. Increasing the time of submission (in inches / min), this factor will lead to the filing, in inches / turn the flywheel. This value must be approximately .0010 to our existing systems. Cranking Factor (Ratio at start) The coefficient for each click of the handwheel approximately 100 in our current system. The coefficient of the start / min number / proportion of the startup maximum flow rate when manually started.

62

SECTION 2 - FRONT PANEL OPERATION


Cranking Max IPM This limits the flow rate, but (Maximum number of inches / rev is run manually for at startup) reasonable response to the programmed low feed rates. Regulation of other parameters may cause flywheel mismatch error on the situation at high speeds. This value must be equal to about 100 in our current system. Sharp Corners (Sharp edges) If you choose to No (no)All sharp edges are rounded up to the maximum specified in the parameter max. deflection angle. If you choose to Yes (yes), Rounding the corners will be proportional to flow rate. At full rate filing will be rounding the corners of the parameters max. deflection angle. At slower speeds, feed the deviation decreases. This number sets the maximum allowable the deviation angle. A value of 0.001 means that the machine will slow down when approaching a corner more than 0.001 ". (Only Centurion 6)

Max Corner Deviation (Maximum deviation angle)

Programmed path

Deviation of the angle The desired trajectory

Min Block Time (sec) (Minimum time unit (s))

If the time to perform an action is less than this value, the control device will slow the feed rate to prevent giving plenty of movement from a lack of data.

End-of-Cycle Axis and With these two parameters determined what End-of-Cycle Outputs output will be used for a light signal (The axis of the end of the cycle and the end of the cycle. output end of the cycle) The light signal the end of the cycle does not require programming. The lamp will light up every time there is no traffic during the execution of the program and at the end of the program. This

63

SECTION 2 - FRONT PANEL OPERATION


will cause the stop block, waiting for the reset tool change, etc. The lamp is extinguished when any key is pressed or the resumption of traffic. The lamp can be lit during the pauses, the automatic tool changer, orientation, etc., but it will go blank when resuming motion machine. Acc Settling Time (Msec) The period of time maintain a constant speed after Dec Settling Time (Msec) acceleration or deceleration. (Cent 6 and up) (Acceleration time setting (ms)) (Deceleration time setting (ms)) (Cent 6 and above) Cylinder Parked Axis See 4, pp. 377, Cylindrical mapping (G107) Cylinder Rotary Axis (Cylindrical axis of the map in the original position) (Cylindrical rotary axis display) Software Options (Options software) Security Code # 0 The secret code to activate S-curves (S-Curves) (Passcode # 0 (S-curves)) Use S-curves (Cent 7 and up) (Use S-curves (Cent 7 and above)) Security Code # 1 (Pay Timer) (Passcode # 1 (WDT)) Look Ahead (Cent 6 and up) (Advanced view) (Cent 6 and above) Yes (yes) to activate the S-curves for acceleration and braking.

Secret code for the correction of old guard timer.

Indicates number of axes of movement, which the device control can preview what allows the device to prepare for the management of acute corners or other elements, which otherwise may be rounded with increasing flow rate.

Note: The advanced view is activated only in DNC-fast. Valid values range from 10 to 255. Max graph file size (Maximum size graphic file) Minimum Parts Space (Minimum distance Limits the number of graphics on the screen. 30.000 for standard systems If the distance between the parts is less than the parameter in HF, the system will jump to the page

64

SECTION 2 - FRONT PANEL OPERATION


between the parts) cleaning every time a key is pressed in the main menu.

G18 is Plane XZ (X - major axis), or the plane ZX (Z (G18-it) the main axis) G93 is 1 /min or 1/sec rate for the inverse supply (G93-it) Special Flags Normally set to 0 (Special pins) Through a bit (# 1) there is a point on the graphical display in the planning of the tool path. Via bit 2 (# 2) turns off the trigonometric help. Through bit 3 (# 4) is turned off correction in the cutting tool. Through bits 5 (# 16) features a disk cutter in the XY plane with the same diameter as that of the active tool. Through the six-bit (# 32) features a 3-dimensional tool for graphical display. Ignore Rapids in Autoscale (Ignore accelerated movement of with automatic scale) If you choose to Yes (yes)Accelerated movement will ignored in the automatic scaling graphics.

Remove Length If you choose to Yes (yes), With graphical representation of all from Graphics the length of the instrument will be considered equal to 0. (Remove the length of the charts) Screen Blank Time (min) (Time to turn off screen (min)) Flat Screen Blank (Off the plane screen) Use FLZ instead of G54 (Use FLZ instead of the G54) Time in minutes before switching off the screen if no key not pressed. Yes (yes) for CRT screens. Some flat screens takes too long to update, if parameter is set to Yes (yes). Used to set the correct operating mode jog feed or manual mode. Yes (yes) means use of FLZ (correction G92). No (no) means the use of offsets G54.

65

SECTION 2 - FRONT PANEL OPERATION


G5 #-Z in Handwheel (G5 #-Z mode flywheel) Tool Setting (Tuning tool) Yes (yes) permits the use of keys G5 #-Z mode flywheel. If set to any tool, the algorithms configuration tool jog mode and mode of submission of the flywheel will be given a prompt to the operator installed the tool room. If it is set to the current tool, the control unit will consider the number of active tool number installed.

Tool Setting Use If set to No (no), The position given by Work Offsets operator applies to the original. If set to Yes (The use of workers (Yes)Given the position relates to the work of correction (this is corrections when setting useful when setting up the tool off the table and tool) application of labor adjustment to the top of the Z tool). Extract Input Programs (Extract program entry) Restrictive Edit Key (Restricted keys editing) If set to Yes (yes), The control unit will remove programs based on 0 # # # in the file, downloaded from floppy disk drive, or obtained in the RS-232. Program-doubles overwritten, with no hint is displayed to the operator. If this parameter is set to Yes (yes), and the key editing is enabled, then: From the main menu you can select F2 (Jog) (Jog feed), F3 (HDW) (flywheel) or F4 (Run) (Performing). In the Jog to select only the F1 (Slow) (slow) or F2 (Fast) (Fast). In the HDW can select only the axis X, Y, Z, A or B. In Run mode you can only select F1 (Start) (Start) - F2 (Old) (existing program) or F7 (Menu) (Menu). F3 (Block) (Block), F4 (OStop) (optional stop) and F5 (BSkip) (Pass Block) only displayed. They can not be changed.

P899 As for the special options consult factory. Resolve DNC programs (Resolution DNC programs) If you choose to Yes (yes), Goto program can be used in DNC (DNC), Run (Execute) or DNC Verf (Check DNC).

Full Dos File Names If you choose to Yes (yes)Can be used by the file names (Full names of the files DOS up to 11 characters [FILENAME.EXT]. At DOS) Pressing "D" in any menu option displays Full Dos File Names (Full file names DOS). Disable 417 Errors If you choose to Yes (yes), The parameters can be changed during the

66

SECTION 2 - FRONT PANEL OPERATION


(Lock error 417) implementation or testing program. If you choose to No (no)When you try to change the parameter at run-time error will be displayed 417. Set to Yes (yes) Every time we run program, or is manual data entry. Correction the tool installed by default on the values from the table tool for the current tool. If you choose to No (no), The length and radius of the tool will be the default set to zero. If you choose to Yes (yes)During the execution of the program will show running at the time of the block plus seven the following blocks.

Load Tool Offsets (Loading corrections on the instrument)

Multiple Block Display (The map a few blocks)

CAD Parameters (Parameters CAD) CAD Type is, DXF, CDL Type of CAD file to import dialog (Type of CAD, DXF, CDL) programming. CAD Epsilon (Epsilon CAD) Tolerance for geometric intersection of imported Files CAD.

Post M codes Table (Table future M-code) Post M code # 0 Post M code # 1 Post M code # 2 Post M code # 3 Post M code # 4 Post M code # 5 Post M code # 6 Post M code # 7 Post M code # 8 Post M code # 9 Report File (Report file) Command Name (Team name) Post M code = following M-code

These are M-codes will be performed after all other operations within the block.

Filenames DOS, in which the text is written DPRINT using POPEN P0 Any line in this parameter will appear in the key F10 (Util) (Utilities). Pressing the F10 will execute the file DOS, associated with the command name. See more details about this feature on page 140.

67

SECTION 2 - FRONT PANEL OPERATION


PULSEX pulse delay (MS) Pulse delay time in milliseconds that is used to (Pulse delay time PULSE0 and PULSE1 PULSEX (ms)) Spindle Power Raw (Spindle power source) Spindle Power Scale (Scale of spindle power) Value read from the ADC is 0 to 255 Multiplier to obtain the power values Spindle

Spindle Power Value (AMPS) Calculated on the basis of the initial capacity and (Power the scale of the spindle spindle (amp)) Spindle Power Limit (AMPS) (Limit of spindle power (Amp)) Not applicable

European Code Parameter and Operation Descriptions (descriptions of the parameters and the functioning of European codes) Door Open Switch (Switch open doors) European Code (European code) Door-Open axis (The axis of the door opening) Door-Open-Input (Entrance door opening) Door-Open-Override Axis (The axis of the abolition of opening the door) Door-Open-Override Input (Entrance cancel opening the door) Max Feed with Door Open (Maximum speed filing with the door open) Activate the switch is open the door

Activate the door opening button Axis , which gets the input-switch door Log , which gets the input-switch door Axis , which enters the cancel button opening the door Input , which enters the cancel button opening the door The maximum speed of the machine when the door is open, If you click cancel opening the door

68

SECTION 2 - FRONT PANEL OPERATION


Soft Start Delay (secs) (Delay starter (s)) The delay time to permit movement of the axes After rebooting the machine.

Software related to European codes for opening the safety door switch. Below is a description of the software relative to the button Set Up (Configure), and the parameters of the software. Only if the switch is activated by opening the door When the door is opened, turns off the spindle, and stop feeding the machine. When the door is opened, the spindle will not start. When the door is open, you can not make manual data entry, filing shaking, the machine will not operate in a mode of execution, however, you can do the job manually using the handwheel. The machine will perform the functions associated with I / O, except the inclusion of the spindle (ie, manipulation of the rotary arm, connecting rod, etc.). If the machine performs the tapping, and the door opened, he finishes the operation, will make stops feeding and stop the spindle. If the door is opened during operation of the machine: A Spindle off. 2 Stop the movement along the axis. 3 Stop feeding the lamp lights up. 4 The spindle will not start again. To continue: A Close the door (lights Cycle Start (Start of cycle)). 2 Click on the button CW (Clockwise) on the front panel (spindle run again). 3 Click on the button Cycle Start (Start of cycle) on the front panel (Cycle Start stop flashing and the indicator goes off Feedhold (Stop feeding)). If the machine does not work, and the spindle does not work, opening the door will have no impact on the machine. However, the indicator lights Feedhold (Stop feeding). If the switch is activated by opening the door and the European Code When the door is open, what happens when you press the button door open (Opening door), the spindle is turned off, and stop feeding the machine going. When the door is opened, the spindle will not start. When the door is open, you can not make manual data entry, filing shaking, the machine will not operate in a mode of execution of the program, it will not run in the flywheel. If the machine performs the tapping, and the door opened, he finishes the operation, and then make stops feeding and stop the spindle. If the door is opened, the machine will allow the device to change the tool indexed by only one position while using the utility tool change or customize the tool. If the door is opened and the button is held Setup (Settings), the machine with jog feed enters the parameter Max Feed with Door Open (ipm) (max. flow rate with the door open (inches / min)). If the door is opened and the button is held Setup (Settings), the machine comes with the flywheel up to speed on the switch 50% correction of the feed rate that is 0.1 mm / click

69

SECTION 2 - FRONT PANEL OPERATION


flywheel. (It is difficult to generate speed in excess of 1000 mm / min in this mode). Change the distance to a mouse flywheel also require a password, which can only be obtained from the manufacturer of the machine. If the door is opened during operation of the machine: A Spindle off. 2 Stop the movement along the axis. 3 Stop feeding the lamp lights up. 4 The spindle will not start again. If a key is pressed Setup (Settings), the machine will move with a fixed feed rate until the button is held. To continue: A Close the door (lights Cycle Start (Start of cycle)). 2 Click on the button CW (Clockwise) on the front panel (spindle run again). 3 Click on the button Cycle Start (Start of cycle) on the front panel (Cycle Start stop flashing and the indicator goes off Feedhold (Stop feeding)). F4 (FdOvr) Main-Parms-Setup-OVRs-FdOvr (Main screen - Options - Settings Correction - Correction of the feed rate) Use the F4 (FdOvr) output settings feedrate. These settings determine what percentage will be used for each of the 16 switch positions feedrate. (Enter 5-040 means 40% at 5-position, 1 - a 0%, 2 - 10%, 3 - 20% ... 16 - 0%.) The following screen appears when you select F4 (FdOvr). To edit these settings to select F1 (Edit) (Edit) and move the cursor to the value you want to change. Enter the desired change and press Enter (Input).

70

SECTION 2 - FRONT PANEL OPERATION


RunTime = Period Main-Parms-Setup-OVRs-FdOvr = Main screen-Options-Settings-Correction-correction flow rate Active = Active Current = current next Next = Distance = the distance Settings feedrate Correction: canceled Instrument: Length: Diameter: Plane: Clearance: Interpolation: linear (feed) Submission: (ipm = inches / min) Units: absolute / English system Cycle: canceled Pause: (sec = seconds) Spindle: (rpm = r / min) Coolant: Disabled Number details: Edit = edit; FdOvr = feed rate correction; HwOvr = correction of the flywheel; SpOvr = correction of the spindle; Back = back

The keys are displayed in the mode of Edit (Edit)

71

SECTION 2 - FRONT PANEL OPERATION


Exit = Exit F5 (HwOvr) Main-Parms-Setup-OVRs-HwOvr (Main screen - Options - Settings Correction - Correction of the flywheel) Use the F5 (HwOvr) (Correction of the flywheel) output switch settings for flywheel switch feedrate. These settings determine how the axis will move one step flywheel (001 = 1 unit). Editing is performed in the same manner as that for the parameters of feedrate. The next screen displays the settings correct flywheel.

RunTime = Period Main-Parms-Setup-OVRs-HwOvr = Main screen-Options-Settings-Correction-Correction flywheel Active = Active Current = current next Next = Distance = the distance Correction settings flywheel Correction: canceled Instrument: Length: Diameter: Plane: Clearance: Interpolation: linear (feed) Submission: (ipm = inches / min) Units: absolute / English system Cycle: canceled Pause: (sec = seconds) Spindle: (rpm = r / min) Coolant: Disabled Number details: Edit = edit; FdOvr = feed rate correction; HwOvr = correction of the flywheel; SpOvr = correction of the spindle; Back = back

The keys are displayed in the mode of Edit (Edit)

72

SECTION 2 - FRONT PANEL OPERATION

Exit = Exit F6 (SpOvr) Main-Parms-Setup-OVRs-SpOvr (Main screen - Options - Settings Correction - Correction of the spindle) Use the F6 (SpOvr) 16 switch settings are displayed correct spindle. These settings are the percentages by which the correction will be made in each spindle command line switch position. Correction parameters are changed the spindle in the same manner as the parameters of feedrate. Screen adjustment spindle is shown below.

RunTime = Period Main-Parms-Setup-OVRs-SpOvr = Main screen - Options - Settings-correction-correction of spindle Active = Active Current = current next Next = Distance = the distance

73

SECTION 2 - FRONT PANEL OPERATION


Settings adjustment spindle Correction: canceled Instrument: Length: Diameter: Plane: Clearance: Interpolation: linear (feed) Submission: (ipm = inches / min) Units: absolute / English system Cycle: canceled Pause: (sec = seconds) Spindle: (rpm = r / min) Coolant: Disabled Number details:

Edit = edit; FdOvr = feed rate correction; HwOvr = correction of the flywheel; SpOvr = correction of the spindle; Back = back

The keys are displayed in the mode of Edit (Edit)

Exit = Exit F7 (BSC) Main-Parms-Setup-BSC (Home Screen - Options - Settings - Correction to the ball-screw pair)

RunTime = Period Main-Parms-Setup-BSC = Main screen - Options - Settings-correction on the ball-screw pair Active = Active Current = current next Next = Distance = the distance

74

SECTION 2 - FRONT PANEL OPERATION


Information about the correction in the ball-screw pair The new gap - 0.5000 A: Off. Y: Off. Z: off. Correction: canceled Instrument: Length: Diameter: Plane: Clearance: Interpolation: linear (feed) Submission: (ipm = inches / min) Units: absolute / English system Cycle: canceled Pause: (sec = seconds) Spindle: (rpm = r / min) Coolant: Disabled Number details:

New = new; On = ON.; Off = off.; Load = load; Gap = gap; Edit = edit; Done = done

Help to create a table of correction on the ball-screw pair Enter X, Y, Z (A, B, C) to select the axis. With the help of F1 (New) (New) creates a new, blank table is ball-screw pair. With the F2 (On) (On) the correction is included in the ball-screw pair for a given axis. With the F3 (Off) (Off) turns off correction in the ball-screw pair for a given axis. With F4 (Load) (download) table of ball screw pair is loaded into the axle. With F5 (Gap) (gap) varies in the range of file ball screw pair, created by F1 (New) (New). With F6 (Edit) (Edit) to edit the transition table ball screw pair. With F7 (4 <> 6) is selected 4 or 6 decimal places in your ball-screw pair, generated by F1 (New) (New). ESC (Done) (Done). F9 (DOS) Main-Parms-Setup-DOS (Main screen - Options - Preferences - Tip DOS) Pressing the F9 (DOS) is out of the NC program and returns to the tip DOS.

75

SECTION 2 - FRONT PANEL OPERATION


F2 (Coord) Main-Parms-Coord (Main screen - Options - Contact) Use the F2 (Coord) (coordinates) on the options screen displays the parameters associated with the different coordinate systems control device. To modify the operating parameters of coordinates to use key PgUp (page up), PgDn (page down) and the arrow keys to move the cursor to the desired setting, then press the key F1 (Edit) (Edit) and point the arrow to the desired axis. Enter the new value and press Enter (Enter), Then the ESC (Exit) (Exit). The next screen shows the G92, G52 and the parameters of the production system G92/G52/54-59, described in the G-codes. On the next page of this screen are options for this. Positive Safe Zone (A positive safety zone) X 00.0000 Y 00.0000 Z 00.0000 Negative Safe Zone (The negative safety zone) X 00.0000 Y 00.0000 Z 00.0000 Position relative to the initial position of the machine, which, together with a negative situation Safe Area, describes the cube, which tool can not enter. If the instrument programmed in the cube, you will see an error. G22 turns off the safety zone G23 includes the safe zone

G28 Reference Point 1 G30 Reference Point 2 G30 Reference Point 3 G30 Reference Point 4

Described in Section 4, page 300. Reference Point = reference point

RunTime = Period Main-Parms-Coord = Main screen - Options - Contact Active = Active Current = current next Next = Distance = the distance

76

SECTION 2 - FRONT PANEL OPERATION


Work = Working WorkCoords = working position Subset = a subset Correction: canceled Instrument: Length: Diameter: Plane: Clearance: Interpolation: linear (feed) Submission: (ipm = inches / min) Units: absolute / English system Cycle: canceled Pause: (sec = seconds) Spindle: (rpm = r / min) Coolant: Disabled Number details:

Edit = edit; PgUp = Page Up; PgDn = page down; Esc = exit

It should be noted that working with the coordinates of the G54 to G59 are subsets. To view / edit, for example, labor adjustment G573 move the cursor to work four-coordinate (G57), then switch (F3) for as long as the subset will not be reading 3. The keys are displayed in the mode of Edit (Edit)

Mach = Mach number; Esc = exit The functioning of the working coordinate systems G92 and G52 described in section 4, page 374 (G92), and p 335 (G52). These parameters are the positions relative to the zero point of the machine and become a new zero point of their use. Use the F4 (Mach) in the edit mode is entered the current state of the machine as the zero point of the working coordinates for X, Y, and Z. Use the F5 (M-XY) coordinates are introduced only to the axes X and Y. Use the F6 (MZ) is introduced only for the coordinate axis Z.

77

SECTION 2 - FRONT PANEL OPERATION


F3 (TOOL) Main-Parms-Tool (main screen - Options - Tools) Use the F3 (Tool) (tool) displays the following screen.

RunTime = Period Main-Parms-Tool = Main screen - Options - Tools Active = Active Current = current next Next = Distance = the distance Tool = Tool Correction: canceled Lengths = length Instrument: Diameters = diameter Length: Diameter: Plane: Clearance: Interpolation: linear (feed) Submission: (ipm = inches / min) Units: absolute / English system Cycle: canceled Pause: (sec = seconds) Spindle: (rpm = r / min) Coolant: Disabled Number details: Exit = exit

The cursor defaults to the number sent to the active tool. The process of editing on this screen is the same as on all other screens Parms (parameters). When selecting F3 displays a table of tool length (H) and Table tool radius (D). The value entered in the string length, T04, introduced also in H04. The value entered in the string radius, T04, also introduced in the D04. This entry screen is there, mostly for convenience, it is useful if the correction of H and D are associated with the corresponding T-numbers. Note: In the control device can be modified with respect to the use of the radii of the tool instead of the diameters. When editing tool offset current value of the right side of the edited 78

SECTION 2 - FRONT PANEL OPERATION


value, so that small quantities can be easily added to or subtracted from the values of the correction. F4 (D Off) Main-Parms-D Off (Home Screen - Options - Correction in diameter) Use the F4 (D Off) displayed 99 D corrections to the radius or diameter, available in NC. These corrections are evaluated and edited in the same manner as the other parameters. The following shows the screen D-corrections.

RunTime = Period Main-Parms-D Off = The main screen - Options - Correction to the diameter of the Active = Active Current = current next Next = Distance = the distance Tool Diameters = diameter of tool Correction: canceled Instrument: Length: Diameter: Plane: Clearance: Interpolation: linear (feed) Submission: (ipm = inches / min) Units: absolute / English system Cycle: canceled Pause: (sec = seconds) Spindle: (rpm = r / min) Coolant: Disabled Number details: Exit = exit

The cursor defaults to the number sent to the active tool.

79

SECTION 2 - FRONT PANEL OPERATION


F5 (H Off) Main-Parms-H Off (Home Screen - Options - length compensation) Use the F5 (H Off) displayed 99 H corrections to the length of the tool available to the control device. These corrections are evaluated and edited in the same manner as the other parameters. The following screen shows the H-correction.

RunTime = Period Main-Parms-H Off = The main screen - Settings - Adjust the length of the Active = Active Current = current next Next = Distance = the distance Tool Diameters = tool length Correction: canceled Instrument: Length: Diameter: Plane: Clearance: Interpolation: linear (feed) Submission: (ipm = inches / min) Units: absolute / English system Cycle: canceled Pause: (sec = seconds) Spindle: (rpm = r / min) Coolant: Disabled Number details: Exit = exit

The cursor defaults to the number sent to the active tool. F6 (Save) Main-Parms-Save (Home Screen - Options - Save) Use the F6 (Save) saves all the files in RAM (memory) on a floppy disk. You will be informed that the duplicate files to a floppy disk will be overwritten. Then you will be prompted to confirm this by pressing the F1 (Ok).

80

SECTION 2 - FRONT PANEL OPERATION


F7 (Load) Main-Parms-Load (Main screen - Options - Load) Download files from floppy disk to the directory RAM (memory). You will be informed that the current settings will be overwritten. Then you will be prompted to confirm this by pressing the F1 (Ok). F8 (Prog) Main-Parms-Prog (Main screen - Options - Program)

RunTime = Period Main-Parms-Prog = Main screen - Options - Program Active = Active Current = current next Next = Distance = the distance The previous position of P200 Correction: canceled R208 Current Situation Instrument: Previous R216 machine Length: R224 Current Machine Diameter: R232 Working Correction Plane: P240 Correction to the tool Clearance: R248 radius of the arc Interpolation: linear (feed) R249 The value of i arc Submission: (ipm = inches / min) Units: absolute / English system Previous position Cycle: canceled Pause: (sec = seconds) Spindle: (rpm = r / min) Coolant: Disabled Number details: Exit = exit

This parameter set gives access to all machine programmer's internal parameters used by the CNC program. Typically, these parameters are used only for display purposes as an aid in debugging the program. However, you can read and modify these parameters in a parametric program. This should be done with great caution, because these parameters are used directly to NC for the next move or function. These parameters are displayed and edited in the

81

SECTION 2 - FRONT PANEL OPERATION


same manner as the parameters of the coordinates. Below is a list and description of these parameters. From P200 to P207 Contains the previous specified position relative to the current working-axis correction activated P200 = X P201 = Y P202 = Z. . . etc. Contains the current desired position relative to the current working-axis correction activated P208 = X P209 = Y P210 = Z. . . etc. Contains the previous position of the machine relative to the zero point of the axis of the machine is activated P216 = X P217 = Y P218 = Z. . . etc. Contains the current state of the machine relative to the zero point of the axis of the machine is activated P224 = X P225 = Y P226 = Z. . . etc. Contains the coordinates of the correct working of the machine relative to the zero point of the axis of the machine is activated P232 = X P233 = Y P234 = Z. . . etc. Contains the parameter length of the active tool (H) for the activated axis P240 = X P241 = Y P242 = Z. . . etc. Contains the current radius of the arc Contains the current value of I or J or K arc Contains the current value of I or J or K arc The current feed rate in inches / min or mm / min Current shutter time Current spindle speed Last performed by the values of X, Y, Z, A, B, C Contains a number of the active tool Contains the active tool radius D

On the P208 for P215

From P216 to P223

From P224 to P231

From P232 to P239

From P240 to P247

P248 P249 P250 P251 P252 P253 From P254 to P258 P260 P261

82

SECTION 2 - FRONT PANEL OPERATION


P262 P263 P264 P266 P267 P268 From P270 to P274 From P273 to P299 From P300 to 303 P304 P305 P306 P307 P308 P309 P310 H contains the length of the active tool Contains the number of active correction of D Number of active correction H Contains the status of the safe zone and excessive speed (0 = off., 1 = on.) Contains the ratio of the pulses from the sensor feedback to program units (1 - inch, 0.03937 for metric system) The expected number of tools time i, time j, k time It is used as a temporary memory Modal Modal 00-03 Status if the control device is in data processing or normal programming (0 = off., 1 = on.) The direction or sign of the correction H Status Mode 0 = G0, 1 = G1, 2 = G2, 3 = G3 Not used Number of active planes 0 = G17 (X4), 1 = G18 (ZX), 2 = G19 (YZ), 3 = G18 (XZ) The status of compensation for the cutting tool 0 = G40, 1 = G41, 2 = G42, 5 = G45, 6 = G46 Current number of active cycle of group0 = Canceled (CANCELLED), 1 = Drill (Drill), 2 = Drill / Dwl (Drilling / Pause), 3 = Peck I (Drilling with periodic withdrawal of the drill I), 4 = Tap (tapping), 5 = Bore (Boring), 6 = Bore II (Boring II), 7 = Peck II (Drilling with periodic withdrawal of the drill II), 8 = Hard Tap (rigid tapping), 9 = Bore / Dwl (Boring / Pause), 10 = Left Tap (Tapping the left), 11 = Cir Pck Clear (Clear round deep grooves), 12 = Cir Fin Inside (Finishing the internal processing of deep circular cut-outs), 13 = Cir Fin Outside (Fine surface treatment of deep circular cut-outs), 14 = Rec

83

SECTION 2 - FRONT PANEL OPERATION


Pck Clear (Clear deep rectangular grooves), 15 = Rec Fin Inside (Finishing the internal processing of deep rectangular grooves), 16 = Rec Fin Outside (Fine surface treatment of deep rectangular grooves), 17 = Threading (Threading), 18 = XZ sweep (sweep XZ), 19 = YZ sweep (sweep YZ) P311 P312 P313 P314 P315 P316 P317 P318 P319 From P320 to P322 0 = The absolute, 1 = Incremental mode Supply unit (0 - Submission / min, 1 - Submission / v, 2 the reverse flow) Spindle Units (0 - r / min, 1 - constant cutting speed) The direction of rotation of the spindle in a clockwise or counter-clockwise 0 = inches, 1 = Metric Scale (0 = off., 1 = on.) Rotation (0 = off., 1 = on.) Mirror Image (0 = off., 1 = on.) The current number of working coordinates (G54 = 1, G55 = 2 ... G59 = 6) Gets the primary, secondary and tertiary axis of the plane on the basis of selection X = 1 Y = 2 Z = 3. . . etc. For the G17 XY prim = 1 sec = 2 t = 3 For the G18 ZX prim sec = 3 = 1 t = 2 For the G19 YZ prim = 2 sec = 3 t = 1 For the G18 XZ prim = 1 sec = 3, t = 2 0 = Return to the plane of the R (G99), a = initial level (G98) Tapping mode (0 = off., 1 = on.) The processing time (the amount of run-time programs) The actual number of tools used for the tool changer The number of blocks per second for the last of the running

P323 P324 P369 P370 Block Rate

84

SECTION 2 - FRONT PANEL OPERATION


(Frequency blocks) programs

F9 (CTRL) Main-Parms-CTRL (Main screen - Options - CTRL) This parameter set is a superset of F8 (Prog) (Program). This group deals primarily with the parameters used for the automatic creation of standard programs and group loops. These parameters can be checked and changed in the same manner as all other parameters are the control device. Below is a list and description of these parameters. Load Text Cycles (Download text cycles) Offset Round Tapered Walls (Correction of curved and tapered walls) Spindle Range (Range of rotation spindle) Chip Remove On (Min) (Removal of chips inc. (Min)) Wash Down On (Sec) Wash Down Off (Sec) (Washing incl. (S)) (Washing off. (S)) Sort Directories by Name (Sort directories by name) Drive Key on Menus (Key disk in the menu) Auto Rotary Brake (Automatic rotary brake) Yes (yes) cycles to load the engraving text. If set to No (no)And the text runs the team, you will be an error 578 "Undefined text cycle" (Uncertain text cycle). See Description M95 and M96 (p 393 and 396, Section 5)

At what range of gears is the spindle

If the machine is equipped with a screw removal system chips, it will be the time during which auger will run after the M38 or pressing a button Auger (Screw) on the front panel. During operation, the screw with the data parameters of time on and off wash-around If you select yes (yes), the menus are sorted alphabetical order by the 1st line of code. Note: this option is invoked by pressing the "N" from any menu. If you select yes (yes) key gives aid the operator to select the drive for the menu. It allows the operator to select a new directory for the menu. If you choose to Yes (yes) is automatic control of rotational axis on the brake A and B. This brake is turned off before the circular movement, and turned back on after the move. If you select No (no), to

85

SECTION 2 - FRONT PANEL OPERATION


enable / disable the brakes need M10/11 and M12/13. Note: If you change this setting to turn the power off and then on again. Rotary Brake Delay (Secs) (Rotational latency brake (s)) This delay, measured in seconds after M11 (Inhibition of the axis A) and M13 (disinhibition axis B). It is also a time delay after automatic release in the modes of Home, Jog and Handwheel. Default - 0.25 sec, max - 2.55 seconds.

Ignore Tool too Large Errors If you choose to Yes (yes) control device will be (Ignore the error, ignore the error 569 and cut the corner when tool compensated arc too small. too large) Pre Check Software Limits Never (ever), Run Only (only in Run), or (Pre-screening Always (always). Never: the control unit programmed never checks the programmed limits. limits) Early versions of the software to work that way. Errorprogrammed limits is issued, if the axis is moved outside. Run Only: checks are not performed in the test mode. During the execution of the program will be tested, do not move if any of the axes of the outside, prior to displacement. In the graphical representation of the course will be shown, but the machine will not implement it. This can prevent the collision, when the movements are fast moving beyond. In earlier versions of the accelerated movement was carried to the limits, and it was impossible to stop before the limit switch and / or a hard stop. Always: the control unit will monitor does not go there any axis beyond in the performance of the program or during the scan. The graphical display will show the progress, but the machine will not implement it. It may be useful to test the program before you implement it. Tool Load Flag (Check downloads tool) Tool Load Monitor (Sensor load tool) Off (Off) E-Stop Limit Exceeded (Limit exceeded) or Limit not Exceeded (limit is not exceeded) Currently there are six options: There will be no control of the tool / spindle. If the limit is exceeded, the machine switches to

86

SECTION 2 - FRONT PANEL OPERATION


(Emergency stop) emergency stop, and it will be shown the appropriate message. Feed Hold If the limit is exceeded, the machine will perform shutdown (Stop feeding) submission, and will display a corresponding message. Block Mode On If the limit is exceeded, the machine switches to (Including mode Lock (Block Mode), and will be shown Lock) an appropriate message. Set Flag-No Message If the limit is exceeded, the machine will set the check box. (Setting flag Messages will not be shown. Flag - PB418. lack of communication) program can check this option to see whether the limit has been exceeded, and perform the variable operation, switch to another instrument, etc. The operator can also see the state (or a change of state) flag in the parameters of CTRL. The parameter "Tool Load Flag" (download the tool box) has two states: Limit Exceeded (limit exceeded) or Limit not Exceeded (limit is not exceeded). Message Only If the limit is exceeded, only shows (Only report) message. The following message appears:
Load a tool spindle has exceeded the limit of 64, the load was 66

The sample is made only in the movements of supply (G1, G2 and G3). Sampling is not performed when the accelerated movements (G0). Sampling is carried out only during acceleration drive spindle when the program is executed and the spindle is turned on. Necessary to stabilize the load of the spindle after any change in the number of its revolutions per minute. This requires that the program was expecting about 5 seconds after the dissolution or any change in the correction to the frequency of rotation of the spindle. Time is hard-coded (no option). Time is based on the configuration of two-speed spindle at 8000 rev / min. Various actuators, spindles and / or drive parameters can affect the time delay.

87

SECTION 2 - FRONT PANEL OPERATION


Limits (Limits) and the maximum load (Max load) for each instrument are shown in the table below the instrument. If the limit is zero for the instrument will not be held control of the tool / spindle. The upper value (High) is not reset until the operator resets the value in the tool table. Initially, the operator will carry out the program and then watch the upper values for each instrument. For an instrument that he would like to check, it loads the appropriate limits on the basis of the upper values obtained in the course of the program.

RunTime = Period Main-Parms-Tool = Main screen - Options - Tools Active = Active Current = current next Next = Distance = the distance Tool = Tool Correction: canceled Lengths = length Instrument: Diameters = diameter Length: Limit = limit Diameter: High = higher value of Plane: Clearance: Interpolation: linear (feed) Submission: (ipm = inches / min) Units: absolute / English system Cycle: canceled Pause: (sec = seconds) Spindle: (rpm = r / min) Coolant: Disabled Number details: Exit = exit

It controls only the tools 1 to 25, they will have these options. Column load spindle will also have a number associated with it. Watch Spindle up to Speed (Tracking signal If set to YES (Yes), the device Management will monitor the dispersal of the signal.

88

SECTION 2 - FRONT PANEL OPERATION


Spindle acceleration) The control unit will not produce the track during a specified time after starting the spindle or after manual correction of spindle speed. Time is based on the parameters of the MISC - Spindle Ramp Time 1 (Acceleration spindle 1) (if it is on the transfer of 1) or 2 Spindle Ramp Time (Ramp-up time spindle 2) (if it is to any other transfer). If the acceleration signal is not observed, the control unit stops the supply of the machine, and a message appears: "The spindle up to speed signal was lost while the spindle was running. The spindle may have stalled. "(Spindle acceleration signal was lost during the work spindle. Perhaps the spindle stopped.). It should be noted that the acceleration only applies to the engine speed when the drive operates in the flux vector. This means that the MC5, or G5, running with the vector of open-loop system will not work in the above manner, since the acceleration is related to the frequency of the drive, not the actual engine speed.

Serial Port Data (serial data) Note: Com-port, baud rate baud rate, parity, data bits and stop bits are the parameters for communication. See more details on page 126, Section 4 of F4 (RS232). Primary Serial Port (Primary serial port) COM1 Baud Rate (COM1, baud rate data baud rate) COM1 Parity, Data and Stop Bits (COM1, parity, Information and stop bits) COM2 Baud Rate (COM2, transfer rate data baud rate) COM2 Parity, Data and Stop Bits (COM2, parity, Information and stop bits) NONE, COM1 or COM2

110, 150, 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600 or 19200

N/7/1, N/7/2, N/8/1, N/8/2, E/7/1, E/7/2, E/8/1, E/8/2, O/7/1, O/7/2, O/8/1 or O/8/2

110, 150, 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600 or 19200

N/7/1, N/7/2, N/8/1, N/8/2, E/7/1, E/7/2, E/8/1, E/8/2, O/7/1, O/7/2, O/8/1 or O/8/2

89

SECTION 2 - FRONT PANEL OPERATION


Secondary Serial Port (Secondary serial port) NONE, COM1 or COM2

Tape Start Character Value ASCII, is used to send in (A symbol of starting tape) the opening of the port comTape Stop Character (The symbol of the stop band) RS232 Buffer Size (Buffer size RS232) LF in change to CR (Line in changes to the return carriage) End of Block Send CR / LF (Send the return carriage / linefeed at the end of block) RS232 EOF Character (Mark the end of File RS232) Value ASCII, is used to send in closing of the port com-

One for users who are long connect the RS-232, and 255 to improve the RS-232 to DNC Yes (yes) means a change of carriage returns, received on the RS-232, a transfer line

Yes (yes) means sending a carriage return / transfer lines at the end of blocks that are sent to the RS-232

The value of ASCII character sent by the end of File sent to the RS-232

90

SECTION 2 - FRONT PANEL OPERATION


Digitizing Parameters (Parameters digitizing) P100 Digitizing (P100 Digitizing) P101 Digitizing (P101 Digitizing) P102 Digitizing (P102 Digitizing) P103 Digitizing (P103 Digitizing) P104 Digitizing (P104 Digitizing) P105 Digitizing (P105 Digitizing) P106 Digitizing (P106 Digitizing) P107 Digitizing (P107 Digitizing) P108 Digitizing (P108 Digitizing) P109 Digitizing (P109 Digitizing) P110 Digitizing (P110 Digitizing) P111 Digitizing (P111 Digitizing) From P120 to P139 P140 P141 P142 P143 P144 P145 P146 P147 Proportional gain The integral gain Differential gain Step subskanirovaniya Detailed angle The gap sensor The radius of the sensor Submission 1 - Picks Submission 2 - Search Submission 3 - removal Vibration Sensor Activation of the walls of the search It is used for seizures in 3 dimensions The size of the plane R The final depth of the loop group The initial level of the group cycle Step-cycle group The first cycle of the depth of the group The feed rate of the tertiary axis for group cycle The distance to the discontinuous chip removal cycle The distance R to the plane of each cycle periodic withdrawal of the drill

91

SECTION 2 - FRONT PANEL OPERATION


P148 and P149 P150 The time delay for the group of cycles The radius of circular recesses in automatic programs, Rectangular recesses in automatic programs, the radius of curvature of the angle The size of the rectangular recesses X The size of the rectangular recesses Y Finishing allowance for the XY automatic programs Finishing allowance Z for automatic programs Cutting width in automatic cleaning programs seizures The radius of the bolt holes cycles The initial angle of bolt holes Number of bolt holes at 360 Number of bolt holes that you want to drill Working memory The coordinates for the center position for the team for the mirroring axis is activated P172 = X P173 = Y P174 = Z. . . etc. The coordinates of the center axis scaling for the activated P180 = X P181 = Y P182 = Z. . . etc. The scale factor for each of the axes of the activated P188 = X P189 = Y P190 = Z. . . etc. Regulation I, J, K the center of rotation of the primary axis Regulation I, J, K the center of rotation of the secondary

P151 P152 P153 P154 P155 P156 P157 P158 P159 From P160 to P171 From P172 to P179

From P180 to P187 From P188 to P195 P196 P197 axis

92

SECTION 2 - FRONT PANEL OPERATION


P198 P199 P346 Bore Relief Angle (Back corner of the hole) P347 Bore Relief Distance (Distance to the rear the angle of the hole) Angle of rotation Automatic program incision / Z-axis deviation 0 = incision, a = slope Cycles used G76 (Finishing boring) and G87 (reverse bore) for orientation and distance from the hole Same as P346

F10 (User) Main-Parms-User (main screen - Options - User) This set of 100 parameter is reserved for the programmer to handle parts for use in the writing of parametric programming. These parameters are not defined, you can edit, display or download from this screen. Formats, editing and display identical parameters described in this section. See information about programming options in Section 5.

RunTime = Period Main-Parms-User = main screen - Options mPolzovatel Active = Active Current = current next Next = Distance = the distance

93

SECTION 2 - FRONT PANEL OPERATION


Correction: canceled Instrument: Length: Diameter: Plane: Clearance: Interpolation: linear (feed) Submission: (ipm = inches / min) Units: absolute / English system Cycle: canceled Pause: (sec = seconds) Spindle: (rpm = r / min) Coolant: Disabled Number details: Edit = edit; PgUp = Page Up; PgDn = page down; Esc = exit

F8 (Prog) Main-Prog (main screen - the Program) Centurion at the control device has two modes of creation / editing of program files: text and dialogue. Pressing the F8 (Prog) (Program) is activated by a functional keyboard, and you can select the type of programming. It also allows you to transfer programs from floppy disks, and on him.

RunTime = Period Main-Prog = Main screen - Program Active = Active Current = current next Next = Distance = the distance

94

SECTION 2 - FRONT PANEL OPERATION


Correction: canceled Instrument: Length: Diameter: Plane: Clearance: Interpolation: linear (feed) Submission: (ipm = inches / min) Units: absolute / English system Cycle: canceled Pause: (sec = seconds) Spindle: (rpm = r / min) Coolant: Disabled Number details: Text = text mode; Conv = interactive mode; Files = Files; Edit = edit; Esc = exit

Test and interactive programs are stored in the control unit in different file formats and have different prefixes for their differences. Text of the program have to prefix the letter "O" and stored in the machining of parts in ASCII. Dialog programs are stored in the machining of parts in two formats: ASCII, with the prefix "O"; and in the dialog - the prefix "P". Only programs with the prefix "O" can be carried out or verified. F1 (Text) Main-Prog-Text (main screen - Program - Text mode) If you switch to text mode programming in the top right of the cell containing the number of active programs that will be displayed last edited the test program.

RunTime = Period Main-Prog-Text = Main Screen-Program-Text Mode Editing = Editing Current = current next Next = Distance = the distance

95

SECTION 2 - FRONT PANEL OPERATION


Correction: canceled Instrument: Length: Diameter: Plane: Clearance: Interpolation: linear (feed) Submission: (ipm = inches / min) Units: absolute / English system Cycle: canceled Pause: (sec = seconds) Spindle: (rpm = r / min) Coolant: Disabled Number details: Edit = edit; New = new; Old = previous; Any = any; Menu = menu; Esc = exit

F1 (Edit) Main-Prog-Text-Edit (main screen - Program - Text mode - Edit) Use the F1 (Edit) (Edit), select the program shown in the upper right corner, as an active editable text program. Terms of text editing Program Editing: Lyrics: The program allows you to input and change information, then save it to a file for retrieval and / or further changes in the future. Refers to the edited sequence of characters and / or rows. Manipulation of the individual characters are produced by the widespread American standard code exchange (ASCII). The small square on the screen, marking where the text changes were made.

Cursor:

Writing and editing text Text is entered in the same way as he was introduced to using a typewriter, and most of the keys on the keyboard correspond to the standard layout (such as pressing Enter to complete block). However, one should pay attention to many important differences. The cursor always points to that which will be introduced a new text, you can move the cursor in several ways. You can copy and move through the test block commands. You can place a line of text using the F8 (Find) (Find) and additionally to replace it with another string using the F7 (Chang) (Edit). And, in most cases, you can even undo some recent changes with the help recovery teams line F2 (Rest) or F1 (UnDo) (Cancel). These commands and others are summarized in the following sections.

96

SECTION 2 - FRONT PANEL OPERATION


The first screen you see when you log into a text editor - it's edit screen, which displays the first 16 lines of code. The main function keys are located at the bottom of the screen editing.

RunTime = Period Main-Prog-Text-Edit = Home screen, program-text-editing mode Editing = Editing Current = current next Next = Distance = the distance Correction: canceled Instrument: Length: Diameter: Plane: Clearance: Interpolation: linear (feed) Submission: (ipm = inches / min) Units: absolute / English system Cycle: canceled Pause: (sec = seconds) Spindle: (rpm = r / min) Coolant: Disabled Number details: Block = block; Cursr = cursor; Words = words; Misc = other; Ins = insert; Delete = delete; Exit = output; Verf = check

Now you can enter text at the current cursor position.

97

SECTION 2 - FRONT PANEL OPERATION


Definitions of keys F1 (Block) Main-Prog-Text-Edit-Block (main screen - Program - Text mode - Edit - Block) Block - is any arbitrarily defined, continuous element of the text. The block may consist of one character, and of the entire program. Mark the block by placing a marker at the beginning of the block the first character the desired block, and handle end of the block - just the last character. Once it is marked, the block can be copied, moved or deleted. Although the marked blocks, as a rule, stand out, so you can see the marked, the block can be Hide (Or see) with the command to hide the block F5 (Hide).

F1 (Begin)

Marks the beginning of the block. The very visible marker on the screen, and the block (Top) becomes visible only when the marker is the end of the block. F2 (End) Marks the end of the block. As early marker block, marker of the end (End) block invisible, and the block will not appear until they install both markers. F3 (Word) Marks a word as a unit, combining the functions of the commands start (Word)block and end block. When the cursor within a word, that word will be marked. If it is not within a word, the word will be marked on the right of the cursor. If the right of the cursor is not the word, the word will be marked on his left. F5 (Hide) (Hide) F6 (Del) (Delete) Turns off the mark, and includes a visual block. Deletes the marked and displayed block. While using the F1 (UnDo) (Cancel), you can usually recover accidentally deleted part of the block there is no command to restore the block completely, so this command should be used with caution.

F7 (Copy) Creates a copy of the marked and displayed block in the current (Copy) the cursor position. Initiallyth block remains unchanged, and the markers are placed around a new copy of the block.

98

SECTION 2 - FRONT PANEL OPERATION


F8 (Move) Moves marked and displayed block from its current (Move) position to the cursor. Markers are around the block in its new position. F2 (Cursr) Main-Prog-Text-Edit-Cursr (Main screen - Program - Text mode - Editing Cursor) The menu F2 (Cursr) (cursor) contains advanced cursor motion commands:

F1 (BBlok) F2 (EBlok) F3 (Tab) F5 (TOF) F6 (EOF) F7 (PgUp) F8 (PgDn) F9 (Left) F10 (Right)

Moves the cursor to the beginning of the marker block. Moves the cursor to the position of the bullet end of the block. Moves the cursor to the beginning of the next word. Moves the cursor to the first character of the program. Moves the cursor to the last line of code. Moves the cursor up 15 lines. Moves the cursor down 15 lines. Moves the cursor to the top of the line. Moves the cursor to the end of the line.

F3 (Words) Main-Prog-Text-Edit-Words (Main Screen - Program - Text mode - Editing Word) Pressing the function key F3 (Words) (Word), open the reserved words that can be used for programming the control unit.

Pressing the key word will be printed on the screen. See the information on the parametric programming in Section 6. Note: Pressing the F6 (RETRN) will be printed RETURN (Return).

99

SECTION 2 - FRONT PANEL OPERATION


F4 (Misc) Main-Prog-Text-Edit-Misc (Main Screen - Program - Text mode - Editing Other) In this section we are talking about some teams that are not included in other categories.

F1 (UnDo) F2 (Rest)

Restores the entire line, deleted using the delete command to delete a row or block. It does not restore the individual characters or words. Cancels any changes made to the line of text until you came out of that line. The line is restored to its previous contents, regardless of the changes. Enables the use of a flywheel to move into position. You can insert the position of the axis of the program by pressing Enter.

F3 (HDW)

F1 - F4 (X / Y / Z / A) Select the axis position to insert F6 (LnDel) F7 (Chang) Deletes the line where the cursor is positioned and moves all rows below it up one line. The cursor moves to column 1 of the next line. This operation works the same way as the team Find (Find), except that it is possible to replace the found string any string of up to 67 characters. After entering the search string will be prompted to enter a string to replace. The latter was introduced to replace the string, if any, will be displayed, it can take, edit, or enter a new line. In the end, given a hint about the options. The first displays the options that were used last. You can enter a new option (abolishing the old), edit the current options, or select them by pressing the Enter (Enter). Available options are the same as for the command Find (Find). Allows you to search for a string of up to 67 characters. When you enter this command, you will be prompted for the search string. Displays the last search string, if any. You can select the row again by pressing the Enter (Enter) or edit it, or enter a new search string. Once the search string is entered, you must specify search options. This displays the options used for the last time, if available. You can enter a new option (abolishing the old), edit the current options, or select them again by pressing the Enter. Following options are available.

F8 (Find)

100

SECTION 2 - FRONT PANEL OPERATION


B G Search in the opposite direction from the current cursor position toward the beginning of the program. Global search. The entire program is scanned for the string, regardless of the current cursor position. The search starts at the beginning of the program if it is produced in the forward direction or in the end, if the direction of the back. Limit the search to a block marked at the moment. Ignores the case, said all the letters of the alphabet, as having the upper register. Find whole words only; skips suitable combinations in other words.

L U W

If the text is an object that matches the search string, the cursor is placed directly behind him. Note: For replacement surgery an option available. N: No option "N", before changing each row that prompt "Replace Y / N / A / Q" (Replace Y / N / A / Q) allows the operator to Y: Yes (yes) - to change it N: No (no) - do not change it A: REPLACE ALL unprompted (Used with the global option "G") Q: QUIT - stop (using the global option "G") ESC: does the same thing and quit (stop) With the option "N" is not given a hint to change the line or lines. F9 (FNext) Repeats the last search operation. If the last command was a search operation Find (Search) will be repeated this same search string and options, for the operation Find-and-Replace (find and replace) the replacement string will also be used again.

101

SECTION 2 - FRONT PANEL OPERATION


F5 (Ins) Main-Prog-Text-Edit-Ins (main screen - Program - Text mode - Edit - Paste) If you press F5 (Ins), edit the program is in insert mode, and the characters will be inserted in the place where the cursor is positioned. If the key F5 (Ins) is pressed, the editing program is in overwrite mode, and the characters will overwrite the previous in the location where the cursor is positioned. F6 (Del) Main-Prog-Text-Edit-Del (Main Screen - Program - Text mode - Edit - Delete) Deletes the character under the cursor and moves all characters to the right of the cursor one position to the left. This command does not work with line breaks. Note: At any point in the editing program by pressing a key (Back) on the numeric keypad moves the cursor one position to the left and remove character, standing in this place. Any characters to the right of the cursor are moved one space to the left. F7 ( ) Moves the cursor up one line. F8 ( ) F9 ( ) F10 ( ) Moves the cursor one line down. Moves the cursor to the left. Moves the cursor to the right.

ESC (Exit) Pressing the ESC (Exit) exit from (Exit) editing program, active editable program is checked for changes. When they were done, a message appears indicating whether to accept and save your changes. When you click on the "Y" changes are accepted, and the program file is changed. When you click on the "N" changes are discarded, and the file remains unchanged. Pressing the ESC will return to edit mode. HELP (Verf) Main-Prog-Text-Edit-Verf (Main Screen - Program - Text mode - Edit Check) When editing a text file, you can check the edited program. Key HELP (Verf) is not active if the currently running program or verified. Pressing the HELP (Verf) program will be tested in trial mode, with zero radius of the tool, as if the program was tested with the option F5 (Part) (Detail). Movement of supply are shown in yellow. Rapid movements are not shown. After testing the program will be made auto-scaling. You'll look at the screen F6 (Displ) (map) - F3 (Graph) (graphic display). Then you can rotate, zoom, zoom, and etc. Pressing the ESC will return in a text editor.

102

SECTION 2 - FRONT PANEL OPERATION


Notes: When the program is verified to be ignored M6, M0, M1, operators, and so I The program is copied to the file in the machining program, under the name "TEXTVER". When a file is copied, not running checks for the space outside the machining program. The file "TEXTVER" is removed when you return to the edit screen. This is to ensure that it does not automatically kept the program on which you work (still a hint will be displayed "Program was Modified. Accept changes? (Y / N) "(The program has been changed. Accept changes (yes / no)). Key HELP (Verf) will not appear if you are on the next level down, such as F1 (Block) (Block), F2 (Cursr) (cursor), F3 (Words) (Word) or F4 (Misc) (Other). If you need a lot of time to test the software, you can press the ESC key during its inspection. Carried out through its automatic scaling that has been tested, and the transition to the screen F6 (Displ) (map) - F3 (Graph) (graphic display). The program will continue testing until the end or until re-pressed on the ESC. F2 (New) Main-Prog-Text-New (Home Screen - Program - Text mode - New) Use the F2 (New) (New), you can enter a new number for the text of the program. Once a number is entered, the control device will check the text of the program on the subject of whether there is a program with this number. If the program is found, a warning is displayed and the operator will be able to erase the text to allow the program to go into a text editor. F3 (Old) Main-Prog-Text-Old (Main Screen - Program - Text mode - Old) Pressing the F3 (Old) (Old) can enter the number of existing programs. Once a number is entered, the control device will check the text of the program, currently available in the catalog processing software components, to check whether there is a program with this number. If the program is found, the Edit window appears, displaying the first 16 lines of code. If the program is not found, a message appears about the error and after clicking on the ESC key, you can enter another number. F4 (Any) Main-Prog-Text-Any (Home Screen - Program - Text mode - Any) When you press the F4 (Any) (Any) prompted the introduction of user file to be edited. Specify the drive, path, file name and extension.

103

SECTION 2 - FRONT PANEL OPERATION


F7 (Menu) Main-Prog-Text-Menu (main screen - Program - Text mode - Menu) When you press the F7 (Menu) (Menu) displays a list of all the text of programs currently available in the software processing components. Press the F7 - F10 arrows to select a file placed on the program you want to edit, select, press the key F5 (Enter) (Enter). See more details about changing discs and routes to other text programs in Section 4.

RunTime = Period Main-Prog-Text-Menu = Home screen, program-text-mode menu Editing = Editing Current = current next Next = Distance = the distance Correction: canceled Instrument: Length: Diameter: Plane: Clearance: Interpolation: linear (feed) Submission: (ipm = inches / min) Units: absolute / English system Cycle: canceled Pause: (sec = seconds) Spindle: (rpm = r / min) Coolant: Disabled Number details: Verf = check; Enter = input; Togle = shift; PhUp = page up; PgDn = page down; Abort = interrupt; Drive = CD

Edit window appears, showing the first 16 programs. To select one of the programs listed in the window, use the arrow keys and scroll keys to move the cursor to the desired program and press the key F5 (Enter) or Enter - on the keyboard. The function menu can be accessed from other screens, but it will work the same way. If the menu from the screen due to Verify (Test), the selected program becomes active editing program. Use the F1 (Verf) (Test) graphically checked the item on which the cursor is positioned. Shows the scheme would apply to an instrument with a diameter of 0. When you press the F6 (Togle) (Switching) will show the file size, date and time 104

SECTION 2 - FRONT PANEL OPERATION


of last modification and the seven characters of the filename. Subdirectories are indicated by <DIR> as file names. Signs ".." indicate the parent directory of the current. If you press the button HELP (Drive), will be a list of available drives. Note: The file name consists of characters enclosed in brackets. If the first block is not parentheses, the name is the first unit.

Pressing the "D" menu switches to the full names of DOS and vice versa. Pressing the "N" include sorting by name or description of the file. Regardless of which mode you select (Edit (Editing), New (New), Old (Old), Any (Any) or Menu (Menu)) is used when there is an editing window, the number of editable text programs will be shown in the active window. F2 (Conv) Main-Prog-Conv (Main Screen - Program - Interactive Mode) In this section we will focus on the choice of interactive programs. When you enter the interactive programming mode active window in the upper right corner will change to show the latest edited interactive program.

RunTime = Period Main-Prog-Conv = Home screen, program mode, Interactive Editing = Editing Current = current next Next = Distance = the distance

105

SECTION 2 - FRONT PANEL OPERATION


Correction: canceled Instrument: Length: Diameter: Plane: Clearance: Interpolation: linear (feed) Submission: (ipm = inches / min) Units: absolute / English system Cycle: canceled Pause: (sec = seconds) Spindle: (rpm = r / min) Coolant: Disabled Number details: Edit = edit; New = new; Old = previous; Any = any; Menu = menu; Esc = exit

There are five options to choose from an interactive program for editing. F1 (Edit) Main-Prog-Conv-Edit (main screen - Program - Interactive mode-Edit) By pressing F1 (Edit) (Edit) selected program and an active dialog to log into interactive programming. When programming or editing in interactive system there are three types of function keys. That the following keys: -The configuration of the function keys 1: Editing keys

RunTime = Period Main-Prog-Conv = Home screen, program mode, Interactive Editing = Editing Current = current next Next = Distance = the distance

106

SECTION 2 - FRONT PANEL OPERATION


Event 0 of 17 Bits: 631 of 102 236 160 Installing the software Correction: canceled Instrument: Length: The name of the program [....] Diameter: Dimensions [Absolute] Plane: Units [Metric] Clearance: Working coordinate [---] Interpolation: linear (feed) Submission: (ipm = inches / min) Notes on installation: Units: absolute / English system Cycle: canceled Pause: (sec = seconds) Spindle: (rpm = r / min) Coolant: Disabled Number details: Edit = Edit; View = view; Event = event; Ins = insert; Del = Delete; Prev = previous; Next = next; Exit = output; Verf = check

These function keys are available when there was made Logon Edit menu. Program can be divided into steps, edit the event and insert or delete an event. Definitions of Key editing F1 (Edit): By pressing F1 (Edit) (Edit) cursor (Edit) installed in the first field of the current event. Will save the key / I, and the event can be edited. F2 (View): Allows you to view the whole program and position in the (View) any of the events in the program. A window similar to the next.

RunTime = Period Main-Prog-Conv = Home screen, program mode, Interactive Editing = Editing Current = current next Next = Distance = the distance

107

SECTION 2 - FRONT PANEL OPERATION


0 Installation Correction: canceled A change of instrument Instrument: Two piercing tool - Start cutting cycle Length: 3 Geometry of milling - Line Diameter: 4 Geometry of milling - Line Plane: 5 The geometry of the cutting - Arc Clearance: 6 Geometry of milling - Line Interpolation: linear (feed) 7 Withdrawal tool Submission: (ipm = inches / min) 8 Beginning of an island Units: absolute / English system 9 The geometry of the cutting - Line Cycle: canceled 10 The geometry of the cutting - Line Pause: (sec = seconds) 11 The geometry of the cutting - Line Spindle: (rpm = r / min) 12 End of the implementation of the island Coolant: Disabled 13 Beginning of the island Number details: 14 The geometry of the cutting - Arc 15 The geometry of the cutting - Arc Begin = start; End = complete; Del = Delete; Copy = copy; Move = move; PgUp = Page Up; PgDn = page down; Exit = output;

F7 ( ), F8 ( ), F9 (PgUp) and F10 (PgDn) can be used to navigate to the desired event. Then press the ESC or Enter, to reflect this event. F1 (Begin): F2 (End): F3: F4 F5 Note: F3 (Event) F4 (T # #) F6 (Ins) Marks the beginning of the block Marks the end of the block Deletes the block of events Copies a block of events at the cursor position Moves a block of events at the cursor position You can not move, delete or copy the installation screen of the program or end the program of events. Allows you to enter an event for your search. If the number of events are not detected, the screen appears the end of the program. Permits entry of the tool to search for numbers. If the number is not found a tool to display the event does not change. INS is used to insert events into the program. A new (-s), event (s) is inserted before the event, which is currently displayed. Insert lasts as long as you press the function key F10 (Exit) (Exit). Removes a phenomenon that appears at the moment. Displays the previous event in the program file. Displays the following phenomenon in the program file.

F7 (Del) F9 (Prev) F10 (Next)

108

SECTION 2 - FRONT PANEL OPERATION


Help (Verf) When editing a file dialog, you can check the edited program. When the key is using (Help) is activated, it will show Verf (check).

Key HELP (Verf) is not active if the currently running program or verified. Pressing the HELP (Verf) program will be tested in trial mode, with zero radius of the tool, as if the program was tested with the option F5 (Part) (Detail). Movement of supply are shown in yellow. Rapid movements are not shown. After testing the program will be made auto-scaling. You'll look at the screen F6 (Displ) (map) - F3 (Graph) (graphic display). You can then perform the rotation, zoom, zoom and so on Pressing the ESC will return to the dialog editor. Notes on key HELP (Verf) (HELP (check)) Note 1:When the program is verified to be ignored M6, M0, M1, operators, and so I Note 2. If you need a lot of time to test the software, you can press the ESC key during its inspection. Carried out through its automatic scaling that has been tested, and the transition to the screen F6 (Displ) (map) - F3 (Graph) (graphic display). The program will continue until the end of the test or re-pressing the ESC. Note 3. Operators While without wend and operators wend without while will not cause error messages. ESC (Exit) Exit the dialog system and the automatic generation of executable program text with the prefix O. The keys to save / I

- Configuration 2 function keys:

109

SECTION 2 - FRONT PANEL OPERATION


RunTime = Period Main-Prog-Conv-Pos = Main Screen-Program-Interactive Mode-Position Editing = Editing Current = current next Next = Distance = the distance Event 1 of 17 Bits: 631 of 102 236 160 Correction: canceled Position Instrument: Length: The feed rate [accelerated] Diameter: Coordinates [Cartesian] Plane: Clearance: Interpolation: linear (feed) Submission: (ipm = inches / min) Units: absolute / English system Cycle: canceled Pause: (sec = seconds) Spindle: (rpm = r / min) Coolant: Disabled Number details: Store = save; Togl = shift; Exit = output;

These function keys are available when input is expected. At this time, the screen will appear, containing any number of fields, and the cursor will be in one of the fields. There are two types of fields that can be displayed on-screen input: the data field and the field shift. The data fields - a field in which data is entered using the keyboard. Red fields require input. Switching fields - is a field with a limited number of possible incoming values and the values that can only be changed by pressing the F3 (Togl) (Switch). Definitions of key conservation / I F1 (Store) Accepts inputs and adds them to the program file. If all the required data has not been entered, the key F1 (Store) will not work, and the cursor moves to the field, requiring input. Each screen is saved is called an event. Clicking this button will display the following values of the switching field. It is absent in the data field. Used to delete entries from the data field. It is absent in the switch. Moves the cursor to the previous field. Moves the cursor to the next field. Moves the cursor to the left. It has no effect on the switch. Moves the cursor to the right. It has no effect on the switch. Cancel entry and return to the menu keys.

F3 (Togl) F5 (Del) F7 ( ) F8 ( ) F9 ( ) F10 ( ) ESC (Exit)

110

SECTION 2 - FRONT PANEL OPERATION


F2 (New) Main-Prog-Conv-New (Home Screen - Program - Interactive mode - New) Use the F2 (New) (New) You can enter a number for a new interactive program. Once a number is entered, the control device will check the interactive program, already available in the software processing of parts, with a view to whether there is a program with this number. If the program is found, two warnings will be displayed and the operator will allow erasing interactive programs and related text of the program prior to entering into a dialog system. It should be remembered that the interactive program is stored in both formats. F3 (Old) Main-Prog-Conv-Old (Main Screen - Program - Interactive mode - Old) Pressing the F3 (Old) (Old) can enter the number of existing interactive program. Once a number is entered, the control device will check the interactive program, available at this time in the software processing components, to check whether there is a program with this number. If the program is found, the Edit window appears, displaying the setup screen of the program. If the program is not found, a message appears about the error and after clicking on the ESC key, you can enter another number. F4 (Any) Main-Prog-Conv-Any (Home Screen - Program - Interactive mode - Any) Pressing F4 (Any) (Any) allowed to put any file. Specify the drive, path, file name and extension. If the name has the correct format for interactive program will transition into the mode of interactive programming. If not, will transition into a text mode programming. Main-Prog-Conv (Main Screen - Program - Interactive Mode) The menu keys are used to navigate through the interactive system and the transition to the desired input screen. The sequence of menu keys, refer to the structural scheme of an interactive system in Section 6. - Configuration of the three function keys: The keys programming The keys are displayed at the first level menu:

111

SECTION 2 - FRONT PANEL OPERATION


Pressing the function key displays the input screen, or [for example, F1 (Pos)], similar to the following

RunTime = Period Main-Prog-Conv-Pos = Main Screen-Program-Interactive Mode-Position Editing = Editing Current = current next Next = Distance = the distance Event 1 of 17 Bits: 631 of 102 236 160 Correction: canceled Position Instrument: Length: The feed rate [accelerated] Diameter: Coordinates [Cartesian] Plane: Clearance: Interpolation: linear (feed) Submission: (ipm = inches / min) Units: absolute / English system Cycle: canceled Pause: (sec = seconds) Spindle: (rpm = r / min) Coolant: Disabled Number details: Store = save; Togl = shift; Exit = output;

another menu, or [for example, F2 (Mill)], as given:

Note that, at all levels, except for level 1, there is a key ESC (Back) (Back). With the help of it returns to the previous menu level keys. Pressing the F10 (Exit) going out of the sub menus and editing keys appear at level 1.

112

SECTION 2 - FRONT PANEL OPERATION


When I found the screen, there are the following buttons to save / input.

Note:

F3 (Togl) (Switch) and F5 (Del) (Delete) can not be on the same screen.

See more details about the input dialog screens in SECTION 3 - display a dialog input. F7 (Menu) Main-Prog-Conv-Menu (main screen - Program - Interactive mode - Menu) The key F7 (Menu) (Menu) dialog displays a list of all programs currently loaded in the catalog of programs for processing details.

RunTime = Period Main-Prog-Conv-Menu = Main Screen-Program-Interactive Mode-Menu Editing = Editing Current = current next Next = Distance = the distance

113

SECTION 2 - FRONT PANEL OPERATION


Event 1 of 17 Bits: 631 of 102 236 160 Position Correction: canceled Instrument: Length: The feed rate [accelerated] Diameter: Coordinates [Cartesian] Plane: Clearance: Interpolation: linear (feed) Submission: (ipm = inches / min) Units: absolute / English system Cycle: canceled Pause: (sec = seconds) Spindle: (rpm = r / min) Coolant: Disabled Number details: Verf = check; Enter = input; Togl = shift; PgUp = Page Up; PgDn = page down; Abort = break; Drive = CD

Press the F7 - F10 arrows to select a file located on the program you want to edit, but the key F5 (Enter) (Enter) is pressed to make a choice. Edit window appears, displaying the setup screen of the program. Regardless of which mode you select [F1 (Edit) (Edit, F2 (New) (New), F3 (Old) (Old), F4 (Any) (Any) or F7 (Menu) (Menu)] is used when editing window appears, the number of editable interactive programs will be shown in the active window. F6 (Togle) shows the time and date for each program. F9 (Verf) Main-Verf (Main screen - Check) Function F9 (Verf) (Test) is used to verify the machining program. In general, the inspection is performed in graphical mode, but it is not necessary. Time is really checking, and can be used to calculate the processing time. The tested program is active. To obtain information about the coordinates for comparison with the map, set the control unit in the block mode, and go through the stages of the program. The cursor in graphics mode will be about the details, and the mapping XYZ will read the coordinate values of each point.

114

SECTION 2 - FRONT PANEL OPERATION


Verification is used to control the active program. When you press the F9 (Verf) (check) the following screen appears.

RunTime = Period Main-Verf = Main screen, check Active = Active Current = current next Next = Distance = the distance Correction: canceled Instrument: Length: Diameter: Plane: Clearance: Interpolation: linear (feed) Submission: (ipm = inches / min) Units: absolute / English system Cycle: canceled Pause: (sec = seconds) Spindle: (rpm = r / min) Coolant: Disabled Number details: Start = start; Old = old; Block = block; OStop = extra stops; BSkip = pass block; Displ = map; Menu = menu; Dry = idle; Esc = exit

115

SECTION 2 - FRONT PANEL OPERATION


When you see the above screen, press the F1 (Start), and the following screen.

RunTime = Period Main-Verf-Start = Main screen, check Active = Active Current = current Next = Click on the following <Cycle Start> (Start of cycle) to start the program from the beginning Correction: canceled Instrument: Length: Diameter: Plane: Clearance: Interpolation: linear (feed) Submission: (ipm = inches / min) Units: absolute / English system Cycle: canceled Pause: (sec = seconds) Spindle: (rpm = r / min) Coolant: Disabled Number details: First = first; Block = block; Tool = Tool; Path = path; Part = item; Both = both; Abort = abort

Key F1 (First) (First) is automatically selected when you enter this screen from the screen Verf (check). So if you want to test an active program from the beginning, you need only press the button Cycle Start (Start of cycle). If you press F2 (Block) (Block), the device management request to enter a number or sequence of the desired block, and then press Enter. If the button is pressed Cycle Start (The first cycle), an active program will be checked from the selected block. If you press F3 (Tool) (tool), the control unit will ask about the number of the instrument. After entering the number of tools and squeezing Enter button is pressed Cycle Start (Start of cycle). Active program will check with the number you want the tool, and the following screen. Use the F4 (Path) (path) shows the trajectory of the tool on a graphic screen. Use the F5 (Part) (detail) shows the trajectory of moving parts on the graphics screen. Use the F6 (Both) (Both), and shows the tool path and the trajectory of the details on the graphics screen.

116

SECTION 2 - FRONT PANEL OPERATION


Note: If you enter the block number or tool number is out of the program, the program will start from the beginning.

RunTime = Period Main-Verf = Main screen, check Active = Active Current = current next Next = Distance = the distance Correction: left cut Instrument: Length: Diameter: Plane: Clearance: Interpolation: circular (counterclockwise) Submission: (ipm = inches / min) Units: absolute / English system Cycle: canceled Pause: (sec = seconds) Spindle: (rpm = r / min) Coolant: Disabled SECTION 28 ..... Number details: Block = block; OStop = extra stops; BSkip = pass block; Displ = map; Dry = idle; Halt = Stop; Esc = exit

117

SECTION 2 - FRONT PANEL OPERATION


The screen shown above, is the main test screen with two new additions: the map unit number and pressing F9 (Halt) (Stop). The block number indicates the current executable line validation program. Key F9 (Halt) is similar to the Feedhold (Stop feeding), so that when it is pressed, the machine stops. However, in contrast to Feedhold, F9 (Halt) also allows you to run the new program. F3 (Block) Main-Verf-Block (Main Screen - Checking - Power) If the key is activated F3 (Block) (Block), the program will stop at the end of each block. Each time you press Cycle Start (Start of cycle) will be tested one more block. F4 (OStop) Main-Verf-OStop (Main screen - Testing - Additional Stop) If the key is activated by an additional stop F4 (OStop), the program will stop on each team M01. F5 (BSkip) Main-Verf-BSkip (Main Screen - Check - Missing the block) If the key is activated crossing block F5 (BSkip), the program will skip all the blocks, beginning with a "/" (slash). / F5 If the key is activated crossing the block, the command changes the feed rate will not be executed.

F6 (Displ) Main-Verf-Displ (Main Screen - Check - Displays) By the key F6 (Display) (map) can be accessed from multiple screens. The screen below shows, as if access to the F6 (Displ) was carried out from the screen F9 (Verf) (Test). All display functions and screens are identical, regardless of the access point. Differ only in the cusps on the basis of the original access point. When you press the F6 (Disp) the following screen appears.

RunTime = Period Main-Verf-Displ = Main Screen-Display-Check Active = Active Current = current next Next = Distance = the distance

118

SECTION 2 - FRONT PANEL OPERATION


Correction: left cut Instrument: Length: Diameter: Plane: Clearance: Interpolation: circular (counterclockwise) Submission: (ipm = inches / min) Units: absolute / English system Cycle: canceled Pause: (sec = seconds) Spindle: (rpm = r / min) Coolant: Disabled SECTION 71 ..... Number details: Dist = distance; Error = error; Graph = graphical display; Diag = diagnosis; Esc = exit

F1 (Next) Main-Verf-Displ-Dist (Main Screen - Check - Displays - Distance) See page 24, Section 2. F2 (Error) Main-Verf-Displ-Error (Home Screen - Check - Displays - Error) See page 24, Section 2. F3 (Graph) Main-Verf-Displ-Graph (Main Screen - Check - Displays - Graphic display) If you press F3 (Graph) (graphic display), the control unit switches to display text on a graphic display of the active part program. The following screen appears.

RunTime = Period Main-Verf-Displ-Graph = Main screen, check-display-graphic display Active = Active Correction: canceled Instrument: Diameter:

119

SECTION 2 - FRONT PANEL OPERATION


Length: Submission: Rotation: Coolant: Disabled Number details: Rot = rotation; Pan = Pan; Wind = creation of a window; Auto = automatic scaling; Zoom-= zoom out; Zoom + = zoom in; Limit = limits; Zone = safe zone; Coord = coordinate; Fresh = update; Exit = output; Clear = clear

Graphs in the NC are fully three-dimensional and displayed in the graphics area as long as the control device is in graphics mode F3 (Graph). At the request of other maps in the graphics area of the window will appear with the requested data. At the end of the window with these features disappear, and the graphical display will be restored. The scale at the top of the screen is used to control the size of parts. If you change the scale on the lines dividing the screen will change accordingly. Division in the rulers expressed in units of the machine, but in the English system of measurement. The largest division is approximately one inch. Note: Charts are removed from the screen when you start or the beginning of the test program. Functions of graphics used in the test mode, the same as the functions used in run mode. A full explanation of these features, see page 24, Section 2, the graphics mode of the program. F4 (Diag) Main-Verf-Disp-Diag (main screen - Check - Displays - Diagnostics) See page 30, Section 2. F8 (Dry) Main-Verf-Dry (Main Screen - Check - Idle) F8 (Dry) (Idle), running in test mode, will drive the program as quickly as possible. For positions feedrate of 100% and above - the scan speed is gradually reduced to 0-90% correction. F9 (Halt) Main-Verf-Halt (Main Screen - Checking - Stop) F9 (Resum) Main-Verf-Resum (Main screen - Validity - Renewal) If the program was stopped F9 (Halt) (Stop), resume function is activated. Now the screen will display validation key F9 (Resum) (Renewal). The program can be resumed, until the key is active. If you choose to resume function, an active program will be resumed from the point of shutdown. Press the F3, F4, F5 and F8 the screen test mode is set to test the program. When these buttons are illuminated, the functions are active at any current tested the program or the program to be tested.

120

SECTION 2 - FRONT PANEL OPERATION


Note: From the test mode can switch to the program. This is convenient for long programs, DNC, as it covers all the feed / speed / tool offset / correction on the cutting tool, etc. To switch to the execution of the verification regime must be in block mode, waiting for the start of the cycle. Press the F9 (Halt) (Stop). F10 key will not show F10 (Run) (Performing). When you press F10 (Run), the control device will behave as if it was held stop / resume running the program. Make sure that the control device was removed from the block and / or idle mode, if it were. Do not try to do it in the middle of an automatic tool changer or similar automated programs input / output.

F10 (Util) Main-Util (Main Screen - Utilities) Buttons and options that are displayed when you press F10 (Util):

F1 (Probe) Main-Util-Probe (Home Screen - Utilities - Sensor) Note: For machines with the option of sampling. If digitization is part of the options and pressed F1 (Probe) (sensor), will be on display next screen.

RunTime = Period Main-Util-Probe = Utility main screen-Sensor Active = Active Current = current next Next = Distance = the distance

121

SECTION 2 - FRONT PANEL OPERATION


SCREEN INSTALLATION Digitization The input file: NOT SELECTED Display Mode: NOT SELECTED Correction: canceled Instrument: Length: Diameter: Plane: Clearance: Interpolation: linear (feed) Submission: (ipm = inches / min) Units: absolute / English system Cycle: canceled Pause: (sec = seconds) Spindle: (rpm = r / min) Coolant: Disabled Number details:

Begin = start; In = input; Out = output; Esc = exit

Note: F1 (Probe) (sensor) is used only for sampling XZ or YZ. F1 (Begin) If the selected file input and output mode will begin digitizing. If not, an error message 808 "Set up not selected" (Installation is not selected).

F3 (In) Displays a menu from which you select the file that contains information to guide sampling. F4 (Out) Specifies the output mode for the digitized data. Options are as follows. F1 - RS232 F2 - File F3 - Disk Primary Serial File number NC The name of the file on a floppy disk

122

SECTION 2 - FRONT PANEL OPERATION


F2 (XyDig) Main-Util-XyDig (Main Screen - Utilities - Digitize XY) Note: For machines with the option of sampling. If digitization is installed and pressed F2 (XyDig) (Digitize XY), will be on display next screen.

RunTime = Period Main-Util-XyDig = Utility main screen-digitizing XY Active = Active Current = current next Next = Distance = the distance SCREEN INSTALLATION Digitization Correction: canceled The input file: NOT SELECTED Instrument: Display Mode: NOT SELECTED Length: Diameter: Plane: Clearance: Interpolation: linear (feed) Submission: (ipm = inches / min) Units: absolute / English system Cycle: canceled Pause: (sec = seconds) Spindle: (rpm = r / min) Coolant: Disabled Number details: Begin = start; In = input; Out = output; Close = close; Esc = exit

F1 (Begin)

If the selected file input and output mode will begin digitizing. If not, an error message 808 "Set up not selected" (Installation is not selected).

F3 (In) Displays a menu from which you select the file that contains information to guide sampling.

123

SECTION 2 - FRONT PANEL OPERATION


F4 (Out) Specifies the output mode for the digitized data. Options are as follows. F1 - RS232 F2 - File F3 - Disk F6 (Close) Primary Serial File number NC The name of the file on a floppy disk

Switches between the closed and open.

Note: More information about the digitization of a guide for digitization. F3 (Files) Main-Util-Files (Main Screen - Utilities - Files) In the utilities to work with files containing basic data manipulation function. They are:

Load = load; Save = save; Renam = rename; Copy = copy; Ram = memory; Erase = delete; Done = done

F1 (Load) Main-Util-Files-Load (Main Screen - Utilities - Downloads - Download) The function F1 (Load) (Download) is used to download programs from the floppy disk into the program memory control unit. When this function is selected, the following screen appears.

RunTime = Period Main-Util-Files-Load = Utility main screen-Files, Download Active = Active Current = current next Next = Distance = the distance

124

SECTION 2 - FRONT PANEL OPERATION


Correction: canceled Instrument: Length: Diameter: Plane: Clearance: Interpolation: linear (feed) Submission: (ipm = inches / min) Units: absolute / English system Cycle: canceled Pause: (sec = seconds) Spindle: (rpm = r / min) Coolant: Disabled Number details: Start = start; Set = setting; Reset = Reset; All = all; None = no; Togle = shift; PgUp = Page Up; PgDn = page down; Abort = interrupt; Verf = check

In the editing window will display a list of programs on a floppy disk. The cursor selection (> <) is located on the first program. F1 (Start) (Start) When you click on this button starts the transfer of selected programs floppy disk into the memory of the program. If the file already exists, the operator will be given a hint.

F2 (Set) Selects the file to which the cursor is positioned to boot from the floppy (Set) drive. It will be highlighted. F3 (Reset) Deselects the file to which the cursor is positioned. Cancels the selection (Reset) the selected file. F4 (All) (All) F5 (None) (Nothing) F6 (Togle) (Switching) F7 ( ) Selects all the programs on a floppy disk that you want to download. Selects all files. Deselect all selected programs. Deselects all the selected files. Shows the size and file date. Moves the cursor to select the top.

F8 ( ) Moves the cursor to select down. F9 (PgUp) F10 (PgDn) Moves the cursor to select up to 16 lines. Moves the cursor down to the choice of 16 lines.

The key means used to select the new disk, or to check the program (based on the parameter control unit) 125

SECTION 2 - FRONT PANEL OPERATION


Help (Drive) Displays a list of available drives for the new menu. Help (CD) Help (Verf) Graphically check the item on which the cursor is positioned. Help (check) Note: If set to extract the files, one file on a floppy disk, separated by 0 # # # # can be downloaded and is divided into several files. When removing the download program does not check for files that already exist.

F2 (Save) Main-Util-Files-Save (Home Screen - Utilities - Downloads - Conservation) The function F2 (Save) is used to save programs from the program memory control device on a floppy disk. The function F2 (Save) works the same way as the function F1 (Load) (download), except that the transfer direction is changed. F3 (Rename) Main-Util-Files-Rename (Main Screen - Utilities - Files - Rename) With the function F3 (Rename) changing the name of the program. If a new file name already exists, the operator will be shown the appropriate prompt. F4 (Copy) Main-Util-Files-Copy (Home Screen - Utilities - Files - Copy) With the function F4 (Copy) makes a copy of the program under a different name. If a new file name already exists, the operator will be shown the appropriate prompt. F5 ( Ram) Main-Util-Files- Ram (The main screen - Utilities - Files - RAM)

This function is used to download programs from floppy disk, Zip-drive or network drive to the RAM disk and then RAM in the DNC. Note: RAM disks of more available as an option. F9 (Erase) Main-Util-Files-Erase (Main Screen - Utilities - Files - Erase) Function F9 (Erase) is used to erase the program from the program memory control unit. Available keys are the same as in option F2 (Save) (Save). F4 (RS232) Main-Util-RS232 (Main Screen - Utilities - RS232) In the utilities F4 (RS232) provides basic communication functions. These include the following:

F1 (COM1 or COM 2) F1 (COM1 or COM2) - is the primary port.

126

SECTION 2 - FRONT PANEL OPERATION


F5 (Send) Main-Util-RS232-Send (Home Screen - Utilities - RS232 - Send) Pressing the F5 (Send) (Email) appear the following keys.

After selecting the F1 (Text) (text) or F2 (Conv) (interactive), select the programs you want to send to the computer running in standalone mode, with the menu. In connection with these actions the following menu appears.

F1 (Begin) (Start) starts to transfer an active program, which is shown in the upper right corner. F7 (Menu) (Menu) to select the program to send the menu. Notes on sending Note 1:When sending parameters F7 (Menu) (Menu) is not an option. Note 2:Parameters of the RS-232 must be set to identical values in the control device and computer. Always check these settings. Note 3:Parameters of the RS-232 are located in the parameters of the control unit (Main-ParmsCtrl) (Home Screen - Options - Ctrl). Default settings: Primary Port Baud Rate Parity Data bits Stop bits COM1 from 1200 to 9600 even 7 2

F6 (Recev) Main-Util-RS232-Recev (Main Screen - Utilities - RS232 - Get) Option F6 (Recev) (Get) is used for programs or settings from a computer running in standalone mode, in memory of the program control unit. When you press the F6 (Recev) will see a new toolbar buttons (shown below). Next, enter a new number in the message window of the program. After the introduction of the real numbers of the program editing screen will appear and will show the program after it is received. Preparation continues for as long as you press ESC (Done) (Done).

127

SECTION 2 - FRONT PANEL OPERATION


Note: If the number received by the program already exists, the operator will be given appropriate help.

If set to extract the files, multiple files can be sent from a computer running in standalone mode, the control unit will extract them to the correct file # # # # if they are separated by 0 # # # #. When removing the check is not carried out of existing files. F7 ( Ram) Main-Util-RS232- Ram (The main screen - Utilities - RS232 - RAM) This function is used to download programs from the RS-232 to the RAM disk, and then drive to the RAM DNC. Note: RAM disks of more available as an option. F5 (Tlchg) Main-Util-Tlchg (Main Screen - Utilities - Tool change) F5 (Tlchg) - is an option for machines with automatic tool changing devices. If the machine has a rotary tool changer, you will see the following panel keys.

When you press the keys F1 (CW) (clockwise), F2 (CCW) (counterclockwise) or F3 (Home) (starting position) the number of active tool is reset, indicating that there is no tool in the spindle. F1 (CW) F2 (CCW) F3 (Home) F5 (Open) F6 (Close) store moves one position clockwise store moves one position clockwise Store results in the initial position opens the door of the tool changer closes the door of the tool changer

If installed on the machine tool changer with swinging arm, following keys are displayed.

128

SECTION 2 - FRONT PANEL OPERATION


F1 (Home) (starting position), F2 (CW) (clockwise) and F3 (CCW) (counterclockwise) perform the same function as the rotary tool changer. The key F7 (Slots) (Jacks) is used to edit the numbers in the nests of the tool changer tool. If you press F7 (Slots), the following screen appears.

RunTime = Period Main-Util-TlChg-Slots = Utility main screen-changer tool-slots Active = Active Current = current next Next = Distance = the distance Pocket = slot Correction: canceled Tool = Tool Instrument: Spindle Spindle = Length: Current pocket = the current slot Diameter: Plane: Clearance: Interpolation: linear (feed) Submission: (ipm = inches / min) Units: absolute / English system Cycle: canceled Pause: (sec = seconds) Spindle: (rpm = r / min) Coolant: Disabled Number details: Edit = edit; Dflt = default; Esc = exit

F1 (Edit) (Edit) tool allows you to change the number in each nest. . With the F3 (Dflt) (Default) numbers are loaded by default the tool (tool 1 in slot 1, the tool 2 in slot 2, etc.). Use F7 and resets the tool number in the spindle. F6 (DNC) Main-Util-DNC (Main Screen - Utilities - DNC) Mode F6 (DNC) (DNC) is used to run large programs. These programs are not loaded into the memory control unit, so they do not have a transition team (GO-TO), cycles, WHILE-WEND, GO-SUB command or commands call (CALL). 129

SECTION 2 - FRONT PANEL OPERATION


Note: CALL instruction permitted the accelerated mode DNC. GO-TO commands are allowed in DNC mode and the DNC run in test mode, provided that the option "resolve DNC" (allow the DNC) is set to Yes (yes). If you press F6 (DNC) (DNC), DNC modes appear.

F3 (Fast) Main-Util-DNC-Fast (Home Screen - Utilities - DNC - Fast mode) After pressing the F3 (Fast) (Fast Track), the following screen appears.

RunTime = Period Main-Util-DNC-Fast = The main screen-Utilities-DNC-Fast Track Active = Active Current = current next Next = Distance = the distance Select the input mode Correction: canceled Instrument: Missing pulses account: 0 Length: Power: 0 Diameter: Plane: Clearance: Interpolation: linear (feed) Submission: (ipm = inches / min) Units: absolute / English system Cycle: canceled Pause: (sec = seconds) Spindle: (rpm = r / min) Coolant: Disabled Number details: File = file; Disk = disk; Any = any; Old = current; Ram = memory; Skip = skip; Mirr = mirroring; Abort = interrupt

130

SECTION 2 - FRONT PANEL OPERATION

F1 (RS232) By pressing the F1 (RS232) is activated by waiting for data from the Com-port, and then prompted the beginning of the cycle to start the program. F2 (File) (File) With the F2 (File) menu, select the program from the programs in the control unit. F3 (Disk) (Disk) With the F3 (Disk) program is selected from a menu of programs on a floppy disk or from LAN. F4 (Any) (Any) The key F4 (Any) allows you to enter the name of any disk route and file extensions. F5 (Old) (Existing) Key F5 (Old) allows you to enter the file number you want to run. F6 (Ram ) (RAM) F6 (Ram ) is used if the program is loaded from disk memory (via RS-232 or a floppy disk). With F6 (Ram ) will be selected by the program. After you select INPUT (input), the control unit will ask to press the start button to start the program cycle. All of the above modes of input - except for the RS-232 - allow to run the program from other places other than the beginning. There are also the following options. F1 (First) (First) F1 (First) runs the program from the beginning. F2 (Block) (Block) F2 (Block) runs the program with a serial number. F3 (Tool) (tool) F3 (Tool) starts with the numbers of the instrument. F4 (Cont) (Continued) The key F4 (Cont) allows you to start from the place where it interrupted the DNC earlier. When a file is interrupted, the file position is saved. Not carried out checks of whether the operator switched the number of files or change file DNC. Use the F4 (Cont), execution will continue from the file position, which was interrupted by any. F9 (Skip) (Skip) F9 (Skip) asks for a pass pulses account. If the bill does not pass the pulse is zero, the request will be made in the run cycle of missed (or ignored) of the number of blocks, and then the second loop will be executed starting from the next block.

131

SECTION 2 - FRONT PANEL OPERATION


F10 (Mirr) (Mirror) F10 (Mirr) authorizes a mirror image of X0 and Y0 in the mode of DNC-FAST. F3 (Fast) (Fast Track) In the F3 (Fast) (Fast Track), the following screen appears.

RunTime = Period Main-Util-DNC-Fast = The main screen-Utilities-DNC-Fast Track Active = Active Current = current next Next = Distance = the distance Correction: canceled Instrument: Length: Diameter: Plane: Clearance: Interpolation: circular (counterclockwise) Submission: (ipm = inches / min) Units: absolute / English system Cycle: canceled Pause: (sec = seconds) Spindle: (rpm = r / min) Coolant: Disabled SECTION 6 ..... Number details: Abort = interrupt

When the program is completed or a key is pressed ESC (Abort) (Termination), the screen will display the total time of DNC, the total distance, average flow rate, average power and average units / second.

132

SECTION 2 - FRONT PANEL OPERATION


This mode should be used for large programs, where high frequency units, for example, when the short movements at high feed rates. In this mode, you can not perform trig help (trigonometric aid), cutter comp (compensation for the cutting tool), rotating (turning), scaling (zooming) or other non-standard command. Reliable data for the Fast Track: X, Y, Z, A, B, I, J, K, F and N Significant G-codes: G0, G1, G2, G3, G17, G18, G19, G70, G71, G90, G91 Secure with a format for arcs: (G17/G18/G19), (G2/G3), (I / J / K), (X, Y, Z) If the code is not included in these groups, the time for this unit will be slow, and it will be highlighted on the display unit. F4 (Run) Main-Util-DNC-Run (Home Screen - Utilities - DNC - Implementation) With F4 (Run) you can make the same choices as with F3 (Fast) (Fast Track) for input modes. In F4 (Run) there is no option F10 (mirroring). After selecting the input mode and skip any block, the control unit selects the Execution Screen (Main-Run), and DNC software can be run like any other program. F9 (Verf) Main-Util-DNC-Verf (Main Screen - Utilities - DNC - Check) F9 (Verf) operates identically to the regime F4 (Run) (Performing). After selecting the input mode and skip any block, the control unit selects the test screen (Main-Verf), DNC and the program can be checked like any other program. Note: For RS-232 DNC F4 (Run) (Performing), and F9 (Verf) (check) number search tool or block number can be made to run the program from the desired location. Program can not be reset to the "first" (first) after a search tool or block number. Option for part / path / both (part / path / both) are not available for DNC in test mode.

133

SECTION 2 - FRONT PANEL OPERATION


F7 (Chart) Main-Util-Chart (Main Screen - Utilities - Scheme) Use the F7 (Chart) shows the scheme of assistance by the end user in accordance with the specific application. If the catalog RAM (memory) is a file called charts.dat, it will be displayed. The format of the file system allows for the indexing of files and other data available to the operator. Below is a sample listing charts.dat. Note: Only the top 16 lines chart.dat. The first 12 characters of each line are not displayed. Speed and feed (Updated May 10 1994.) To get more information or to make changes to the schema information, see Bill Jones. Carstl.dat AllSt.dat *Carbon steel *Alloy steel etc. *Aluminum *Cast iron *Tasks for ACME Inc.

Allum.dat CstIron.dat Acme.dat

F8 (Info) Main-Util-Info (Home Screen - Utilities - Information) F8 (Info) shows information about the software, hardware, etc. The following function keys are displayed.

F1 (Std) Main-Util-Info-Std (Home Screen - Utilities - Statistics - Standard) F1 (Std) shows the standard information as a representative in the next window.

134

SECTION 2 - FRONT PANEL OPERATION


Memory Avail (Access Memory) shows the available system memory in bytes. Parts Storage (memory processing software components) shows the amount of memory processing software components, in bytes. Front Panel (front panel) shows the code version of the front panel. Controller Card (Controller board) shows the version of the controller card (v0206 mean 2.06) and counting the number of errors (should be zero). Information on cycle Acroloop about axes X, Y and Z for systems Centurion 5 as follows: version, (v0214 = 2.14) Set count of the number of errors (should be zero) four bytes, downloaded the program issuing the optional acroloop (files. HEX), formatted as: aamm ssrr, where: aa = axis (01 = X, 02 = Y, etc.) mm = major version (= 00 hand, 01 = P1ATC ram, 07 = P7ATC, 08 = P8ATC, 11 = P1 geneva) ss = subversion, uniquely identifies a file. HEX. rr = Reserve (always zero) The information network control block (NCB) on the axes X, Y and Z for Centurion Systems 6/7 is as follows. The version number Date of each file NCB.HEX A brief description of the file F2 (Sys) Main-Util-Info-Sys (Main Screen - Utilities - Statistics - System) F2 (Sys) shows the system information as a representative in the next window.

135

SECTION 2 - FRONT PANEL OPERATION


This screen shows the internal information system. Lines 1 - 5 show the distribution of memory in DOS, NC and overlays dynamically allocated area. Line 6 shows the version of MS-DOS, and CP 80286, 80386, 80486 or 80586. Lines 11 and 12 show the compiler and blocks previously allocated to the group of cycles, cycles, and text codes M and G, connected by the user. Line 13 is a hex dump of the BIOS memory for F000: 0. Line 14 - is a hexadecimal dump of the emulator ROM drive with CA00: 0. Line 15 indicates the type of Bios and type of disk emulator. F3 (Fp) Main-Util-Info-Fp (Main Screen - Utilities - Details-Front) F3 (Fp) shows information on the front panel, as shown in the figure below.

The first line of the version of the front panel. The next two lines are a few abbreviations and numbers: AK RT TO SR SS NK DC PE TL CL Confirmation received from the sensor / controller keyboard Repeated transmission received from the sensor / controller keyboard Timeouts for transmission to the sensor keyboard, the keyboard controller found Repeated sending fragments - timeouts detected NC Sending fragments - the standard keyboard to send a probe Nonconfirmation found the keyboard controller The value of the DAC spindle sent to the transmitter keyboard Parity error detected by the keyboard controller Time limits detected by the keyboard controller Pressing Control, received by the keyboard controller (Used to indicate the inconsistency of data / command)

136

SECTION 2 - FRONT PANEL OPERATION


F4 (Path) Main-Util-Info-Path (Main Screen - Utilities - Information - Directions) When you press the F4 (Path) the next screen appears, which displays the file path. The standard procedure is for the ROM catalogs (ROM), memory (RAM), details of programs for processing, display and floppy disk. The following catalog processing software components shown in the available space for programs in bits. For directories, the ROM (ROM), machining programs and display the volume name of the DOS to the disk is shown on the right.

NC Centurion VI 6.6206r ROM: RAM: Processing program details: Showing: Floppy disk: Remote files:

Note:

File Route reboots, which displays the above information. So you can edit the file path, and then restart it using this command. If route processing program details and / or remote file has been modified from the menu, they will be saved back to the original route of the PATH.DAT. Version of the above #. # 169 route have a floppy disk and route remote files. Route the floppy disk is used specifically to save and load settings.

137

SECTION 2 - FRONT PANEL OPERATION


F5 (Time) Main-Util-Info-Time (Home Screen - Utilities - Statistics - Time) F5 (Time) shows the time and distance are calculated when checking program. Information on the clock at 100% to correct feed rate for tool change, spindle acceleration, stopping blocks, etc. Views expressed in hours, minutes, seconds. Length - in inches or mm. Change the tool adds 10 seconds to the time of filing.

RunTime = Period Main-Util-Time = Utility Main Screen-Time Active = Active Current = current next Next = Distance = the distance NC Centurion VI 6.6206r Correction: canceled Information on the clock at 100% Instrument: Length: Implementation: Diameter: Submission: Plane: Faster movement: Clearance: Distance: Interpolation: linear (feed) Submission: (ipm = inches / min) Units: absolute / English system Cycle: canceled Pause: (sec = seconds) Spindle: (rpm = r / min) Coolant: Disabled Number details: Std = standard; Sys = systematic; Fp = front panel; Path = path; Time = time; Ram = memory; Diag = diagnosis; MISC = additional parameters; Done = done

The screen above provides information on the timing for the last audited program. Shown period of time suggests that correction of the feed rate is 100%. RUN (Running) gives the total time, FEED (Feed) - the time of milling (G1, G2, G3), and RAPID (Fast Moving) - during G0. All the time expressed in hours: minutes: seconds. The distance means the total distance traveled in inches or millimeters.

138

SECTION 2 - FRONT PANEL OPERATION


F6 (Ram) Main-Util-Info-Ram (The main screen - Utilities - Statistics - RAM) With F6 (Ram) displays the following screen, which shows the contents of the directory RAM (memory). F6 is used mainly for diagnostic purposes. Programs that run the various options on the machine, usually stored in the directory.

NC Centurion VI 6.6206r The contents of RAM: ... To continue, press any key

F7 (Diag) Main-Util-Info-Diag (main screen - Utilities - Statistics - Diagnosis) With F7 (Diag) displays the following screen, which shows the diagnostics of the machine just before the emergency stop. F7 is used mainly for diagnostic purposes to determine the cause of the emergency stop. The user can view the status of inputs and outputs for each axis.

RunTime = Period Main-Util-Diag = Home screen, utilities, diagnostics Active = active

139

SECTION 2 - FRONT PANEL OPERATION


Enter the X-axis 01 Emergency Stop Connecting rod 02 is turned off Connecting rod 03 is included 04 Acceleration 05 Change Tool 06 Failure of lubrication system 07 Waiting for the channel 08 Zero Speed 09 Faulty Drive 10 Rear Spindle 11 Digitization The switch 12 of the original The output of the X axis 01 Program Emergency Stop 02 coolant in the form of oil mist 03 Coolant splash The rotation of the spindle 04 in a clockwise direction The rotation of the spindle 05 counterclockwise The spindle 06 in the order 07 The inclusion of a connecting rod 08 Change Tool Resolution 09 relief Conclusion 10 X 10 11 Locking Spindle 12 swivel clip Correction: canceled Instrument: Length: Diameter: Plane: Clearance: Interpolation: linear (feed) Submission: Units: absolute / English system Cycle: canceled Pause: (sec = seconds) Spindle: (rpm = r / min) Coolant: Disabled Number details:

STATUS I / O AT THE TIME OF THE LAST EMERGENCY STOP Esc = exit

F9 (Blank) Main-Util-Blank (Home Screen - Utilities - Blank) F9 (Blank) makes the screen blank. With this feature removed written to the CRT image. The screen will remain blank until such time as there is no any key is pressed. The screen will be cleared automatically and remain empty until such time until any key is pressed. Shutdowns block tool change, a request to start cycle, etc. activate the screen, the operator will be given a hint, then the screen will again be cleared. There is also a timer to clear the screen if the key is not pressed within a specified period of time. See information about the parameter of time to turn off the display on page 65, Section 2. F10 (Command) Main-Util-Command (Home Screen - Utilities - Team) If the parameter Misc (Optional) Name of the team is not empty, the first 5 characters will be displayed pressing F10. When the F10 key is pressed, the command will be executed. If you need a few commands can run a batch file. See more information on this page 67. Help (AugRv) Main-Util-AugRV (Main Screen - Utilities - Reverse the screw) When you press and hold this key is reversed screw. It is used to help eliminate jamming systems chip removal. The screw will move in the opposite direction until the button is depressed. The screw will not move (forward or backward) if the door is opened or the machine is in an emergency stop.

140

SECTION 3 - display a dialog INPUT DATA

141

SECTION 3 - display a dialog INPUT DATA


BLOCK DIAGRAM Dialog Box CNC CENTURION 7 POS Regulations MILL - START Start cutting cycle GOEM LINE Line Additional features MISC ARC Arc END End milling cycle TANGS Tangent CGEN generation of circles Home treatment ISLND island E-ISL completion of processing of the island POCK SETUP Installing milling grooves CIRC - CLEAR Cleaning the round cut-outs F IN Fine ext. processing of round recesses RECT- CLEAR Clear the rectangular cut-outs F IN Fine ext. pryamoug processing. seizures FACE treatment cycle ends MANUL cleaning cycle manually cut-outs POLYG Turnaround polygonal cavities FRAMESETUP Installing milling frame CIRC Outdoor finishing a round frame Outdoor finishing RECT rectangle POLYG polygonal frame processing cycle 3DPCTSTART Start scanning cycle in 3 dimensions LINE A line in 3 dimensions ARC arc in 3 dimensions END End of the cycle sweep in 3 dimensions 3DARC Set rotation in 3 dimensions CAD Import CAD files THRED Threading cycles DRILL- START Activation of the selected cycle POS positioning for drilling Additional features MISC SUB Subroutine Call END decontamination cycle CAD Import CAD files BOLT Activate the selected program performance of bolt holes TCHNG Call / tool change Additional features MISC CALL Call subroutine SPEC- PARAMS Setting TOOLS Set tool offset Setting the zoom SCALE ROT Set rotation MIRR Setting Mirroring Install a floating zero FLZ TEXT Text loop SUBS GOSUB subroutine call START Start routines

142

SECTION 3 - display a dialog INPUT DATA


Each interactive program has an associated text program. File an interactive program begins with the letter P, followed by 4 digits, for example, P1234. The text file begins with the letter O, followed by 4 digits, for example, O1234. Time is a program created or modified from the interactive program. Changes in the interactive program, create a new text of the revised program of dialogue. The operator can view or edit text program, but changes will not be transferred to an interactive program. If you resend an interactive program overwrites it changed the program text. This section contains the schema dialog data entry screens and explanations of each screen. Showing, not all possible combinations of input screens, so if you need additional information regarding any of the screens or fields, please refer to the relevant section of the manual. In the red field to enter data. After entering the data, these fields will be red. Setting screen of the program, shown below, always appears at the beginning of each program. He runs some important functions, so that the program carried out before, leaving no options. Installing the software The following dialog screen to install the software. This is the first event of each interactive program.

Event 0 of 2 Bytes: 130 088 960 118 of Installing the software The name of the program [] Dimensions [Absolute] Units [English system] Working coordinate [---] Installation Notes:

The main keys are installed in the following dialog programming.

143

SECTION 3 - display a dialog INPUT DATA


F1 (Pos) Main-Prog-Conv-Pos (main screen - Program - Interactive mode - the Regulations) The screen position is generally used for fast positioning, however, filing the motion may be made by switching in the feed rate and the input flow rate. Below is an interactive screen for fast positioning in the Cartesian coordinate system.

Event 1 of 1 Bytes: 48 out of 85,487,616 Position The feed rate [accelerated] Coordinates [Cartesian] The X-axis The Y-axis The Z-axis

Note: See more information about the positioning of page 271, Section 4. Below is an interactive screen for positioning in a polar coordinate system.

Event 1 of 2 Bytes: 84 out of 800 522 240 Position The feed rate [12]

144

SECTION 3 - display a dialog INPUT DATA


Coordinates [polar] The plane [XY] Type [the current] The length of R [1.4142] The rear corner of the AB [45] The axis Z [-2]

Note: See more details about the polar setting lines on the page 273, Section 4. F2 (Mill) Main-Prog-Conv-Mill (Home Screen - Program - Interactive mode - Milling) When you select F2 (Mill) appears next panel function keys.

F1 (Start) Mill-Start (Milling - Start) Screen F1 (Start) is used to start the continuous cycle of single-or multi-row routing. Milling begins at the first depth Z, and continues to decline to step Z, until it reached a final depth of Z. Interactive tool to puncture the screen and start cutting cycle is as follows.

Event 1 of 2 Bytes: 125 894 656 118 of Puncture tool - Start cutting cycle The feed rate puncture Z [10] Point of Return [Gap] Gap [.1] The final depth of Z [] 1st depth of Z [] Step Z [] X point of puncture X [] Puncture point Y Y [] Correction [off] Options [---]

145

SECTION 3 - display a dialog INPUT DATA

In the beginning of the milling cycle usually follows the geometry, but in the end - the event "end mill cycle" (End milling cycle). Correction of the cutting tool is activated on the screen below.

Event 1 of 3 bytes: 168 of 125 894 656 Puncture tool - Start cutting cycle The feed rate puncture Z [10] Point of Return [Gap] Gap [.1] The final depth of Z [-1] 1st depth Z [- .25] Step Z [.25] X point of the puncture x [0] Puncture point Y Y [0] Correction [Left] [Cartesian] Before the puncture x [1] Y [0] Options [---]

Event 1 of 3 Bytes: 215 125 894 656 Puncture tool - Start cutting cycle The feed rate puncture Z [10] Point of Return [Gap] Gap [.1]

146

SECTION 3 - display a dialog INPUT DATA


The final depth of Z [-1] 1st depth Z [- .25] Step Z [.25] X point of the puncture x [0] Puncture point Y Y [0] Correction [Left] [polar] The angle AB [0] Options [---]

Event 1 of 3 Bytes: 215 125 894 656 Puncture tool - Start cutting cycle The feed rate puncture Z [10] Point of Return [Gap] Gap [.1] The final depth of Z [-1] 1st depth Z [- .25] Step Z [.25] X point of the puncture x [0] Puncture point Y Y [0] Correction [automatic left] Options [---]

F2 (Geom) Mill-Geom (Milling - Geometry) When you select F2 (Geom) appears next panel function keys.

147

SECTION 3 - display a dialog INPUT DATA


F1 (Line) Mill-Geom-Line (Milling - Geometry - Line) Use the F1 (Line) displays the following dialog screen for the linear interpolation in the Cartesian coordinate system, which is used to perform linear interpolation in the mode of delivery.

Event 1 of 1 Bytes: 48 out of 85,487,616 Geometrical parameters of milling - Line The feed rate F [20] Coordinates [Cartesian] The X-axis The Y-axis The Z-axis End of [---] Elongation in the opposite direction [off]

Note: See more details about positioning on the page 271, Section 4.

148

SECTION 3 - display a dialog INPUT DATA


In the programming for all the fields entering the feed rate or spindle speed will be the active key is F12. Pressing the F12 key operator requested assistance in calculating the appropriate spindle speed and feed rate for the relevant entries. The only exception - the feed rate of the screen, since it is assumed that the flow rate is rapid movement. After pressing the F12 key the next screen appears.

Calculation of speed and feed The diameter of the cutting tool (inch) Cutting width (inches) Cutting speed (ft / min) Number of cutters Chip thickness (inches) Spindle speed (rpm = r / min) The feed rate (ipm = inches / min)

After entering the data in the first five fields will be given the recommended feed rate and spindle speed. Below is an interactive screen for positioning in a polar coordinate system.

Event 1 of 1 Bytes: 48 out of 85,487,616

149

SECTION 3 - display a dialog INPUT DATA


Geometrical parameters of milling - Line The feed rate F [20] Coordinates [polar] The plane [YZ] Type [absolute] The absolute center of YC [1] ZC [-1] The length of R [2] The rear corner of the AB [60] The axis X [] End of [---] Elongation in the opposite direction [off]

Note: See more details about the polar setting lines on the page 273, Section 4. When set to Extend Back [ON] (Elongation in the opposite direction [inc.]), The following screen appears.

Event 7 of 10 Bytes: 423 886 848 358 of Geometrical parameters of milling - Line The feed rate F [] Coordinates [Cartesian] The X-axis The Y-axis The Z-axis End of [---] Elongation in the opposite direction [short] angle [110]

Note: See more information on the back line on page 289, Section 4. Interactive screen for lines with a rounded corner is shown below.

150

SECTION 3 - display a dialog INPUT DATA

Event 1 of 1 Bytes: 48 out of 85,487,616 Geometrical parameters of milling - Line The feed rate F [20] Coordinates [Cartesian] The X-axis The Y-axis The Z-axis End of [rounded the corner] Radius [.15] Elongation in the opposite direction [off]

Note: See more details about rounding the corners on the 287, Section 4. Interactive screen for lines with land listed below.

Event 1 of 1 Bytes: 48 out of 85,487,616 Geometrical parameters of milling - Line The feed rate F [20] Coordinates [Cartesian]

151

SECTION 3 - display a dialog INPUT DATA


The X-axis The Y-axis The Z-axis End of [facet] Length [.15] Elongation in the opposite direction [off]

Note: See more details on the corners with chamfer on page 288, Section 4. F2 (Arc) Mill-Geom-Arc (Milling - Geometry - Doug) Screen F2 (Arc) is used to perform circular interpolation mode supply. Sample of an arc Below is a dialog screen plane XY, the center of the increments, circular interpolation clockwise.

Event 1 of 1 Bytes: 48 out of 85,487,616 Geometrical parameters of milling - Doug The plane [XY] The feed rate F [20] The direction [clockwise] Center [Centre increments] Center of the arc I [1] Endpoint [absolute] A Y Z The final option is [---]

Note: See more details about circular interpolation on page 274, Section 4.

152

SECTION 3 - display a dialog INPUT DATA


A sample of the arc two Below is a dialog screen plane ZX, the absolute center, circular interpolation clockwise.

Event 1 of 1 Bytes: 48 out of 85,487,616 Geometrical parameters of milling - Doug The plane [ZX] The feed rate F [10] The direction [clockwise] Center [the absolute center] Arc radius R [2] Center of the arc ZC [0] Endpoint [absolute] A Y Z The final option is [---]

Note: See more details about circular interpolation on page 274, Section 4. A sample of the arc 3 Below is a dialog screen plane XY, Polar Center, helical interpolation counterclockwise, with a rounded corner.

153

SECTION 3 - display a dialog INPUT DATA


Event 1 of 1 Bytes: 48 out of 85,487,616 Geometrical parameters of milling - Doug The plane [XY] The feed rate F [15] The direction [clockwise] Center [polar] Arc radius R [3] The initial angle of AA [45] Endpoint [polar] The final angle of AB [135] The final option [rounded the corner] Radius [.25]

Note: See more details about the description of the arc with polar coordinates on the page 273, Section 4. Sample 4 arc Below is a dialog screen plane XY, only the radius, circular interpolation clockwise.

Event 1 of 1 Bytes: 48 out of 85,487,616 Geometrical parameters of milling - Doug The plane [XY] The feed rate F [] The direction [clockwise] Center [the radius] Arc radius R [2] Endpoint [absolute] A Y Z The final option is [---]

Note:

See more details about the description of the arc with the radius of the page 276, Section 4.

154

SECTION 3 - display a dialog INPUT DATA


F3 (Tangs) Mill-Geom-Tangs (Milling - Geometry - Tangent) Screen F3 (Tangs) is used to calculate the intersection points needed for the arc tangent or tangent line between the two arcs. When this function is used, the program introduced the first arc and the tangent line or arc. Information about the second arc will be used only for purposes of calculation. This capability has been developed in order to be able to program a series of successive tangent lines or arcs. Therefore, the command line or arc tangent, as a rule, follows the arc of the team, describing the second arc. To determine the value of left or right inputs on these screens, draw a line connecting the centers of the two arcs in the direction of the tool. Next, determine the desired point are right or left of the line, and enter these values.

The general sequence of the above form is as follows. Event 1 Event 2 Event 3 The line L1 The function of the tangent line or arc, describing an arc R1 and L2 line or arc 3 Doug R2

155

SECTION 3 - display a dialog INPUT DATA


The tangent line Below is an interactive screen for the tangent line.

Event 1 of 1 Bytes: 48 out of 85,487,616 Connecting two arcs tangent line or arc in the plane [XY] Milled first arc in the direction [clockwise] R1 XC1 The second arc is to calculate: R2 HC2 Exit 1st arc [left] and enter into the second [left] Connect the [line]

Note: See more details about the tangent line at p 414, Section 6. Arc Tangent Below is an interactive display of the tangent arc.

156

SECTION 3 - display a dialog INPUT DATA


Event 1 of 1 Bytes: 48 out of 85,487,616 Connecting two arcs tangent line or arc in the plane [XY] Milled first arc in the direction [clockwise] R1 XC1 The second arc is to calculate: R2 HC2 Exit 1st arc [left] and enter into the second [left] Connect the [arch] center to the [left] Radius [5] The direction of the arc [clockwise]

Note: See more details about the arc of a tangent on page 414, Section 6. F4 (CGen) Mill-Geom-CGen (Milling - Geometry - Generator circles) For use F4 (CGen), the function generator circles to fill in any three points on the arc. These three points will be used to calculate the center and the radius of this arc. Below is a dialog screen for the generator circles.

Event 1 of 1 Bytes: 48 out of 85,487,616 The generator of the circles with three points The plane [XY] The direction [clockwise] X1 ... Y2 ... Z3 ... Use the X3, Y3, as the end point [yes]

157

SECTION 3 - display a dialog INPUT DATA


Note: The screen generator circles do not move to the first point on the arc to cutting arc. In most cases, the screen is preceded by the movement of the generator circle line in this situation. Depending on the direction of the arc generated by the arc can not pass through the second point. See more details about the display of the generator of the circle in Section 6. F7 (Islnd) Mill-Geom-Islnd (Milling - Geometry - Island) The screen of the island is used to determine the geometric parameters of the individual in a series of milling. It can be used in the standard cycle of milling, or for any option (clear cuts, tapered or rounded walls of the wall).

Event 5 of 5 Bytes: 280 788 992 201 of Home treatment of islet Islet [1] The point of puncture X [2] The point of puncture Y [3] Correction [automatic, left]

The screen begins to process the island there is no information about the Z. All dimensions are in the cycle Z began milling. The island is called a screen cutting cycle completion.

158

SECTION 3 - display a dialog INPUT DATA


F8 (E-Isl) Mill-Geom-E-Isl (Milling - Geometry - End of treatment of the island) The screen has finished processing the island used to complete the setup geometry on the island.

Event 6 of 6 Bytes: 219 280 788 992 Completion of processing of the island Point to the details after the removal tool [Automatically]

Below is a sample program that uses a cutting cycle with cleaning grooves and islands. Interactive Program C: \ CNC \ PARTS \ P7878 Event 0 out of 16 Installing the software The name of the program [] Dimensions [Absolute] Units [English system] Working coordinate [---] Notes on setting: [] [] [] [] [] [] -------------------------------------------------- -

159

SECTION 3 - display a dialog INPUT DATA


Event 1 of 16 Puncture tool - Start cutting cycle The feed rate puncture Z [25] Point of Return [Gap] Gap [.1] The final depth of Z [-1] 1st depth Z [- .3] The increment of Z [.3] The point of puncture X X [0] The point of puncture Y Y [0] Correction [Left] [Polar coordinate system] The angle of AB [90] Options [Clean grooves 1] Feed rate XY [50] Cutting width [.2] The final allowance [.005] -------------------------------------------------- Event 2 of 16 Geometrical parameters of milling - Line The feed rate F [50] Coordinates [Cartesian] The axis X X [3] The axis Y Y [0] The axis Z Z [] End of [---] Elongation in the opposite direction [Disabled] -------------------------------------------------- Event 3 of 16 Geometrical parameters of milling - Line The feed rate F [] Coordinates [Cartesian] The axis X X [3] The axis Y Y [3] The axis Z Z [] End of [---] Elongation in the opposite direction [Disabled] -------------------------------------------------- -

160

SECTION 3 - display a dialog INPUT DATA


Event 4 of 16 Geometrical parameters of milling - Doug The plane [XY] The feed rate F [] The direction [clockwise] Center [the absolute center] Arc radius R [1.5] Center of the arc XC [1.5] YC [3] Endpoint [Absolute] X [0] Y [3] Z [] The final option is [---] -------------------------------------------------- Event 5 of 16 Geometrical parameters of milling - Line The feed rate F [] Coordinates [Cartesian] The axis X X [0] The axis Y Y [0] The axis Z Z [] End of [---] Elongation in the opposite direction [Disabled] -------------------------------------------------- Event 6 of 16 Removal of the instrument Completing the cycle of milling Forward to the part after the removal tool [The polar coordinate system] The angle AB [0] Call island # [1] Call island # [2] Call island # [] # Call the islet [] Call island # [] # Call the islet [] Call island # [] # Call the islet [] -------------------------------------------------- -

161

SECTION 3 - display a dialog INPUT DATA


Event 7 of 16 Home treatment of islet Number of islands # [1] The point of puncture X X [1] The point of puncture Y Y [1] Correction [Left] [Polar coordinate system] The angle AB [0] -------------------------------------------------- Event 8 of 16 Geometrical parameters of milling - Line The feed rate F [50] Coordinates [Cartesian] The axis X X [2] The axis Y Y [2] The axis Z Z [] End of [---] Elongation in the opposite direction [Disabled] -------------------------------------------------- Event 9 of 16 Geometrical parameters of milling - Line The feed rate F [] Coordinates [Cartesian] The axis X X [2] The axis Y Y [1] The axis Z Z [] End of [---] Elongation in the opposite direction [Disabled] -------------------------------------------------- -

162

SECTION 3 - display a dialog INPUT DATA


Event 10 of 16 Geometrical parameters of milling - Line The feed rate F [] Coordinates [Cartesian] The axis X X [1] The axis Y Y [1] The axis Z Z [] End of [---] Elongation in the opposite direction [Disabled] -------------------------------------------------- Event 11 of 16 Completion of processing of the island Forward to the part after the removal tool [The polar coordinate system] Angle AB[45] -------------------------------------------------- Event 12 of 16 Home treatment of islet Number of islands # [2] The point of puncture X X [.75] The point of puncture Y Y [2.75] Correction [Left] [Polar coordinate system] The angle AB [-90] -------------------------------------------------- -

163

SECTION 3 - display a dialog INPUT DATA


Event 13 of 16 Geometrical parameters of milling - Doug The plane [XY] The feed rate F [50] The direction [clockwise] Center [the absolute center] Arc radius R [.5] Center of the arc XC [1.25] YC [2.75] Endpoint [Absolute] X [1.75] Y [2.75] Z [] The final option is [---] -------------------------------------------------- Event 14 of 16 Geometrical parameters of milling - Doug The plane [XY] The feed rate F [] The direction [clockwise] Center [the absolute center] Arc radius R [.5] Center of the arc XC [1.25] YC [2.75] Endpoint [Absolute] X [.75] Y [2.75] Z [] The final option is [---] -------------------------------------------------- Event 15 of 16 Completion of processing of the island Forward to the part after the removal tool [The polar coordinate system] Angle AB[90] -------------------------------------------------- -

164

SECTION 3 - display a dialog INPUT DATA


Event 16 of 16 End of program Spindle off [Yes] Coolant is turned off [yes] Z to change the tool [yes] Regulation X (relative to the original) [] Regulation Y (relative to the original) [] -------------------------------------------------- With the previous program generated the following graphic.

Note: See more information about cleaning up the deep grooves on page 401Section 5. F3 (Misc) Mill-Misc (Milling - More options) See explanation on page 249, Section 3. F4 (End) Mill-End (Milling - End) Screen F4 (End) is used to complete the previously started cutting cycle. Completing the cycle cutting cycle with no beginning or the beginning of cutting cycle, cutting cycle without end milling will lead to a syntax error when you run or test program.

165

SECTION 3 - display a dialog INPUT DATA


Common error codes for milling cycles Cycle removal tool, complete milling

Start cutting cycle

andNO

= ERROR # 602 No operator of WEND

This may be due to the start of the cycle without end milling cutting cycle. Cycle removal tool, complete milling andNO Start cutting cycle = ERROR # 601 WHILE there is no operator

This may be due to the completion of the cycle without cutting cycle start milling. Below is an interactive tool for removing the screen at the completion of milling cycles.

Event 1 of 1 Bytes: 54 146 374 656 Removal of the instrument Completing the cycle of milling Forward to the part after the removal tool [Cartesian coordinate system] X [0] Y [1] Call island # [] # Call the islet [] Call island # [] # Call the islet [] Call island # [] # Call the islet [] Call island # [] # Call the islet []

166

SECTION 3 - display a dialog INPUT DATA


Example of milling program Event 0 of 7 Installing the software The name of the program [] Dimensions [Absolute] Units [English system] Working coordinate [---] Notes on setting: [] [] [] [] [] [] -------------------------------------------------- Event 1 of 7 Puncture tool - Start cutting cycle The feed rate puncture Z [20] Point of Return [Gap] Gap [.1] The final depth of Z [-1] 1st depth Z [- .2] The increment of Z [.3] The point of puncture X X [0] The point of puncture Y Y [0] Correction [automatic right] Options [---] -------------------------------------------------- -

167

SECTION 3 - display a dialog INPUT DATA


Event 2 of 7 Geometrical parameters of milling - Line The feed rate F [] Coordinates [Cartesian] The axis X X [2] The axis Y Y [] The axis Z Z [] End of [---] Elongation in the opposite direction [Disabled] -------------------------------------------------- Event 3 of 7 Geometrical parameters of milling - Doug The plane [XY] The feed rate F [] The direction [clockwise] Center [polar] Arc radius R [1] The initial angle of AA [-90] Endpoint [polar] The final angle of AB [90] Z [] The final option is [---] -------------------------------------------------- Event 4 of 7 Geometrical parameters of milling - Line The feed rate F [] Coordinates [Cartesian] The axis X X [0] The axis Y Y [] The axis Z Z [] End of [---] Elongation in the opposite direction [Disabled] -------------------------------------------------- -

168

SECTION 3 - display a dialog INPUT DATA


Event 5 of 7 Geometrical parameters of milling - Doug The plane [XY] The feed rate F [] The direction [clockwise] Center [polar] Arc radius R [1] The initial angle of AA [90] Endpoint [polar] The final angle of AB [-90] Z [] The final option is [---] -------------------------------------------------- Event 6 of 7 Removal of the instrument Completing the cycle of milling Forward to the part after the removal tool [Automatically] Call island # [] # Call the islet [] Call island # [] # Call the islet [] Call island # [] # Call the islet [] Call island # [] # Call the islet [] -------------------------------------------------- Event 7 of 7 End of program The spindle is turned off [yes] Coolant is turned off [yes] Z to change the tool [yes] Regulation X (relative to the original) [] Regulation Y (relative to the original) [] -------------------------------------------------- -

169

SECTION 3 - display a dialog INPUT DATA


The following graphic is an isometric view of the program milling.

170

SECTION 3 - display a dialog INPUT DATA


Below is a dialog screen for the option of deep cleaning grooves with loop start milling tool with a puncture.

Event 1 of 7 Bytes: 124 878 848 406 of Puncture tool - Start cutting cycle The feed rate puncture Z [20] Point of Return [Gap] Gap [.1] The final depth of Z [-1] 1st depth Z [0] The increment of Z [.1] The point of puncture X X [0] The point of puncture Y Y [0] Correction [automatic right] Options [Clean grooves 1] Feed rate XY [20] Cutting width [.1] Final allowance [.01]

The following graphic is a top view of an example program using the routing options are a clear cut-outs in the cycle began milling tool with a puncture.

Note: See more information about cleaning up the deep grooves on one page 401, Section 4.

171

SECTION 3 - display a dialog INPUT DATA


Below is an interactive screen for option clean grooves with loop start milling tool with a puncture.

Event 1 of 7 Bytes: 252 124 878 848 of Puncture tool - Start cutting cycle The feed rate puncture Z [20] Point of Return [Gap] Gap [.1] The final depth of Z [-1] 1st depth Z [0] The increment of Z [.1] The point of puncture X X [0] The point of puncture Y Y [0] Correction [automatic right] Options [Clean grooves 2] The number of passes [5] The width of cut [.125] Enter a negative width of cut for finishing pass

The following graphic is a top view of an example program using the option of milling grooves 2 in the treatment cycle began milling tool with a puncture.

Note: see more detailed information about clearing the cut-outs on page 2 401, Section 5 2. Note: This option can also be used to clean the frame of the cutting cycle. To use the option finishing pass initial data for the tool radius rough passage can exceed the actual radius of the tool, in this case to achieve the proper tool radius using two passes with a negative width of the 172

SECTION 3 - display a dialog INPUT DATA


aisle. This option is intended for the treatment of the real details, but did not clear the entire excavation. Below is a dialog screen for the cycle beginning with the milling tools and a puncture with the option of conical walls.

Event 1 of 7 Bytes: 337 of 124 911 616 Puncture tool - Start cutting cycle The feed rate puncture Z [20] Point of Return [Gap] Gap [.1] The final depth of Z [-1] 1st depth Z [0] The increment of Z [.25] The point of puncture X X [0] The point of puncture Y Y [0] Correction [automatic right] Options [Tapered Wall (spherical cutter)] The angle of the wall [20]

In the following graphic representation is given a sample program using the option of milling tapered walls in cycle beginning with the piercing tool milling.

173

SECTION 3 - display a dialog INPUT DATA


0 - a vertical wall, 90 - is impossible. The conical wall is also an option for end mill. To be able to use the conical walls of the correction must be activated on the cutting tool. First depth of Z should be the top of the wall. The first pass is adjusted for the entire radius of the tool. Note: See more information about the conical walls of the page 393Section 5. Below is an interactive screen to start the cycle milling tool with a puncture with the option of rounded walls.

Event 1 of 4 Bytes: 498 124 911 616 of Puncture tool - Start cutting cycle The feed rate puncture Z [20] Point of Return [Gap] Gap [.1] The final depth of Z [-2] 1st depth Z [0] The increment of Z [.1] The point of puncture X X [0] The point of puncture Y Y [0] Correction [automatic right] Options [Round the walls (spherical cutter)] The radius of the wall [2] The initial angle [0]

174

SECTION 3 - display a dialog INPUT DATA


An example program using the rounded walls of the loop end milling 0 of 4 Events Installing the software The name of the program [] Dimensions [Absolute] Units [English system] Working coordinate [---] Notes on setting: [] [] [] [] [] [] -------------------------------------------------- Event 1 of 4 Puncture tool - Start cutting cycle The feed rate puncture Z [20] Point of Return [Gap] Gap [.1] The final depth of Z [-2] 1st depth Z [0] The increment of Z [.1] The point of puncture X X [0] The point of puncture Y Y [0] Correction [automatic right] Options [Round the walls (spherical cutter)] The radius of the wall [2] The initial angle [0] -------------------------------------------------- -

175

SECTION 3 - display a dialog INPUT DATA


Event 2 of 4 Geometrical parameters of milling - Doug The plane [XY] The feed rate F [] The direction [clockwise] Center [polar] Arc radius R [1] The initial angle of AA [0] Endpoint [polar] The final angle of AB [0] Z [] The final option is [---] -------------------------------------------------- Event 3 of 4 Removal of the instrument Completing the cycle of milling Forward to the part after the removal tool [Automatically] Call island # [] # Call the islet [] Call island # [] # Call the islet [] Call island # [] # Call the islet [] Call island # [] # Call the islet [] -------------------------------------------------- Event 4 of 4 End of program The spindle is turned off [yes] Coolant is turned off [yes] Z to change the tool [yes] Regulation X (relative to the original) [] Regulation Y (relative to the original) [] -------------------------------------------------- -

176

SECTION 3 - display a dialog INPUT DATA


In the following graphic representation is given a sample program using the option of milling curved walls at the beginning of a cycle of milling tool with a puncture.

0 - a vertical wall, 90 - is impossible. Rounded wall also has an option for end mill. To be able to use the curved walls of the correction must be activated on the cutting tool. First depth of Z should be the top of the wall. The first pass is adjusted for the entire radius of the tool. Note: See more information on the rounded walls of the page 396Section 5. F5 (Pockt) Mill-Pockt (Milling - Deep excavation) When selecting F5 (Pockt), a function of milling of deep cavities, the following panel keys.

F1 (Setup) Mill-Pockt-Setup (Milling - Deep groove - Installation) Screen F1 (Setup) is used to set the parameters needed for the programs of milling round, rectangular and polygonal cavities. Setting must be done before any milling grooves programs. Cleanup dredging hand does not require the installation screen. The cycles start and end milling not should be used with programs of milling deep cavities. Note: All automatic standard milling program must be activated with the instrument in the heart of the program.

177

SECTION 3 - display a dialog INPUT DATA


Below is an interactive screen to install the milling of deep cavities.

Event 1 of 1 Bytes: 47 out of 85,434,368 Installing the software milling of deep cavities A center of the notch [1] Center recess Y [2] Feed rate XY [20] The feed rate puncture Z [10] Point of Return [Gap] Gap [.1] The final depth of Z [-1] 1st depth Z [- .2] The increment of Z [.25]

Note: See more information about standard milling of deep cavities programs on page 295,302 in Section 4, and page 401 in Section 5. F2 (Circ) Mill-Pockt-Circ (Milling - Deep groove - Round) When you select F2 (Circ) appears next panel function keys.

178

SECTION 3 - display a dialog INPUT DATA


F1 (Clear) Mill-Pockt-Circ-Clear (Milling - Deep groove - Round - Clean) Below is a dialog screen to clear the circular cut-outs in a clockwise direction.

Event 1 of 1 Bytes: 47 out of 85,434,368 Cleaning the deep recesses of round Notch radius [4] Finishing allowance XY [.01] Finishing allowance Z [.01] Cutting width [.25] Z down [incision] Areas of cut [clockwise (dial.)] Correction [inc. ]

Note: See more information about clearing the round cut-outs on page 295, Section 4.

179

SECTION 3 - display a dialog INPUT DATA


F2 (Fin) Mill-Pockt-Circ-Fin (Milling - Deep groove - Round - Finishing) Below is an interactive screen for internal finishing of round recesses in a clockwise direction.

Event 6 of 18 Bytes: 895 out of 1,023,932,928 Internal finishing round of deep grooves Notch radius [1.3] Z down [Line] Corner [3.5] Areas of cut [counter-clockwise (counter-milling)] Correction [inc. ]

Note: See more details about the internal finishing the round cut-outs on page 296, Section 4. F3 (Rect) Mill-Pockt-Rect (Milling - Deep groove - Rectangular) When you select F3 (Rect) (Milling rectangular recesses) appears next panel function keys.

180

SECTION 3 - display a dialog INPUT DATA


F1 (Clear) Mill-Pockt-Rect-Clear (Milling - Deep groove - Rectangular - Clean) Below is an interactive screen for cleaning of rectangular grooves in a clockwise direction.

Event 1 of 1 Bytes: 47 out of 85,434,368 Cleaning deep rectangular grooves Size of excavation X [2] Size of excavation Y [4] Finishing allowance XY [.01] Finishing allowance Z [.01] Cutting width [.25] Corner radius [.5] Z down [incision] Correction [inc. ] Areas of cut [clockwise (dial.)]

Note: See more information about cleaning up of rectangular cut-outs on page 302, Section 4.

181

SECTION 3 - display a dialog INPUT DATA


F2 (Fin) Mill-Pockt-Rect-Fin (Milling - Deep groove - Rectangular - Finishing) Below is an interactive screen for internal finishing of rectangular grooves in a clockwise direction.

Event 2 of 4 Bytes: 138 of 237 010 944 Internal finishing of deep rectangular grooves Size of excavation X [2] Size of excavation Y [3] The radius of curvature of the vertices [.3] Z down [incision] Correction [inc. ] Areas of cut [clockwise (dial.)]

Note: See more details about the internal finishing of rectangular recesses on page 304, Section 4. F3 (Face) Mill-Pockt-Rect-Face (Milling - Deep groove - Rectangular - Ends) Below is an interactive screen for loop ends.

182

SECTION 3 - display a dialog INPUT DATA


Event 1 of 1 Bytes: 47 out of 85,434,368 The processing cycle ends Size of excavation X [3] Size of excavation Y [6] Cutting width [.2] Correction [inc. ]

F4 (Manul) Mill-Pockt-Manul (Milling - Deep groove - Clean by hand) The function is used to manually clean grooves to the operator was able to move the tool on a graphic screen and create a tool path with the arrow keys (move tool) and press enter (to select points). To add the manual points interactively select F2 (Mill) - F5 (Pockt) - F4 (Manul). Screen cleaning recesses in the manual mode is as follows:

Event 1 of 16 Bytes: 366 of 215 711 744 Cleaning the deep recesses in the manual mode The feed rate puncture Z [] Point of Return [Gap] Clearance [] The final depth of Z [] 1st depth of Z [] The increment of Z [] Number to use the tool [] After pressing the F1 (Store) (Save) to increase the area you want to clear, then click on Help (Manul) (Manual). Use the cursor keys to the tool, use the key Enter (Enter) to select positions.

The fields on the screen similar to the beginning of the cycle of milling. Number of tool used to graphically display the tool (the diameter of the tool in the tool table). After filling out the fields

183

SECTION 3 - display a dialog INPUT DATA


on the screen and pressing the F1 (Store) (Save) programmable item will be checked (the part and tool path). The operator may enter into the frame, increase or pan, press the Help (Man) (Manual mode) and move the tool by using the cursor keys and Enter key to select the tool position.

When the operator leaves the graphics mode, the control unit stores the point, as the cycle of cutting, using the 1st point in the cycle as the initial start of milling. The remaining points are stored as lines. Event end milling cycle persists after the last line. Note: To use this feature it is recommended that the operator has programmed the region, requiring manual data, and grooves put in the function of cleaning by hand before the geometrical parameters to be cleaned. F5 (Polyg) Mill-Pockt-Polyg (Milling - Deep groove - Polygonal) Below is an interactive screen for polygonal milling cycle of deep grooves.

184

SECTION 3 - display a dialog INPUT DATA


Event 2 of 3 Bytes: 131 out of 1,023,932,928 The inner loop cutting deep grooves of polygonal The number of sides [6] [The radius of the plane] [1] Angle to the first vertex [0] The radius of curvature of the vertices [.2] Z down [Line] Corner [2.5] Areas of cut [clockwise (dial.)] Correction [inc. ]

Note: See more details about the cycle of cutting polygonal cut-outs on page 309, Section 4. F6 (Frame) Mill-Frame (Milling - Frame) When choosing F6 (Frame) (frame) appears next panel function keys.

F1 (Setup) Mill-Frame-Setup (Milling - Frame - Installation) Screen F1 (Setup) (Set) is used to set the parameters needed for automatic programming cutting round and rectangular frames. Installing the program should be carried out before any cutting program framework. The cycles start and end milling not should be used with programs of cutting the frame. Note: All automatic standard milling program must be activated with the instrument in the heart of the program. All standard automatic routing software framework can be used to determine the G65 X___Y___ center.

Below is a dialog screen to install the routing framework.

185

SECTION 3 - display a dialog INPUT DATA


Event 1 of 1 Bytes: 47 out of 85,434,368 Installing the software routing framework Center frame X [1] Center frame Y [3] Feed rate XY [20] The feed rate puncture Z [10] Point of Return [Home] Gap [.1] The final depth of Z [-1] 1st depth Z [- .2] The increment of Z [.25]

F2 (Circ) Mill-Frame-Circ (Milling - Frame - Round) Below is an interactive screen for milling round outside the scope counterclockwise.

Event 1 of 1 Bytes: 47 out of 85,434,368 Outdoor finishing the round frames The radius of the framework [4] Z down [incision] Correction [Off. ] Areas of cut [counter-clockwise (dial.)]

Note: See more information on finishing the round outer frame on the page 298, Section 4.

186

SECTION 3 - display a dialog INPUT DATA


F3 (Rect) Mill-Frame-Rect (Milling - Frame - Rectangle) Below is an interactive screen for outdoor finishing a rectangular frame:

Event 2 of 2 Bytes: 206 1023932928 The inner loop cutting deep grooves of polygonal Size of the frame X [2] Frame size Y [4] The corner radius [.05] Z down [Line] Corner [3.5] Correction [inc. ] Areas of cut [clockwise (counter-milling)]

Note: See more information about the external finishing of rectangular frames on the page 307, Section 4. F5 (Poly) Mill-Frame-Poly (Milling - Frame - Polygon) Interactive screen for processing polygonal outer frame is as follows:

187

SECTION 3 - display a dialog INPUT DATA


Event 3 of 4 Bytes: 139 264 000 149 of The cycle of the internal processing of polygonal frames The number of sides [6] [The radius of the plane] [1] Angle to the first vertex [0] The radius of curvature of the vertices [.2] Z down [incision] Areas of cut [clockwise (dial.)] Correction [inc. ]

Note: See more details about the cycle of cutting polygonal frame on page 309, Section 4. F7 (3dPkt) Mill-3dPkt (Milling - Sweep in 3 dimensions) When you select F7 (3dPkt) appears next panel function keys.

F1 (Start) Mill-3dPkt-Start (Milling - Sweep in 3 dimensions - Home) Use the F1 (Start) (Home) is called the next dialog screen to start the cycle pazvertki in 3 dimensions.

188

SECTION 3 - display a dialog INPUT DATA


Event 1 of 1 Bytes: 47 out of 85,422,080 The beginning of the sweep cycle in 3 dimensions Gap [.1] The feed rate puncture Z [5] The feed rate of the arc [10] Starting point X [0] Y Z The radius of the beginning of the sweep R [1] The initial angle of the sweep of AA [- .001] The final sweep angle AB [180] Aisle width [.05] The plane sweep [YZ] Correction of the cutting tool [inc. ]

Notes on the cycle of scanning in 3 dimensions Note 1: Note 2: If the initial angle sweep = sweep the final corner, the arc will not be formed. Negative angles indicate the initial covering part, the positive initial angles - for the male part.

After filling out the home screen 3D next step - it is programming the desired path using only lines and arcs. These should be entered through screens Mill-3DPkt-Line or Mill-3DPkt-Arc. Once introduced XY profile details using the above cycle will be scanning the arcs in this plane along the lines of pre-programmed, or XY, until the cycle is completed the sweep by the events unfolding in the decontamination cycle of 3 dimensions. The net result of this cycle is the rotation of the programmed contour in the XZ plane XY, or YZ. In the case of the bottle mold bottle only has to be programmed in the plane XY, and then rotated in the YZ plane or XZ.

189

SECTION 3 - display a dialog INPUT DATA


F4 (End) Mill-3dPkt-End (Milling - Sweep in 3 dimensions - End) To complete the cycle sweep seizures in 3-dimensions, select the key F4 (End), or you will receive an error message. Below is an interactive screen for decontamination cycle scan in 3 dimensions.

Event 1 of 1 Bytes: 47 out of 854 343 368 Deactivation of sweep cycles in 3-dimensions.

A sample program using the Scan cycle in 3 dimensions Installing the software The name of the program [] Dimensions [Absolute] Units [English system] Working coordinate [---] Notes on setting: [] [] [] [] [] [] -------------------------------------------------- -

190

SECTION 3 - display a dialog INPUT DATA


Event 1 of 6 The beginning of the sweep cycle in 3 dimensions Gap [.1] The feed rate puncture Z [15] The feed rate of the arc [20] Starting point X [2 ] Y [1 ] Z [0 ] The initial radius R scan [1 ] The initial angle of the sweep AA [- .0001] The final sweep angle AB [180 ] Width of passage [.05] The plane sweep [XZ] Correction of the cutting tool [inc.] -------------------------------------------------- Event 2 of 6 Three-dimensional geometry - Line The feed rate [] Coordinates [Cartesian] The X-axis X [3] The Y-axis Y [3] The Z-axis Z [] -------------------------------------------------- Event 3 of 6 Three-dimensional geometry - Line The feed rate [] Coordinates [Cartesian] The X-axis X [] The Y-axis Y [4] The Z-axis Z [] -------------------------------------------------- -

191

SECTION 3 - display a dialog INPUT DATA


Event 4 of 6 Three-dimensional geometry - arc The plane [XY] The feed rate F [] The direction [clockwise] Center [the absolute center] The radius of the arc R [1 ] Center of arc XC [3 ] YC [5 ] End point [Absolute] X [2 ] Y [5 ] Z [ ] -------------------------------------------------- Event 5 of 6 Deactivation of sweep cycles in 3 dimensions -------------------------------------------------- Event 6 of 6 End of program Spindle off [No] Coolant off [No] Z to the tool change [No] Regulation X (relative to baseline) [] Regulation Y (relative to baseline) [] --------------------------------------------------The next graphic shows an example of the mapping program using cutting-cycle refresh in 3 dimensions.

192

SECTION 3 - display a dialog INPUT DATA


F5 (3dArc) Mill-3dPkt-3dArc (Milling - Sweep in 3 dimensions - three-dimensional arc) When you press the F5 (3dArc) appears next dialog screen to call a subroutine function threedimensional arc.

Event 1 of 2 Bytes: 89 out of 109 510 656 Subroutine call three-dimensional arc Turning to the trajectory of the sub, including the outside of the plane of the arc. Does not support the correction to the cutting tool or trigonometric help. All arcs must be the absolute center. The plane [XY to Z] Clearance [] Starting point X [1] Y Z The initial angle [0] The angle increment of [-5] The called routine [826] Number of cycles [36]

Below is a sample program using three-dimensional arc:

193

SECTION 3 - display a dialog INPUT DATA


Interactive Program C: \ CNC \ PARTS \ P0825 Event 0 of 2 Installing the software The name of the program [] Dimensions [Absolute] Units [English system] Working coordinate [---] Notes on setting: [] [] [] [] [] [] -------------------------------------------------- Event 1 of 2 Subroutine call three-dimensional arc Turning to the trajectory of the sub, including the outside of the plane of the arc. Does not support the correction to the cutting tool or trigonometric help. All arcs must be the absolute center. The plane [Xy - Z] Clearance [] Starting point X [1] Y [1] Z [0] The initial angle [0] The angle increment of [-5] The called routine [826] Number of cycles [36] -------------------------------------------------- Event 2 of 2 End of program The spindle is turned off [yes] Coolant is turned off [yes] Z to change the tool [not] Regulation X (relative to the original) [] Regulation Y (relative to the original) [] -------------------------------------------------- -

194

SECTION 3 - display a dialog INPUT DATA


Interactive Program C: \ CNC \ PARTS \ P0826 Event 0 out of 5 Installing the software The name of the program [] Dimensions [Absolute] Units [English system] Working coordinate [---] Notes on setting: [] [] [] [] [] [] -------------------------------------------------- Event 1 of 5 Geometrical parameters of milling - Line The feed rate F [] Coordinates [Cartesian] The axis X X [2] The axis Y Y [1] The axis Z Z [] End of [---] Elongation in the opposite direction [Disabled] -------------------------------------------------- -

195

SECTION 3 - display a dialog INPUT DATA


Event 2 of 5 Geometrical parameters of milling - Line The feed rate F [] Coordinates [Cartesian] The axis X X [3] The axis Y Y [3] The axis Z Z [] End of [---] Elongation in the opposite direction [Disabled] -------------------------------------------------- Event 3 of 5 Geometrical parameters of milling - Line The feed rate F [] Coordinates [Cartesian] The axis X X [] The axis Y Y [4] The axis Z Z [] End of [---] Elongation in the opposite direction [Disabled] -------------------------------------------------- Event 4 of 5 Geometrical parameters of milling - Doug The plane [XY] The feed rate F [] The direction [clockwise] Center [the absolute center] The radius of the arc R [1 ] Center of arc XC [3 ] YC [5 ] End point [Absolute] X [2] Y [5] Z [] The final option is [---] -------------------------------------------------- -

196

SECTION 3 - display a dialog INPUT DATA


Event 5 of 5 End of program The spindle is turned off [yes] Coolant is turned off [yes] Z to change the tool [not] Regulation X (relative to the original) [] Regulation Y (relative to the original) [] -------------------------------------------------- The next graphic shows an example of the mapping program using three-dimensional arc:

F8 (CAD) Mill-CAD (milling - CAD) Importing CAD files in the devices CNC milling machines Milltronics. The control unit has the ability to import files to CAD (. Dxf or. Cdl) directly in the interactive program. With this possibility created by the events of lines and arcs that define the geometric parameters of the details. Creating a CAD drawing to be imported. Imported only lines and arcs. The text, splines, polylines, dimension data, boundary drawings are not imported. When you create a file milling CAD geometric parameters of CAD file to form a continuous path from start to finish, with no gaps between objects. There is a parameter that controls the search distance that the control device will be used to find the next object. It is located in the parameters of F7 (Parms) - F1 (Setup) - F1 (Level) - F5 (Misc) and designated as CAD EPSILON. It is necessary to edit the parameter to a value that will work with the files CAD (recommended from 0.0003 to 0.0005). The following is an entry screen for CAD.

197

SECTION 3 - display a dialog INPUT DATA

RunTime = Period Main-Prog-Conv-Mill-DXF = Main Screen-Program-Interactive Mode-Milling-DXF Editing = Editing Current = current next Next = Distance = the distance Route CAD file Correction: canceled CAD File Name Instrument: Enhanced CAD file Length: Diameter: CAD file will be displayed after clicking on the Plane: F1. Press the F1 (Path) (path) to select the starting Clearance: point and direction of the cut. Interpolation: linear (feed) Submission: (ipm = inches / min) Units: absolute / English system Cycle: canceled Pause: (sec = seconds) Spindle: (rpm = r / min) Coolant: Disabled Number details: Input = input; Menn = menu; Strip = delete; Esc = exit;

According to the introduced above route CAD file DXF file will be imported from the "C: \ CK19 \ DXF". You can specify any valid path to the file allocation drawings CAD. Use the F2 (Menu) (Menu), you can select the item from the list of all files stored in the control unit or any of their CDs. When the light is the key F3 (Strip) (Delete), the control unit will delete the file from Z CAD. This is useful for 2-axis geometry. To import the size of the Z key to switch from F3 (Strip) (Delete) that it has not been activated. The only valid option for the field of file extensions CAD - a. DXF and. CDL. This field is set by default DXF. If you want, you can adjust the MISC (optional) so that the default standing CDL.

198

SECTION 3 - display a dialog INPUT DATA


Once the file name has been entered and selected F1 (Input) (Enter) to display all the geometric parameters of the file CAD (lines and arcs) and any additional events in the program. Key F1 (Path) (path) is used to select the trajectory and direction.

RunTime = Period Main-Prog-Conv-Mill-Verf-Graph = Main Screen-Program-Interactive Mode-Routing-CheckGraphical Active = Active Correction: canceled Instrument: Diameter: Length: Submission: Rotation: Coolant: Disabled Number details: Path = path; Pan = Pan; Wind = creation of a window; Auto = automatic scaling; Zoom-= zoom out; Zoom + = zoom in; Limit = limits; Zone = safe zone; Coord = coordinate; Fresh = update; Exit = exit

After selecting the key F1 (Path) (trajectory), the control unit will prompt the operator to select the starting point for the trajectory. The starting point is selected by moving the crosshair to the desired location using the arrow keys F7 - F10 (you can also use buttons move the jog) and press F5 (Enter) (Enter) (or you can use the Enter key on your keyboard). After the initial point is selected, the control unit will prompt the operator to select points in the desired direction of cutting. This point is chosen by the same procedure. The control unit uses these two points to create a path.

199

SECTION 3 - display a dialog INPUT DATA


F9 (Thred) Mill-Thred (Milling - Thread) Use the F9 (Thred) displays the input screen for thread milling. The following shows two examples.

Event 9 of 9 Bytes: 317 of 422 576 128 Thread milling cycle Center for X [] Center Y [0] The initial depth [0] The final depth of Z [-1] Threads per unit [10] Gap [.1] The feed rate [50] Part of the wall [internal] The direction of the thread [right] Correction [inc. ] Passages [forward-] Thread type [cylindrical] Diameter [2]

200

SECTION 3 - display a dialog INPUT DATA


Event 9 of 9 Bytes: 317 of 422 576 128 Thread milling cycle Center for X [] Center Y [0] The initial depth [0] The final depth of Z [-1] Threads per unit [10] Gap [.1] The feed rate [50] Part of the wall [external] The direction of the thread [right] Correction [inc. ] Passages [multipass] Reducing the diameter of [.5] The final diameter [1.5] Thread type [conical] The initial diameter [2] The angle of the cone [3.52]

Note: See information on the correct combination of the correction to the cutting tool, cutting directions on page 312, Section 4. F3 (Drill) Drill (Drill) When you select F3 (Drill), the following menu.

All cycles must begin drilling before the end and after the last hole. This is done by pressing F1 (Start) (Start) and F5 (End) (End).

201

SECTION 3 - display a dialog INPUT DATA


Dialog screens The screen started drilling cycle F3 (Drill) a switch box to select the type of drilling to be performed. In the beginning of a cycle is usually followed by drilling holes for the position, and it ends with the completion of drilling cycle event. Optional drilling cycles are shown below. Boring Below is an interactive screen for drilling.

Event 2 of 3 Bytes: 96 out of 406 159 360 Activate the drilling cycle [Drilling cycle] The feed rate puncture F [5] Spindle incl., Clockwise, rev / min S [2000] Point of Return [Gap] Clearance R [.1] The final depth of [-2]

Note: See more details about the cycle of drilling on page 360, Section 4.

202

SECTION 3 - display a dialog INPUT DATA


Drilling / Pause Below is an interactive screen for drilling / pause.

Event 2 of 3 Bytes: 99 out of 402 259 968 Activate the drilling cycle [Drilling cycle with a pause] The feed rate puncture F [5] Spindle incl., Clockwise, rev / min S [2000] Point of Return [Gap] Clearance R [.1] The final depth of [-2] Pause P [.5]

Note: See more details about the cycle of drilling / pause on page 360, Section 4. Drill / drill bits with a periodic output Below is an interactive screen for drilling cycle with periodic withdrawal of the drill.

203

SECTION 3 - display a dialog INPUT DATA


Event 2 of 3 Bytes: 143 402 227 200 Activate the drilling cycle [Drilling cycle with periodic withdrawal of the drill] The feed rate puncture F [5] Spindle incl., Clockwise, rev / min S [2000] Point of Return [Gap] Clearance R [.1] The final depth of [-2] The first deep V [- .25] The increment in Q [.25] The gap in the periodic output bits D [0.2]

Note: See more information about the drilling cycle with periodic withdrawal of the drill on page 361, Section 4. Struzhkolomnoe drilling Below is an interactive screen for struzhkolomnogo drilling cycle.

Event 1 of 3 Bytes: 108 724 224 134 of Activate the drilling cycle [Struzhkolomny drilling cycle] The feed rate puncture F [5] Spindle incl., Clockwise, rev / min S [2000] Point of Return [Gap] Clearance R [.1] The final depth of [-2] The first deep V [- .25] The increment in Q [.25] The gap in the periodic output bits D [0.2] Step periodic output bits U [.2]

Note: See more details about struzhkolomnom drilling cycle on page 354, Section 4.

204

SECTION 3 - display a dialog INPUT DATA


Boring Below is an interactive screen for boring cycle.

Event 2 of 3 Bytes: 398 032 896 191 of Activate the drilling cycle [Boring Cycle] The feed rate puncture F [5] Spindle incl., Clockwise, rev / min S [2000] Point of Return [Gap] Clearance R [.1] The final depth of [-2]

Note: See more details about the cycle of boring on the page 363, Section 4.

205

SECTION 3 - display a dialog INPUT DATA


Boring / Pause Below is an interactive screen for boring / pause.

Event 2 of 3 Bytes: 219 402 227 200 Activate the drilling cycle [The cycle of boring with a pause] The feed rate puncture F [5] Spindle incl., Clockwise, rev / min S [2000] Point of Return [Gap] Clearance R [.1] The final depth of [-2] Pause P [.5]

Note: See more details about the cycle of boring with a pause on page 369, Section 4. Boring 2 The following shows the dialog screens bore 2.

206

SECTION 3 - display a dialog INPUT DATA


Accelerated boring

Event 2 of 3 Bytes: 281 of 396 361 728 Activate the drilling cycle [The cycle of boring 2] [Accelerated boring] The feed rate puncture F [5] Spindle incl., Clockwise, rev / min S [2000] Point of Return [Gap] Clearance R [.1] The final depth of [-2]

Note: See more details about the accelerated cycle of boring on the page 364, Section 4. Fine boring

207

SECTION 3 - display a dialog INPUT DATA


Event 2 of 3 Bytes: 281 of 396 361 728 Activate the drilling cycle [The cycle of boring 2] [Fine boring] The feed rate puncture F [5] Spindle incl., Clockwise, rev / min S [2000] Point of Return [Gap] Clearance R [.1] The final depth of [-2] Pause P [.3]

Note: See more details about the cycle finish boring page 356, Section 4. Contact boring

Event 2 of 3 Bytes: 315 of 396 361 728 Activate the drilling cycle [The cycle of boring 2] [Contact boring] The feed rate puncture F [5] Spindle incl., Clockwise, rev / min S [2000] The initial depth of the R [.1] The final depth of [-2]

Note: See more details about the feedback loop boring page 365, Section 4.

208

SECTION 3 - display a dialog INPUT DATA


Boring manual

Event 2 of 3 Bytes: 343 of 396 361 728 Activate the drilling cycle [The cycle of boring 2] [Boring manual] The feed rate puncture F [5] Spindle incl., Clockwise, rev / min S [2000] Point of Return [Gap] Clearance R [.1] The final depth of [-2] Pause P [.6]

Note: See more information about the boring cycle manually on page 359, Section 4.

209

SECTION 3 - display a dialog INPUT DATA


Tsekovanie

Event 1 of 3 Bytes: 108 724 224 184 of Activate the drilling cycle [The cycle of boring 2] [Tsekovanie] The feed rate puncture F [5] Spindle incl., Clockwise, rev / min S [2000] Point of Return [Gap] Clearance R [.1] The final depth of [-2] The first deep V [- .25] The increment in Q [.25] Feed rate XY [7] Correction of the cutting tool [inc.] Radius tsekovki [1]

Note: See more details about the cycle tsekovki page 363, Section 4.

210

SECTION 3 - display a dialog INPUT DATA


Drilling holes to screw (Drill-Start-Tap) The following shows the dialog screens for drilling holes for the loop thread. Drilling holes for soft tapping on the right

Event 2 of 3 Bytes: 488 of 396 034 048 Activate the drilling cycle [The cycle of drilling holes to screw] [A soft tapping on the right] The feed rate puncture F [20] Spindle incl., Clockwise, rev / min S [200] Point of Return [Gap] Clearance R [.1] The final depth of [-2] Pause before turning in [.2] Pause after the rotation R [0]

Note: See more details about the cycle ofVerlaine holes for soft tapping on the right page 362, Section 4.

211

SECTION 3 - display a dialog INPUT DATA


Drilling holes for soft tapping on the left

Event 2 of 3 Bytes: 488 of 396 034 048 Activate the drilling cycle [The cycle of drilling holes to screw] [A soft tapping on the left] The feed rate puncture F [14.2857] Spindle incl., Counter-clockwise, rev / min S [200] Point of Return [Gap] Clearance R [.1] The final depth [-2.5] Pause before turning in the [0] Pause after the rotation R [0]

Note: See more details about the cycle ofVerlaine holes for soft tapping on the left of page 355, Section 4.

212

SECTION 3 - display a dialog INPUT DATA


Drilling holes for rigid tapping on the right

Event 1 of 4 Bytes: 206 243 236 864 Activate the drilling cycle [The cycle of drilling holes to screw] [Rigid Tapping on the right (option)] Threads per unit of F [14] Spindle incl., Clockwise, rev / min S [200] Point of Return [Gap] Clearance R [.1] Depth [-2.5] Pause after the rotation R [0]

Note: See more details about the cycle ofVerlaine holes for rigid tapping on the right page 367, Section 4. Drilling holes for rigid tapping on the left

213

SECTION 3 - display a dialog INPUT DATA


Event 1 of 4 Bytes: 206 243 138 560 Activate the drilling cycle [The cycle of drilling holes to screw] [Rigid Tapping on the left side (optional)] Threads per unit of F [14] Spindle incl., Counter-clockwise, rev / min S [200] Point of Return [Gap] Clearance R [.1] Depth [-2.5] Pause after the rotation R [0]

Note: See more details about the cycle ofVerlaine holes for rigid tapping on the left of page 367, Section 4. Drilling holes for rigid tapping on the right with a periodic output bits

Event 1 of 4 Bytes: 243 138 560 241 of Activate the drilling cycle [The cycle of drilling holes to screw] [Rigid Tapping on the right (option) with periodic withdrawal of the drill] Threads per unit of F [14] Spindle incl., Clockwise, rev / min S [200] Point of Return [Gap] Clearance R [.1] Depth [-2.5] The first deep V [- .5] The increment in Q [.5] Pause after the rotation R [0]

Note: See more details about the cycle ofVerlaine threaded holes on the left of page 367, Section 4.

214

SECTION 3 - display a dialog INPUT DATA


Drilling holes for rigid tapping on the left with the conclusion of the periodic drills

Event 1 of 3 Bytes: 130 of 105 644 032 Activate the drilling cycle [The cycle of drilling holes to screw] [Rigid Tapping on the left (option) with periodic withdrawal of the drill] Threads per unit of F [14] Spindle incl., Counter-clockwise, rev / min S [200] Point of Return [Gap] Clearance R [.1] Depth [-2.5] The first deep V [- .5] The increment in Q [.5] Pause after the rotation R [0]

Note: See more details about the cycle ofVerlaine threaded holes on the left of page 367, Section 4. F2 (Pos) Drill-Pos (Drilling-positioning), F3 (Misc) Drill-Misc (Drilling - Options), F4 (Call) Drill-Call (Drilling - Call) Use the F2 (Pos) displays screens of positioning. They are used to input the provisions of the drill.

215

SECTION 3 - display a dialog INPUT DATA

Event 2 of 2 Bytes: 78 out of 198 508 544 Positioning for drilling The feed rate [Express] Coordinates [Cartesian] The X axis X [1] The axis Y Y [2] The axis Z Z [] Mesh openings [---] Openings to the intervals [---]

The screen shown above - is the screen of one of the holes for drilling. One hole will be drilled or cut in the (1,2). If the field Z is entered in this screen size, will be drilled at the depth of the new (1.2) and subsequent holes. If only the size of the typed appears in the Z, Z-axis move to this position, the hole is not drilled and the depth of Z does not change. This can be useful for cleaning fixtures or fasteners.

216

SECTION 3 - display a dialog INPUT DATA

Event 3 of 5 Bytes: 395 608 064 187 of Positioning for drilling The feed rate [Express] Coordinates [Cartesian] The X axis X [1] The axis Y Y [2] The axis Z Z [] The grid of holes [yes] The number of columns [6] The number of lines [5] The interval between the columns [1] The interval between the rows of [.75]

The figure above shows the screen position when drilling with option grid holes. Grid will be drilled holes 6 x 5 with an interval of 1 "X-axis and 0.75" along the axis Y. The first hole at (1,2). Below is a grid pattern of holes created by this phenomenon.

217

SECTION 3 - display a dialog INPUT DATA


The following shows the screen positioning for drilling holes with the option at intervals. Will be drilled or cut six holes, including a hole at (1,2). If in the interval X is 0, the line of holes will be drilled vertically. If the interval Y is 0, the hole will be drilled on a horizontal line.

Event 3 of 5 Bytes: 151 3956440832 Positioning for drilling The feed rate [Express] Coordinates [Cartesian] The X axis X [1] The axis Y Y [2] The axis Z Z [] Openings to the intervals [yes] The number of holes [6] The interval between the columns [1] The interval between the lines [.75]

With the above screen will be created following the grid holes.

218

SECTION 3 - display a dialog INPUT DATA


Pressing the F3 (Misc) (Options) screen is displayed with additional features that makes it possible to program these functions during the drilling cycle. Screen F4 (Call) (Call) provides the ability to call routines during the drilling cycle. These routines typically include provisions for various drilling operations. Note: See more details about the extra features on page 249, Section 3. See more details about the call on page 250, Section 3. F5 (End) (End) Below is an interactive screen for decontamination of the group cycle.

Event 1 of 1 Bytes: 47 out of 85,434,368 Decontamination of drilling cycle

In this screen does not need anything to enter, but it must be stored in the program to stop the cycle of active drilling. If the screen is not saved, every action will cause the loop drilling on the axis Z. F6 (CAD) Drill-CAD (Drilling - CAD) Importing CAD files in the devices CNC milling machines Milltronics. The control unit has the ability to import files to CAD (. Dxf or. Cdl) directly in the interactive program. With this feature imported circle defining the position for drilling. Creating a CAD drawing to be imported. From CAD file is imported to drill only a circle.

219

SECTION 3 - display a dialog INPUT DATA


The following is an entry screen for file Drill CAD.

RunTime = Period Main-Prog-Conv-Drill-DXF = Main Screen-Program-Interactive Mode-Drilling-DXF Editing = Editing Current = current next Next = Distance = the distance Correction: canceled Instrument: Route CAD file Length: CAD File Name Diameter: Enhanced CAD file Plane: Gap: Interpolation: linear (feed) Submission: (ipm = inches / min) Units: absolute / English system Cycle: canceled Pause: (sec = seconds) Spindle: (rpm = r / min) Coolant: Disabled Number details: Input = input; Menn = menu; Strip = delete; Esc = exit;

According to the introduced above route CAD file DXF file will be imported from the "C: \ CK19 \ DXF". You can specify any valid path to the file allocation drawings CAD. Use the F2 (Menu) (Menu), you can select the item from the list of all files stored in the control unit or on any of the disks. When the light is the key F3 (Strip) (Delete), the control unit will delete the file from Z CAD. To import the depths of the Z key to switch from F3 (Strip) (Delete) that it has not been activated. The only valid option for the field of file extensions CAD - a. DXF and. CDL. This field is set by default DXF. If you want, you can adjust the MISC (optional) so that the default standing CDL.

220

SECTION 3 - display a dialog INPUT DATA


Drill CAD sorts hole size. This allows the operator to select what you want to drill holes. After selecting the F1 (Input) (Enter) comes a list of openings:

RunTime = Period Main-Prog-Conv-Drill-DXF = Main Screen-Program-Interactive Mode-Drilling-DXF Editing = Editing Current = current next Next = Distance = the distance Correction: canceled Diam. = Diameter of Instrument: Holes = hole Length: Diameter: Plane: Gap: Interpolation: linear (feed) Submission: (ipm = inches / min) Units: absolute / English system Cycle: canceled Choose the hole that you want to drill. Pause: (sec = seconds) Spindle: (rpm = r / min) Coolant: Disabled Number details: Start = start; Set = setting; Reset = Reset; All = all; None = no; Togle = shift; PgUp = Page Up; PgDn = page down; Abort = end; Drive = CD

Use the function keys to select the desired holes. After pressing the F1 (Start) (Start) are included in the selected hole drilling cycle. The operator can change the feed rate for drilling depth and drilling cycles are different.

221

SECTION 3 - display a dialog INPUT DATA

Example of drilling program Event 0 out of 17 Installing the software The name of the program [Example of drilling programs]

Dimensions The absolute] Units [The English system] Working coordinate [---] Installation Notes: [ ] [] [] [] [] [] -------------------------------------------------- Event 1 of 17 Change of tool Tool The situation in the tool change Number of tools Description of instrument Number of the next tool [Cut] X [] Y [] T [1] [DRILL] []

Rotational speed of spindle S [2000] The direction of rotation of the spindle [Clockwise] Coolant [irrigation] -------------------------------------------------- 222

SECTION 3 - display a dialog INPUT DATA


Event 2 of 17 Activation of drilling cycle [Drilling cycle] The feed rate for puncture F [20] Spindle incl., Clockwise, rev / min S [] Return point [Gap] Gap R [.1] The final depth of [-2 ] -------------------------------------------------- Event 3 of 17 Positioning for drilling The feed rate Coordinates The X-axis The Y-axis The Z-axis [Faster] [Cartesian] X [1] Y [1] (Z to 2 ") Z []

Mesh openings [---] The holes at intervals of [---] -------------------------------------------------- Event 4 of 17 Positioning for drilling The feed rate Coordinates The X-axis The Y-axis The Z-axis [Faster] [Cartesian] X [2] Y [] (Z to 2 ") Z []

Mesh openings [---] The holes at intervals of [---] -------------------------------------------------- Event 5 of 17 Positioning for drilling The feed rate Coordinates The X-axis The Y-axis The Z-axis [Faster] [Cartesian] X [] Y [] Z [3] (Z to 3 "to go to clip)

223

SECTION 3 - display a dialog INPUT DATA


Mesh openings [---] The holes at intervals of [---] -------------------------------------------------- Event 6 of 17 Positioning for drilling The feed rate Coordinates The X-axis The Y-axis The Z-axis [Faster] [Cartesian] X [4] Y [] (Z to -1 ") Z [-1]

Mesh openings [---] The holes at intervals of [---] -------------------------------------------------- Event 7 of 17 Positioning for drilling The feed rate Coordinates The X-axis The Y-axis The Z-axis [Faster] [Cartesian] X [5] Y [] (Z to -1 ") Z []

Mesh openings [---] The holes at intervals of [---] -------------------------------------------------- Event 8 of 17 Decontamination of drilling cycle -------------------------------------------------- Event 9 of 17 Change of tool Tool The situation in the tool change [Cut] X [] Y [] Number of tools T [2] Description of instrument [BORING] Number of the next tool [] Rotational speed of spindle S [2000] The direction of rotation of the spindle [Clockwise]

224

SECTION 3 - display a dialog INPUT DATA


Coolant [irrigation] -------------------------------------------------- Event 10 of 17 Activation of drilling cycle [Boring Cycle] The feed rate for puncture F [20] Spindle incl., Clockwise, rev / min S [] Return point [Gap] Gap R [.1] The final depth of [-2 ] -------------------------------------------------- Event 11 of 17 Positioning for drilling The feed rate Coordinates The X-axis The Y-axis The Z-axis [Faster] [Cartesian] X [1] Y [1] (Z to 2 ") Z []

Mesh openings [---] The holes at intervals of [---] -------------------------------------------------- Event 12 of 17 Positioning for drilling The feed rate Coordinates The X-axis The Y-axis The Z-axis [Faster] [Cartesian] X [2] Y [] (Z to 2 ") Z []

Mesh openings [---] The holes at intervals of [---] -------------------------------------------------- Event 13 of 17 Positioning for drilling The feed rate Coordinates The X-axis [Faster] [Cartesian] X []

225

SECTION 3 - display a dialog INPUT DATA


The Y-axis The Z-axis Y [] Z [3] (Z to 3 "to go to clip)

Mesh openings [---] The holes at intervals of [---] -------------------------------------------------- Event 14 of 17 Positioning for drilling The feed rate Coordinates The X-axis The Y-axis The Z-axis [Faster] [Cartesian] X [4] Y [] (Z to -1 ") Z [-1]

Mesh openings [---] The holes at intervals of [---] -------------------------------------------------- Event 15 of 17 Positioning for drilling The feed rate Coordinates The X-axis The Y-axis The Z-axis [Faster] [Cartesian] X [5] Y [] (Z to -1 ") Z []

Mesh openings [---] The holes at intervals of [---] -------------------------------------------------- Event 16 of 17 Decontamination of drilling cycle -------------------------------------------------- Event 17 of 17 End of program Spindle off [Yes] Coolant off [Yes] Z to the tool change [No] Regulation X (relative to the original) [] Regulation Y (relative to the original) [] Note: See more information about the group cycles on page 345, Section 4.

226

SECTION 3 - display a dialog INPUT DATA

227

SECTION 3 - display a dialog INPUT DATA


F4 (Bolt) (Bolt) The following shows the dialog screens for drilling holes for screws that are displayed when you select the corresponding cycles. In the first part of the screen contains the information used to set the appropriate drilling cycle, while the second part - the information used to set the cycle of drilling holes for bolts.

228

SECTION 3 - display a dialog INPUT DATA


Event 2 of 3 Bytes: 385 056 768 115 of The cycle performance of bolt holes [The cycle of drilling holes for screws] The feed rate puncture F [10] Spindle incl., Clockwise, rev / min S [1000] Point of Return [Gap] Gap R [.1] The final depth of [-2] Event 2 of 3 Bytes: 385 056 768 115 of The cycle performance of bolt holes [The cycle of drilling holes for bolts with a pause] The feed rate puncture F [10] Spindle incl., Clockwise, rev / min S [1000] Point of Return [Gap] Gap R [.1] The final depth of [-2] Pause P [1] Center bolt hole [-1] [1] The radius of bolt holes [2] (-R, if the counterclockwise) Angle of 1st hole [0] Number of openings carried out [6] Number of holes at 360 degrees. [6]

Center bolt hole [-1] [1] The radius of bolt holes [2] (-R, if the counterclockwise) Angle of 1st hole [0] Number of openings carried out [6] Number of holes at 360 degrees. [6]

229

SECTION 3 - display a dialog INPUT DATA

230

SECTION 3 - display a dialog INPUT DATA


Event 2 of 3 Bytes: 229 385 056 768 The cycle performance of bolt holes [The cycle of drilling bolt holes / drilling with periodic withdrawal of the drill] The feed rate puncture F [10] Spindle incl., Clockwise, rev / min S [1000] Point of Return [Gap] Gap R [.1] The final depth of [-2] The first deep V [- .25] The increment in Q [.25] Gap the periodic output bits D [.1] Center bolt hole [-1] [1] The radius of bolt holes [2] (-R, if the counterclockwise) Angle of 1st hole [0] Number of openings carried out [6] Number of holes at 360 degrees. [6] Event 2 of 3 Bytes: 229 385 056 768 The cycle performance of bolt holes [The cycle of drilling bolt holes with periodic withdrawal of the drill] The feed rate puncture F [10] Spindle incl., Clockwise, rev / min S [1000] Point of Return [Gap] Gap R [.1] The final depth of [-2] The first deep V [- .25] The increment in Q [.25] Gap the periodic output bits D [.1] The increment of the periodic output bits U [.2] Center bolt hole [-1] [1] The radius of bolt holes [2] (-R, if the counterclockwise) Angle of 1st hole [0] Number of openings carried out [6] Number of holes at 360 degrees. [6]

231

SECTION 3 - display a dialog INPUT DATA

232

SECTION 3 - display a dialog INPUT DATA


Event 2 of 3 Bytes: 344 of 385 056 768 The cycle performance of bolt holes [The cycle of boring bolt holes with a pause] The feed rate puncture F [10] Spindle incl., Clockwise, rev / min S [1000] Point of Return [Gap] Gap R [.1] The final depth of [-2] Pause P [.5] Center bolt hole [-1] [1] The radius of bolt holes [2] (-R, if the counterclockwise) Angle of 1st hole [0] Number of openings carried out [6] Number of holes at 360 degrees. [6] Event 2 of 3 Bytes: 344 of 385 056 768 The cycle performance of bolt holes [The cycle of boring bolt holes] The feed rate puncture F [10] Spindle incl., Clockwise, rev / min S [1000] Point of Return [Gap] Gap R [.1] The final depth of [-2]

Center bolt hole [-1] [1] The radius of bolt holes [2] (-R, if the counterclockwise) Angle of 1st hole [0] Number of openings carried out [6] Number of holes at 360 degrees. [6]

233

SECTION 3 - display a dialog INPUT DATA

234

SECTION 3 - display a dialog INPUT DATA


Event 2 of 3 Bytes: 396 of 385 056 768 The cycle performance of bolt holes [The cycle of boring bolt holes 2] [Fast boring] The feed rate puncture F [10] Spindle incl., Clockwise, rev / min S [1000] Point of Return [Gap] Gap R [.1] The final depth of [-2] Center bolt hole [-1] [1] The radius of bolt holes [2] (-R, if the counterclockwise) Angle of 1st hole [0] Number of openings carried out [6] Number of holes at 360 degrees. [6] Event 2 of 3 Bytes: 446 of 380 862 464 The cycle performance of bolt holes [The cycle of boring bolt holes 2] [Fine boring] The feed rate puncture F [10] Spindle incl., Clockwise, rev / min S [1000] Point of Return [Gap] Gap R [.1] The final depth of [-2] Pause P [.7] Center bolt hole [-1] [1] The radius of bolt holes [2] (-R, if the counterclockwise) Angle of 1st hole [0] Number of openings carried out [6] Number of holes at 360 degrees. [6]

235

SECTION 3 - display a dialog INPUT DATA

236

SECTION 3 - display a dialog INPUT DATA


Event 2 of 3 Bytes: 380 862 464 500 of The cycle performance of bolt holes [The cycle of boring bolt holes 2] [Contact boring] The feed rate puncture F [10] Spindle incl., Clockwise, rev / min S [1000] The initial depth of the R [.1] The final depth of [-2] Event 2 of 3 Bytes: 548 of 380 862 464 The cycle performance of bolt holes [The cycle of boring bolt holes 2] [Boring manual] The feed rate puncture F [10] Spindle incl., Clockwise, rev / min S [1000] Point of Return [Gap] Gap R [.1] The final depth of [-2] Pause P [1] Center bolt hole [-1] [1] The radius of bolt holes [2] (-R, if the counterclockwise) Angle of 1st hole [0] Number of openings carried out [6] Number of holes at 360 degrees. [6]

Center bolt hole [-1] [1] The radius of bolt holes [2] (-R, if the counterclockwise) Angle of 1st hole [0] Number of openings carried out [6] Number of holes at 360 degrees. [6]

237

SECTION 3 - display a dialog INPUT DATA

238

SECTION 3 - display a dialog INPUT DATA


Event 1 of 2 Bytes: 105 644 032 197 of The cycle performance of bolt holes [The cycle of boring bolt holes 2] [Tsekovanie] The feed rate puncture F [10] Spindle incl., Clockwise, rev / min S [1000] Point of Return [Gap] Gap R [.1] The final depth of [-1] The first deep V [- .25] The increment in Q [- .3] Feed rate XY [7] correction [inc.] Radius tsekovki [1] Center bolt hole [-1] [1] The radius of bolt holes [2] (-R, if the counter-clockwise) Angle of 1st hole [0] Number of openings carried out [6] Number of holes at 360 degrees. [6]

239

SECTION 3 - display a dialog INPUT DATA

240

SECTION 3 - display a dialog INPUT DATA


Event 2 of 3 Bytes: 380 862 464 821 of The cycle performance of bolt holes [The cycle of tapping on the bolt holes] [The soft tapping on the left] The feed rate puncture F [10] Spindle incl., Clockwise, rev / min S [1000] Point of Return [Gap] Gap R [.1] The final depth of [-2] Pause before turning in [.2] Pause after the turn of P [0] Center bolt hole [-1] [1] The radius of bolt holes [2] (-R, if the counterclockwise) Angle of 1st hole [0] Number of openings carried out [6] Number of holes at 360 degrees. [6] Event 2 of 3 Bytes: 601 of 380 862 464 The cycle performance of bolt holes [The cycle of tapping on the bolt holes] [The soft tapping on the right] The feed rate puncture F [10] Spindle incl., Clockwise, rev / min S [1000] Point of Return [Gap] Gap R [.1] The final depth of [-2] Pause before turning in [.2] Pause after the turn of P [0] Center bolt hole [-1] [1] The radius of bolt holes [2] (-R, if the counterclockwise) Angle of 1st hole [0] Number of openings carried out [6] Number of holes at 360 degrees. [6]

241

SECTION 3 - display a dialog INPUT DATA

Event 2 of 3 Bytes: 877 of 380 862 464 The cycle performance of bolt holes [The cycle of tapping on the bolt holes] [Rigid Tapping on the left side (optional)] Threads per unit of P [10] Spindle incl., Counter-clockwise, rev / min S [400] Point of Return [Gap] Gap R [.1] Depth [-2] Pause after the turn of P [0] Center bolt hole [-1] [1] The radius of bolt holes [2] (-R, if the counterclockwise) Angle of 1st hole [0] Number of openings carried out [6] Number of holes at 360 degrees. [6]

Event 2 of 3 Bytes: 713 of 380 862 464 The cycle performance of bolt holes [The cycle of tapping on the bolt holes] [Rigid Tapping on the right (option)] Threads per unit of P [10] Spindle incl., Clockwise, rev / min S [400] Point of Return [Gap] Gap R [.1] Depth [-2] Pause after the turn of P [0] Center bolt hole [-1] [1] The radius of bolt holes [2] (-R, if the counterclockwise) Angle of 1st hole [0] Number of openings carried out [6] Number of holes at 360 degrees. [6]

242

SECTION 3 - display a dialog INPUT DATA


Event 2 of 3 Bytes: 929 380 862 464 of The cycle performance of bolt holes [Rigid Tapping on the right (option) with periodic withdrawal of the drill] Threads per unit of F [10] Spindle incl., Clockwise, rev / min S [400] Point of Return [Gap] Gap R [.1] Depth [-2] The first deep V [-1] The increment of Q [1] Pause after the rotation R [0] Center bolt hole [-1] [1] The radius of bolt holes [2] (-R, if the counterclockwise) Angle of 1st hole [0] Number of openings carried out [6] Number of holes at 360 degrees. [6] Event 2 of 3 Bytes: 988 of 380 862 464 The cycle performance of bolt holes [Rigid Tapping on the left (option) with periodic withdrawal of the drill] Threads per unit of F [10] Spindle incl., Counter-clockwise, rev / min S [400] Point of Return [Gap] Gap R [.1] Depth [-2] The first deep V [-1] The increment of Q [1] Pause after the rotation R [0] Center bolt hole [-1] [1] The radius of bolt holes [2] (-R, if the counterclockwise) Angle of 1st hole [0] Number of openings carried out [6] Number of holes at 360 degrees. [6]

The example program execution bolt holes Event 0 of 3 Installing the software The name of the program [The example program execution bolt holes]

Dimensions The absolute] Units [The English system] Working coordinate [---] Installation Notes: [] [] [] [] [] [] -------------------------------------------------- Event 1 of 3 Change of tool Tool The situation in the tool change Number of tools Description of instrument 243 [Cut] X [] Y [] T [1] [DRILL]

SECTION 3 - display a dialog INPUT DATA


Number of the next tool [] Rotational speed of spindle S [2000] The direction of rotation of the spindle [Clockwise] Coolant [Irrigation] -------------------------------------------------- Event 2 of 3 The cycle performance of bolt holes [The cycle of drilling holes for screws] The feed rate for puncture F [10] Spindle incl., Clockwise, rev / min S [] Return point [Gap] Gap R [.1] The final depth of [-2] Center bolt hole The radius of bolt holes [-4] [2] [-3] (-R, if counter-clockwise) [90] [8] [14]

Angle of 1st hole Number of holes running Number of holes at 360 degrees.

-------------------------------------------------- Event 3 of 3 End of program Spindle off Coolant off Z to the tool change [Yes] [Yes] [No] [] []

Regulation X (relative to baseline) Regulation Y (relative to baseline)

244

SECTION 3 - display a dialog INPUT DATA

Notes: See more details about the program execution bolt holes in the p 351, Section 4. And drilling cycles, and cycles run bolt holes dialog entry screens will be different versions of the software below # .116. They also translated into other languages and in English translation # .110. The input fields are the same in all versions of the software, but the appearance and the stages of transition to the input screen is slightly different. For each cycle in older versions of some keys appear to the programmer can choose the type of cycle to be done, and not the field to the desired switching cycle, which is available in more modern versions. If the interactive program is created in an older version of the drilling cycle or run bolt holes, it can be edited in the new versions of software. However, if the interactive program is created in a more modern version of the drilling cycle or run bolt holes, it can not be edited using older versions of software. Fatal Error 100 "Disk read error" (error reading disk) will appear when trying to run a series of drill holes or run under the bolts of a new type of interactive program using an older version of the software. If the program is interactive with the cycles of drilling holes for bolts execution of a new type is edited in older versions of software, and a fatal error 100 is issued, the control unit will incorrectly change the text in the program. It will destroy the event, which contains a series of drill holes or run a new type of bolt. The control unit generates program text corresponding to the input data in an interactive program, and the text program will run machines. Time is a program that creates a control device is identical for both types, so you can edit and execute in the new and old versions of software, no matter in which it was created.

245

SECTION 3 - display a dialog INPUT DATA


F5 (TChng) Change Tool If the machine you want to install a new tool to use screen tool change. The two screens of the tool change is the screen calling and screen tool tool changer. Call Screen tool used to launch a new set of corrections to the tool without the physical shift. Screen Machine tool changer sets the mode and the tool change is a new tool. When you change or correction tool call H and D, which are activated will be the same as the number of the instrument. For security purposes, when you change the machine tool manually always should be in the mode of the tool change. Showing below displays the tool. Dialog screen to display the tool is as follows. Tool change is not carried out. Caused by the correction of the instrument. Commands are executed, and the spindle coolant.

Event 1 of 3 Bytes: 209 out of 1,023,932,928 Change of tool Tool [Challenge] Tool number T [1] Description of the tool [1/4 "drill bit] Spindle speed S [600] The direction of spindle rotation [clockwise] Coolant [irrigation] Screw [---]

Interactive screen for changing tools.

246

SECTION 3 - display a dialog INPUT DATA


Event 1 of 3 Bytes: 149 out of 1,023,932,928 Change of tool Tool [Change] Position Tool Changer X [-10] Y [-10] Tool number T [1] Description of the tool [1/4 "drill bit] Number of the next tool [] Spindle speed S [600] The direction of spindle rotation [clockwise] Coolant [irrigation]

If you make a tool change position Z-axis is in the tool change position or higher, moving XY is produced before any movement on the axis Z. If Z is lower than the position tool changer, Z moves to the position of the tool changer, and then will move X and Y. If the number of X and Y are not introduced during the tool change will only move Z. The field numbers next tool is used to change the device for instruments installed in any slot. The holder of the instrument will produce a next-indexing tool during the cutting of the active tool. Note: See more information about the tool change on page 390Section 5.

If the machine is equipped with a chip removal system, the option will be available to enable (or disable) the screw, and while it is running.

247

SECTION 3 - display a dialog INPUT DATA


Event 1 of 3 Bytes: 188 out of 1,023,932,928 Change of tool Tool [Challenge] Position Tool Changer X [-10] Y [-10] Tool number T [1] Description of the tool [1/4 "drill bit] Number of the next tool [] Spindle speed S [600] The direction of spindle rotation [clockwise] Coolant [irrigation] Screw [inc.] Screw Time incl. [10] minutes

248

SECTION 3 - display a dialog INPUT DATA


F6 (Misc) (Additional Functions) When you create a program may need to add some additional features, such as command and stop the coolant. This is done through a screen F6 (Misc) (Additional Functions). The following shows the dialog screens for extra features. The additional line is used to enter any M-code is not included in the standard list.

Event 1 of 1 Bytes: 47 out of 85,422,080 Additional Features Spindle speed S [] Team spindle [---] Team coolant [OFF]. Correction [off]. Stop command [the program] The team return [from XYZ to 0] Cutting [---] Programming mode [absolute] Working coordinate [---] The feed rate F [] Additional line: []

249

SECTION 3 - display a dialog INPUT DATA


Event 1 of 1 Bytes: 47 out of 85,422,080 Additional Features Spindle speed S [2000] Team spindle [clockwise] Team coolant [irrigation] Correction [left] Stop command [---] The team return [---] Cutting [ongoing] Programming mode [---] Working coordinate [---] The feed rate F [] Additional line: []

F7 (Call) (Call) The screen program call is used to transfer the program to another program for a certain number of cycles. Below is a dialog screen to invoke the program.

Event 2 of 4 Bytes: 105 644 032 291 of Calling the program Program number [900] Options [cycles] Number of cycles [2]

If the number of cycles in the field is empty, the routine is called once. Note: See more information about the calling routine on page 402Section 5.

250

SECTION 3 - display a dialog INPUT DATA


Calls to subroutines can be used to create multiple identical parts in a row or grid. The screen shown below, can be used to call a subroutine for cutting grooves.

Event 2 of 3 Bytes: 108 of 105 578 496 Calling the program Program number [900] Options [Grid] 1st position of the X [2] Y [3] Number of columns [5] The number of rows [4] Intervals X [3] The intervals Y [3]

F8 (Spec) (Specifications) These screens are designed to install or configure various parameters of the CNC Centurion. The parameters control various functions such as tool offset, scale factors, rotation angles, mirroring, floating zero and the parameters listed in Appendix A. The following keys.

251

SECTION 3 - display a dialog INPUT DATA


F1 (Parms) Spec-Parms (Specifications - Options) Below is a dialog screen to adjust the parameters.

Event 1 of 1 Setting

Bytes: 47 out of 85,422,080

Installation Type [control] The parameter P [97] The value of [.25]

When loading a parameter set to the specified amount. When adjusting the parameters specified value is added to the current configuration. F2 (Tools) Spec-Tools (Specifications - Tools) Below is an interactive screen for setting tool offset.

Event 1 of 1 Bytes: 47 out of 85,422,080 Installing the tool offset (Note: This will affect only a tool, currently active) Type of installation [download] Correction of the instrument D [.25] H [.75]

Note: See more details about the correction of the length of the tool on page 331, Section 4.

252

SECTION 3 - display a dialog INPUT DATA


Below is a dialog screen to adjust the tool offset.

253

SECTION 3 - display a dialog INPUT DATA


Event 1 of 1 Bytes: 47 out of 85,422,080 Installing the tool offset (Note: This will affect only a tool, currently active) Installation Type [control] Correction of the instrument D [.1] H [.15]

254

SECTION 3 - display a dialog INPUT DATA

F4 (Scale) Spec-Scale (Specification - Scale) Below is a dialog screen to activate the zoom.

Event 1 of 1 Bytes: 47 out of 85,422,080 Setting the scale factor Scale [On]. The scaling factors [regulation] Correction of the instrument D [.1] H [.15]

Below is a dialog screen to turn off the scale factor.

Event 1 of 1 Bytes: 47 out of 85,422,080 Setting the scale factor Scale [Off].

Note: See more information about installing and cancel the zoom to page 332, Section 4.

255

SECTION 3 - display a dialog INPUT DATA


F5 (Rot) Spec-Rot (Specifications - Turn) Below is a dialog screen to activate the turn.

Event 1 of 1 Bytes: 47 out of 85,422,080 Set the angle of rotation Turn [On]. The angle of rotation of AA [45] Start turning X [0] Y [0] Z [0]

Note: See more details about the rotation of the coordinate system on page 338, Section 4. Below is an interactive screen for setting the angle of rotation in three dimensions.

256

SECTION 3 - display a dialog INPUT DATA


Event 1 of 1 Bytes: 47 out of 85,422,080 Set the angle of rotation Rotate the [3D] The plane of the [XYZ] The angle of AB [45] Sinus scale [20] Note: Do not work function correction to the cutting tool trigonometric aid chamfering (, C) and rounded corners (, R).

Rotation in three dimensions is used to rotate the parts out of the plane.

257

SECTION 3 - display a dialog INPUT DATA


F6 (Mirr) Spec-Mirr (Specs - Mirror) Below is a dialog screen to enable mirroring.

Event 1 of 1 Bytes: 47 out of 85,422,080 Setting the mirroring Mirroring [On]. Axis mirroring X [0] Y [0] Z [0]

Below is a dialog screen to disable mirroring.

Event 1 of 1 Bytes: 47 out of 85,422,080 Setting the mirroring Mirroring [Off].

Note: See more information about installing and cancel mirroring on page 344, Section 4.

258

SECTION 3 - display a dialog INPUT DATA


F7 (Flz) Spec-Flz (Specifications - Floating zero) Below is a dialog screen to install a floating zero.

Event 1 of 1 Bytes: 47 out of 85,422,080 Install a floating zero The axis X [0] Y [0] Z [0]

Note: See more about navigating the zeros of p 374, Section 4.

259

SECTION 3 - display a dialog INPUT DATA


F8 (Text) Spec-Text (Specifications - Text) Below is an interactive screen for text.

260

SECTION 3 - display a dialog INPUT DATA


Event 1 of 2 Bytes: 105 of 229 900 288 Text [Solid] The position of the text X [1] Y [2] Clearance R [.1] The depth Z Z [- .03] The feed rate puncture ZF [20] Feed rate XY F [20] Text size X X [.25] Text size Y Y [.5] A string of text [PART V-36-16]

Interactive screen for the text on the arc:

Event 1 of 2 Bytes: 225 705 984 113 of Text [On the arc] direction [clockwise] Center the text X [1] Y [2] The radius of the text [1] The initial angle [200] Clearance R [.1] The depth Z Z [- .03] The feed rate puncture ZF [20] Feed rate XY F [20] Text size X X [.3] Text size Y Y [.3] A string of text [MILLTRONICS]

F9 (Subs) (Sub) These screens are used to define and call subroutines. Displays the following keys:

261

SECTION 3 - display a dialog INPUT DATA


F1 (Gosub) Subs-Gosub (Sub - Jump to a subroutine) The function uses Gosub to subroutine call. The screen below is called a sub-15 times. If the number of cycles is not filled, the subroutine will be called one time.

Event 1 of 2 Bytes: 62 220 725 248 Go to subroutine Number of sub [1] Options [cycles] Number of cycles [15]

Another option is to go to the sub-screen is used to call a subroutine and its repetition in a right manner.

Event 1 of 7 Bytes: 371 220 659 712 of Go to subroutine Number of sub [1] Options [Grid] 1st position x [0] Y [0] Number of rows [4] The number of columns [3] Intervals X [3] The intervals Y [2.5]

262

SECTION 3 - display a dialog INPUT DATA


Note: Another option - a subroutine call with the interval between each XY. Functions of the grid and the intervals are similar to those functions in the drilling cycles on page 212, Section 3. F2 (Start) Subs-Start (Sub - Run) Start-up screen subroutine defines the beginning of the subroutine.

Event 2 of 7 Bytes: 371 220 659 712 of Starting routines Number of sub [1]

F3 (End) Subs-End (Sub - Conclusion) Complete screen subroutine determines the end of the subroutine.

Event 6 of 7 Bytes: 371 220 659 712 of The completion routines

263

SECTION 3 - display a dialog INPUT DATA


Example programs using subprograms Interactive Program C: \ CNC \ PARTS \ P0523 Event 0 out of 12 Installing the software The name of the program [ ]

Dimensions The absolute] Units [The English system] Working coordinate [---] Installation Notes: [] [] [] [] [] [] -------------------------------------------------- Event 1 of 12 Change of tool Tool The situation in the tool change [Cut] X [] Y [] Number of tools T [1] Description of instrument [] Number of the next tool [] Rotational speed of spindle S [600] The direction of rotation of the spindle [Clockwise] Coolant [irrigation] -------------------------------------------------- Event 2 of 12 Go to the subroutine Number of subroutines Options 1st position [1] [Grid] X [0] Y [0]

Number of rows [4] Number of columns [3] The interval X [3] The interval Y [2.5] -------------------------------------------------- -

264

SECTION 3 - display a dialog INPUT DATA


Event 3 of 12 Change of tool Tool [Cut] The situation in the tool change X [] Y [] Number of tools T [2] Description of instrument [] Number of the next tool [] Rotational speed of spindle S [1200] The direction of rotation of the spindle [Clockwise] Coolant [Fog] -------------------------------------------------- Event 4 of 12 Go to the subroutine Number of subroutines Options 1st position [2] [Grid] X [0] Y [0]

Number of rows [4] Number of columns [3] The interval X [3] The interval Y [2.5] -------------------------------------------------- Event 5 of 12 Starting routines Number of subroutines [1] -------------------------------------------------- Event 6 of 12 Installing the software milling of deep cavities Center recess X Y center of the notch [0 ] [0 ]

Feed rate XY [10 ] The feed rate puncture Z [5 ] Return point [Gap] Gap [.1 ] The final depth of Z [- .4 ] First the depth Z [- .1 ] The increment of Z [.1 ] -------------------------------------------------- -

265

SECTION 3 - display a dialog INPUT DATA


Event 7 of 12 Internal finishing the round cut-outs The radius of notch Z down Direction of cut [1 ]

[incision] [counter-clockwise (countermilling)] Correction [inc.] -------------------------------------------------- Event 8 of 12 The completion routines -------------------------------------------------- Event 9 of 12 Starting routines Number of subroutines [2] -------------------------------------------------- Event 10 of 12 Text [On the arc] direction [clockwise] Center the text X [0] Y [0] The radius of the text [1 ] The initial angle [180 ] Gap R [.1] The depth Z Z [- .03] The feed rate puncture Z Feed rate XY Text size X Text size Y F [20] F [30] X [.3] Y [.4]

A string of text [MILLTRONICS] -------------------------------------------------- Event 11 of 12 The completion routines -------------------------------------------------- Event 12 of 12 End of program Spindle off [No] Coolant is turned off [no] Z to the tool change

[No]

Regulation X (relative to the original) [] Regulation Y (relative to the original) []

266

SECTION 3 - display a dialog INPUT DATA


-------------------------------------------------- With the above program is executed as follows:

End of program Below is a dialog screen to complete the program.

Event 1 of 1 Bytes: 47 out of 85,422,080 End of program The spindle is turned off [yes] Coolant is turned off [yes] Z to change the tool [yes] Regulation X (relative to the original) [] Regulation Y (relative to the original) []

267

PART 4 - PRE-FUNCTION (G-CODES)


These codes are used if the operator programs the Centurion in text mode or in manual data entry. They are also generated from the interactive program. It should be noted that most programmers, especially beginners, use interactive programming mode. If you plan to use the text-mode programming, you need to pay special attention to this section as it explains the codes. If you plan to use the interactive programming mode, you can skim this section and concentrate on the section of the dialog programming. Preparatory function code is a two-digit number preceded by the letter G. Preparatory functions are used to determine the mode of operation of the program and are divided into two types: onetime and modal. One-time G-codes are only valid during the execution of the block in which they are located. With the help of modal G-code set operating modes, which act as long as they do not replace other modes in the same category. If the G-code is less than 10, enter zero is not necessarily (G2 or G02). The table below lists the G-codes adopted by the CNC Centurion. A detailed explanation of each code is given below in this manual. G-codes 1 00 01 02 03 04 09 10 11 12 17 18 19 * 20 *21 *22 *23 24
*

Active powerFast positioning Linear interpolation The circular / helical interpolation clockwise The circular / helical interpolation counterclockwise Pause Exact stop Data Set incl. Installing the data off. Cleaning the floating zero The XY plane The plane XZ or ZX The plane YZ Input in inches Input in metric units How to disable the safe zone Enable checking the safe zone Cleaning the deep recesses of round X

Modal X X X X

Disposable

X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X

G20, G21, G22 and G23 are selected on the parameters at power on.

268

PART 4 - PRE-FUNCTION (G-CODES)


1 25 26 28-30 31 32 33 34 35 36 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 49 50 51 52 53 54 55-59 60 61 63 64 65 68 69 Active powerInternal finishing round of deep grooves Outdoor finishing round of deep grooves Return to the zero point Z to the gap Z to the tool change The processing cycle ends Cleaning deep rectangular grooves Internal finishing of deep rectangular grooves Outdoor finishing deep rectangular grooves Thread milling cycle Cancel correction on the cutting tool Correction of the cutting tool on the left Correction of the cutting tool on the right Correction of H added Correction H be deducted Automatic correction of the cutting tool on the left Automatic correction of the cutting tool on the right Automatic correction of the cutting tool off. Cancel the correction H Cancel zoom Setting the zoom Setting the local coordinate system The coordinate system of the machine Operating a system of coordinates (G540. .. G549) Working Coordinate System 2-6 (G5 # 0 ... G5 # 9) Unidirectional positioning Exact stop mode Tapping mode Cutting Blocking traffic / Call Program Setting the rotation Cancel turn Modal Disposable X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X

269

PART 4 - PRE-FUNCTION (G-CODES)


1 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 98 99 271 666 990 991 995 Cancel mirroring Setting the mirroring Execute bolt holes Drilling with periodic withdrawal of the drill Tapping the left Tsekovanie Fine boring Specialized drilling cycle Boring manual Specialized drilling cycle Cancellation of group cycle Boring Drilling / pause Periodic withdrawal of the drill / drill Tapping on the right Boring Accelerated boring Contact boring Rigid tapping Boring / pause The absolute size of Incremental dimensions Changing the working position (Set floating zero) Filing delayed Serve in a minute Feed per revolution Return the group cycle at baseline Return of the loop group on the level of the point R Cleaning the deep recesses The cycle performance of polygons Saving the settings Reading parameters Read byte parameters Active powerX Modal X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X Disposable

270

PART 4 - PRE-FUNCTION (G-CODES)


1 996 997 998 Active powerSet byte parameters Calling the error Sound signal Modal Disposable X X X

Note: Unresolved G-code cause an error 549. Interpolation functions There are four types of interpolation: G0 Rapid traverse, linear G1 Submission, linear Fits G2, clockwise G3 arcs counterclockwise Positioning (G00) with rapid movement (modal) For example: G0 X3 Y2 G00 indicates the positioning during fast movement. You do not need to program the speed of fast moving, because the rate parameters are given in advance. You can adjust speeds to quickly move through the switch feedrate override button on the machine operator. G00 moves the tool with the increased speed in the working position on the coordinate system for both incremental and absolute for the teams. Format: G00 ~ -; Where ~ - is: a combination of optional addresses axes (X, Y, Z, A, B, C), such as XYZA-...

271

PART 4 - PRE-FUNCTION (G-CODES)


The programmed feed rate remains in the magazine and feed rate can be activated by removing the G00 command with the command G01. Movement of all axes in the G00 will be interpolated mode, all axis will reach the end point at a time.
Endpoint

The tool path

The Y-axis STARTING POINT The X axis

Note: Rapid traverse in the G00 command is set separately for each axis of the machine manufacturer. Thus, the rate of rapid movement can not be specified in the address F. In positioning mode that is activated with G00, the tool is accelerated to a predetermined level at the beginning of the block and slowing at the end of the block. Execution continues in the next block after the confirmation of a given situation. Given position means that the position of the axis is within the specified limits. (These limits are defined by the manufacturer of the machine.) In the G00 acceleration and deceleration occur automatically, linearly, which provides a smooth start and stop controlled axis. The intensity of the acceleration / deceleration can be changed by the manufacturer of the machine. Positioning (G01) Movement of feed (modal) For example: G1 X5 Y2 (control unit at the beginning of each program is the default mode in the G1.) This command mode is activated by linear interpolation. The feed rate is set at the address work through F and is modal. Here is an example. (G91) G01 X20 Y10 F20 The feed rate specified by the address F, is the vector velocity on trajectory, it is not the speed of each axis. Commands for flow rate of the linear interpolation (G01) and circular interpolation (G02, G03) are sent using the numbers after the address F (FXXX.X). Location F can appear anywhere in the block, it indicates the velocity in inches or millimeters per minute. 272

PART 4 - PRE-FUNCTION (G-CODES)


Tangential feed speed control: Office workers are fed in such a way that the velocity along the tangent path is always controlled feed rate. Adjust the feed rate:
The Y-axis (Endpoint)

The X axis (Starting Point)

Feed per minute can be adjusted by pressing the correct feed rate on the remote machine operator from 0 to 140% (for each 10%). Correction of filing can not be applied to the functions for which the correction is not allowed (for example, the cycle of tapping). Determination of polar The polar radius is determined by the polar / length (R), angle (AB) and polar center (AA or I, J, K, or XC, YC, ZC). Definitions are valid in any of the polar plane. Position "3 hours" is always 0 . Positive angles cause counterclockwise rotation (0 ) with respect to the polar radius, while negative angles lead to a rotation in a clockwise direction (0 ) with respect to the polar radius. Polars can be used in determining the length of time, using the trigonometric. If the polar radius / length (R) or angle (AB) is not specified, will use the previous values. If the polar center is not specified, it is taken as the current state of the machine. Below is a few examples.

273

PART 4 - PRE-FUNCTION (G-CODES)


POLAR ANGLE OF THE CENTER NON-POLAR CENTER

POLAR CENTER OF THE CURRENT MACHINE

ABSOLUTE CENTER OF POLAR

Incremental POLAR CENTER

Circular interpolation (G02, G03) Below is the general format of commands to move through an arc of a circle. G17 G18 G19 G02 X Y I Jor XC YC R or R or XZIK or XC ZC R G03 Y Z J K or YC ZC R or AB R * (3 or 6) * (4 or 5) or or or AA R F R or R or AA R F AA R F

* (1) * (2)

* (7)

* These numbers are given as references in the following diagram. Plane Choose Direction Radius and / or center G17 G2 R XC YC (or ZC) XY (or Z) G18 G3 R AA AB G19 I J (or K) XY (or Z) WC R or-R End point F The feed rate

274

PART 4 - PRE-FUNCTION (G-CODES)


Circular interpolation Inputs A The choice of plane TEAM G17 G18 G19 2 Sense of rotation G02 G03 3 Position the end point G90 mode G91 mode 4 Distance from start point to the center The radius of the arc R One, two or three X, Y and Z One, two or three X, Y and Z Two I, J and K VALUE Specify an arc in the XY plane Specify an arc on the ZX plane Specify an arc on the YZ plane Clockwise Counterclockwise Status endpoint in the working coordinate system The distance from the start and end points The observed distance from initial point to the center R = (I2 + J2) The radius of the arc (if the center is not specified, it is calculated from the start and end points) (-R is a long-arc) Reported absolute coordinates of the center of the arc

Two XC, YC, ZC

Determination of polar Inputs 5 The radius of the arc The initial angle 6 7 8 The final angle The feed rate By the line R AA AB F W, C TEAM VALUE The radius of the arc The angle from the center to start The angle from the center to the end point in a clockwise direction Speed along the arc Angle

275

PART 4 - PRE-FUNCTION (G-CODES)


Clockwise and anticlockwise

View from above, before the positive direction of axis Z, Y or X to the negative direction in the plane XY, XZ, YZ or ZX in the right-handed Cartesian coordinate system. Method I Description of the arc with the center of the incremental The end point of the arc indicates the address X, Y or Z, and expressed as absolute or incremental value, depending on the G90 or G91. In incremental mode, the coordinate of the end point is the starting point of the arc. Center of the arc is defined by I, J and K for the X, Y and Z. The numeric value that follows the I, J or K, is the distance from the starting point to the center of the arc from X, Y, or Z. I, J and K are always incremental values are independent of the G90 and G91. The sign of I, J and K depends on the ratio of the center to the starting point, as shown below.

Method II Description of the arc with radius In describing an arc with radius values are several existing formats. Here are the formats of the various teams. G17 G18 G19 G02 or G03 X____ X____ Y____ Y____ Z____ Z____ R____ R____ R____

276

PART 4 - PRE-FUNCTION (G-CODES)


The endpoints of the arc The radius is always listed as the true value. Endpoints incremental or absolute, depending on the G90 and G91. If the radius is used without a central point, we can generate two types of arcs. One less than 180 , and the other - more than 180 , as shown in the following figure. When the arc is greater than 180 , the radius must be specified as a negative value. Examples: For an arc (less than 180 ) G2 X6 Y2 R5 F30 For the two arcs (180 ) G2 X6 Y2 R-5 F30

Endpoint

STARTING POINT

Note: If the arc can not override the start and end points, you get an error 505 "Radius too small to span given points" (the radius is too small to cover the data points). Method III Description of the arc through the center and the absolute trigonometric aid G17 G18 G19 G02 or G03 X___ X___ Y___ End point Y___ Z___ Z___ XC___ XC___ YC___ YC___ ZC___ ZC___ R___ R___ R___

The central point

Radius

277

PART 4 - PRE-FUNCTION (G-CODES)


A trigonometric aid allows a programmer to define both the initial and end points of the arc. The control unit calculates the true start and end points based on the actions of the preceding and following the arc. Where there are two possible correct answers, the control unit selects the point closest to the calculated one. If the slope of the line, incoming or outgoing from the arc, such that no intersection occurs, the line will be made tangent to the arc. The following are examples of trigonometric aid. Program 1
ESTIMATED STARTING POINT ESTIMATED FINAL POINT

Programmed path

Programmed trajectory G1 X0 Y0 X4 Y4 (the estimated start point) G2 R2 XC7 YC2 X10 Y4 (estimated end-point) G1 X15 Y0 The trajectory generated by a program

278

PART 4 - PRE-FUNCTION (G-CODES)


Program 2

Programmed trajectory G1 X0 Y0 X2 Y1 (the estimated start point) G2 R1.5 XC4 YC2 X5 Y6 (calculated You are Hereth point) G1 X5 Y0 The trajectory generated by the program two

279

PART 4 - PRE-FUNCTION (G-CODES)


Program 3

Programmed trajectory G1 X0 Y0 X7 Y6 (calculated starting point) G2 R1.5 XC4 YC2 X5 Y.2 (calculated You are Hereth point) G1 X5 Y0 The trajectory generated by the program three

In general, when working with lines and arcs, if the line is programmed, not reaching the arc, it will be stretched to the arc. If the line is programmed for the arc, it will be reduced to the arc, and if the line does not intersect the arc tangent is to be done.

280

PART 4 - PRE-FUNCTION (G-CODES)


Program 4

Programmed trajectory G1 X0 Y0 X2.5 Y2 (calculated starting point) G2 R1 XC5 YC4 X5 Y5 (calculated You are Hereth point) R2 XC7.5 YC5 X9 Y8 (calculated You are Hereth point) G1 X9 Y0 The trajectory generated by the program 4

281

PART 4 - PRE-FUNCTION (G-CODES)


Program 5

Programmed trajectory G1 X0 Y0 X2.5 Y2 (design point) G2 R1 XC5 YC4 X5 Y3 (calculated You are Hereth point) G3 R2 XC7.5 YC5 X9 Y5 (calculated You are Hereth point) G1 Y0 The trajectory generated by the program 5

In general, when determining the intersections of the arcs with the arcs of the easiest to find one of the points of a quarter circle (0 , 90 , 180 or 270 ).

282

PART 4 - PRE-FUNCTION (G-CODES)


What is important to keep in mind when determining the points

Identification can be used with the trajectories of the line to a circle, circle to circle and circle to the line. Center and radius of the arc can not be determined. For the line to the circle and the circle to the line calculated start and end points have lie on a line, ie slopes lines, incoming and outgoing arc must be true. If the line intersects the arc at two points, the calculated point should be closer to the desired point of intersection. If the above conditions are met, there are no limits on how far from the calculated point correct. In determining the intersection of the arc on the other one is easiest to find on the arc of one of the points a quarter circle (0 , 90 , 180 or 270 ).

The following briefly describes the correction to the cutting tool and the trigonometric help when trigonometric aid is used for the tangent line to arc. The sample program: G41 D1 G65 X1 Y8 X0 Z-1 X0 Y0 X2 Y6 (This line is made of the tangent.) G2 R3 XC7 YC3 X12 Y6 G1 X15 Y0 Y8 X0 G65 X0 Y0 Z0

283

PART 4 - PRE-FUNCTION (G-CODES)

Block X2 Y6 derived tangent to the arc. When correcting for the cutting tool has been taken into account the previous two lines and calculated on the basis of the adjusted point of the baseline, not a tangent. When using the corrected trajectory for this program will not be stripped right thing. To avoid this problem, you should check off the program with the correction on the cutting tool (Or radius of the tool set to 0). Mark the actual point of contact (X4.8276, Y5.0690). Replace this point the calculated point (X2 Y6). This is not a problem for the other tangent line in the program. Method IV Description of line with the definition of polar Definitions polar do not change from absolute to incremental. Center of the arc is always considered a pole, and all the angles refer to it. The basic definition polar the following. G17 G18 G19 G2 or AA_____ AB_____ R_____ G3 start angle end angle range
Finite angle

RADIUS

The initial angle Center of the radius

284

PART 4 - PRE-FUNCTION (G-CODES)


Format for polar arcs can be mixed with Cartesian formats. Here are the official formats. G17 X_____ Y_____ AA_____ R_____ end point the initial angle G17 G2 AB_____ XC_____ YC_____ R_____ endpoint is the central point G17 G2 I_____ J_____ AB_____ the central point The above formats are written to the plane of XY, but act in any plane or direction. A trigonometric aid is effective only when used in the polar arc to the current center point and radius. Program 1 With all of these programs is the same thing. The method of programming is completely optional. G2

A. The absolute coordinates (polar, trigonometric No aid) G90 G1 X0 Y0 X4.2929 Y4.2929 G3 R3 AA295.53 AB357.59 G2 R4 AA77.56 AB318.59 G1 Y0 X0

285

PART 4 - PRE-FUNCTION (G-CODES)


Two. The absolute coordinates (polar, trigonometric aid) G90 G1 X0 Y0 R1 AB45 G3 R3 XC3 YC7 AB0 G2 R4 XC5 YC3 X8 Y.5 G1 Y0 X0 Note: When using a trigonometric care must be valid and center of the arc radius. Therefore, lines G2 and G3 have a fixed format. Three. The absolute coordinates (Cartesian, with no trigonometric) G90 G1 X0 Y0 X4.2929 Y4.2929 G3 R3 XC3 YC7 X5.9973 Y6.8737 or G3 I-1.2929 J2.7071 X5.9973 Y6.8737 or G3 R3 X5.9973 Y6.8737 G2 R4 XC5 YC3 X8 Y.3542 or G2 R4 X8 Y.3542 G1 Y0 X0 4. The absolute coordinates (Cartesian, trigonometric aid) G1 X0 Y0 X1 Y1 G3 R3 XC3 YC7 X6 Y7 G2 R4 XC5 YC3 X8 Y.5 G1 X8 Y0 X0 Note: Most sizes are approximate, the control unit calculates the exact size.

286

PART 4 - PRE-FUNCTION (G-CODES)


Five. Incremental coordinates G91 G1 X0 Y0 X4.2929 Y4.2929 G3 I-1.2929 J2.7071 X-1.7044 Y2.5058 or G3 R3 XC3 Yc7 X-1.7044 Y2.5808 or G2 I-.9973 J-3.8737 X2.0027 Y-6.5195 G2 X2.0027 Y-6.5195 I-.9973 J-3.8737 or G2 R4 X2.0021 Y-6.5195 or G2 R4 XC5 YC3 X2.0027 Y-6.5195 G1 Y-.3542 X-8 Note: The system of incremental coordinates trigonometric aid can not be used at each point associated with the current position. Trigonometric support can be disabled by setting bit 2 of parameter control more flags. It may be desirable for applications that are created from some systems Cad / Cam. Corner rounding (, R) Adding, R___ the end blocks, control of linear or circular interpolation, you can automatically insert rounding corners. G91 G01 X0 Y0 X1, R.25 X1 Y1

287

PART 4 - PRE-FUNCTION (G-CODES)


Bevel angle (, C) Adding, C___ the end blocks, linear interpolation control, you can automatically insert the bevel angle. G91 G01 X0 Y0 X1, C.25 X1 Y1
SKEW ANGLE MAY BE USED ONLY FOR THE TRACKS OF LINE TO LINE.

288

PART 4 - PRE-FUNCTION (G-CODES)


Contact Line The function return line can be used on any command line. This function changes the direction of the programmed line. Usually it is used, if known to the end point line, and not the starting point. The end point will be programmed, and the line will be increased in the opposite direction to the starting point. All trigonometric functions are help by using this function. X0 Y0 X3 Y1 G2 R1 XC3 YC0 AB270 G01 X0 Y0 BACK C2 W165

Back C2 W165

Increases line in the opposite direction from (0,0) Uses the intersection with the arc, the most distant from the (0,0) Increases line from (0,0) at an angle of 165

X0 Y0 X3 Y1 G17 G2 R1 XC3 YC0 AB270 G01 X0 Y0 BACK C0 W165

C0 Uses near the intersection of X0 Y0 X3 Y1 G2 R1 XC3 YC0 X3 Y-1 G01 X0 Y0 BACK C0 W135

289

PART 4 - PRE-FUNCTION (G-CODES)

W135

This line does not intersect with the arc, so the line will be rotated until, until it becomes a tangent. X0 Y0 X3 Y1 X4 Y0 X0 Y0 BACK C0 or C2 W165

In this example, the return line is used between the two lines for programming an unknown point.

290

PART 4 - PRE-FUNCTION (G-CODES)


Notes on the milling of circular and linear feed The feed rate in the circular and linear mode equal to the rate specified by the address F. This flow rate is the tangential velocity along the arc and feed supply in the vector of linear displacements. Note 1: I0, J0 and K0 can be omitted. Note 2: If X, Y and Z are left out - or if the endpoint is located in the same position as the primary, and the center is managed by I, J and K may be an arc 360 (full circle). G02I _____; (full circle) When only R, the arc programmed 0. G02R _____; (The cutter does not move.) Note 3: Note 4: The feed rate is measured along the arc after applying the correction to the cutting tool. If the addresses I, J, K and R are specified at the same time, the radius of the arc defined at I, J, K has the advantage, and R is ignored. Teams XYZIJKR AA AB supports device control. If the block is interpolated on incomplete, missing information about the axis will be added to the default values previously entered.

Note 5:

Screw cutting (G02, G03) Helical interpolation is activated by specifying a different axis, which moves in sync with the circular interpolation. That is, the tool can move in a spiral. G02 G17 or G03 G02 G18 or G03 G02 G19 or G03 R____ X____ Y____ or Z____ F____; I____ J____ R____ X____ Z____ or Y____ F____; I____ K____ R____ Y____ Z____ or X____ F____; J____ K____

291

PART 4 - PRE-FUNCTION (G-CODES)

The above format for helical milling illustrate the overall concept. Any of the previous format of the arcs can be used for screw cutting simply by adding a third axis endpoint of the arc to the team.

The tool path

Address F determines the feed rate along the arc of a circle. Therefore, the feed rate of the linear axis of the next. The length of linear axis F x ______________________ The length of arc Determine the feed rate so that the feed rate on a linear axis does not exceed any of the thresholds. The team paused (G04) Code G4 should immediately follow the instruction FXXX.X. This statement will then stop or pause the program at XXX.X seconds. The general format: G4F2.5 cause a pause in the program in 2.5 seconds. G4F25 cause a pause in the program for 25 seconds. Note: A, P or X can be used instead of F after the command G4. Exact Stop (G09) Displacement, which are given to the team in blocks with G09, slowed at the end point, and checks in the operating position. This function is used when sharp edges are required to work the angles of the workpiece when applying.

292

PART 4 - PRE-FUNCTION (G-CODES)


Data Set incl. / Off. (G10, G11) This feature allows you to load all the configuration settings, table settings and adjustments CNC axes with the program rather than through the front panel. (This feature - the only way to change the parameters of 700 and above from the program.). Below is a format for downloading options. G10 P *** = significance P *** = significance P *** = significance P *** = significance G11 Installing the data included P *** = number of loaded parameter Setting data is disabled

Teams, in addition to P *** = value in the mode of G10 will cause an error 543 "Illegal G10 statement." (Invalid operator G10). When you run a G11, the CNC will use the new settings. See the destination parameter in the Appendix. Cleaning the floating zero (G12) With this function, removed floating zero. (G12 in the program cancels the floating zero, but they are restored at the end of the program. G12 in manual data entry removes floating zeros.) The plane XY (modal) (G17) Selects the XY plane for all the polar and arc movements. This command is valid until the other team off the plane. G17 command can appear anywhere on the line. The control unit is always included in the mode of G17. The control unit is set to the default G17 at the beginning of each program. The plane XZ (modal) (G18) Selects the XZ plane or ZX for all the polar and arc movements. This command is valid until the other team off the plane. G18 command can appear anywhere on the line. The plane YZ (modal) (G19) Selects the YZ plane for all the polar and arc movements. This command is valid until the other team off the plane. G19 command can appear anywhere on the line. Inch size mode (Modal) (G20) With this function, the system goes to the inch mode. In this mode, the system receives the size in inches. You can select active at power on. G20 cancels the G21.

293

PART 4 - PRE-FUNCTION (G-CODES)


Metric size mode (Modal) (G21) With this function, the system goes into metric mode. In this mode, the system will accept sizes in millimeters (mm). In the metric system, the actual state of the machine may not exactly coincide with the position of the program because of the conversion. The feed rate in metric mode, expressed in millimeters per minute (mm / min). Note: CNC is able to convert - from metric to inch out of the system and inch to metric - for all corrections to the instrument. This means that the correction 1.0 in. changes to 25.4 mmWhen the system switches to the metric mode. The reverse occurs for metric values. Enable / disable the safe zone (G22, G23) This unit is equipped with a programmable control safe zone. Any area of movement of the machine can be designated as safe. This is an area in which the machine can not enter. If the machine is programmed for the area, when the checking is enabled the safe zone, an error will be displayed "Attempted to move into safe zone" (attempt to penetrate the security zone.) Safe Zone is defined in the parameters of the coordinates. Checking is turned off using the G22, and included - with the G23. You can select active at power on. Automatic standard programs With these G-codes are selected basic models that are used repeatedly in most applications, milling. These models are circular and rectangular cuts Finishing, cleaning round and rectangular deep recesses, and polygons. In these programs, the standard settings are used for entering a variety of CNC cutting and size differences found in various applications. Below are explanations of each G-code and an example of its use in the program. All the internal standard automatic program to be activated when the tool is in the heart of the program. Automatic external standard programs can use the G65 (blocking traffic) for the determination of the center.

294

PART 4 - PRE-FUNCTION (G-CODES)


Cleaning the round deep recesses (G24) Automatic routine G24 is used to clean a deep circular groove from the center and moving spiral of programmed diameter. Cleanup round of deep grooves G20 G90 (Inch / absolute) G00 X0 Y0 (accelerated move to the center of the cavity) S1000 M3 D1 G43 H1 (spindle clockwise -1000 rev / min, calls for correction tools # 1) F25 (feed rate X-Y) P150 = 1 (the radius of the cavity) P153 = .015 (finishing allowance X-Y) P154 = .005 (finishing allowance Z) P155 = .25 (cutting width) G24 G99 G42 G2 R.1 P199 = 0 Z-.5 V-.3 Q.2 F10 *1*2*3*3*4*5*6*7*8*9 *1 *2 *3 *4 *5 *6 *7 *8 *9 Performs automatic cleaning program standard round of deep grooves Returns the Z in the area of safe return Clockwise from the right or "G3 G41" counter-clockwise to the left ** 0.1 Zone safe return P199 = 0 for all immersion programs, automatic standard, except for the processing cycle ends -Final depth of 0.5 Z -0.3 Depth first Z *** 0.2 increment of Z, a marked increment of Z will use the absolute value of 10 inch / min feed rate Z

** For all automatic programs G41 and G42 do the same thing: they include a correction to the cutting tool. In the example shown in the right direction for correcting the cutting tool. The control unit will adjust the appropriate standard in all automatic programs, if the correction is included in the cutting tool (G41 or G42). Counter / normal milling indicated G2 or G3. *** If the first is less than the depth Z final depth of Z, Z depth of the first set to a final depth of Z. Note: You can also use the following. P140 = zone for the safe return P141 = depth Z for final P142 = entry-level Z P143 = for the increment of Z P144 = 1 for the first depth Z P145 = feed rate to Z

295

PART 4 - PRE-FUNCTION (G-CODES)


Purification of circular recesses of hours. Cleaning the round cut-outs against the hours with.
TOOL DOWN

TOOL DOWN TOOLING UP

HOME / END

TOOLING UP

HOME / END

Block # Information on entering the block Block # Information on entering the block N9 G2 G42 N9 G3 G41 Block 9 Selects a circle in a clockwiseBlock 9 Selects the circle direction and includes an adjustment to the against clockwise and cutting tool to the right includes an adjustment to the cutting tool left Internal finishing round of deep grooves (G25) If the specified radius of the tool, adjust the cutting tool can be used in all standard automatic programs. The control unit automatically reduces or increases the tool path with tool radius.

296

PART 4 - PRE-FUNCTION (G-CODES)


The figure "Internal finishing a clockwise circle" below shows the tool path following the program. The figure "Internal finishing the circle counter-clockwise" below shows the same program with the change indicated in the line N9. The program of internal finishing the round cut-outs G20 G90 (Inch / absolute) G00 X0 Y0 (accelerated move to the center of the cavity) S1000 M3 D1 G43 H1 (spindle clockwise -1000 rev / min, calls for correction tools # 1) G99 (Z returns to the zone safe return) F20 (feed rate X-Y) P522 = 3 (the angle of the bevel) P150 = 1 (the radius of the cavity) P153 = 0 (finishing allowance X-Y) ** P154 = 0 (finishing allowance Z) G25 G42 G2 V-.3 R.1 P199 = 1 F5 Z-.5 Q.2 *1*2*2*3*4*5*6*7*8 *1 *2 *3 *4 *5 *6 *7 *8 Performs internal finishing the round cut-outs Clockwise from the right or "G41 G3" counter-clockwise to the left First the depth Z Area safe return Bevel down the Z Feedrate Z The final depth of Z The increment of Z

Finishing allowance ** XY and Z finishing allowance is reset at the beginning of each program. Internal finishing with a range of hours. hours with. Internal finishing the circle against the

Start / End

Start / End

297

PART 4 - PRE-FUNCTION (G-CODES)


N9 range of G42 G2 selects the circle in a clockwise clockwise and adjust the cutting tool on the right N9 G41 G3 selects a

counterclockwise and correction on the cutting tool left

Note: Parameter P150 - is the radius of the recess. If you do not need finishing allowance, P153 and P154 parameters must be set to zero. F20, programmed in the N5, a feed rate of XY, and F5 in N9 affects only the flow on the axis Z. If the settings on the value, they do not change and can be used in the program in the future. When you call the automated routine, any parameters that are not reinitialized, the default will be on the previous parameter value. Outdoor finishing round of deep grooves (G26) Automatic routine is identical to the G26 on the basis of the program G25, except for the fact that it produces cutting round the outside of the tide, rather than inside. Since the G26 requires positioning the outside of the tide, will apply the following formula to calculate the distance from the center of the tide to the point of puncture / removal. Distance = 0.1 + Circle + [3 X tool] radius of the radius

Program outside of finishing the round of deep grooves G20 G90 (Inch / absolute) S1000 M3 D1 G43 H1 (spindle clockwise -1000 rev / min, calls for correction tools # 1) F20 (feed rate X-Y) P150 = 1 (tidal radius) P153 = 0 (finishing allowance X-Y) P154 = 0 (finishing allowance Z) G26 G98 G41 G2 R.1 P199 = 0 Z-.5 V-.3 Q.2 F5 298

PART 4 - PRE-FUNCTION (G-CODES)


*1 *2*3*3*4*5*6*7*8*9 *1 *2 *3 *4 *5 *6 *7 *8 *9 Performs exterior finishing the round cut-outs Return to the starting point Clockwise from the left or "G42 G3" counter-clockwise to the right Area safe return Crossings The final depth of Z First the depth Z The increment of Z Feedrate Z

The outer circle on the finishing part of. Outer finishing the circle against the hours with.
Center TIDE Center TIDE

R + 0,1 + (3X tool radius)

TOOL UP / DOWN

TOOL UP / DOWN

299

PART 4 - PRE-FUNCTION (G-CODES)


N7 G2, G42 selects the circle in a clockwise clockwise and adjust the cutting tool left N7 G3 G42 selects the range of counterclockwise and correction on the cutting tool on the right

Return to the zero point (G28, G29, G30) These commands provide the administration of the machine to a fixed point (zero point) with the passage through the first intermediate point on the way to zero. First, a fixed zero point in XYZ is inserted through the front panel of the parameters the zero point. The zero point corresponds to the zero point of the machine. When this point is set, it remains unchanged as long as no other team will be replaced by the front panel. Each time you issue the command G28 or G30 machine will be returned to the designated zero point. Positioning in the intermediate and the zero point is made during fast movement. If the G28 or G30 is executed without specifying the axes, they will not be influenced. If one or two axes are controlled as intermediate points, only the steering axis will move to an intermediate point and the zero point. If the intermediate point is programmed, the program will remember it until the next G28 will not run (ie for use in the G29). The command format. The zero point is set to X-10 Y0 Z-0.1 Example 1: Example 2: Example 3: machine) Example 4: X-3 Y2 Z-8 G28 Z-7 G29 Z -7, Then Z-0.1 (Relative to the zero point of the machine) from Z to -7 G28 G91 (No movements of the axes) G28 Z = 0 (from Z to -0.1 relative zero point of the machine) X3, then the X-10 (Relative to the zero point of the

X1 Y0 Z-2 G28 X3

The command G29 - this transformation G28. G29 machine returns to the programmed point through the last waypoint, saved command G28. The command format. G29 X____ Y____ Z____ programmed point

300

PART 4 - PRE-FUNCTION (G-CODES)


In general, G28 is used for the tool change position or loading / unloading of parts. Usually it is used to move only in the zero point. For example, the movement of G91, G28, Z0, Z to the zero point. When G29 is executed by itself, only the axle, which sent teams to previous G28/G30, becomes the starting point. An example of G28 and G29:
ZERO POINT ON THE SET X4 Y4 WORKING WITHOUT CORRECTION ZERO POINT

INTERMEDIATE POINT

X1 Y1 Point A G28 X3 Y2 Point B, then the point R G29 X6 Y1.5Point B, then point C G30 Return to 2nd, 3rd, 4th reference point This function works similarly to return to the starting point G28, except that you can call the 2nd, 3rd and 4th reference point. The command format. G30 P2 X____ Y____ Z____ G30 P3 X____ Y____ Z____ G30 P4 X____ Y____ Z____ zero point intermediate point Unless otherwise specified P, may be P2. P < 1 and P> 5 are not valid, and lead to error 542 "G30 illegal return to reference parameter on G30 block" (G30 invalid return to the zero setting on the block G30).

301

PART 4 - PRE-FUNCTION (G-CODES)


Z to the gap (G31) With the help of the functions assigned to the G31 Z position of the gap. By default, this is the last position of the gap, but it can be changed by editing the parameter set 140 or the group of cycles by using the "R". Z to the tool change (G32) With the help of the functions assigned to the G32 Z position tool changer. This position is set by the manufacturer of the machine, but can be changed by editing the parameter coordinates of the tool change. The processing cycle ends (G33) Automatic sub-G33 is used for processing the ends of a rectangular surface. It always starts in the upper right corner of the rectangle moves back and forth along the long sides of the rectangle and moves to the short side of the recess. Consistent depth of the tool to lift 0.1 "above the current depth and quickly moved into the top right corner for the next depth. The program loop ends G20 G90 (Inch / absolute) S1000 M3 D1 G43 H1 (spindle clockwise -1000 rev / min, calls for correction tools # 1) G0 X1 Y2 (rapid movement in the center of the notch) F20 (feed rate X-Y) P151 = 1 (Size X) P152 = 3 (the size of the Y) P155 = .1 (cutting width) G33 G99 G41 R.1 Z-.5 V-.3 Q.1 F5 *1 *2*3*4*5*6*7*8 *1 *2 *3 *4 *5 *6 *7 *8 Perform loop ends Returns the Z in the area of safe return Correction of the cutting tool (G41 or G42 do the same thing) Area safe return The final depth of Z First the depth Z (If V is not specified, the 1st depth Z - is the area safe return minus the increment of Z) The increment of Z Feedrate Z

Cleaning deep rectangular grooves (G34) Automatic routine G34 is used to clear deep rectangular grooves, starting from the center and paving the way to the final size. Jobs similar to the work program of the automatic processing programs circular cut-outs, except for the fact that the cut out a rectangle with rounded corners. In the program for rectangular grooves added parameters P151 (the size of the excavation X) and P152 (the size of the excavation Y). Parameters P150, P153, P154 and P155 retain the same meaning as in programs for circular cut-outs. Dimensions X and Y are the dimensions seizure, and if the radius is set to 0, the corners will be cut along the radius of the tool. 302

PART 4 - PRE-FUNCTION (G-CODES)


Cleanup of deep rectangular grooves G20 G90 (Inch / absolute) S1000 M3 D1 G43 H1 (spindle clockwise -1000 rev / min, calls for correction tools # 1) G00 X0 Y0 (accelerated move to the center of the cavity) F20 (feed rate X-Y) P522-2.5 (bevel angle) P150 = .75 (radius) P151 = 4 (the size of the excavation X) P152 = 2 (the size of the excavation Y) P153 = .015 (finishing allowance X-Y) P154 = .005 (finishing allowance Z) P155 = .5 (cutting width) G34 G99 G42 G2 R.1 P199 = 1 Z-.5 V-.3 Q.2 F5 *1*2*3*3*4*5 *6*7*8*9 *1 *2 *3 *4 *5 *6 *7 *8 *9 Cleans deep rectangular grooves Returns the Z in the area of safe return Clockwise from the right or "G41 G3" counter-clockwise to the left Area safe return Bevel down the Z The final depth of Z First the depth Z (If V is not specified, the 1st depth Z - is the area safe return minus the increment of Z) The increment of Z feed rate of Z

303

PART 4 - PRE-FUNCTION (G-CODES)


Start / End The radius of curvature (P150)

SIZE OF TAKING Y (R152)

Cutting width (R155)

TAKING A SIZE (R151)

If the N11 - G42 G2, the direction of the cut in a clockwise direction. If the N11 - G41 G3, the direction of the cutting counter-clockwise. Internal finishing of deep rectangular grooves (G35) Automatic routine G35 is used for removal of finishing allowance remaining after the cleaning program of deep rectangular grooves, or it is used for removing a certain amount of allowance around the inside of the rectangle. Automatic software works similarly to the program G35 G34. It starts in the center. The circumference of the middle to the end of the program will always go along the longest side of the recess. The program of internal finishing of deep rectangular grooves G20 G90 (Inch / absolute) S1000 M3 D1 G43 H1 (spindle clockwise -1000 r / min, calls to corrections to the tool number 1) G00 X0 Y0 (accelerated move to the center of the cavity) F20 (feed rate X-Y) P522-2.5 (bevel angle) P150 = .25 (radius) P153 = 0 (finishing allowance X-Y) P154 = 0 (finishing allowance Z) P151 = 4 (the size of the excavation X) P152 = 2 (the size of the excavation Y) G35 G99 G42 G2 R.1 P199 = 1 Z-.5 V-.3 Q.2 F5 *1*2*3*3*4*5 *6*7*8*9 *1 *2 *3 *4 *5 *6 *7 Performs internal finishing of deep rectangular grooves Returns the Z in the area of safe return Clockwise from the right or "G41 G3" counter-clockwise to the left Area safe return Bevel down the Z The final depth of Z First the depth Z (If V is not specified, the 1st depth Z - is the area safe return minus the increment of Z)

304

PART 4 - PRE-FUNCTION (G-CODES)


*8 *9 The increment of Z feed rate of Z

305

PART 4 - PRE-FUNCTION (G-CODES)


Block # N10 Information about the input line Block # G2 G42 selects N10 in a clockwise direction clockwise and adjust the cutting tool on the right Information about the input line G2 G42 selects in a clockwise direction clockwise and adjust the cutting tool on the right

Internal finishing of CS Internal finishing of CS A rectangular recess X <Y A rectangular recess X> Y P151 <P152 P151> P152

Block # N10 the cutting

Information about the input line Block # Information about the input line G3 G41 selects N10 G3 G41 selects counter-clockwise direction counter-clockwise direction direction and correction to the cutting direction and correction to tool left tool left Interior. clean. treatment against CS Rectangular with rounded notches angles and X> Y P151> P152

Internal finishing against the CS Rectangular Angles and X < Y P151 <P152

306

PART 4 - PRE-FUNCTION (G-CODES)

Outdoor finishing deep rectangular grooves (G36) Automatic routine G36 is used for removal of finishing allowance around the outside of the square of the tide. The program works similar to G36 G34 manner. It starts in the center, performs a quick move to the outside of the details, then submit the tool down. The circumference of the edge is always at the bottom of the tide. CNC uses the following formula to calculate the distance from the center to the point of the bottom feeder. Y = (3 X tool radius) + .1 + the width of the groove Y
SIZE A The radius of curvature (P150)

SIZE Y 1/2 TIMEMEASURE Y DIAMETER TOOL

The tool path CONCERNING THE ARC The tool radius + .050 (P150) Point of Puncture / DRAINAGE The tool radius

Program outside of finishing deep rectangular grooves G20 G90 (Inch / absolute) S1000 M3 D1 G43 H1 (spindle clockwise -1000 r / min, calls to corrections to the tool number 1) G00 X0 Y0 (rapid movement in the X0 Y0) G98 (Z returns to the initial level) F20 (feed rate X-Y) P150 = .25 (radius) P153 = 0 (finishing allowance X-Y) P154 = 0 (finishing allowance Z) P151 = 4 (frame size X) P152 = 2 (frame size Y) G36 G41 G2 V-.25 R.1 Z-.5 Q.25 F10 P199 = 0 *1 *2*2*3*4*5*6*7*8 *1 *2 *3 *4 *5 *6 Performs exterior finishing of deep rectangular grooves Clockwise from the left or "G42 G3" counter-clockwise to the right First the depth Z (If V is not specified, the 1st depth Z - is the area safe return minus the increment of Z) Area safe return The final depth of Z The increment of Z 307

PART 4 - PRE-FUNCTION (G-CODES)


*7 *8 Feedrate Z Crossings Z Block # N11 Information about the

Block # Information about the input line input line N11 G3 G42 selects the direction of counterclockwise and correction on the cutting tool on the right
CENTER

G2 G41 selects the direction of clockwise and correction cutter left

CENTER

TOOL UP / DOWN

TOOL UP / DOWN

Outdoor finishing against the CS Outdoor finishing of CS

Tapping (G39) Automatic routine G39 is used for threading. You can program the internal or external thread. G39 works with the same principles as the G25, interior finishing round of deep cuts, and G26, exterior finishing round of deep grooves. If programmed with an internal thread, the program automatically starts in the center of G39 and moves, as shown in the following diagrams.

308

PART 4 - PRE-FUNCTION (G-CODES)


Inner / Inner Right / Left

HOME / END

HOME / END

For internal thread starting point is the center of the thread when switched on and off at the correct cutting tool. If programmed with external thread, it starts in the center and moves rapidly to the point of low feed using the following formulas for the correction off the cutting tool. X = radius of the thread + [2 X radius of the tool] + 0.1 When correcting for the cutting tool at the control device using the following formula to calculate the point of reducing the supply. X = radius of the thread + [3 X radius of the tool] + 0.1 For external thread the machine moves, as shown in the figures below. Male / Male Right / Left

Start / End

The cycle performance of the polygons (G666) Automatic G666 standard program used for cutting out polygons (shapes with the same parties), such as triangles, squares, pentagons, hexagons, etc. The cycle performance of the polygons can be used for indoor or outdoor cutting. The internal implementation of the polygons in the middle and begins to spiral turns to the form, then cut in a spiral polygon and returns to the center. Outer polygons have positioned in the center (or use

309

PART 4 - PRE-FUNCTION (G-CODES)


G65 X___ Y___ to specify the center). To move from the center out using the same formula as in the outer finishing the round recesses or outdoor finishing of rectangular grooves, to create an execution cycle of the polygons. Execute internal polygons G0 X2 Y3 (center) F20 (feed rate of XY) P126 = 2 (radius of curvature of) P127 = 0 (the angle of curvature of the 1 st) P125 = 6 (number of sides) P128 = .3 (radius of curvature) P132 = 0 (inside / outside) G666 G99 G3 G41 R.2 P199 = 1 Z-1 V-.1 Q.2 F10 *1*2*3*3*4*5*6*7*8*9 *1 *2 *3 *4 *5 *6 *7 *8 *9 Performs a series of polygons Returns the zone of safe return A counter-clockwise milling / left Area safe return Bevel down the Z The final depth of Z First the depth Z The increment of Z Feedrate Z

With the above program creates the following item.

310

PART 4 - PRE-FUNCTION (G-CODES)


Execute the outer polygon G0 Z2 G65 X2 Y3 (Center) F20 (feed rate of XY) P126 = 3 (The radius of curvature of a) P127 = 60 (Corner of 1st rounded) P125 = 3 (number of sides) P128 = .1 (radius of curvature) P132 = 1 (inside / outside) G666 G98 G2 G41 R.1 P199 = 0 Z-1 V-.2 Q.2 F5 *1*2*3*3*4*5*6*7*8*9 *1 *2 *3 *4 *5 *6 *7 *8 *9 Performs a series of polygons Returns the Z in the original position A counter-clockwise milling / left Area safe return Incision down the Z The final depth of Z First the depth Z The increment of Z Feedrate Z

With the above program creates the following item.

311

PART 4 - PRE-FUNCTION (G-CODES)


G20 G90 F100 (feed rate) P121 = 0 (inch absolute) N2 G0 X0 Y0 (Fast positioning of the center X, Y Center for Inland) (use the G65 for outdoor)

(The angle of the cone half-angle, or defined by the angle with the center line, 0 for a cylindrical thread) P122 = 10 (Threads per unit) P123 = 1 (1 for internal threads, 2 - exterior) P125 = .03 (The increment / decrease in diameter, zero for a single pass) P126 = 2 (The final diameter for multiple passes) ** P127 = 0 (Center X) P128 = 0 (Center Y) P150 = 1.91 (The diameter of the cylindrical thread pitch diameter for tapered threads and multiple passes) G39 G42 G2 Z-1 V0 R.1 *1*2*3*4*5*6 *1 *2 *3 *4 *5 *6 Runs thread milling cycle Correction of the cutting tool [Off. (G40), left (G41), right (G42)] *** The direction of the thread (G2 right, G3 left) *** The final depth of Z (P141) First depth of Z [(P144, if V is not specified, the control unit calculates the 1st depth of P140 (Zone safe return) minus the P143 (the increment of Z)] Area safe return (P140)

** For multiple passes on the inner diameter of the thread must be less than the final start. On the contrary, for multiple passes on the outer diameter of the final carving must be less than the initial one. The right combination of *** and correcting the direction of the cut on the cutting tool: G42 G2 for domestic right-hand threads. G41 G3 for the internal left-handed threads. G41 G2 for the outer right-hand threads. G42 G3 for the outer left-handed threads. Correction of the cutting tool (G40, G41, G42) G40 Correction off. G41 Correction of the left G42 Correction to the right This section explains how the correction of the cutting tool, and provides advice on its optimal use. Correction of the cutting tool - the offset tool paths - perpendicular to the programmed path - an amount equal to the radius of the cutter. The programmed path may be defined by the

312

PART 4 - PRE-FUNCTION (G-CODES)


programmer for the zero-range instrument. If the program is written for the machining tool with zero radius, ie directly from the printout, then, with the introduction of the actual tool radius in the system and the activation of the correction on the cutting tool, the operator can make the control device calculated the trajectory of the displaced. During program execution, the control unit records the previous preset point, the current programmed point and the next point along the trajectory of a programmable instrument. Two geometric parameters such as line and arc, the radius of the tool, the correction to the right or left, the control unit can be corrected to calculate the current point. The control unit also uses its own function using trigonometric described above, to connect the lines and arcs during the correction of the cutting tool. After each successful calculation of adjusted terms, the current point becomes the previous programmable preset point, the next programmed point becomes the current programmed point, and a new programmable read point to become the next programmed point. This mechanism is repeated until, until you reach the end of the program. This sequence must be aware of, because it clarifies many points which will arise in the future as to how the correction. Correction in the control unit intersecting. Taking into account the three above-mentioned points, the control unit calculates the intersection of the corrected trajectory between the previous and current programmed point and corrected path between the current and next programmed point. These trajectories can be a mixture of straight lines and arcs. Because of the crossover nature of the correction package for the system to work there must be the intersection of the shifted trajectories. If the two trajectories do not cross, the control unit will produce an error 507 or 509. Note: All examples in the correction of the cutting tool shown without displacements along the axis Z.

313

PART 4 - PRE-FUNCTION (G-CODES)


In order to see how the correction of the cutting tool, select the key F6 (Both) (Both) when checking the details. An explanation of how the offset tool paths may not have the intersection

(A) tool with

The trajectory of the tool with diameter of 0 "

(B)

The trajectory of the

non-zero diameter

The solution shown above for the details - is the introduction of the bevel or rounded angle 00.0001 "point 5 between disjoint surfaces. An explanation of how to be introduced facet 00.0001 "to solve the problem of non-intersection Note: ", C", used for chamfering, can only be applied between the two lines.

In some cases, the system detects the intersection, but it will be too distant from the details. Again, in such cases to address must be entered chamfer or a rounded corner of 00.0001. "

314

PART 4 - PRE-FUNCTION (G-CODES)


The outer "V"-shaped correction to the cutting tool
TOOL

START

Note: A point of correction (4 ') is shifted to a greater extent than the radius of the tool (4). The figure below shows how the chamfer or a rounded corner of 00.0001 ", added to (4), prevents unnecessary deviations. The solution for the outer "V"-shaped correction to the cutting tool
ADDED CHAMFER 0.0001

The figure below shows how the adjusted point for the inner "V"-shaped cavity is programmed to point at a distance exceeding the radius of the tool.

315

PART 4 - PRE-FUNCTION (G-CODES)


The inner "V"-shaped correction to the cutting tool

DETAIL

TOOL

Note: The tool is separated from the programmed point (2) at a distance exceeding the radius of the tool. If the adjusted point (2 ') was closer to (2), the tool would be plied by the details. Test sample details Because the system requires three points to determine the adjusted points, caution should be exercised when the correction is on the cutting tool is enabled or disabled. Magnitude to move the axis at the exit or entrance to the detail of to be greater than the expected value of the correction on the cutting tool. Figure 1 shows under the stage that the position of the machine at the point (1) is the same as in the corrected and uncorrected trajectories of the tool. This is because the first point can not be corrected because it does not have a previous point to form a group of three points needed for the correction program. Therefore, the correction should be included to how the tool will enter the work area. For ease of programming tools to enter and leave the details of the zone perpendicular surface of the part. This is not a strict requirement, but it simplifies the understanding of how the correction of the cutting tool will operate at the entrance and exit from the zone of the workpiece. If there is doubt as to how it will look offset tool path, we recommend hand-drawn sketches of lines parallel to the surface of the part from start to finish or use a press F6 (Both) (Both) for verification. The most common problems are detected immediately.

316

PART 4 - PRE-FUNCTION (G-CODES)


The definition would look like the trajectory of the adjusted Step 1. Draw the actual item and note the point in the sequence.

START

Endpoint

STEP 1

Step 2. Draw a line shifted from the surface of the radius of the tool parts from point 1 to point 11.

STEP 2

317

PART 4 - PRE-FUNCTION (G-CODES)


Step 3. Check whether all trajectories intersect in the sequence. If so, then (except for the start and end points) to connect the displaced trajectory and note the points of intersection. If at least one crossing can not be detected, the item will not be processed until the error is corrected.

STEP 3

Step 4. Since points 1 and 11 have adjacent points on one side, they will not be adjusted. Therefore, you should connect them to neighboring points adjusted to get to the actual trajectory of the displaced incisor.

STEP 4

318

PART 4 - PRE-FUNCTION (G-CODES)


Step 5. The above trajectory is biased - it is a trajectory that will comply with the system for processing details. However, the problem was identified with the help of a sketch. Note that the lower-left corner will be left untreated as a tool, moving from (1) (2), leave a small groove nesrezannogo material. A similar case is evident in the trajectory of the tool (10) to (11). Again, the angle will be left nesrezannym. The solution can serve as a redevelopment of the start and end points, the angle was cut properly.

STEP 5

Step 6. Notice how the points 1, 2, 10 and 11 gradually shifted. The result is as follows.

STEP 6

Note:

Now we see that when the tool is moved from (2) (3) and (9) (10), the angle will be cut properly.

319

PART 4 - PRE-FUNCTION (G-CODES)


In step 6 the correction in the cutting tool has been included using the G41 to include the correction of the cutting tool to the left at the point (2) and disabled using the G40 at the point (11). Notes on the steps of 6.1 Note 1: Points (1) and (11), which start and end points were chosen in such a way that they were far enough away from the workpiece surface. Suffice means the distance greater than the total expected correction. The circle at the points (9) and (8) for the complications that can arise if the radius is too large. As the radius increases, (9) and (8) will move closer together until, until, at one point of the radius, they will not be identical. If the radius increases more, the radius of the tool is too large to form a circle, and the system will generate an error, informing the operator that the intersection can not be found on this line. If a path can be successfully adjusted to draw by hand, it will work in the system. However, if the sketch shows the intersection of the missing, the control unit generates an error message 507 or 509. While the operator is not familiar with the principles of correction of the cutting tool is recommended to perform sketches for the corrected trajectory before the item will be processed under the program. Correction of the cutting tool is turned off at the beginning of each program.

Note 2:

Note 3:

Note 4:

Note 5:

320

PART 4 - PRE-FUNCTION (G-CODES)


How to make a correction to the cavity If the item is a cavity, the start and end points must be changed. A simple change in the G41 G42 (right cut) will not help. This will occur because the tool will still go down to the detail. The reason for this, as explained above, the following: the system uses the previous, current and next programmed point for the calculation of the correction. This procedure does not occur at the point 1 and point 5. The displacement of points 1, 2, 10 and 11 for oral

In the figure above, the tool should be lowered to a point 1, and then raised back to the point 5. Point 1a is added to the system of providing preliminary information on the line 4-5. Length from 1a to 1 may be in the range 00.0001. "It is important to note that preliminary information correct angle 1a to 1 should be the sameAs the angle 4 to 5. In this case, the angle is zero. Similarly, the point 5a is added to provide a system previous information on the line 1-2. Again, the angle of 5 to 5a should be the sameAs the angle of 1 to 2. Regardless of the radius of the cutter, the tool can now be lowered to the corner at (2) and raised back at 5.

321

PART 4 - PRE-FUNCTION (G-CODES)


Programming with the correction of the cutting tool When programming with the correction in the radius of the cutting tool first and last movements performed by the tool, must be performed according to figure out the details below. Moving to be performed before the cut should be equal to a minimum distance of the diameter of the tool used. Block # N1001 N1002 N1003 N1004 N1005 N1006 N1007 N1008 N1009 N1010 Information on entering the block G0 X-1 Y-1 G41 X0 D1 (D = correction tool radius) G1 Y3 F10 X3.5 G3 R.5 XC4 YC3 X4.5 Y3 G1 X6.8 Y2 X4.5 Y0 X-1 G40 Y-.5

Programmed path CUTTERS

ADJUSTED REAL TRAJECTORY

Blocking the movement (G65) G65 is used to start and complete correction of the cutting tool. Through code G65, located on a line with coordinates, these coordinates will be used for the correction of points on the cutting tool, but will not be taken into account during the movement of the machine. G65 X___ Y___ Z___ The machine will not move to the coordinates XYZ.

Note: G65 can be used as the polar and Cartesian coordinate system. G65 R____ AB____

322

PART 4 - PRE-FUNCTION (G-CODES)


G65 allows a programmer to include the correction of the cutting tool for lowering or removal of the instrument at a certain point without performing additional movements. In general, the point of no movement on the details of the selected point, just before the point of lowering the tool. If you challenge a point without moving the tool will be a point at the details behind the point immediately after the lifting tool. The point of the lack of movement should not be based on the details, but point to the parts usually work better. The figures under the heading "The beginning and end of the correction to the cutting tool" shows the various provisions of the start-up and removal tool on the basis of different points of locking movements, which are shown by the dashed line (---). Point 2 - this is a desirable starting point or the removal tool. Point 1 - is the point of blocking traffic when the correction is on the cutting tool is turned on (flat), and point 3 - point locking this movement, when the correction in the cutting tool is disabled (removal). If the correction is on the cutting tool is enabled or disabled by using this format, the upper and lower position of the tool is easy to predict.

323

PART 4 - PRE-FUNCTION (G-CODES)


The beginning and end of the correction on the cutting tool G41 Tool Left D1 = radius of the tool (pre-installed in D1) Puncture 1 = point on the details before the puncture point 2 = point of puncture 3 = first movement of the cutting
TOOL DOWN

EVACUATION A =the last position before outlet 2 =challenge the position of the tool 3 =point after removal
ON. PREVIOUSLY

TOOLING UP

ON. PREVIOUSLY

ON. PREVIOUSLY

ON. PREVIOUSLY

ON. PREVIOUSLY

324

PART 4 - PRE-FUNCTION (G-CODES)


G42 right tool D1 = radius of the tool (pre-installed in D1) Puncture 1 = point on the details before the puncture point 2 = point of puncture 3 = first movement of the cutting EVACUATION A =the last position before outlet 2 =polozhenie removal tool 3 =point after removal

ON. PREVIOUSLY

TOOL DOWN

TOOLING UP

ON. PREVIOUSLY

ON. PREVIOUSLY

ON. PREVIOUSLY

ON. PREVIOUSLY

325

PART 4 - PRE-FUNCTION (G-CODES)


Sample Program to enter the tool offset and exit G0 X-5 Y1 G41 D1 F10 number G65 X0 Y1 X0 Y0 G1 Z-1 X1 Y1 X0 Y0 G65 X1 Y0 G40 G0 Z0 point of blocking the motion correction Down Tool point of load / unload parts correction in the dir. the tool is enabled, the correction of a

correction in the dir. the tool is turned off, the point of blocking traffic at the exit tool up

TOOLING UP AND DOWN

Note that the tool enters and leaves the details of the area, touching both walls because of the line G65. Notes on the correction of the cutting tool Note 1: Inclusion of the correction can be made both in the block without moving along the axis and in the block containing the axis movement. There is no limit to how many consecutive blocks may not have information about the axis. There are no restrictions on how the line and out of the zone edges. They can have any angle of intersection until the intersection there.

Note 2: Note 3:

326

PART 4 - PRE-FUNCTION (G-CODES)


Note 4: On the basis of regular points and the radii of two intersecting circles, the system automatically checks and corrects the programmed point of intersection, ie trigonometric function is performed by. All programs are standard automatic position of the axis is used as the center. For this reason, you should make sure that the correction to the cutting tool off Playing with these standard programs, so that the axis can be programmed to position the center. If you use the correction center, all excavation will be biased. If you want to preset point, and not corrected, you should add a command in the G40 block containing this point. G40 could be part of the previous block, provided that this unit is no information about the axis. Similarly, if the point when the desired pre-programmed points should be adjusted, should be added to the G41 or G42 block containing this next point, or in any block, not related to the commands for the axes between the two. Roughing and finishing passes can be easily implemented by introducing the value of the tool radius greater than the actual measured radius of the tool on the amount of allowance that should be left to the details for the finishing pass. When a program is executed, the resulting item will be oversize. However, the actual radius of the tool by typing in and running the program again, you can get the size of the finished part. So, if you enter more or smaller tool radius size of the details can be more or less. Note 9: In general, when using the correction to the cutting tool, none of the internal characteristics of the parts can not be less than tool radius. This includes features such as grooves, arcs, and V-shaped depression. If the item has such characteristics, they should be replaced by straight lines, the correction of the cutting tool should be disabled or to be used a smaller instrument. Correction of the cutting tool should be disabled by setting the parameter of a special flag to 4. G41 with a negative radius of the tool is the same as the G42 with a positive radius of the tool.

Note 5:

Note 6:

Note 7:

Note 8:

Note 10: Note 11:

327

PART 4 - PRE-FUNCTION (G-CODES)


Note 12: G42 with a negative radius of the tool is the same as the G41 with a positive radius of the tool.

In the above cases, the tool will move in the opposite direction, as he tries to settle down, touching the walls of the groove or V-shaped depression.

In this case, the error will be issued "Compensated line / arc do not intersect" (Adjusted line / arc does not intersect.) Automatic correction of the cutting tool (G45, G46, G47) Commands for automatic correction of the cutting tool, G45 (automatic correction to the left), G46 (automatic correction to the right) and G47 (automatic correction off.) Act mainly as a normal correction commands to the cutting tool, using the previous, current and next programmed point to calculate the adjusted current point. They differ only by way of correction of the first and last pre-programmed points. The control unit automatically calculates the previous programmed point for the first points of the adjusted and the next programmed point for the final adjusted points. These points are calculated in such a way that adjusted the trajectory starts and ends at the points where the radius of the tool is removed from the first and last programmed point on the left (G45) or on the right (G46) side of the programmed path.

328

PART 4 - PRE-FUNCTION (G-CODES)


Examples of programs Correction of the cutting tool incl. with G41 X-1 is Y1 G41 X0 Y0 X1 Y.2 X0 Y1.5

Correction of the cutting tool incl.

329

PART 4 - PRE-FUNCTION (G-CODES)

330

PART 4 - PRE-FUNCTION (G-CODES)


Tool length compensation (G43, G44, G49)

( or or A 2 3 4

G17 XY H-plane to add to / subtract from the Z-axis plane G18 XZ H added to / subtracted from the Y-axis plane G19 YZ H added to / subtracted from the X-axis If the correction is activated in H-plane G17 XY, and then switches to the plane of the plane G18 XZ, correction will act, and still added to the axis Z. However, if another adjustment is activated by H is still in the plane of the G18 XZ, it will be added to the axis Y. Both the correction will act on an axis Z, and the other on the axis Y, until they are canceled with G49 or changed to another correction H.

331

PART 4 - PRE-FUNCTION (G-CODES)


Correction table H of the instrument H01 = 1.5 H02 = - .5 H03 = -1.25 H04 = 5 Various lines of code and results G17 G43 H1 G90 Z0 Z1 H3 G44 H3 Z0 H4 Z0 G19 G43 H2 X0 H0 X0 G49 X0 Z0 Z moves to 1.5 (from the starting position) Z moves to -0.25 (from the starting position) Z moves to 1.25 (from the starting position) Z moves to -5 (from the starting position) X moves to -0.5 (from the starting position) X moves to 0 (from the starting position) Z moves to 0, and X is moved to 0 (from the starting position)

In the G90, and G91 modes there is no aspect of how the correction of H added to the final position of the axis or subtracted from it. Cancel scaling (G50) Set scaling (G51) You can send a command to scale at any time during the program using the G51. The command format is: G51 I____ J____ K____ X____ Y____ Z____ I, J, K - is the center of scaling. If I, J, K are not in line G51, the center will scalability last used by default center. Center Zoom is set to 0 at the beginning of each program and after the G50. X, Y, Z are the scaling factors for each axis. The range of each of the scaling factor is up to 999,9999 000,0001. After installing the scaling factors are as long as the will not be changed or canceled with G50. At the beginning of each program, all scaling factors are set to 1.

332

PART 4 - PRE-FUNCTION (G-CODES)

P1 - P4 P1'-P4 ' P0

original program, lack of scalability scalable software Center Zoom Notes on Scaling

Note 1: Note 2: Note 3: Note 4: Note 5:

After installing the scaling is valid until until canceled with G50. If you scale the arcs using a scaling factor of the primary axis. At G27, G28, G29, G30 and G92 are not influenced by scaling factors. For the scaling of the axes of the same coefficient is used G51 P. G50 sets the scaling factors of 1, and centers on the scale zero.

333

PART 4 - PRE-FUNCTION (G-CODES)


Coordinate Systems The zero point of the machine - is a fixed point on the machine. Usually, the zero point of the machine determines the manufacturer of the machine. It is set by the limit switch and encoder marker pulse on each axis. The zero point of the machine is turned on when the team F1 (Home) (starting position) is performed for the first time. When the machine zero point is defined, it does not change when you reset, call the coordinate system (G54-G59), the displacement of the coordinate system (G92) or the installation of a local coordinate system (G52). Programmed limits set by the zero point of the machine. The coordinate system of the machine (G53) Code G53, prior to any movement of XYZ, leads to the fact that these dimensions are related to the zero point of the machine.

G92 or G54-REFERENCE SYSTEM 59

REFERENCE SYSTEM ZERO POINT MACHINE

XA Y1 G92 X0 Y0 X1 Y1 X-1 Y-1 or G53 X0 Y0

moving to P2 movement in P1 displacement of P3 displacement of P3

334

PART 4 - PRE-FUNCTION (G-CODES)


The coordinate system used to align the size of the workpiece in accordance with the programs of the machine, called work coordinate system. Working coordinate system is established using one of the following methods. A. using the G92 Two. using the G53 Three. using the commands G54-G59 4. using the G52 Work coordinate system (G54 - G59) (G5 # 0 ... G5 # 9) Dimensions of working coordinates is always dependent on the floating zero points G92. To install the operating system of coordinates to press the F7 (Parms) (Options) - F2 (Coord) (coordinates). A menu of working coordinates, giving the opportunity to enter the shifted coordinates for each working coordinate system. Correction of the original - it's parameters, displacing all of the coordinate system relative to the zero point of the machine. Usually, the zero point of the machine and the same starting position. The following extensive work coordinate system. G540 - G549 . . (60 general working of corrections) . G590 - G599 Note: G540 - G590 - the same as the G54 - G59 G55 X1 Y1 G59 X1 Y1 G54 Note: moves to the X1 Y1 in the labor of correction 2 moves to the X1 Y1 in the labor adjustment 6 always food on the coordinate system

Correction of G54 - G59 are not reset during power-up or after reduction to the original position. The control unit will remain in the chosen coordinate system, as long as you run your other G54-G59.

The local coordinate system (G52) The command G52 is similar to the G92 is that it uses a zero current coordinate system as its starting point instead of the current status of the machine (G92). When you use the G52 should be taken as a "shift position working with" X____ Y ____ Z____. Notes on the local coordinate system Note 1: G52 - a modal code, so after installation it will affect all systems of coordinates.

335

PART 4 - PRE-FUNCTION (G-CODES)


Note 2: Note 3: Note 4: To cancel the G52 to introduce G52 X0 Y0. At the G52 correction does not affect the position of the machine. At the G92 correction affects the position of the machine. Correction G52 reset during power-up, after the installation to its original position, after installing the operating manual correction mode or jog feed, as well as any team after the G92. The initial values of corrections G52 restored after the completion of the program.

Note 5:

CURRENT SITUATION IN THE BEGINNING OF THE MACHINE

Local coordinate system

WORKING STARTING POSITION

SYSTEM 2

ZERO POINT MACHINE

G55 X2 Y2 G52 X1 Y1 X1 Y1 X2 Y2 With the G92 G55 X2 Y2 G92 X1 Y1 X1 Y1 X2 Y2

moves in P3 establishes a zero in the amount of P2 relative to P1 stops in P3 moves in P4

moves in P3 establishes a zero in the amount of P2 relative to P3 stops in P3 moves in P4

336

PART 4 - PRE-FUNCTION (G-CODES)


One-way or one-time accelerated positioning (G60) To perform precise positioning with no gaps there is a function of position in one direction.
Going beyond

STARTING POINT Endpoint

G60 X___ Y___ G60 - is a single G-code, it is used instead of the G00. Notes for unidirectional positioning Note 1: Note 2: Note 3: The degree of departure from the pre-specified by the manufacturer of the machine. At the direction of the transition is not affected beyond the mirroring. If the manufacturer of the machine was set to "one-sided supply of G00 ("G00 unidirectional approach"), the same sequence position will be respected at every movement of G00.

Exact stop mode (modal) (G61) When the command is issued to G61, is slowing down the block to the end point of cutting and installing the operating position is relative to the next block. G61 is valid as long as there is no command is issued by the G63 (tapping mode) or G64 (cutting mode). Tapping mode (modal) (G63) When a command is issued G63, feed rate and the correction of spindle speed is ignored (always considered as 100%), and the mode of the block and stop filing do not apply. G63 is valid as long as there is no command is issued by the G61 (exact stop mode) or G64 (cutting mode). Cutting mode (modal) (G64) G64 is the default at the beginning of each program. When a team is slowing G64 on the basis of the angle between the blocks at the end point of each subsequent block, and the mode of cutting over to the next block. This command is valid for as long as no command will be G61 (exact stop mode) or G63 (tapping mode). Calling the program (G65 P) G65 can also be used to invoke the program. The called program is determined by P.

337

PART 4 - PRE-FUNCTION (G-CODES)


For example: *G65 P4371 (program number is 4371, and sets the number 16 in 4371, and the parameter number 7 of 65) To pass parameters to the program to a block can be added to other addresses. For example: *G65 P1402 A500 (program number is 1402 and sets the number 1 to 500, the parameter number 16 in 1402, and the parameter number 7 of 65) * Unspecified parameters are set to -999. Addresses refer to the parameters as follows. Addresses A B C . . X Y Z The parameter number A 2 3 . . 24 25 26

Notes on a call using the G65 program Note 1: Note 2: Note 3: If the program specified location P, does not exist, an error. The called program is rounded address value R. For example: G65 P12.75 (program number is 13) If in block G65 is not P, the block is not considered to block the move.

Note 4: Unspecified address set to -999. Rotate the coordinate system (G68) Cancel the rotation (G69) G68 can be used to rotate the model around a programmable predetermined central point. The plane of rotation is determined by the G17, G18, G19; the center of rotation is determined by the IJK, a turning angle - with the help of AA. The command format. G68 AA + _____ I____ J____ K____ AA + means anticlockwise AA-clockwise means

338

PART 4 - PRE-FUNCTION (G-CODES)


IJK determine the center of rotation in the plane the selected G17 G18 G19. Center of rotation is installed by default on the zero point of the current coordinate system at the beginning of each program. If IJK are not present in block G68, the center of rotation will be the last mentioned center. The angle of rotation and the center of rotation are set to zero at the beginning of each program.

ANGLE OF ROTATION

CENTER TURN

G69 resets the rotation angle and the center of rotation. It should be used with caution in combination with the rotation of the other functions. We must carefully consider the use of features such as mirroring, scaling and correction of the cutting tool, along with the rotation. Here are some basic rules. A. Correction of the cutting tool should be disabled (G40), when the function is called rotation. (After the call to turn the correction on the cutting tool can be included).

Two. If scaling is included before the call rotation, the center of rotation will be scaled, if the function is called before the turn of the zoom, the center of rotation will not be scaled. Three. The procedure to enable or disable: the first inclusion, the last stop. G51. . . . Scaling incl. G68. . . . On a turn. G41. . . . correction in the cutting tool incl. . . . G40. . . . correction in the cutting tool off. G69. . . . turn off. G50. . . . scaling off.

339

PART 4 - PRE-FUNCTION (G-CODES)


4. If the center of rotation is scaled, it will be scaled up since then, until the new center will be replaced or canceled with G69.

Five. Rotation is always performed in the active plane. 6. 7. X, Y and Z can be used instead of I, J and K to the center of rotation. R can be used instead of AA for the rotation angle.

340

PART 4 - PRE-FUNCTION (G-CODES)


Turn in 3 dimensions (G0, G1, G2, G3, G68 and G69) G0, G1, G2 and G3 refer to the turn in 3 dimensions, if introduced G68 ABm. G68 ABm ABm indicates rotation in 3 dimensions. The angle in degrees m - a turn of the first axis of the third. For example, G17 G68 AB30 causes the rotation of the X coordinate of 30 degrees over the coordinates of Z. Sample Program: G31 P1 = 0 G69 N1 G0 X0 Y0 G1 Z0 G17 G68 AB [P1] (piece for rotation) X1 Y2 G3 R1 AA0 AB45 G1 X3 Y5 Y6 G69 G31 P1 = P1-5 IF P1> = -180 GOTO 1

With the above program yields the following detail:

341

PART 4 - PRE-FUNCTION (G-CODES)


Note: Any AA to turn the plane is ignored. Correction of the cutting tool and the trigonometric aid is not fully supported as a function of rotation in three dimensions.

With the G69 cancels all corners, including the turn in 3 dimensions. Scalable and then turns the part

SCALABLE / ROTATED PIECE

ROTATED PIECE CENTER FOR SCALING BACKGROUND DETAIL

Scale DETAIL Center of rotation Scale the center of rotation

G51 I4 J1.5 X.7 Y.7 G68 I3 J1 AA45 X3 Y1 X5 Y2 X3 Y1 G69 G50

342

PART 4 - PRE-FUNCTION (G-CODES)


Rotatable and scalable, then the item

G68 I3 J1 AA45.00 G51 I4 J1.5 X.9 Y.9 X3 Y1 X5 Y2 X3 Y1 G50 G69

343

PART 4 - PRE-FUNCTION (G-CODES)


Cancel mirroring (G70) Install a mirrored display (G71) Commands allow you to receive mirroring mirroring any midline. In the mirrored midline has no effect, on or off scaling or rotation. Mirroring is disabled at the beginning of each program. The team is as follows. G71 X____ Y____ Z____
MIRROR SECONDARY LINE Mirroring DETAIL BACKGROUND DETAIL

X, Y and Z axis is determined to be mirrored. Their values determine the distance from the zero current position to create a mirrored center line. After the G71 command must be at least one X, Y or Z. G71 X3.5 X4 Y1.5 X5 Y2.25 X4 Y3 Y1.5 G70

344

PART 4 - PRE-FUNCTION (G-CODES)


G71 X0 Mirroring X G70 NORMAL (Not mirroring)

G71 X0 Y0 Mirroring the X and Y Mirroring

G70 Y0 Mirroring Y

G70 cancels mirroring. Mirroring on the same axis changes the counter and conventional milling. Mirroring the same axis scaling by -1. Group cycles The group makes the program loop, using a block to G-code to determine the processing operations are usually defined by several blocks.

345

PART 4 - PRE-FUNCTION (G-CODES)


Group cycles
G-code G73 Boring -Z The intermediate flow Operation at the bottom of the hole Pause rotation of the spindle clockwise Challenge +Z The accelerated movement of Application The cycle of highspeed drill bits with a periodic output The cycle of tapping on the left

G74

Feed

Feed The accelerated movement of The accelerated movement of movement in XY

G75

Feed

Tsekovanie

G76

Feed

Pause orientation of the spindle movement in the X Y

Cycle finish boring

G77 G78 G80 G81 G82 G83 Feed Feed Feed The intermediate flow Pause spindle stop flywheel Pause Pause rotation of the spindle clockwise Stopping the spindle Moving in the XY Pause Pause The accelerated movement of The accelerated movement of The accelerated movement of The accelerated movement of Feed Feed The accelerated movement of Feed The accelerated movement of Feed Feed

Drilling cycle of your choice The cycle of boring manual Cancellation Drilling cycle, zasverlovki loop holes Drilling cycle, the cycle tsekovaniya Drilling cycle with periodic withdrawal of the drill The cycle of tapping The cycle of boring The cycle of rapid boring Feedback loop boring

G84 G85 G86 G87 G88 G89

Feed Feed Feed Feed Feed Feed

Rigid tapping The cycle of boring

As a rule, group cycle consists of a sequence of six operations, as shown below.

346

PART 4 - PRE-FUNCTION (G-CODES)


Stage 1: Positioning axes X and Y (or the 4th and 5th, if activated) Stage 2: The accelerated movement of the point R Stage 3: Handling holes Stage 4: Operation at the bottom of the hole Step 5: Challenge to the point R Stage 6: Fast moving to the starting point The work of the group cycle

Operation 1 STARTING POINT

Operation 2 OPERATION 6

POINT R Step 5 Operation 3

Accelerated movement WORK FLOW Operation 4

The positioning is usually performed on the plane XY, and processing of the holes made by means of axis Z. When positioning and handling of the holes should be using this plane, and a combination of axes. Group cycles can be used in any plane. The operations of the group cycle consists of three basic modes, which are specified by certain modal G-codes, as shown below. (1) The data format (2) The level of the cusps (3) drill mode G90 Absolute G91 Incremental G98 level of the initial point G99 R-point level G73 G80 G81 .

347

PART 4 - PRE-FUNCTION (G-CODES)


. . G89 Note: The initial level assumes the value of the Z-axis when you first start the cycle group.

The figure below shows how to specify the data in G90 or G91. Absolute and incremental programming

ENTRY-LEVEL

ENTRY-LEVEL

POINT R

POINT R

POINT Z ABSOLUTE

POINT Z Incremental Accelerated movement WORK FLOW

If the tool is returned to the R point or the initial level, it is indicated by G98 or G99. (See the figure below.) Use the G99 to the first hole, and the G98 - for the latter. When the cycle is repeated in a group mode, G98, the tool returns to the initial level after each hole. In the G99 initial level does not change, and the tool returns to the R point after each hole.

348

PART 4 - PRE-FUNCTION (G-CODES)


The initial level and the level of the point R

ENTRY-LEVEL

ENTRY-LEVEL

LEVEL POINTS R

LEVEL POINTS R

RETURN TO ENTRY LEVEL

RETURN TO THE POINT OF LEVEL R Accelerated movement WORK FLOW

Data on drilling indicated after the G73, G74, G76, G77, G78, G81 - G89. The data is stored in the device management, as modal values for future use in other cycles. Data on the processing cycle in the group are indicated as shown below. G ____ X__ Y__ Drilling mode The data on the status of the holes Z__ R__ V__ Q__ P__ F__ Data on drilling

Drilling mode. . . See G__ __ table of the group of cycles. The data on the situation X Indicates the position of the holes on the incremental openings or the absolute value Y. The trajectory and speed of delivery are the same as in the positioning of the G00. Data on drilling Z. . . Denotes the distance from point R to the bottom of the hole with an incremental value or the position of the bottom of the hole with the absolute value. R. . . Denotes the distance from entry level to point R with the incremental value or the position of the point R by the absolute value. V. . . Indicates the first depth Z in the G73 and G83. Q. . . Represents incremental value for the G73 and G83. P. . . Denotes the time spent at the bottom of the hole. The relationship between time and the specified value is the same as for the G04. F. . . Refers to the feedrate. B. . . Denotes the exposure time to reverse the spindle in the soft mode, tapping the left or right.

349

PART 4 - PRE-FUNCTION (G-CODES)


For the drilling cycle can be used: P140 for P141 for P142 for P143 for P144 for P145 for P146 for P147 for P148 for P149 for Zones of safe return The final depth Z The entry-level Z The increments of Z ATh depth Z Feed rate of Z The increments of the periodic output bits Output gap in the periodic drills Pause before reversing the spindle threading cycles Pause

Drilling mode (G__ __) remains unchanged as long as there is no other mode is specified, or a group drilling cycle will not be canceled with G80. After specifying the data on drilling in the group cycle, they persist as long as there will not be changed. All necessary data about the drilling must be specified when starting the cycle group, only the variable data must be specified at the time of the cycle. Group cycles are canceled at the beginning of each program. G73 - G78, G81 - G89 without moving along the axis will not perform drilling holes. G-codes include only the drilling cycle.

350

PART 4 - PRE-FUNCTION (G-CODES)


Uniformly distributed holes can be programmed with the address L.
LAST OF TREATMENT

FIRST OF TREATMENT

STANDINGS

G81 R___ Z___ F___ G91 X___ Y___ L___ X___ Y____ represent the first and subsequent position openings in the incremental mode (G91). In absolute mode (G90) hole will be drilled repeatedly in the same position. K can be used instead of L to denote the number of holes. Execute bolt holes (G72) Automatic routine execution bolt holes can be used with any of the drilling cycle. Drilling cycles, if they apply to this automated program, characterized in that the hole positions are not specified. Line G72 indirectly identified all the provisions of the holes on the basis of special entry: the number of holes at 360 , the number of reams holes, the radius of the circle center of bolt holes, the initial angle of the first hole and the center of the circle bolt holes. The control unit then calculates the position of each hole and produce a rapid linear movement in every hole. Angle is the angle of the first hole of the position "at 3:00." Positive initial angle departs clockwise from the position "at 3:00." A negative start angle departs clockwise from the position "at 3:00." Note: Holes are drilled in a clockwise direction from the first position if the radius of the bolt holes is positive. Holes are drilled counter-clockwise, if the radius of the bolt hole is negative.

351

PART 4 - PRE-FUNCTION (G-CODES)


Determination of the initial angle
E 1-HOLE K GOOD

E 2-HOLE K NEGATIVE

Below is the format command G72. G72 X___ Y___ R___ Q___ P___ K___ position radius number of holes number of holes angle circle in center of hole 360 Drilling first bolt openings openings bolt The program for the drilling of a circle with a 5 bolt holes with a radius of 1 " N1 N2 N3 G20 G90 (Inch / absolute) S1000 M3 G43 H1 (spindle clockwise, 1000 rev / min, activates the correction to the length of the tool number 1) G81 G99 Z-1 R.1 F10 G81 G99 Z-1 R.1 F10 N4 Boring Return to point R The drilling depth The plane R Feedrate Z

G72 X0 Y0 R1 Q5 P5 K0 G72 The standard program execution bolt holes X0 Y0 Center in X0, Y0 R1 Radius 1 inch Q5 5holes in the 360 P5 Drilling of 5 holes K0 The initial angle of 0

352

PART 4 - PRE-FUNCTION (G-CODES)


Notes on a standard program execution bolt holes Note 1:If P is less than Q, the circle would be incomplete drilled holes for the bolt. Note 2 To move counter-clockwise using a negative radius. Note 3: If you do not want to move to the center of the bolt hole pattern, you can use the following scheme. G81 G99 Z-1 R.1 F10 G65 X0 Y0 G72 R1 Q5 P5 K0 Note 4:G65 can not be in block G72, because the block is also P, which causes the program 5. You can also use: G81 G99 Z-2.1 F10 1 P156 = 1 (radius of the bolt holes) P157 = 45 (initial angle of bolt holes) P158 = 5 (number of holes at 360 ) P159 = 5 (number of holes to be performed) G72 G65 X0 Y0 (center bolt holes) Note 5: The initial level corresponds to Z, where Z during the drilling of the code (G73 - G78, G81 - G89).

353

PART 4 - PRE-FUNCTION (G-CODES)


The cycle of high-speed drill bits with a periodic output (G73)

POINT R Z, ZERO

POINT R Z, ZERO

POINT Z

POINT Z

Accelerated movement WORK FLOW

G73 G98/G99 Z___ R___ V___ Q___ U___ D___ F___ The command G73 represents the cycle of high-speed drill with a periodic withdrawal of the drill. With this cycle is executed as follows. A. Two. Three. 4. Five. 6. 7. Note: The accelerated movement of the point R Filing down the point V Fast moving up to a value of U Fast moving down to the value of D Filing down the value of Q is either a point Z (whichever is less) Repeat steps 3-5 until you reach the point Z Fast moving to the starting point / point R, as defined G98/G99 Team V optional. If you miss it, the first depth is equal to R___ - Q___.

354

PART 4 - PRE-FUNCTION (G-CODES)


The cycle of the soft tapping on the left (G74)

STARTING POINT Spindle CCW

Spindle CCW

POINT R

POINT R

POINT Z POINT Z PAUSE Spindle clockwise PAUSE Accelerated movement WORK FLOW Spindle clockwise

G74 G98/G99 Z___ R___ B___ P___ F___ The command G74 represents the cycle of soft tapping on the left. Each axis position in this cycle is executed as follows. A. Two. Three. 4. Five. 6. 7. Eight. Note: The accelerated movement of the point R Filing down the point Z Pause before the reversal (indicated by code B) Reverse spindle rotation (clockwise) Pause after the reversal (indicated by code P) Submission to the point R Reverse spindle rotation (counterclockwise) Fast moving to the starting point, if you see code G98

During the tapping switch feedrate and spindle speed adjustment is ignored. In block mode, the cycle does not stop until until it is finished carving. If you use a feed, or just stop stop, stop the tap when it is outside the hole. The calculation of feed and speeds for threading A STATUS = STEP QTY / min X STATUS = feed rate

355

PART 4 - PRE-FUNCTION (G-CODES)


For example: 1/4-20 taps, the number of rev / min spindle 400 1/20 = 0.05 (stroke) 400 x 0,05 = 20 (flow rate)

For proper operation metchikoderzhatelya may need to adjust the feed rate. If you tap in the chuck is too drawn out, the feed rate should be increased. If the tap is pushed into the chuck, the feed rate should be reduced. Tsekovanie (G75) Tsekovanie identical to the cycle of internal finishing round of deep grooves (G25). It always performs a counter-milling (counterclockwise). It always performs infeed to the center (not linear). It can be used in schemes under the bolt holes and other drilling patterns.

POINT R Z, ZERO

POINT R Z, ZERO

POINT Z

POINT Z

Accelerated movement WORK FLOW

F__ (Feed rate XY) P150 = __ Radius tsekovki P503 = __ O - correction of the cutting tool off., 1 - Correction to the cutting tools inc. G75 G98/G99 Z__ R__ V__ Q__ F__

356

PART 4 - PRE-FUNCTION (G-CODES)


G75 represents Team tsekovaniya cycle. In the loop is executed as follows. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. The accelerated movement of the point R. Filing down to the point V. Tsekovanie hole (radius up to P150). Filing down the value of Q or a point Z (whichever is less.) Repeat steps 3-4 until you reach the point Z. Fast moving to the starting point / point R, as defined G98/G99.

Note 1: The command is optional V. If you miss it, the first depth is equal to R__ - Q__ Note 2: You can cut normal (clockwise) with mirroring. Cycle finish boring (G76)
Spindle clockwise
STARTING POINT

Spindle clockwise

POINT R POINT R

PAUSE

POINT Z

PAUSE

POINT Z

Accelerated movement WORK FLOW OSS - ORIENTED SPINDLE STOP OFFSET (acceleration)

ORIENTED SPINDLE STOP TOOL

The displacement

The distance and angle are adjustable parameters to control the angle of the holes and the distance to it.

357

PART 4 - PRE-FUNCTION (G-CODES)


G76 F____ P____ R____ Z____ G98/G99 The team represents the cycle G76 boring finish. In each position of the axis, this cycle will be performed as follows. A 2 3 4 5 6 7 The accelerated movement of the point R Filing down to the point Z Pause at the bottom of the second P The orientation of the spindle Move to XY (the distance and direction parameters are CTRL back corner holes" and "distance to the rear corner of the hole") The accelerated movement of the hole at the point R / start point specified G98/G99 Moving back to the original position of the XY

Specialized drilling cycle (G77) This is a specialized drilling cycle. It can be used to loop specified by the user. The cycle must be set to G-code, G79. For example: G77 R.1 Z-2 X1 Y2 (does what and G79) Y-2 (does what and G79) . . . X3 (does what and G79) G80 Specialized drilling cycle can be used in the execution cycles bolt holes, equally spaced grid of holes or openings. If the G79 - no special code, you get an error 549, unrecognized G code (an unidentified G-code).

358

PART 4 - PRE-FUNCTION (G-CODES)


The cycle of boring manual (G78)

Spindle clockwise

STARTING POINT Spindle clockwise POINT R PAUSE / STOP SPINDLE / FLYWHEEL PAUSE / STOP SPINDLE / FLYWHEEL POINT Z POINT Z POINT R

Accelerated movement WORK FLOW

G78 F____ P____ R____ Z____ G98/G99 The teams represent the cycle G78 Boring manual. In each of the following axis position in this cycle will happen next. A. Two. 3. 4. Five. 6. 7. The accelerated movement of the point R Filing down the point Z Pause on P seconds Stopping the spindle Log in flywheel mode (user can use the flywheel manually control axes, enable / disable the spindle, take the tool, etc.) Exit from the flywheel by pressing Enter or ESC The accelerated movement of the holes in the point R / starting point

Cancellation of group cycle (G80) Group Cycle (G73 - G78, G81 - G89) is canceled, and then, work in normal mode.

359

PART 4 - PRE-FUNCTION (G-CODES)


Drilling cycle (G81)

STARTING POINT

POINT R

POINT R

POINT Z

POINT Z

Accelerated movement WORK FLOW

G81 G98/G99 Z___ R___ F___ The team represents drilling cycle G81. In this cycle is executed as follows. A. The accelerated movement of the point R Two. Filing down the point Z Three. Fast moving to the starting point / point R, as defined G98/G99 Drilling cycle / pause (G82)

STARTING POINT

POINT R

POINT R

PAUSE

POINT Z

POINT Z PAUSE

Accelerated movement WORK FLOW

G82 G98/G99 Z___ R___ P___ F___

360

PART 4 - PRE-FUNCTION (G-CODES)


The command G82 is similar to the G81; but pause (indicated by the command P) holds at the bottom of the hole. With this cycle is executed as follows. A. Two. Three. 4. The accelerated movement of the point R Filing down the point Z Pause for P___ seconds Fast moving to the starting point / point R, as defined G98/G99

Drilling cycle with periodic withdrawal of the drill (G83)

POINT R, Z, ZERO

POINT R, Z, ZERO

POINT Z

POINT Z

Accelerated movement WORK FLOW

G83 G98/G99 Z___ R___ V___ Q___ D___ F___ The command G83 drilling cycle stands with periodic withdrawal of the drill. This cycle is performed as follows. A. Two. Three. 4. Five. 6. 7. Note: The accelerated movement of the point R Filing down the point V Fast moving up to the point R Fast moving down to the value of D Filing down the value of Q is either a point Z (whichever is less) Repeat steps 3-5 to then, until you reach the point Z Fast moving to the starting point / point R, as defined G98/G99

Team V optional, if omitted, the first depth is equal to R___ - Q___.

361

PART 4 - PRE-FUNCTION (G-CODES)


The cycle of the soft tapping on the right (G84)

G84 G98/G99 Z___ R___ B___ P___ F___ The team represents the cycle G84 tapping on the right. Each axis position in this cycle will be performed as follows. A. Two. Three. 4. Five. 6. 7. Eight. Note: The accelerated movement of the point R Filing down the point Z Pause before the reversal (denoted by team B) Reverse spindle rotation (counterclockwise) Pause after the reversal (denoted by a team of P) Submission to the point R Reverse spindle rotation (clockwise) . Fast moving to the starting point, if it is listed code G98

During the tapping switch feedrate and spindle speed adjustment is ignored. In block mode, the cycle does not stop until until it is finished carving. If you use a feed, or just stop stop, stop the tap when it is outside the hole. Feed and speed for tapping A STATUS = STEP QTY / min X STATUS = feed rate

For example:

1/4-20 taps, the number of rev / min spindle 400 1/20 = 0.05 (stroke) 400 x 0,05 = 20 (flow rate)

362

PART 4 - PRE-FUNCTION (G-CODES)


For proper operation metchikoderzhatelya may need to adjust the feed rate. If you tap in the chuck is too drawn out, the feed rate should be increased. If the tap is pushed into the chuck, the feed rate should be reduced. Boring Cycle (G85)

STARTING POINT

POINT R

POINT R

POINT Z

POINT Z

Accelerated movement WORK FLOW

G85 G98/G99 Z___ R____ F___ The team represents the cycle G85 boring. Each axis position in this cycle will be performed as follows. A. Two. Three. 4. The accelerated movement of the point R Submission to the point Z Submission to the point R Fast moving to the starting point, if it is listed code G98

363

PART 4 - PRE-FUNCTION (G-CODES)


The cycle accelerated boring (G86)

Spindle clockwise

STARTING POINT

Spindle clockwise

POINT R

POINT R

POINT Z POINT Z Spindle stop Spindle stop

Accelerated movement WORK FLOW

G86 G98/G99 Z___ R___ F___ The team represents the cycle G86 boring fast. Each axis position in this cycle will be performed as follows. A. Two. Three. 4. Five. 6. 7. Starting the spindle (clockwise) The accelerated movement of the point R Filing down the point Z Stopping the spindle The accelerated movement of the point R Fast moving to the starting point / point R, as defined by G98/G99 Starting the spindle (clockwise)

364

PART 4 - PRE-FUNCTION (G-CODES)


Boring feedback loop (G87)
NOT USED Early to a fixed point Spindle clockwise POINT Z

Spindle clockwise

POINT R

Accelerated movement WORK FLOW ORIENTED SPINDLE STOP OFFSET (acceleration)

ORIENTED SPINDLE STOP

TOOL

The amount of bias

G87, G98 F____ R____ Z____ The distance and angle indicated by the control parameters of the "back corner holes" and "distance to the rear corner of the hole." The team represents a feedback loop G87 boring. Each axis position in this cycle will be performed as follows. A. The orientation of the spindle Two. Accelerated movement in XY (with parameters CTRL, used in G76) Three. The accelerated movement of the point R (usually at the bottom of the hole) 4. Move to the starting position XY 5. Starting the spindle 6. Submission of up to a depth of Z 7. The orientation of the spindle Eight. Move to XY (determined by the rear corner of the hole and the distance to the rear corner of the hole)

365

PART 4 - PRE-FUNCTION (G-CODES)


9. 10. 11. Fast moving up to the starting point Moving back to the starting position XY Restarting the spindle

366

PART 4 - PRE-FUNCTION (G-CODES)


Rigid tapping cycle (G88)

G88 G98/G99 Z____ R____ F____ P____ (Q____ V____) The command G88 stands rigid tapping cycle. P (pause) may be used if the distance between the holes is too small to provide time for spindle reverse its rotation in the right direction. This cycle is performed as follows. A. Two. Three. 4. Five. 6. 7. The accelerated movement of the point R Submission to the point Z Reversing the rotation of the spindle Submission to the point R Reversing the rotation of the spindle Pause for P___ seconds Fast moving to the starting point, if it is listed code G98

367

PART 4 - PRE-FUNCTION (G-CODES)


Note 1: If the spindle is rotated in a clockwise direction when running G88, threading is performed on the right. If the spindle rotates counterclockwise when running G88, threading is performed on the left. The cycle will not stop tapping until it is complete, even if they are activated by stopping the flow, or block mode. If the shutdown is activated, tapping goes in the opposite direction and stopped at the exit of the hole. If Q__ indicated in block G88, threading is performed with periodic withdrawal of the tap. Q__ step indicates a periodic output metchika.V__ indicates the depth of the first tap. F indicates the progress For example: - 20 tap 1/20 = 0.05, the course Use F.05 Rigid tapping - it is an option provided by the manufacturer of the machine, it should only be used if this option is set.

Note 2:

Note 3:

368

PART 4 - PRE-FUNCTION (G-CODES)


Boring Cycle / Pause (G89)

STARTING POINT R

POINT R

POINT R

POINT Z PAUSE

POINT Z PAUSE

Accelerated movement WORK FLOW

G89 G98/G99 Z___ P___ F___ The team represents the cycle G89 boring, with a pause. In each subsequent position of the axis in a given cycle will be performed as follows. A. Two. Three. 4. Five. The accelerated movement of the point R Submission to the point Z Pause at the bottom (indicated by code P) Submission to the point R Fast moving to the starting point, if it is listed code G98

Example program for drilling holes in the plane YZ. G19 G81 R.1 X-1 F20 (the depth of X -1) Y3 Z2 (drilling holes in the Y3 Z2) Z5 (drilling holes in the Y3 Z5) Y-1 (drilling holes in a Y-Z5) G80

369

PART 4 - PRE-FUNCTION (G-CODES)


Notes on the specifics of the loop group Note 1: The spindle must be included with the M-code, M3 or M4, before the marked group cycle. M3 The rotation of the spindle clockwise . . . G ____ ...... Correctly M5 Stopping the spindle . . . G ____ ..... Wrong (M3 or M4 must be specified before the data block.) Note 2: If the block contains a moving X and / or Y, is produced in the drilling mode, the group of the cycle. If the unit does not contain the movement of the X and / or Y, drilling is performed. However, when specified "G4 X___", drilling is not performed, even if marked X. If the block contains a clause Z, drilling will be performed. However, the Z axis will move quickly at this point. It can be used to move the tool up and over obstacles without the deactivation of the group cycle. G00 X____ G81X____ Y____ Z____ R____ F____ F (Drilling is performed. Updated feed rate X Y.) M (Drilling is performed. Performed only optional.) G4 P (Drilling is performed. Data on drilling P is not changed by G04 P__.)

Note 3:

370

PART 4 - PRE-FUNCTION (G-CODES)


Note 4: Specify the data on drilling in the block in which the drilling. The input data (V, Q, B, Z, R, F or P) is stored as modal.

CLIP

PROCESSING

Example of drilling: G90 G81 G0 R.1 Z-2 F10 (0.1 clearance for drilling, the depth of 2, Z 10 filing) X1 (drill holes at depths of -2 X1) X2.5 F5 (drill holes at depths of -2 X2.5, Z 5 flow) X3.5 Z-1 (drill holes at depths X3.5 -1) Z2 (Z to accelerate the movement to remove the 2 clips) X6 (drilling holes in the X6) X7 Z-2 (drilled hole at a depth of X7 -2) G80 (removal of drilling cycle)
USED STILL, WAITING FOR NORMAL SPINDLE ROTATION

Note 5:

If you use G76, G78, G86, G87 and G88 the distance between the holes is too small to insert a pause (G04) between the movements, to allow time for reversing the direction of rotation of the spindle. 371

PART 4 - PRE-FUNCTION (G-CODES)

G00 M___ G86 X___ Y___ Z___ R___ F___ G04 P___ (Pauses, drilling is performed.) X__ Y___ G04 P___ (Pauses, drilling is performed.) X__ Y___ G04 P___ (Pauses, drilling is performed.) . . . . . . This can not be taken into account if the machine has the function of spindle acceleration. Note 6: Precautions operator a) A single unit When the cycle is carried out in a group mode, a single unit, the control unit stops at the end of Operations 1, 2 and 6. Therefore, it must run at least three times to drill one hole. Correction Allowed correction of the feed rate and spindle speed adjustment, equal to 100%, during the execution of the group of cycles G74 and G84.

b)

Absolute / incremental mode There are two modes of movement notation: G90 (absolute) denotes a fixed position, and G91 (incremental) denotes the distance from the current position of the tool. Absolute mode (modal) (G90) This function causes the transition to the normal control devices Absolute mode. In this mode, all sizes are calculated from a base point. This basic point can be either the original zero point, which is a fixed point on the machine, or a point on the working coordinate system defined by the operator. Due to the limitation table / slide XYZ dimensions relative to the original zero point can only be negative for the standard milling machines, manufactured by Milltronics. Size relative to the origin of workers may be negative or positive, depending on where the operator sets the origin. G90 is active at the beginning of each program. G90 cancels the G91. Note: The machine defaults to G90 (absolute mode) when the program starts.

372

PART 4 - PRE-FUNCTION (G-CODES)


Positioning in the absolute coordinate system G90 X0 Y0 X1 Y1.5 X2 Y2 P1 P2 P3

Incremental mode (modal) (G91) This function causes the transition of the control device in an incremental mode. In this mode, all the dimensions are entered on the status of the machine in the previous block. In the case of manual data entry dimensions refer to the current state of the machine. Dimensions in G91 may be positive or negative. G91 should be used with caution. When you activate the tool offset, size, or the installation plane R zeros floating through the G92 control unit should not be in the mode of G91. XC, YC, ZC (center), AA (initial angle) and AB (end angle) is always in absolute mode. G91 cancels the G90.

373

PART 4 - PRE-FUNCTION (G-CODES)


Incremental Positioning G90 X0 Y0 G91 X1 Y1.5 X1 Y.5 P1 P2 P3

Floating zero (G92) This command sets the working coordinate system. The situation becomes programmed tool position in the current work coordinate system. If you use this command G92 should take it as a "challenge of the provision X_ Y_ Z_.

New coordinate system G92

CURRENT WORKING REFERENCE SYSTEM

If the machine is positioned in the P2, which is the command X1 Y1, and then issued the command G92 X0 Y0, the next time you issue the command X.5 Y.5 machine will be positioned

374

PART 4 - PRE-FUNCTION (G-CODES)


in P3. If the machine is positioned at P1, and given the team a G92 X-Y-1, the next time you issue the command X.5 Y.5 machine will be positioned in P3. When using the G92 for the G92 subroutine call to the subroutine call is saved and restored when returning from the subroutine. For example: X0 Y0 Challenge 2 (cut at 0.0) X5 Y0 Challenge 2 (cut at 5.0) X5 Y5 Challenge 2 (cut at 5.5) O0002 G92 X0 Y0 X__ Y__ X__ Y__ X__ Y__ M99 (return)

Applying this rule, you can cut the same form in several places. For more information on calling subroutines using the G92 in the notes on the M98 (p 402.) Notes on a floating zero Note 1: When using the G92 Z__ correction to the length of the instrument should be removed or taken into account the fact that they will influence the new position of the floating zero on the axis Z. G92 must not be used when the correction is on the cutting tool is activated, the control unit must always be in the mode of G40. The distance shifted by one working in the G92 coordinate system will be applied to other operating systems of coordinates, when they are activated by using the commands G54 - G59. If this is undesirable, the new G92 should be installed when changing coordinate systems. G92 settings are reset when the power and after the installation of the machine to its original position. G92 X__ Y__ can be considered as a challenge to this position X__ Y__. At power-G54 coordinate system is activated. The original values are restored after the G92 program.

Note 2: Note 3:

Note 4: Note 5: Note 6:

375

PART 4 - PRE-FUNCTION (G-CODES)


Feed mode with a time delay (G93) G93 - is a modal G-code. In the G93 feed rate mode with a time delay given in inverse seconds (1/sec) or inverse-minute (1/min). Both units used depend on many parameters, which set the units for time-delay mode. In the time delay the amount of time you want to move the block, is the inverse of the feed rate, regardless of distance traveled. To this there are two exceptions: 1) the accelerated movement and 2) moving, slow down, if any axis of a given movement is moving faster than the maximum setting for the supply of that particular axis. In the time-delay feed rate should be specified in each block transfer, otherwise an error will be issued 611. For example: G93 X-10Y-2.4A-3F.25 (Provided that the unit feed rate equal to 1/sec, the movement takes 1/0.25 = 4 seconds, regardless of where the movement started on the machine). X-5 (This line generates an error 611, because the rate is not specified filing.) Note: Accelerated movement going on in the accelerated filing. Submission of a minute (G94) This G-code is a modal code, giving the device control instructions on how to interpret the commands of submission - in inches / min or mm / min for linear displacement degrees / minute for rotations and inches / min or mm / min for the combination of linear and rotary movements. When programming a combination of linear and rotary displacement curves correspond to the time required for the implementation of linear displacement. The only exception is that if the time for linear movement is too small, the axis of rotation will try to move faster than is possible. In this case, the movement slows down with the length of the rotation and the maximum flow rate for the axis of rotation. When you turn the control unit G94 is always expressed in the submission in a minute. For example: F100 X12 F28 X1Y3Z4 F600 A180 F250 A200 B100 Starts at (0,0,0) and performs integer linear movement 12 inches, The movement is 12 x 60/100 = 7.2 seconds. It starts at (2,5,1) and performs integer linear movement 3.74 inches, The movement is 3,74 x 60/28 = 8.02 seconds. It starts with (0,0,0,0,0) and performs a rotation by 180 , the rotation is 180 x 60/600 = 18 seconds. It starts with (0,0,0,120,300) and performs a turn at 215,41 , the rotation is 215,41 x 60/250 = 51.70 seconds.

376

PART 4 - PRE-FUNCTION (G-CODES)


F100 X12 A180 F28 X1 Y3 Z4 A30 B120 F10 X-1 A1800 It starts with (0,0,0,0,0) and performs a linear movement 12 inches, The movement is 12 x 60/100 = 7.2 seconds. It starts with (2,5,1,0, -333), and performs a linear movement 3.74 inches, The movement is 3,74 x 60/28 = 8.02 seconds. It starts with (0,0,0,0,0), and since the axis of rotation will try to move faster than is possible, the control unit uses the parameters to the axis of rotation of the movement performed at 1800 , which would take 1800 x 60/5000 = 21.6 seconds, with 5000 - this is the maximum flow rate for the axis of rotation A.

Feed per revolution (G95) This G-code is a modal code, giving the device control instructions on how to interpret the commands of submission - in mm or inch per revolution of the spindle. G1 F.005 will cause the displacement of the axis of 0.005 "for each revolution of the spindle. Note: To use this G-code on the machine should be optional rigid tapping.

Returning to the original level or the level of R (G98/G99) These two G-code is used only when the control device is located in one of the group of cycles axis Z (with the G73 to G89), or automatic standard programs (G24-26, G34-36). G98 causes the return of the Z group cycle at the level at which it was activated during this cycle. G99 causes the return of the Z group cycle at the current level of R. G98 X1 Y1 Z1 G81 X5 Y-4 Z-1.3 R.2 F10 X2 Y3 G99 X3 Y-1 G80

X5 Y-4

then Z.2 then Z-1.3 and then Z1 X2 Y3 then Z.2 then Z-1.3 and then Z1 X3 Y-1 and then Z.2 then Z-1.3 and then Z.2 cancellation of the cycle

Here are a few specialized and non-G-code. On. / Off. cylindrical display (G107) G107 can be used when there is a rotary axis for cutting on the surface of the cylinder. Before you apply this g-code, you must install two additional parameters (MISC) for valid values: Cylindrical axis display its original position (set to 1 for X, 2 Y, 3 for Z)

377

PART 4 - PRE-FUNCTION (G-CODES)


CHEESE DISPLAY rotation axis (set of 4 for A, 5 for B) When the cylindrical mapping is enabled, any movement that is specified for the "Axis in position" will be transformed into a movement for "a rotary axis." When a cylindrical display is activated, move the axis in the initial position is possible. As for the other two linear axes, in addition to the original position of the axis, the axis on which the transfer is made to the cylinder or from him, sometimes called the "axis of supply", and the axis on which the transfer is made along the cylinder, sometimes simply called "linear axis." Cylindrical mapping is included in determining the radius of the cylinder with the address of 'R' or the rotational axis of the corresponding address (or 'A', or 'B', depending on the parameter of the cylindrical rotary axis): G107 R10 or G107 A10 (if A - rotary axis) or G107 B10 (if B - rotary axis) With regard to the definitions of the planes, rotary axis is the axis of a place in the starting position. When the cylindrical mapping is enabled, the radius can be re-defined by the recall G107. Cylindrical mapping is disabled if you specify zero radius or the radius is not specified: G107 or G107 R0 or G107 A0 (if A - rotary axis) or G107 B0 (if B - rotary axis) Next, the description will be deemed to have A - a rotary axis, Y - axis in the initial position, and Z - axis of the serve. When the cylindrical mapping is enabled, can use two modes of programming. In both modes the rotational axis of the shaft takes place in the starting position for the determination of the planes.

378

PART 4 - PRE-FUNCTION (G-CODES)


MODE 1 - ENTER STRAIGHT CIRCULAR MOVEMENTS In this mode, use the address 'A'. To calculate the feed distance traveled in degrees, is converted to an equivalent distance on the surface of the cylinder. Example 1: G107 A10 (the radius of the cylinder 10 inches) (If we were in the plane of XY, we are now in the plane XA) G1 F50 X-5 A-5 (for the calculation of feed is converted to 5 degrees of arc length on the cylinder) G3 X-25 R10 (R is always linear distance in inches) G1 Z-2 G107 A8 (after moving along the axis of filing typically requires re-definition of the radius of the cylinder) | | G107 A0 MODE 2 - CHANGE OF LINEAR In this mode, the address used by 'Y'. Addresses 'Y' will be converted to a similar address 'A'. Programmed trajectory, recorded for the plane XY, can "rotate" around the cylinder, without changing the program after you insert G107. Example 2: G0 X0Y0 Z0 G107 R10 (the radius of the cylinder 10 inches) (If we were in the plane of XY, we are now in the plane XA) G1 F50 X-5 Y-5 (the required displacement is computed A, equivalent to the Y-5) G3 X-15 Y-15 I-5 J-5 (even in the plane XA -5 in the J-5 is still in inches) G3 X-25 R5 (R is always linear distance in inches) G1 Z-2 G107 R8 (after moving along the axis of filing typically requires re-definition of the radius of the cylinder) | | G107 R0 NOTES:

379

PART 4 - PRE-FUNCTION (G-CODES)


A. When a cylindrical map of activated at a certain radius, the axis of filing, as a rule, does not move. If the axis of the feed is moved, it usually moves in a block separate from the other movements of the axes, and then a re-definition of the radius of the cylinder. Two. As noted above, the rotary axis is the axis of a place in the starting position for the determination of the planes. In general, only useful for the plane, including the linear axis and the rotation axis. Other planes include the displacement of the axis of filing in conjunction with the other axis, and not likely to give useful results. Three. Allowed correction of the cutting tool. 4. Can be determined by the base position for the axis in position for use with the G28 or G30. Axis in the initial position can be directed to the transition team is the "original position" to start the G107. G271 (cleaning deep cavities) This cycle operates, working with the correction of the trajectory of the cutting tool using the tool radius, plus the finishing allowance. The sample program: P145 = 10 (Feedrate Z) F25 (XY feed rate to clear the notch) G271 P1234 Q1235 R.1 Z-1 D.1 I.05 ('R' - is the plane R, 'Z' - is the depth Z, 'D' - a cutting width, and the 'I' - a finishing allowance) N1234 ('P' indicates the start of excavation) G41 G65 X0 Y1 X0 Y0 X2 Y1 G3 R1 AA-90 AB90 G1 Y4 X0 Y0 G65 X1 Y0 G40 N1235 ('Q' denotes the end of recess)

380

PART 4 - PRE-FUNCTION (G-CODES)


This program clears cut that looks as follows.

Cutting width - the distance between a pass and the next. Finishing allowance is not removed in the final pass. For removal allowance should be programmed another cycle of milling. Finishing allowance is not included in the option, if the correction is turned off in the cutting tool. Note 1: For values of 'I' requires that the correction in the cutting tool has been included. If the correction of the cutting tool is included in the wrong direction (outward, not inward), a large excavation will be cleaned. Note 2: If the endpoint does not match the primary, will be added to the line from the end point to the beginning. Note 3: The feed rate and spindle speed in the geometry of the cavity is
ignored during the cleaning cycle.

Note 4: If the trajectory has a geometry that intersects another geometry, the loop will be done everything possible to clean the recess, but most likely the work will be done poorly. Note 5: The cycle may require that the holes were drilled at the points of penetration. To do this, to the point of incision observed and added to the drilling cycle.

381

PART 4 - PRE-FUNCTION (G-CODES)


This cycle can then be used to clean around the sites. Example program areas: P145 = 10 (Feedrate Z) F321 (XY feed rate to clear the notch) G271 P1234 Q1235 R.1 Z-1 D.1 I.05 ('R' - is the plane R, 'Z' - is the depth Z, 'D' - a cutting width, and the 'I' - a finishing allowance) N1234 ('P' indicates the start of excavation) G41 G65 X0 Y1 G0 X0 Y0 G1 X2 Y1 G3 R1 AA-90 AB90 G1 Y4 X0 Y0 G65 X1 Y0 G40 P516 = 1 (means island) G45 G0 X1 Y1 G2 R.3 AA180 AB180 G47 P516 = 1 (means island) G45 G0 X1 Y2 G2 R.3 AA180 AB180 G47 P516 = 1 (means island) G45 G0 X1 Y3 G2 R.3 AA180 AB180 G47 N1235 ('Q' denotes the end of recess)

382

PART 4 - PRE-FUNCTION (G-CODES)


This program clears cut that looks like this:

RunTime = Period Main-Prog-Text-Edit-Verf-Graph = Home screen, program-text-edit-check-Graphical Active = Actively TextVer = Test text Correction: canceled Instrument: Diameter: Length: Submission: Rotation: Coolant: Disabled Number details: Rot = rotation; Pan = Pan; Wind = creation of a window; Auto = automatic scaling; Zoom-= zoom out; Zoom + = zoom in; Limit = limits; Zone = safe zone; Coord = coordinate; Fresh = update; Exit = output; Clear = clear

The following will be discussed on a number of special and non-G-codes. Save / Restore Settings (G990/G991) Pp Ll Qq G990 (save settings) Pp Ll Qq G991 (reconstruction parameters) G990/991 allows you to save and restore the settings using the file name C :/ RAM/Q0000Q9999. The parameters are as follows: Pp (number of core parameters, default 0) Ll (number of parameters, the default is 10) Qq (identification of the file, the default is 0). G990 and G991 have to follow the Pp, Ll, or Qq. WARNING: The line should not be other teams.

383

PART 4 - PRE-FUNCTION (G-CODES)


For example: N0020 (my routines) P0 L10 Q20 G990 (Save Settings P0-P9) (Freely use and modify the parameters P0-P9) P0 L10 Q20 G991 (restore P0-P9) M98 (a return to the calling program with the original P0-P9) Read byte parameters (G995) P1 = b G995 (P0 sets the value of byte b) For example: P1 = 79 G995 (P0 sets the value of byte 79, G18 choice of the plane, XZ = 0, ZX = 1) Valid values of P1 - from 0 to 639 Valid values of P1 - from 0 to 639 Valid values of P0 - 0 to 255 Note: G995 is identical to the P0 = PB # #. Write byte parameters (G996) P1 = b P0 = V byte parameter b sets the value of v. For example: P1 = 82 P0 = a G996 (setting the parameter byte number 82, the correction on the walls of the circular conical yes (yes), for example, 0 = no (no), 1 = yes (yes)) Note: G996 is identical to the PB # # = # Full list of byte parameters, see Appendix.

384

PART 4 - PRE-FUNCTION (G-CODES)


Calling error (G997) Forces display an error code. The generated code error is rounded (option number 1). For example: P1 = 408 G997 (Causes display of an error 408, error axis Y. The Y-axis does not cause a mismatch error, it only displays the error). Note: P1 = 0 is not an error. All valid error codes in the control unit are in the range from 1 to 999. Beep (G998) G998 is a beep from the speaker if the speaker is installed. Special G-codes Special G-codes can be created for the execution of the loop defined by the user, for example, a non-existent drilling cycle. To install a new specialized G-code must first create a text program (numbered from 9010 to 9019), indicating the new G-code. Next, enter the number of new specialized section of the code in the parameter F3 (Power) (Power), newly established after the text of the program. Time is a specialized program for G-code can be stored in the directory memory (RAM) or a directory of programs for processing details. The program in the directory memory (RAM) is preceded by the program in the software for processing details. When you call any custom code M or G of specialized code, it will perform its normal function. If the code is in a specialized syntax error at power up the following window appears.
The error in the program or the program 09,013 specialized Gcode not found. To continue, press any key ...

For example: Set a special G-code O9014 - 005 parameter F3 (Power) (Power) and enter a program in C :/ RAM/O9014. Each time a G5 it will be similar to calling C :/ RAM/O9014. To refer to the newly created custom code can be used three-digit number. See the M-and Gcodes on page 48, Section 2.

385

SECTION 5 - ADDITIONAL FEATURES (L-CODES)


These codes are used if the operator programs the CNC Centurion in text mode or manual data entry. They are also generated from the interactive program. It should be noted that most programmers, especially beginners, use interactive programming mode. If you plan to use the text-mode programming, you need to pay special attention to this section as it explains the codes. If you plan to use the interactive programming mode, you can skip or skim this section to read it and concentrate on the section of the dialog programming Passage of additional functions - it is one or two digits, preceded by a letter of M. If the code is less than 10, the zero can be omitted (M02 or M2). These codes are used to perform many functions of the machine and control devices listed in the following table. Note: Most of the M-code, working with the I / O, refer to the machines Milltronics; but they are flexible and can be adapted to the specific application. There may be other Mcode is not listed here, relating to additional features on special machines.

386

SECTION 5 - ADDITIONAL FEATURES (L-CODES)


M-codes

387

SECTION 5 - ADDITIONAL FEATURES (L-CODES)


M-codes M00 M01 M02 M30 M03 M04 M05 Function Stopping the program Optional Stop Completion of the program Completion of the program / Spindle off Included spindle rotation in a clockwise direction Included spindle rotation counterclockwise Spindle off X* Performed prior to moving Performed after the move X X X X

X* X*

M06 M07 M08 M09 M10 M11 M19

Change of tool Includes coolant in the form of oil mist Includes coolant splash Coolant off Clamp / Brake Decompression / brake The orientation of the spindle (optional Automatic Tool Changer) Emergency Stop Check out the channel Graphic off Graphics included Scan in 3 dimensions include Scan in 3 dimensions is disabled Cone Wall Rounded wall Cleaning the deep recesses X* X*

X*

X* X* X* X*

M31 M32 M90 M91 M93 M94 M95 M96 M97

X* X* X* X* X X X X X

388

SECTION 5 - ADDITIONAL FEATURES (L-CODES)


M-codes M98 M99 Function The operator of the subroutine call Performed prior to moving X* Xbri Performed after the move

Completion of the operator routines * These functions can be selected before moving, and after it.

Please note: The control unit receives more than one M-code line, but it is recommended to program only one M-code on the line. If a line has more than one M-code, the execution order is not defined in part, and the program can not run as expected. In general, the Mcode will be executed in numerical order, "the first M00, the latest M99, if you have not specified that they run after the operators of the movement. (See the table following Mcode on page 67, Section 4.) After switching on coolant, it runs on and off the spindle, and it does not need to program, when running the spindle. Stop the program (M00) Program execution stops on the block, which contains the M00, and the operator is given a hint to click Cycle Start (Run cycles). After clicking on the button Cycle Start (Run cycles) program execution resumes. If the M00 in line with the team moving, moving will be executed before shutdown. If the M00 is a block comment, it will be displayed as a hint. An optional stop (M01) M01 - this is the same as the M00, except that it runs only when the switch is activated by an optional stop. If the M01 is a block comment, it will appear as a prompt to the operator. Skipping the block (/) Line of code can be omitted or ignored by the control device. Insert the sign "/" (oblique line) at the start line and the activation of F5 (BSkip) (Skip block) lead to the fact that the control unit will skip that line. In the example below, F5 (BSkip) (Pass Block) is deactivated, the machine will move in first, second and third points. When the F5 (BSkip) is activated, the machine will move in first, and then the third point. Block 2 will be skipped. N1 /N2 N3 X0 Y0 X2 Y2 X4 Y0

Completion of the program (M02, M30, M99) Any one of these codes can be used to refer to the completion of the program. However, M02 and M99 are left spindle and coolant included; M30 them off. All three codes are returned to the top of the program and run when you press the button Cycle Start (Run cycles). Completion of the program - the same as the M2 or M99. 389

SECTION 5 - ADDITIONAL FEATURES (L-CODES)


Spindle incl. / Off. (M03, M04, M05) With the help of these codes include the spindle: a clockwise rotation (M03), counter-clockwise rotation (M04) or disable (M05). Teams include the spindle will be executed before the command line. M05 will be executed after the command line. Tool change (M06) M06 moves the Z position tool changer. This command sends a strobe signal to the M-bus functions and sends impulse to 150 milliseconds (ms) found M06. It then stops the program and gives the operator a hint about changing the tool. If the M6 is a comment block, it will be displayed as a hint to the operator. The control unit turns off the spindle and coolant, and then waits for a signal the completion of the tool changer. The spindle can not join until the tool change is not complete. After receiving the signal the completion of the tool change program execution resumes. If the settings tool changer mounted on a manual shift, after receiving a signal the completion of the tool change is necessary to press Cycle Start (Run cycles) to resume the program. For security purposes, never not attempt to change the tool manually, while the machine is not in command mode, the tool change M06. If the machine is equipped with an automatic tool changer, it has the option F3 (Power) (Power), MACRO M6 (tool change) for the implementation of an automatic shift. A macro tool change points to a program that performs a tool change. These programs relate to the tool changer and its inputs and outputs. If a program has a bug or a program is not found in the specified directory, the power-error message.
Invalid path was not found either macro program for the tool change M6. To continue, press any key ...

Coolant inc. / Off. (M07, M08, M09) With the help of these codes include coolant (M07 - oil mist, M08 - watering) before executing the command for the axis. Team off coolant (M09) will be executed after the command for the axis. Clip for rotary table (M10) This code is activated by clamping or brake for the optional rotary table. Decompression on the turntable (M11) With this code, released the brake option turntable. Note: There is an option F9 (Ctrl) "auto rotary brake" (automatic brake rotary table), which automatically turns on and off the brake.

390

SECTION 5 - ADDITIONAL FEATURES (L-CODES)


Tool changing device codes (M19-M28) These functions are used with the optional automatic tool changer. With the M19 runs spindle orientation. Instrumental drum is controlled by M20 (starting position of instrumental drum), M21 (the rotation of the tool drum in a clockwise direction) and M22 (the rotation of the tool drum counter-clockwise). Hand tool change device control codes M23 (supply hand) and M24 (Rejected hand). Drive shaft is controlled by the M25 (the inclusion of the traction rod) and M26 (Disable the traction rod). Orientation video is controlled by M27 (orientation video included) and M28 (the orientation video is disabled). Lock Drive (M31) You might want to lock the drive (emergency stop) after the long program when the machine is not in service. With the M31 drives off (emergency stop of the machine). Canal (M32) This code leads to the fact that the control unit waits for the channel expectations, putting X 7, and then continues to run the program. Various M-codes (M65/75, M67/77, M68/78, M69/79, M50/60) Standard M-code is monitored by means of M65 (incl.) and M66 (off). These optional M-code control 4 extra functions. An additional feature is controlled by an M67 (incl.) and M77 (off). An additional feature is controlled by two M68 (incl.) and M78 (off). An additional feature is controlled by three M69 (incl.) and M79 (off). An additional feature is controlled by four M50 (incl.) and M60 (off). Enable / disable graphics (M90, M91) The function of graphics on the machines can be turned off to avoid excessive graphic display. When writing a program with the cycles of the operator can perform the M90 (the schedule is disabled) after the first cycle. This will prevent the construction of unnecessary lines in the graphics memory. After completion of the cycle can be carried out M91 (graphics included) to display the next section of the program. If the last executed command was M90 (the schedule is disabled), and the program started again, the control unit will restore the state of the M91 (graphics included). The size of the graphic file size is limited, established by the manufacturer of the machine. If the size is exceeded, the screen will update the chart. Enable / disable scanning in 3 dimensions (M93, M94) Scan function in 3 dimensions can be used to sweep the arc XZ or YZ in the geometry of XY (and Z). To determine these arcs, the following parameters. P120-plane of the arc (8 plane = XZ, 9 = the plane YZ) Initial radius of the P127 P128 initial angle P129 finite angle

391

SECTION 5 - ADDITIONAL FEATURES (L-CODES)


Deployed along the arc geometry after command M94. The feed rate punctured Z - is the parameter number 145, the gap - is the parameter number 140, and the width of the passage - the parameter number 130.
STARTING POINT

The initial radius

Initial angle of 0 STEP INCREMENT Finite angle 180

The starting point is stored in the next parameter. 121 for the X-axis 122 Y-axis 123 for the Z-axis To create the initial angle of covering the details must be greater than 180 and less than 360 . For covering the details, starting at 0 , you should use either -0,0001 359,9999 . For covering the details, starting at 180 , you should use either 180,00001 -179,9999 . Z can also be changed in geometry. For example: P120 = 9 P127 = 1 P128 = - .0001 P129 = 180 P130 = .1 P145 = 10 F15 P121 = 0 P122 = 0 P123 = 0 P140 = .1 M94 X3 Z-1 M93 YZ plane the initial radius initial angle, covering the part finite angle Width of passage feed rate of Z feed rate with a sweep starting point the plane R Scan in 3 dimensions include gradual decrease to a Z-1, from X0 to X3 Scan in 3 dimensions is disabled

It creates a smooth rise, which falls from Z0 to Z-1. 392

SECTION 5 - ADDITIONAL FEATURES (L-CODES)


Notes on the activation / deactivation sweep in 3 dimensions Note 1:Scan in 3 dimensions requires the use of a spherical end mill. Note 2:Scan in 3 dimensions will not work with a rounded or beveled corner. Note 3:Correction of the cutting tool can be used by setting number 167 to 1. It works only in the XZ plane or YZ. Tapered wall (M95) M95 can be used to make the conical recesses in the walls or on the islands. In this command, as the parameters used by the angle of the wall, the first depth, the depth and the final increment of Z. M95 should be in the loop while-wend. The tool radius and the parameter number 160 (current depth Z) vary on the basis of the above parameters. Sets the M95 162 at 2, when the cycle is completed. To use the conical wall, correction of the cutting tool should be included. M95 involves the use of a spherical end mill. The functions of the conical walls as you use the correct rounded / tapered walls to determine the location of the first cut. Example 1: Correction of the cone section The parameter adjustment rounded / tapered wall = yes (yes) The first cut - this is the correction to the avoidance of cutting a vertical wall.

393

SECTION 5 - ADDITIONAL FEATURES (L-CODES)


Example 2: The absence of correction of the cone section The parameter adjustment rounded / tapered wall = no (no) For the cutting of the details of the correction is not required.

Example 3: Correction of the cone cavity The parameter adjustment rounded / tapered wall = yes (yes) The first cut - this is the correction to the avoidance of cutting a vertical wall.

394

SECTION 5 - ADDITIONAL FEATURES (L-CODES)


Example 4: Correction of the cone cavity The parameter adjustment rounded / tapered wall = no (no) For this part does not require correction tool.

Note: The first cut at the first depth Z is always adjusted to the range of the instrument. First depth of Z should be on the surface to be cutting. The angles of the walls are described as follows, irrespective of recesses or islets.

HORIZONTAL WALL CAN NOT

ALLOWABLE WALL negative angles VERTICAL

When used on the walls of the conical spherical cutters should be used M95 EO (or M95). When using the end mill should be used M95 E1.

395

SECTION 5 - ADDITIONAL FEATURES (L-CODES)


Sample Program: With this program runs the cavity 2 "x 3" with walls of 30 . P140 = .1 P141 = -1 P143 = .1 P144 = 0 P160 = P144 P162 = 0 While P162 = 0 G41 G65 X0 Y1 X0 Y0 G1 F10 Z [P160] X2 Y3 X0 Y0 G65 X1 Y0 P163 = 30 M95 Wend Gap The final depth of Z The increment of Z A-I have the depth Z, the upper cut To enter the while loop Start of cycle Input correction on the cutting tool Zdown Geometry Geometry Geometry Geometry Breeding The angle of the wall Team conical walls Completion of the while loop

Rounded walls (M96) M96 can be used for rounding the walls in the pits or on the islands. In this command, as the parameters used by the initial angle, radius walls, the first depth, the depth and the final increment of Z. M96 should be in the loop while-wend. To use the curved walls of the tool radius, the parameter number 160 (current depth Z) and the correction of the cutting tool must be activated. Sets the M96 162 at 2, when the cycle is completed. M96 requires the use of spherical cutters. The functions of the curved walls as you use the correct rounded / tapered walls to determine the location of the first cut.

396

SECTION 5 - ADDITIONAL FEATURES (L-CODES)


Example 1: Correction of the rounded walls of the island The parameter adjustment rounded / tapered wall = yes (yes) The first cut - this is the correction to the avoidance of excessive cutting of the vertical wall.

Example 2: The absence of correction of curved walls of the island The parameter adjustment rounded / tapered wall = no (no) To cut this part does not require correction tool.

Example 3: Correction of the rounded walls of the cavity The parameter adjustment rounded / tapered wall = yes (yes) The first cut - this is the correction to the avoidance of cutting a vertical wall.

397

SECTION 5 - ADDITIONAL FEATURES (L-CODES)


Example 4: The lack of correction of curved walls of the cavity The parameter adjustment rounded / tapered wall = no (no) For this part does not require correction tool.

398

SECTION 5 - ADDITIONAL FEATURES (L-CODES)


This program runs the island 2 "x 3" with rounded walls. The walls have a radius of 2 "and starts at an angle of inclination of 30 . P140 = .1 P141 = -1 P143 = .1 P144 = 0 P160 = P144 P162 = 0 G0 While P162 = 0 G42 G65 X0 Y1 X0 Y0 G1 F10 Z [P160] G1 X2 Y3 X0 Y0 G65 X1 Y0 P163 = 30 P164 = 2 M96 Wend Gap The final depth of Z The increment of Z A-I have the depth Z To enter the while loop The beginning of the loop while-wend Input correction on the cutting tool Zdown Geometry Geometry Geometry Output The initial angle The radius of the wall The command to the rounded walls

399

SECTION 5 - ADDITIONAL FEATURES (L-CODES)


Notes on the rounded walls Note 1:First cut at the first depth Z is always adjusted to the range of the instrument. Note 2:First depth of Z should be on the surface to be cutting. Note 3:If the radius of the initial angle of the walls and do not apply to the first depth Z and the final depth of Z, an error message. The initial angles are determined and are shown in the following drawings. Allowed the initial negative angles.
STARTING VERTICAL STARTING VERTICAL

THIS TYPE OF DETAILS ISLET

THIS TYPE OF DETAILS CAVITY

THIS TYPE OF DETAILS ISLET

THIS TYPE OF DETAILS CAVITY

When using either E0 if E is not used in block M95 (or M96), the control unit will use a spherical tool on the wall. Any other E in the M95 (or M96) will inform the control unit that is used end mill. Correction rounded / tapered wall does not work with the option to end mill.

400

SECTION 5 - ADDITIONAL FEATURES (L-CODES)


Cleaning the deep recesses (M97) M97 can be used to clean the deep recesses, as well as removing material from the islands. It can also be used for finishing passes in non-standard cavities or islands. This team involves two parameters: the number of passes you want to accomplish, and the cutting width of each pass. The team must be within the loop while-wend. Cutting width is added to or subtracted from the radius of the cutter and go toward or away from the cutter. To use this function, cleaning grooves on the correction of the cutting tool should be included. If an error is compensated for the intersection of the arc radius of the modified instrument, the compensated line is replaced from the start point to the end point of the arc. For example: G0 Z.1 D1 P1 = - .1 WHILE P1> - .3 G41 G65 X1 Y2 X1 Y1 G1 F10 Z [P1] X2 G3 R.5 XC2.5 YC1 X2.5 Y .5 G1 X5 Y3 X1 Y1 G65 X2 Y0 G40 P163 = 5 P164 = .1 M97 P1 = P1-.1 G0 Z.1 WEND Rapid traverse in 0.1 above 0 Download the tool radius number 1 First the depth Z The last depth Z = -0.3 Input correction on the cutting tool in the absence of movement starting point Z down

Turn off correction in the cutting tool in the absence of movement Turn off correction in the cutting tool Perform 5 passes Cut width = 0.1 Cleaning groove Next the depth Z The accelerated movement of the workpiece Completion of the while loop

401

SECTION 5 - ADDITIONAL FEATURES (L-CODES)


Next the program performs a tool with a radius of 0.1 ":

1st pass

TRAJECTORY DETAILS

Tool change is too great

To clear the island of the same form should be changed to G41 G42. To perform the finishing pass to download the table tool to tool radius greater than the radius of the actual instrument used. P163 = 2 P164 = - .01 Perform two passes Adjustments to the actual size of the tool / finishing allowance for cleaning

Note: Cleaning the grooves are used to remove the allowance from the details. If programmed too many passes, you can damage the surface. It is best to use the M97 (clean grooves) to remove a few passes, and then use other means to remove the remaining material. Subroutine call (M98) The completion routines (M99) Subroutine call command (M98) can be used to run any program that is constantly stored in the memory of another program. After the execution of the called program control device will transmit back to the calling program a block of commands after the M98.

402

SECTION 5 - ADDITIONAL FEATURES (L-CODES)


When the main program calls a subroutine, it is considered an attachment with a single cycle. Attachment 2-cycles can be used as shown below.
HOME PROGRAM SUB SUB

ATTACHMENT C 1 CYCLE

ATTACHMENT C 2 Cycle

When used with the M98 team L___ team can re-call the subroutine. Team L___ may indicate up to 999 repetitions of routines. Attachments are allowed up to 50 levels. M2 can be used instead of the M99. If the subroutine ends without M2 or M99, it will return to the calling program, as in a meeting with the M2 or M99. Training routines Sub-looks just like any other program. Specifying the M99 at the end subroutine is optional. If the program was called with the M98, will return to the M02, M30 or M99. Subroutines are entered into memory in the same way as conventional programs.

403

SECTION 5 - ADDITIONAL FEATURES (L-CODES)


Performing routines Subroutine is executed when it is caused by the main program or another subprogram.

A For example:

= =

Team subroutine call and the team move can be made in one block. For example: X1 M98 P0200 In this example, the subroutine 200 is invoked after the move in the direction of the axis X. Sequence of the main program that calls the subroutine is as follows.
HOME PROGRAM SUB

When the subroutine is called another subroutine, it is performed in the same sequence as shown in the example above. Notes for subprograms Note 1: If the specified number of routines can not be detected, an error message 603 "Program O # # # # does not exist" (program O # # # # does not exist).

404

SECTION 5 - ADDITIONAL FEATURES (L-CODES)


Note 2: Subroutine call M98___ can not run from the regime of manual data entry. In this case, you should write a short program to call a subroutine. 0XXXX M98PXXX M02 Note 3:

Then run it in run mode.

If the routine changes the floating zero (as a rule, G92 X0 Y0 in the first block of subroutines), it will be restored by the same amount of correction, which was when entering the subroutine. This can be useful for cutting the same shape in different places. For example: 0#### O0002 X1 Y2 G92 X0 Y0 M98 P2 (to cut the part when X1 Y2) . X3 Y5 . . M98 P2 (to cut the part with X3 Y5) . M2 M99

Note 4:When you use the call, you can call the subroutine with the full names of DOS. For example: call C: \ Test \ Parts \ XYZ.PRG Specialized M-codes Specialized M-codes can be created for user-defined function. To install a new specialized Mcode, you must first create a text program - with the number of 9020 to 9029 - which defines the new M-code. Then enter the number of new specialized section of the code in the parameter F3 (Power) (Power), after that you just created a text program. To enumerate the newly created special codes you can use three-digit number.

405

SECTION 5 - ADDITIONAL FEATURES (L-CODES)


Time is a program may be stored in the directory memory (RAM), or or a catalog of programs to handle the details. The program in the directory memory (RAM) is preceded by the program in the software for processing details. When you call any custom code M or G of specialized code, it will perform its normal function. If the code is in a specialized syntax error at power up the following window appears.
The error in the program, or 09,020 in a program of specialized M-code not found. To continue, press any key ...

Example 1:

Establish a dedicated M-code parameter F3 (Power) (Power) O9025 at 014 and enter the program in C :/ RAM/O9025. Implementation of M14 is similar to calling in the C :/ RAM/O9025. Establish a dedicated M-code parameter F3 (Power) (Power) O9027 by 3 and enter the following G-program C :/ RAM/O9027. (to turn on the vacuum) (Pause for 1 second) (Includes a spindle, like a normal M3)

Example 2: Set 25 G4 F1 M3

406

SECTION 6 - PARAMETRIC PROGRAMMING


Parametric programming is similar to the macro programming is that to specify the position of the axis of the equation can be used instead of decimal numbers. Centurion CNC does not limit the application of parametrics subroutines or macros. They can be used in the program anywhere. Parametric expressions can be used to refer to the functions M, G, F and S. When the parametric expression is used to position the axis, will first find its value, then the correction is applied to the cutting tool. All the usual rules for the correction of the cutting tool will be applied to a calculated point. When using parametric expressions used in the program options - a 100 userdefined parameters, as described above on page 93, Section 2. The values obtained from the equations will be displayed on the user settings screen. Other listed system parameters can be used as input for parametric equations, but in normal circumstances, these options should not be changed. Parametric link Parametric link indicated by the letter "P", followed by a valid parameter number. When a parameter reference is used to position coordinates, it must be enclosed in parentheses. For example: X [P10] Y [-P145] Z [P2]

Parametric team assignment Assignment - this is the main command in the application parameters. Symbol assignment - is an equal sign (=). Assignment operators replace the current value of the new value. For example: P1 = 1.234

In this example, the value of 1.234 assigned to the parameter 1. Therefore, each of the following commands performs the movement in the same position coordinates. X1.234, or X [P1] Note: If the assignment exceeds the number of parameters 699, it is necessary that the control device was in the mode of transmission (G10). See the list of numbers of parameters and their descriptions in the Appendix.

PB (byte option) Byte parameters typically contain values that represent the configuration of the machine. For example, the parameter range of spindle PB50 is set to 1 for the low range, 2 - and 3 for medium - to high. Byte parameters can not exceed 255. For example: PB50 = 2

407

SECTION 6 - PARAMETRIC PROGRAMMING


Note: Byte parameters are not recorded in the test mode. See the list of numbers of parameters and their descriptions in the Appendix.

Arithmetic Operators Below is a list of the available arithmetic operators. Operator + * ** / DIV MOD Note: Operation addition subtraction multiplication exponent division integer division balance

The value of A DIV B - a mathematical quotient A / B with a lowered fractional part or residue. Examples: 3/2 = 1.5 24/5 = 4.8 72/8 = 9.0 5.46/2.1 = 2.6 3 DIV 2 = 1 24 DIV 5 = 4 72 DIV 8 = 9 5.46 DIV 2.1 = 2

MOD returns the remainder obtained by dividing two numbers. 3 MOD 2 = 1 remainder = 1 24 MOD 5 = 4 = 4 remainder 72 MOD 8 = 0 remainder = 0 3.57 MOD 2.1 = 1.47 Fract (3.57 2.1 = .7) (.7 x 2.1 = 1.47) Relational Operators Below is a list of the available relational operators. Operator Operation

EQ or = equally NE or <> not equal LT or < less than GT or>more than LE or <= less than or equal GE or> = greater than or equal

408

SECTION 6 - PARAMETRIC PROGRAMMING


The operators of functions Calling a function is denoted by the name of the function (eg, SIN, ATAN, ...), followed by the argument in parentheses. When the function is used to position coordinates, it must be enclosed in parentheses. Examples: X [SIN [45]] Y [ATAN [half]] Z [SQRT [9]]

The function returns a value and can be used interchangeably wherever decimal values are accepted. The following functions. Sine (SIN) returns the sine of the argument SIN [90] = 1 Cosine (COS) returns the cosine of the argument. COS [180] = -1 Tangent (TAN) returns the tangent of the argument. TAN [135] = -1 Arctangent (ATAN) returns the arc tangent of the argument. The argument must be specified in the form of fractions (eg, , 2/1 -5 / 6, ...). ATAN [1/-1] = 135 The square root (SQRT) returns the square root of the argument. SQRT [9] = 3 The absolute value (ABS) returns the absolute value of the argument. ABS [-15] = 15 An integer (INT) returns an integer argument. INT [5.5099] = 5 A random number (RND) returns an integer random number between 0 and its argument. RND [25] returns an integer> = 0 and <= 24 The natural logarithm (LN) function returns the natural logarithm of the argument. LN [10] = 2.3026 Exponential (EXP) returns the exponential argument. EXP [1] = 2.7183

409

SECTION 6 - PARAMETRIC PROGRAMMING


Rounding (ROUND) rounds the decimal value to an integer. Half-integer values are rounded. ROUND [2.3] = 2 ROUND [7.88] = 8 ROUND [1.5] = 2 ROUND [-1.5] = -2 Half-integer values (exactly half) are rounded to the nearest even number. ROUND [2.5] = 2 ROUND [3.5] = 4 Mathematical expressions Any combination of the previously described expression is an arithmetic function. Examples: X [SIN [P123] * COS [P124]] Y [2.5 + [P2/P3] * SQRT [P4]] Z [[P2DIV3] + [P2MOD3]]

Conditionals Centurion CNC supports two types of conditional statements. These operators are used to transfer program control from one point to another based on some condition, developed in the program. These statements - IF-THEN and WHILE-WEND. IF-THEN The operator IF-THEN - it's method of conditional execution block if the results of the expression evaluated as true. The expression must contain one of the relational operators, which can reduce the expression to true or false. If the expression is true, the THEN part of the operator IF. If the expression is false, the next line after the operator of IF-THEN. An example of the general form: If [Any] (operator) [any] [mathematical] (Relationship) [mathematical] That any action [expression] [expression] N20 IF P1 LT P2 THEN GOTO 15 N21 or N22 IF P1 <P2 GOTO 15 N21

410

SECTION 6 - PARAMETRIC PROGRAMMING


Two of the above statements do the same thing. If the assertion is true, the N15; if false - runs N21. Examples: IF P1 * P3/COS [P90] GE TAN [P6] THEN X1 IF P4/P3 LT P6 GOTO 25 IF P1 = P2 THEN P4 = P5 - P6 Multiple IF statements can be used to test multiple conditions. Examples: IF P36 <5 THEN IF P1 <> 0 THEN M5 Defined, this means that if less than 5 P36, and P1 is 0, the spindle is turned off.

Note: Word THEN optional in all cases. WHILE-WEND The second type of conditional statements is WHILE-WEND. WHILE statement contains an expression that controls the repeated execution of blocks that are between the operators WHILE and WEND. The expression that controls the repetition, must contain a set of relational operators, which reduces the expression to true or false. The expression is evaluated before the containing block. Contained units to re-run if the expression is true. If the expression is false in the beginning, the blocks are not executed. For example: N20 N21 N22 N23 N24 N25 N26 WHILE [[P2 * P3] /COS[P6]] LT P2 P6 = P6 + 1 Y [P2] Z [P3] X [P6] X1 Y0 Z0 WEND M30

In this example, the line of N25 with N20 will be repeated for as long as the WHILE expression is false. The string is then N26 will be executed instead of the N21. Note: Admitted nested loops WHILE. Operators of transfer Operators of transmission transfer control from one program section to another. This is an unconditional transfer, as expressed in the fact that when the statement is executed, control is always passed. Operators GOSUB / RETURN and CALL return control to the block N +1 after its completion, and the GOTO statement transfers control to the specified block of no return.

411

SECTION 6 - PARAMETRIC PROGRAMMING


GOTO statements The operator N # # # defines the label. Operators GOTO / GOSUB can extend or transfer control to the blocks containing these tags. GOTO statement transfers the program into a block with a prefix of label block, said in the statement GOTO. GOTO 30 Note: (The next executed block - it is N30.)

If there is more than one program N30, the transfer will happen in the first N30.

CALL statement CALL statement transfers control to the program stored in the memory of the CNC. Upon completion of the program caused or M2, M99 or M30, control is returned to the main program in the block immediately following the statement CALL. CALL format is as follows. CALL XXXX Number program LXXX The loop counter (optional)

If L is omitted, the called program will run once. The operator calls the same as the M98. Note: You do not need to subroutine calls in a separate program. You can call O # # # # in the same file. This eliminates the need for setting lessons programs. For example: X1 Y1 . . Call 2 (call O0002) . . M2 (M2 is optional) O0002 (O # # # # in the same file is preceded by a separate file, O # # # #.) X2 Y2 . . M99 (M99 is optional) Notes on the operator to call Note 1:Call subroutine allows attachments up to 50 levels. Note 2:See more details about using the G92 in the routines page 374, Section 2. Note 3:Allowed to call programs with the full names of DOS. For example: CALL S :/ XYZ / PRG.X

412

SECTION 6 - PARAMETRIC PROGRAMMING


GOSUB and RETURN GOSUB transfers the program into a block whose number is specified in the statement GOSUB. Implementation will continue through until it encounters a block that contains the operator RETURN. RETURN returns control back to the block immediately following the statement GOSUB. To use the operator GOSUB, caused by a number of blocks to be part of the same program. Typically, the routines are at the end of the main program. The format follows GOSUB. GOSUB XXXX LXXX The line number The loop counter (optional)

If the missing L, GOSUB program will be executed once. N1 N2 N3 N4 GOSUB 100 N5 . . . N90 M30 N100 N101 . . . N200 N201 RETURN N202

The main program

Subroutine

When GOSUB is executed in the N4, the program will move to the N100 and begin execution until you reach the N201. In the N201 control will be transferred to N5, and will be performed with a string of N5 N90. M30 stops executing the main program and starts re-execution of lines 100 through 202. Note: permitted up to 50 levels of investment routines.

413

SECTION 6 - PARAMETRIC PROGRAMMING


Computational functions A. The tangent arc TANA 2. The tangent line TANL 3. Creating a 3-point circle CGEN The three above-mentioned functions can be used anywhere in a program for solving various problems of the intersection. These features are input into the parameters of P90 to P96, and return a response with the parameters P80 to P85. The answer can then be used in the commands for the line and the circle to get the desired results. The following is the format for these three functions. The general format for TANA, TANL The input parameters P90 = X1 center of the arc a P91 = Y1 center of the arc a P92 = R1 radius of the arc of a P93 = X2 center of the arc two P94 = Y2 center of the arc two P95 = R2 arc radius 2 P96 = R3 radius of the arc tangent (used only in TANA) The calculated output parameters P80 = Xs X starting point of tangent arcs or lines P81 = Ys Y starting point of tangent arcs or lines P82 = Xe X endpoint tangent arcs or lines P83 = Ye Y endpoint tangent arcs or lines P84 = Xt X center of the arc tangent (only in case of TANA) P85 = Yt Y center of the arc tangent (only in case of TANA) The general form for the function of the tangent of the arc or line following. TANA C # or TANL C # # - A number from 0 to 7 in the case of tangent arcs, and from 0 to 3 in the case of the tangent line. Through this number is chosen one of eight possible solutions, or TANA is one of the four solutions TANL. Values of C # are defined as the point of tangency, located on the right or left of the line and connects the centers of arcs and arcs connecting the center, when viewed in the direction of the tool. See examples of decisions regarding the following diagrams.

414

SECTION 6 - PARAMETRIC PROGRAMMING


Cases of TANA 1st C0 = right C1 = Left C2 = Right C3 = Left C4 = Left C5 = right C6 = Left C7 = right 2nd On the right On the right Left Left Left Left On the right On the right Center Left Left Left Left On the right On the right On the right On the right

Cases TANL 1st C0 = C1 = C2 = C3 = On the right Left On the right Left 2nd On the right On the right Left Left

415

SECTION 6 - PARAMETRIC PROGRAMMING

Example programs using TANA and TANL N1 N2 N3 N4 N5 N6 N7 N8 N9 P90 = 0 P91 = 0 P92 = 1.5 P93 = 5 P94 = 4 P95 = 2 P96 = 5 XC arc a YC arc of a radius of the arc of a XC arc two YC arc two arc radius 2 radius of the arc tangent (is not used for the tangent line) TANA C3 or TANL C3 G2 R1.5 XC0 YC0 X [P80] Y [P81]

The calculated end-point, or TANA TANL N10 G3 R5 XC [P84] YC [P85] X [P82] Y [P83] (Calculated center and endpoints TANA) or N10 G1 X [P82] Y [P83] (Calculated endpoint TANL) N11 G2 R2 XC5 YC4 X Y end end

416

SECTION 6 - PARAMETRIC PROGRAMMING


With the function to create the circle center and radius are calculated arc passing through any three noncollinear points. The general format for the following functions CGen. The input parameters P90 = X1 P91 = Y1 P92 = X2 P93 = Y2 P94 = X3 P95 = Y3 Output parameters P80 = XC P81 = YC the calculated center of the circle P82 = R calculated radius of the circle Example programs using CGen N1 N2 N3 N4 N5 N6 P90 = 0 P91 = 0 first point P92 = 1 P93 = 1 second point P94 = 2 P95 = 0 the third point CGEN G1 X0 Y0 starting position of the arc G17 G2 R [P82] XC [P80] YC [P81] Xe____Ye____ coordinates of the first point coordinates of the second point coordinates of the third point

CGEN function can be used anywhere in a program to calculate the radius and the center of the arc. These calculations can be used in normal commands arc with the help of trigonometric, chamfering, rounding corners, back extension, and any other available options. Note: The direction of the arc back to the P97, so the unit can be replaced by N6 G17 G [P97] R [P82] XC [P81] YC [P80] Xe___ Ye___

Time team Centurion CNC team has the letter, which can be used to engrave serial numbers or other designations. Text cycles must be loaded by setting "Load text cycles" (Download text of cycles). After setting the parameter control unit must be reset. Bijective letter size - 1 "x 1", the printed text. All these letters can be scaled or rotated to achieve the desired size and orientation. Depth of cut is contained in the P141, the speed infeed Z - in P145, a zone of safe return - in the P140. A typical program would look like.

417

SECTION 6 - PARAMETRIC PROGRAMMING


N1 N2 N3 N4 N5 N6 N7 N8 P140 = .1 P141 = - .2 P145 = 5 G1 F10 S1000 M3 X-4 Y.5 Text [MILLTRONICS MFG] M30 0.1 Gap Depth of cut 0.2 inches Infeed speed 5 inch / min Feed rate XY 10 inch / min The rotation of the spindle clockwise The position of the first letter Desired Text End of program

With this program you will be the inscription "MILLTRONICS MFG" at a depth of -0.2 "to 1" in block letters 1 "from the provisions of the X-4 Y.5. Text loop can also be used for engraving parameters, time and date. For example: P28 = -6.77777 TEXT [N = # 28 [34]] With this will be engraved with "N = -006.7778" (3 senior level, four junior). If the field of senior and junior categories are not filled, the default format from the settings of the machine. The serial numbers of items can be engraved as follows: TEXT [# 23 [30]] Etch the value of P23, 3 places to the left, right 0) P23 = P23 +1 (incremental counter parts) If the senior and junior level equal to 0, will engrave ascii code parameter. For example: P1 = 35 (Ascii for '#') P2 = 123 TEXT [PART # 100] # 2 [30]] With this will engrave "PART # 123". (Item number 123) If the senior and junior level = -1, engraved time (parameter # is ignored.) For example: TEXT [TIME IS # 1 [-1]] will be engraved "TIME IS 016:46:51". (Time of 016:46:51) If the senior and junior level = -2, engraved date (option # is ignored.) For example: TEXT [DATE IS # 1 [-2]] will be engraved "DATE IS 02/11/08" (date 11/02/08)

418

SECTION 6 - PARAMETRIC PROGRAMMING


Additional commands Gaps Blocks Comments Gaps can be used anywhere in the program. For example, Z1.234 can be written as Z 1. April 23, if you want. Blocks without valid information. Go to comments is any text enclosed in brackets, they are ignored by the control device. Comments can be anywhere in the program or unit. When a comment is in a block with M0 (stopping power), M1 (optional stop) or M6 (tool change), the comment will be displayed in the message window.

For example: M0 (MOVE THE CLAMP) (traverse)


WARNING: Detected stop the program. MOVE CLIP. Click on <Cycle Start> (Run cycles) to continue.

For example: M6 (3/8 "DRILL) (drill 3/8")


WARNING: Changing the tool. Insert the tool number 2 DRILL 3/8 ". Click on <Cycle Start> (Run cycles) to continue.

PRINT (Seal)

Print to print the text on the screen. PRINT can used to display text, values, time, date, etc.

For example: P87 = 32.45 PRINT [N = # 87] shows "N = 32.4500"

419

SECTION 6 - PARAMETRIC PROGRAMMING


# N [LT] #n [LT] displays the parameter n with leading digits L and LSB T.

For example: P100 = 1.235 P101 = 2.87656 PRINT [P100 = # 100 [04] P101 = # 101 [33]] shows "P100 = 1.2350 P101 = 002.877" If the field of senior and junior categories are not filled, the default format of the senior and junior categories of the settings of the machine. If LT = 0 apply the exception. If LT = 0, shows the ASCII code of the parameter. For example: P1 = 72 (ASCII H) P2 = 105 (ASCII i) PRINT [# 1 [00] # 2 [00]] shows "Hi" If LT = -1, the parameter is ignored. Time is shown in the format 0chch: mm: ss. If LT = -2, the parameter is ignored. Date shown in the format year / month / day. For example: PRINT [Time = # 1 [-1] Date = # 1 [-2]] shows "Time = 012:51:52 Date = 97/10/23" (time = 012:51:52, Date = 97/10 / 23) POPEN POPEN P0 Through team POPEN opens the file, or RS-232 output from the command DPRNT. Through team POPEN P0 opens the file for output. The file to be opened by the parameters specified in the MISC (more). If the file name in this parameter is omitted, the output will be recorded in REPORT.DAT. Through team POPEN P1 opens the serial port of an input-output to output. POPEN P2 opens the serial port input-output 2 to output. PCLOS closes the serial port input-output, which was opened by POPEN.

POPEN P1 POPEN P2 PCLOS

420

SECTION 6 - PARAMETRIC PROGRAMMING


DPRNT DPRNT displays the text in a file or an RS-232, which specifies the command POPEN.

For example: DPRNT [PLEASE CLEAR THE WORK AREA] (Please clean the work area) # N writes the value For example: DPRNT [X # 208 Y # 209 Z # 210] displays the current position X, Y and Z in a file or an RS-232. # N [LT] displays the parameter n with leading digits L and LSB T. For example: P100 = 1.235 P101 = 2.87656 DPRNT [P100 = # 100 [04] P101 = # 101 [33]] conclusions "P100 = 1.2350 P101 = 002.877" If the field of senior and junior categories are not filled, the default format of the senior and junior categories of the settings of the machine. If LT = 00, shows the ASCII code of the parameter. For example: P1 = 40 (ASCII () P2 = 72 (ASCII H) P3 = 105 (ASCII i) P4 = 41 (ASCII)) PRINT [# 1 [00] # 2 [00] # 3 [00] # 4 [00]] displays (Hi) If LT = -1, the parameter is ignored. Time is shown in the format 0chch: mm: ss. If LT = -2, the parameter is ignored. Date shown in the format year / month / day. For example: DPRNT [Time = # 1 [-1] Date = # 1 [-2]] shows "Time = 012:51:52 Date = 97/10/23" (time = 012:51:52, Date = 97/10/23) DPRNT can be used to create the report files relating to the production of parts, check parts of the digitization of information, etc.

421

SECTION 6 - PARAMETRIC PROGRAMMING


INPUT (ENTER) The operator INPUT (input operator) is used to enter data the front panel.

For example: INPUT (X START POSITION) P1 The operator will be given a hint about the data to be entered.
The initial position of the X

The operator can use the data that is displayed when you press ENTER (Enter). If ESC is pressed in the operator input, the program will be terminated. Team HDW (flywheel) can be used to enter the flywheel during program execution. Maybe add a comment for a clue to the operator during the execution of commands HDW (flywheel). HDW is ignored when testing the program. For example: HDW (TOUCH THE TOOL TO THE PART) gives the following message to the operator.
The display mode of the flywheel. To complete click on <Escape>. Touch TOOL.

The operator presses the key <enter> after bringing the machine in the mode of the flywheel. If you click on <esc> flywheel mode, the program will be terminated. For manual installation and cleaning / O pins, see the following. CLR Remove the output pin. For example: CLR X7 (pin eliminates the output X 7) SET Set the output pin. For example: SET Z3 (sets the output pin Z 3)

422

SECTION 6 - PARAMETRIC PROGRAMMING


PULSE0 Sends a pulse to the output pin.

Example 1: PULSE0 Z10 (removal of the output pin Z 10, a delay by the number of milliseconds specified in the optional parameter PULSEx pulse delay (ms), then setting the output pin Z10) Example 2: PULSE0 X2 P3.5 (removal of the output pin X 2, a delay of 3.5 seconds, and then setting the output pin X 2) PULSE1 Sends a pulse to the output pin For example: PULSE1 X5 (setting the output pin X 5, ut # 5, a delay by the number of milliseconds specified in the optional parameter PULSEx delay (ms), then setting the output pin X5) STO STO is similar to the command SET, except that the output pins are adjacent to each other. On each axis there are 12 output pins. For example: STO20 (setting the output pin Y 8 or 20-th output pin) CLO CLO is similar to the command CLR, except that the output pins are adjacent to each other. For example: CLO25 (removal of the output pin Z 1 or 25second output pin) PIN Pin an input Input 2 Input 3 Input 4 Input 5 Input 6 Input 7 Input 8 Input 9 Input 10 Input 11 Input 12 Output 1 Output 2 off 3 Output 4 PIN refers to the pin. The axis X - is the 1000 values of the axis Y - 2000 values of the axis Z - values of 3000, etc. 4th axis 4000 4001 4002 4003 4004 4005 4006 4007 4008 4009 4010 4011 4012 4013 4014 4015 5th axis 5000 5001 5002 5003 5004 5005 5006 5007 5008 5009 5010 5011 5012 5013 5014 5015 6-I axis 6000 6001 6002 6003

The X-axis The Y-axis The Z-axis 1000 2000 3000 1001 2001 3001 1002 2002 3002 1003 2003 3003 1004 2004 3004 1005 2005 3005 1006 2006 3006 1007 2007 3007 1008 2008 3008 1009 2009 3009 1010 2010 3010 1011 2011 3011 1012 2012 3012 1013 2013 3013 1014 2014 3014 1015 2015 3015 423

6012 6013 6014 6015

SECTION 6 - PARAMETRIC PROGRAMMING


Output 5 Output 6 Output 7 Output 8 off 9 off 10 off 11 off 12 Note: 1016 1017 1018 1019 1020 1021 1022 1023 2016 2017 2018 2019 2020 2021 2022 2023 3016 3017 3018 3019 3020 3021 3022 3023 4016 4017 4018 4019 4020 4021 4022 4023 5016 5017 5018 5019 5020 5021 5022 5023

Operators PIN can be used in conditional statements such as IF-THEN and WHILE-WEND. Examples: IF PIN [2017] EQ 1 THEN PB50 = 1 WHILE PIN [1005] NE 0 M62 M63 WEND P5 = P3 + PIN [2011]

IPIN IPIN applies the input pin. The argument - is the number of input pins. IPIN [32] - 32-th input pin. Only 64 input pins. IPIN [32] - is the input pin Z 8. IPIN [18] - the same as the PIN [2005], or input pin Y 6. IPIN operators can be used in conditional statements, or to assign variables. OPIN OPIN refers to the output pin. The argument - is the number of output pins. OPIN [14] - is the 14 th output pin. Total of 64 output pins. OPIN [40] - is the output pin number 4 of the 4th axis. OPIN [4] - the same as the pin [1003], or output pin 4 axis X. OPIN operators can be used in conditional statements, or to assign variables. Teams check details and digitizing PROBE1 PROBE1 can be used with any movement of the axis for a team of stickslip. The movement will be interrupted when the input pin down.

For example: PROBE1 F.01 X1.3 Y-2 Move X and Y in the direction of 1.3 and 2, respectively, for as long as the probe touches the part. PROBE2 PROBE2 can be used with any movement of the axis for a team of stickslip. The movement will be interrupted when the input pin is increased.

For example: PROBE2 F.01 X1.3 Y-2 Move X and Y in the direction of 1.3 and 2, respectively, for as long as the sensor will not release the item.

424

SECTION 6 - PARAMETRIC PROGRAMMING


Note: The input pin is used by teams of detector is selected in the advanced options. Contact Line The function return line can be used in any command line. This function changes the direction of the programmed line. Return line is typically used when the endpoint is known for the line, and not starting. The endpoint is programmed, and the line is extended in the opposite direction to the starting point. When using this function, all functions of Trig Help (trigonometric assistance) act. Example 1: X6 Y2 X5 X4 Y1.5 G2 R1 XC3 YC1.5 AB270 G1 X1 Y2 back C0 W145 X0 Back - in the opposite direction of elongation of the (1,2) C0 - use the intersection of the arc that is closest to (1,2) W145 - elongation of the line from (1,2) at an angle of 145 Example 2: X6 YZ X5 X4 Y1.5 G2 R1XC3YC1.5 AB270 G1 X1 YZ BACK C2 W145 X0 C2 - Use the farthest intersection Example 3: X6 Y2 X5 X4 Y1.5 X1 Y2 BACK C0 W-35 X0 Note: In this example, the return line between the two lines for programming an unknown point. See more details about the return line in the section on page 4 289.

425

SECTION 6 - PARAMETRIC PROGRAMMING


MOD (modulo operation) MOD is used to shift the position axis. It is typically used to set the rotation axis in a positive position between 0 and 360 degrees. It can be useful after the rotary axis makes a few turns in one direction. Examples: G0 A750 MOD A360 (A-axis position is now 30 ) G0 A-100 MOD A360 (A-axis position is now 240 ) G0 A-500 MOD A360 (A-axis position is now 220 ) G0 A437 MOD A20 (A-axis position is 17 ) G0 A33.285 MOD A2.1 (A-axis position are 1.785 ) 33,285 / 2.1 = 15.85 15.85, the remainder - 0.85 0.85 * 2.1 = 1,785 Note: With a team of MOD can also shift the programmed limits. This is desirable for most rotary axes, but not desirable for a linear axis. ORIGIN (start address) Start address - this is another way to shift the axis of coordinates. It shifts the coordinates of the axis of the volume operator. Examples: G0 A437 ORIGIN A20 (A-axis position is now 417) G0 A33.285 ORIGIN A2.1 (A-axis position is now 31.185) G0 A361 ORIGIN A360 (A-axis position are 1) G0 A-500 ORIGIN A360 (A-axis position is now -860) Note: The team also shifts the start address programmed limits.

426

SECTION 6 - PARAMETRIC PROGRAMMING


HOME (starting position) To bring the axis to its original position in the program should use the HOME. For example: Home Z0 (Z-axis leads to the starting position, the number of "0 " does not mean anything) Home X0Y0 (leads to the initial position of the X and Y) Below is shown the parametric program for cutting the five 45 -GOVERNMENTAL segments of the fan blades.

P2 = 0 N2 P1 = .5 P140 = .1 G31 N1 G0 X [P1] Y0 G1 Z0 G3 R [P1] AA0 AB45 Z [[.5-P1] / 5] G31 P1 = P1 + .1 IF P1 LE 2 GOTO 1 P2 = P2 +72 G68 AA [P2] I0 J0 IF P2 LT 360 GOTO 2

427

SECTION 6 - PARAMETRIC PROGRAMMING


In the above example, the tool performs 16 passes for each blade, starting at X.5 step up to the X2 0,1 ". Z is equal to 0 on the entire front edge of the blade and drops to 0 for the first pass and to -0.3" at the last pass . Each shift of the axis of the blade is 45 . The cycle of N1-GOTO 1 - for each fan blade. The cycle of N2-GOTO 2 rotates each blade to the additional 72 . P1 controls the displacement of the axis of the blade radius and depth Z. P2 controls the angle of rotation. Example programs using some special operators (Outdoor sampling program. Prospective Center - 0.0.) INPUT (diameter) P1 INPUT (depth Z) P2 INPUT (angle increment) P3 TI M6 (sensor) H43 H1 D1 G0 X [P1 / 2 + .5] Y0 (Moving to a diameter of 0.5) Z [P2] (at a depth Z) PB81 = 7 (Set special flags byte settings to disable the trigonometric assistance and correction of the cutting tool) POPEN P0 (Open a file for output. Set the log file in the c :/ parts/O0100.) DPRNT [(Extract the file to the diameter number 1 @ Z # 2)] DPRNT [S1500 M3] DPRNT [X # 208 Y # 209] DPRNT [Z # 210] P4 = 0 (degrees counter) N1 G1 F20 PROBE1 X0 Y0 (Move to the center, until a touch sensor) DPRNT [X # 208 Y # 209] (Record current sizes of X and Y in the file) PROBE 2 XC0 YC0 R [P1 / 2 + .5] AB [P4] (removal of parts, while the sensor will not be released) P4 = P4 + P3 (Degrees increments) XC0 YC0 R [SQRT [P208 * P208 + P209 * P209]] AB [P4] (Dismissal) PROBE 2 XC0 YC0 R [P1 / 2 + .5] AB [P4] (remove the case if there is a touch.) IF P4 <= 360 GOTO 1 (Perform 360 ) G0 Z1 (Z up) DPRNT [Z1] DPRNT [M5] A sample output of the parametric program (Extract the file to the diameter of 4.0000 @ Z-1.0000) S1500 M3 X2.5000Y0.0000 Z-1.0000

428

SECTION 6 - PARAMETRIC PROGRAMMING


X1.0500Y0.0000 X1.0360Y0.0906 X1.1030Y0.1945 X1.1301Y0.3028 X1.0525Y0.3831 X0.9516Y0.4437 . . . X1.0149Y-0.3694 X1.0301Y-0.3028 X1.0242Y-0.1806 X1.0560Y-0.0924 X1.13000Y-0.0000 Z1 M5

429

SECTION 7 - EXAMPLES OF PROGRAMS


The following example demonstrates the various problems associated with programming, and possible solutions to these problems by using CNC Centurion. The program, driven for each sample parts, in any case is not the only solution for this part. A description of each part of the sample begins with the drawing, and then given standard codes EIA (G-and M-codes), followed by a explanation of the EIA program and, in conclusion, interactive program for sample details. In the drawings, parts for the milling of the samples will be included starting and ending points of pre-programmed movements, the direction of the tool and the tool path, indicated by dotted lines running parallel to the edge of the details. The drawings also indicate where the float is set to zero for each detail. Feed and speed end mills are designed to mill 3/8 "for aluminum. Other instruments will be displayed. Before you cut any of the details of these samples, the operator must install a floating zero and tool offset. When you enter the loop geometry milling interactive program last selected option at the bottom line and arc screens are the ultimate option. The final option allows the programmer to select the rounded corner or chamfer at this point the program. If you make a choice is required, the final option would be to miss. Sample 1

Start / End

430

SECTION 7 - EXAMPLES OF PROGRAMS


Sample programs one EIA N1 N2 N3 N4 N5 N6 N7 N8 N9 N10 N11 N12 N13 N14 N15 N16 G0 G17 G20 G32 G40 G50 G69 G80 G90 T1 M6 X-1 Y-1 S3000 M03 G43 H1 Z.1 M08 G01 Z-.375 F5 G41 D1 X0 F25 Y3.5 X1.5 G3 R1 AA180 AB-45 G1 R.S AB45 G2 R1 XC5.9142 YC4.0858 AB0 G1 Y0 X-1 G40 Y-1 G0 Z.1 M9 M5 Explanation of the EIA program, a N1 The choice of accelerated movement, the plane XY, inch of change and movement in the Z position of the tool change, cancellation of the correction on the cutting tool, scaling, rotation, and the group of cycles, the choice of absolute measurements. (All programs default to G17, G40, G50, G69, G80 and G90. G20 is modal). Change the tool number 1 Positioning in the X-1 Y-1 and the inclusion of the spindle (3000 rev / min) Calling correction "H" number one tool, the positioning of Z in the 0.1 and the inclusion of coolant Submission of Z-0.375 at 5 inches / minute The choice of the correction on the cutting tool on the left, call the correction "D" tool number 1 and submission to the X0 Y-1 at 25 inches / minute Note: Correction to the cutting tool will increase during this movement. Moving the line X0 Y3.5 Moving the line to X1.5 Y3.5 The radius of an "arc counter-clockwise, starting at 180 , ending with -45

N2 N3 N4 N5 N6

N7 N8 N9

431

SECTION 7 - EXAMPLES OF PROGRAMS


N10 N11 N12 N13 N14 N15 N16 Move the line with the estimated endpoint, described using polar coordinates, an angle of 45 radius of 0.5 The absolute center of the radius of an "arc in a clockwise direction XC5.9142 YC4.0858 and posterior angle of 0 Move the line in Y0 Move the line in the X-1 Y0 Turn off correction in the cutting tool while moving the X-1 Y-1 Rapid traverse Z in 0.1 and off coolant Turn off the spindle An example of an interactive program Event 0 out of 11 Installing the software The name of the program [SAMPLE 1]

Dimensions [Absolute] Units [The English system] Working coordinate [---] Installation Notes: [] [] [] [] [] [] -------------------------------------------------- Event 1 of 11 Change of tool Tool The position tool changer Number of tools Description of instrument Number of the next tool [Turn] X [] Y [] T [1] [ ] []

432

SECTION 7 - EXAMPLES OF PROGRAMS


Rotational speed of spindle S [3000] The direction of spindle rotation [clockwise] Coolant [irrigation] -------------------------------------------------- Event 2 of 11 Puncture tool - Start cutting cycle The feed rate puncture Z Return point Gap The final depth of Z 1st depth Z The increment of Z The point of puncture X The point of puncture Y Correction [5 ] [Gap] [.1 ] [- .375 ] [- .375 ] [1 ] X [0] Y [0] [Automatic, left]

Options [---] -------------------------------------------------- Event 3 of 11 Geometrical parameters of milling - Line The feed rate Coordinates The X-axis The Y-axis The Z-axis End F [] [Cartesian] X [] Y [3.5 ] Z[ ] [---]

Elongation in the opposite direction [off.] -------------------------------------------------- Event 4 of 11 Geometrical parameters of milling - Line The feed rate Coordinates The X-axis The Y-axis The Z-axis End F [] [Cartesian] X [1.5] Y[ ] Z [] [---]

433

SECTION 7 - EXAMPLES OF PROGRAMS


Elongation in the opposite direction [off.] -------------------------------------------------- Event 5 of 11 Geometrical parameters of milling - Doug Plane [XY] The feed rate F [] Direction [counter-clockwise] Center [The polar] The radius of the arc R [1] The initial angle AA [180] End point The final angle [The polar] AB [-45] Z []

The final option is [---] -------------------------------------------------- Event 6 of 11 Geometrical parameters of milling - Line The feed rate Coordinates Plane Type Length The final angle The Z-axis End F [] [Polar] [XY] [current] R [.5] AB [45] Z [] [---]

Elongation in the opposite direction [off.] -------------------------------------------------- -

434

SECTION 7 - EXAMPLES OF PROGRAMS


Event 7 of 11 Geometrical parameters of milling - Doug Plane The feed rate Direction Center The radius of the arc Center of arc End point The final angle [XY] F [] [Clockwise] [The absolute center] R [1] XC [5.9142] YC [4.0858] [The polar] AB [0] Z []

The final option is [---] -------------------------------------------------- Event 8 of 11 Geometrical parameters of milling - Line The feed rate Coordinates The X-axis The Y-axis The Z-axis End F [] [Cartesian] X [] Y [0] Z[ ] [---]

Elongation in the opposite direction [off.] -------------------------------------------------- Event 9 of 11 Geometrical parameters of milling - Line The feed rate Coordinates The X-axis The Y-axis The Z-axis End F [] [Cartesian] X [0] Y[ ] Z [] [---]

Elongation in the opposite direction [off.] -------------------------------------------------- -

435

SECTION 7 - EXAMPLES OF PROGRAMS


Event 10 of 11 Removal of the instrument Complete cycle of milling The direction of the workpiece after the removal tool [Automatic] -------------------------------------------------- Event 11 of 11 End of program Turn off the spindle Disconnect coolant Z in the tool change [Yes] [Yes] [No] [ ] [ ]

The position of X (with respect to the reference point) The position of Y (with respect to the reference point) -------------------------------------------------- Sample 2A
Start / End

The central point is necessary to calculate

436

SECTION 7 - EXAMPLES OF PROGRAMS


The sample program EIA 2A N1 N2 N3 N4 N5 N6 N7 N8 N9 N10 N11 N12 N13 N14 T1 M6 G0 X-1 Y1 S3000 M3 G43 H1 Z.1 M8 G1 Z-.375 F5 G42 D1 X0 F25 Y-1.5 G3 XC1 YC-1.5 AB-45 R1 G2XC2.7071 YC-3.2071 AB-45 R1.4142 G3 XC4.4142 YC-1.5 AB0 R1 G1 Y0 X-1 G40 Y1 G0 Z.1 M9 M05 Explanation of the EIA 2A program N1 N2 N3 N4 N5 Change the tool number 1 Fast positioning in the X-1 is Y1; inclusion of rotation of the spindle in a clockwise direction (3000 rev / min) Calling correction "H" number one tool, the positioning of Z in the 0.1 and the inclusion of coolant Submission of Z-0.375 at 5 inches / minute The choice of the correction on the cutting tool on the right, call the correction "D" tool number 1 and moving in X0 at 25 inches / minute Note: Correction to the cutting tool will increase during this movement. Moving the line X0 Y-1.5 The radius of a "counter-clockwise arc with XC1 YC-1.5 and the estimated posterior angle of -45 The radius of 1.4142 arc in a clockwise direction with XC2.7071 YC-3.197 and the estimated posterior angle of 45 Note: The central point must be calculated before the programming. The radius of a "counter-clockwise arc with CX4.4142 YC-1.5 and the rear angle 0 Moving the line X5.4142 Y0

N6 N7 N8

N9 N10

437

SECTION 7 - EXAMPLES OF PROGRAMS


N11 N12 N13 N14 Move the line in the X-1 Y0 Turn off correction in the cutting tool, the movement in the X-1 Y1 Rapid traverse Z in 0.1 and off coolant Turn off the spindle An example of an interactive program 2A Event 0 of 10 Installing the software The name of the program [SAMPLE 2]

Dimensions [Absolute] Units [The English system] Working coordinate [---] Installation Notes: [] [] [] [] [] [] -------------------------------------------------- Event 1 of 10 Change of tool Tool The position tool changer [Turn] X []

Number of tools T [1] Description of instrument [ ] Number of the next tool [] Rotational speed of spindle S [3000] The direction of spindle rotation [clockwise] Coolant [irrigation] -------------------------------------------------- Event 2 of 10 Puncture tool - Start cutting cycle The feed rate puncture Z Return point Gap [5 ] [Gap] [.1 ]

438

SECTION 7 - EXAMPLES OF PROGRAMS


The final depth of Z 1st depth Z The increment of Z The point of puncture X The point of puncture Y Correction [- .375 ] [- .375 ] [1 ] X [0] Y [0] [Automatic, right]

Options [---] -------------------------------------------------- Event 3 of 10 Geometrical parameters of milling - Line The feed rate Coordinates The X-axis The Y-axis The Z-axis End F [] [Cartesian] X [] Y [-1.5] Z[ ] [---]

Elongation in the opposite direction [off.] -------------------------------------------------- Event 4 of 10 Geometrical parameters of milling - Doug Plane [XY] The feed rate F [] Direction [counter-clockwise] Center [The absolute center] The radius of the arc R [1] Center of arc XC [1] YC [-1.5] End point The final angle [The polar] AB [-45] Z []

The final option is [---] -------------------------------------------------- -

439

SECTION 7 - EXAMPLES OF PROGRAMS


Event 5 of 10 Geometrical parameters of milling - Doug Plane [XY] The feed rate F [] Direction [Clockwise] Center [The absolute center] The radius of the arc R [1] Center of arc XC [1.4142] YC [-3.197] End point [The polar] The final angle AB [-45] Z [] The final option is [---] -------------------------------------------------- Event 6 of 10 Geometrical parameters of milling - Doug Plane [XY] The feed rate F [] Direction [counter-clockwise] Center [The absolute center] The radius of the arc R [1] Center of arc XC [4.4142] YC [-1.5] End point [The polar] The final angle AB [0] Z [] The final option is [---] -------------------------------------------------- Event 7 of 10 Geometrical parameters of milling - Line The feed rate Coordinates The X-axis The Y-axis The Z-axis End F [] [Cartesian] X [] Y [0] Z[ ] [---]

Elongation in the opposite direction [off.] -------------------------------------------------- -

440

SECTION 7 - EXAMPLES OF PROGRAMS


Event 8 of 10 Geometrical parameters of milling - Line The feed rate Coordinates The X-axis The Y-axis The Z-axis End F [] [Cartesian] X [0] Y[ ] Z [] [---]

Elongation in the opposite direction [off.] -------------------------------------------------- Event 9 of 10 Removal of the instrument Complete cycle of milling The direction of the workpiece after the removal tool [Automatic] -------------------------------------------------- Event 10 of 10 End of program Turn off the spindle Disconnect coolant Z in the tool change [Yes] [Yes] [No] [ ] [ ]

The position of X (with respect to the reference point) The position of Y (with respect to the reference point)

441

SECTION 7 - EXAMPLES OF PROGRAMS


Sample 2B The same detail as in sample 2A, but programmed by using the tangent arc.

Start / End

CENTRAL POINT, calculated using the tangent arc

The sample program EIA 2B N1 N2 N3 N4 N5 N6 N7 N8 N9 N10 N11 N12 N13 N14 N15 N16 N17 N18 N19 N20 N21 N22 T1 M6 G0 X-1 Y1 S3000 M3 G43 H1 Z.1 M8 G1 Z-.375 F5 G42 D1 X0 F25 Y-1.5 P90 = 1 P91 = -1.5 P92 = 1 P93 = 4.4142 P94 = -1.5 P95 = 1 P96 = 1.4142 TANA C7 G3 XC1 YC-1.5 AB-45 R1 G2 XC [P84] YC [P85] R [P96] X [P82] Y [P83] G3 R1 XC4.4142 YC-1.5 AB0 G1 Y0 X-1 G40 Y1 G0 Z.1 M9 M5

442

SECTION 7 - EXAMPLES OF PROGRAMS


Explanation of the EIA program, 2B N1 N2 N3 N4 N5 Change the tool number 1 Fast positioning in the X-1 is Y1; inclusion of rotation of the spindle in a clockwise direction (3000 rev / min) Calling correction "H" number one tool, the positioning of Z in the 0.1 and the inclusion of coolant Submission of Z-0.375 at 5 inches / minute The choice of the correction on the cutting tool on the right, call the correction "D" tool number 1 and moving in X0 at 25 inches / minute Note: Correction to the cutting tool will increase during this movement. Moving the line X0 Y-1.5

N6

N7, N8- The central point of X, Y the first arc N9 The radius of the first arc

N10, N11 - the central point of X, Y second arc N12 N13 N14 N15 N16 N17 N18 N19 N20 N21 N22 Radius of second arc The radius of the arc tangent The function of the arc tangent The first arc with endpoint The tangent arc with the calculated center point and end point The radius of a "counter-clockwise arc with CX4.4142 YC-1.5 and the rear angle 0 Moving the line X5.4142 Y0 Move the line in the X-1 Y0 Turn off correction in the cutting tool, the movement in the X-1 Y1 Note: Correction to the cutting tool will decrease during this movement. Rapid traverse Z in 0.1 and off coolant Turn off the spindle

443

SECTION 7 - EXAMPLES OF PROGRAMS


An example of an interactive program 2B 0 of 9 Event Installing the software The name of the program [EXAMPLE 2B]

Dimensions [Absolute] Units [The English system] Working coordinate [---] Installation Notes: [] [] [] [] [] [] -------------------------------------------------- Event 1 of 9 Change of tool Tool The position tool changer [Turn] X [] Y [] Number of tools T [1] Description of instrument [ ] Number of the next tool [] Rotational speed of spindle S [3000] The direction of spindle rotation [clockwise] Coolant [irrigation] -------------------------------------------------- Event 2 of 9 Puncture tool - Start cutting cycle The feed rate puncture Z Return point Gap The final depth of Z 1st depth Z The increment of Z The point of puncture X The point of puncture Y Correction [5 ] [Gap] [.1 ] [- .375 ] [- .375 ] [1 ] X [0] Y [0] [Automatic, right]

444

SECTION 7 - EXAMPLES OF PROGRAMS


Options [---] -------------------------------------------------- Event 3 of 9 Geometrical parameters of milling - Line The feed rate Coordinates The X-axis The Y-axis The Z-axis End F [25] [Cartesian] X [] Y [-1.5] Z[ ] [---]

Elongation in the opposite direction [off.] -------------------------------------------------- Event 4 of 9 Connecting two arcs tangent line or arc in the plane [XY] Milling of the first arc in the direction [clockwise] R1 [1 ] XC1 [1 ] YC1 [-1.5 ] The second arc is to calculate: R2 [1 ] XC2 [4.4142] YC2 [-1.5 ] The output of the 1st arc [right] Log in during the 2nd arc right] Connecting with [arc] From the center of [right] Radius [1.4142] The direction of the arc [Clockwise] -------------------------------------------------- -

445

SECTION 7 - EXAMPLES OF PROGRAMS


Event 5 of 9 Geometrical parameters of milling - Doug Plane The feed rate Direction Center The radius of the arc Center of arc End point The final angle [XY] F [] [counter-clockwise] [The absolute center] R [1] XC [4.4142] YC [-1.5] [The polar] AB [0] Z []

The final option is [---] -------------------------------------------------- Event 6 of 9 Geometrical parameters of milling - Line The feed rate Coordinates The X-axis The Y-axis The Z-axis End F [] [Cartesian] X [] Y [0] Z[ ] [---]

Elongation in the opposite direction [off.] -------------------------------------------------- Event 7 of 9 Geometrical parameters of milling - Line The feed rate Coordinates The X-axis The Y-axis The Z-axis End F [] [Cartesian] X [0] Y[ ] Z [] [---]

Elongation in the opposite direction [off.] -------------------------------------------------- -

446

SECTION 7 - EXAMPLES OF PROGRAMS


Event 8 of 9 Removal of the instrument Complete cycle of milling The direction of the workpiece after the removal tool [Automatic] -------------------------------------------------- Event 9 of 9 End of program Turn off the spindle Disconnect coolant Z in the tool change [Yes] [Yes] [No] [ ] [ ]

The position of X (with respect to the reference point) The position of Y (with respect to the reference point)

447

SECTION 7 - EXAMPLES OF PROGRAMS


Sample 3A

Start / End

The sample program EIA 3A N1 N2 N3 N4 N5 N6 N7 N8 N9 N10 N11 N12 N13 N14 N15 N16 N17 N18 T1 M6 G41 D1 S3000 M03 G65 X0 Y99 G0 Y0 G43 H1 Z.1 M8 G1 Z-.375 F5 X1 F25 G2 XC2 YC0 AB135 R1 G1 AB45 R.5 G2 XC4 YC2 X5 Y2 R1 G3 XC7 YC2 X9 R2 G1 Y5 X0 Y0 G65 X99 G40 G0 Z.1 M9 M5

448

SECTION 7 - EXAMPLES OF PROGRAMS


Explanation of the program, EIA 3A N1 N2 Change the tool number 1 The choice of the correction on the cutting tool on the left, the activation of correction "D" tool number 1 and the inclusion of rotation of the spindle in a clockwise direction (3000 rev / min) Installation of a "point to puncture X0 Y99 Note: The machine does not perform the movement in this position. Installing the "point of puncture X0 Y0; movement in his adjusted point, as determined by the previous block Calling correction "H" number one tool, the positioning of Z in the 0.1 and the inclusion of coolant Submission of Z-0.375 at 5 inches / minute Moving the line X1 Y0 at 25 inches / minute The radius of an "arc in a clockwise direction with XC2 YC0 and rear corner of the AB135 Move the line with the calculated endpoint and described the polar angle of 45 radius of 0.5 " The radius of an "arc in a clockwise direction using the XC-4 YC2 and endpoint X5 Y2 The radius of 2 "arc counterclockwise with XC7 YC2 and end points of X9 Y2 Moving the line X9 Y5 Moving the line X0 Y5 Moving the line X0 Y0 Installation of the "points after a puncture X99 Y0 Note: The machine does not perform the movement in this position. Turn off correction in the cutting tool Rapid traverse Z in 0.1 and off coolant Turn off the spindle

N3 N4 N5 N6 N7 N8 N9 N10 N11 N12 N13 N14 N15 N16 N17 N18

449

SECTION 7 - EXAMPLES OF PROGRAMS


An example of an interactive program 3A Event 0 out of 12 Installing the software The name of the program [EXAMPLE 3A] Dimensions [Absolute] Units [The English system] Working coordinate [---] Installation Notes: [] [] [] [] [] [] -------------------------------------------------- Event 1 of 12 Change of tool Tool The position tool changer [Turn] X [] Y [] Number of tools T [1] Description of instrument [ ] Number of the next tool [] Rotational speed of spindle S [3000] The direction of spindle rotation [clockwise] Coolant [irrigation] -------------------------------------------------- Event 2 of 12 Puncture tool - Start cutting cycle The feed rate puncture Z Return point Gap The final depth of Z 1st depth Z The increment of Z The point of puncture X The point of puncture Y [5 ] [Gap] [.1 ] [- .375 ] [- .375 ] [1 ] X [0] Y [0]

450

SECTION 7 - EXAMPLES OF PROGRAMS


Correction X to the puncturing Y to puncture [left] [Cartesian] X [0] Y [99]

Options [---] -------------------------------------------------- Event 3 of 12 Geometrical parameters of milling - Line The feed rate Coordinates The X-axis The Y-axis The Z-axis End F [25] [Cartesian] X [1] Y[ ] Z [] [---]

Elongation in the opposite direction [off.] -------------------------------------------------- Event 4 of 12 Geometrical parameters of milling - Doug Plane [XY] The feed rate F [] Direction [Clockwise] Center [The polar] The radius of the arc R [1] The initial angle AA [180] End point The final angle [The polar] AB [135] Z []

The final option is [---] -------------------------------------------------- -

451

SECTION 7 - EXAMPLES OF PROGRAMS


Event 5 of 12 Geometrical parameters of milling - Line The feed rate Coordinates Plane Type Length The final angle The Z-axis End F [] [Polar] [XY] [current] R [.5] AB [45] Z [] [---]

Elongation in the opposite direction [off.] -------------------------------------------------- Event 6 of 12 Geometrical parameters of milling - Doug Plane [XY] The feed rate F [] Direction [Clockwise] Center [The absolute center] The radius of the arc R [1] Center of arc XC [4] YC [2] End point [Absolute] X [5] Y [2] Z []

The final option is [---] -------------------------------------------------- -

452

SECTION 7 - EXAMPLES OF PROGRAMS


Event 7 of 12 Geometrical parameters of milling - Doug Plane [XY] The feed rate F [] Direction [counter-clockwise] Center [The absolute center] The radius of the arc R [2] Center of arc XC [7] YC [2] End point [Absolute] X [9] Y [] Z []

The final option is [---] -------------------------------------------------- Event 8 of 12 Geometrical parameters of milling - Line The feed rate Coordinates The X-axis The Y-axis The Z-axis End F [] [Cartesian] X [] Y [5 ] Z [] [---]

Elongation in the opposite direction [off.] -------------------------------------------------- Event 9 of 12 Geometrical parameters of milling - Line The feed rate Coordinates The X-axis The Y-axis The Z-axis End F [] [Cartesian] X [0] Y[ ] Z [] [---]

Elongation in the opposite direction [off.] -------------------------------------------------- -

453

SECTION 7 - EXAMPLES OF PROGRAMS


Event 10 of 12 Geometrical parameters of milling - Line The feed rate Coordinates The X-axis The Y-axis The Z-axis End F [] [Cartesian] X [] Y [0] Z [] [---]

Elongation in the opposite direction [off.] -------------------------------------------------- Event 11 of 12 Removal of the instrument Complete cycle of milling The direction of the workpiece after the removal tool [Cartesian] X [99] Y [0] -------------------------------------------------- Event 12 of 12 End of program Turn off the spindle Disconnect coolant Z in the tool change [Yes] [Yes] [No] [ ] [ ]

The position of X (with respect to the reference point) The position of Y (with respect to the reference point)

454

SECTION 7 - EXAMPLES OF PROGRAMS


Sample 3B The same detail as in the sample 3A, but programmed with the function of the tangent line.

Start / End

The sample program EIA 3B N1 N2 N3 N4 N5 N6 N7 N8 N9 N10 N11 N12 N13 N14 N15 N16 N17 N18 N19 N20 N21 N22 N23 N24 T1 M6 G41 D1 S3000 M3 G65 X0 Y99 G0 Y0 G43 H1 Z.1 M8 G1 Z-.375 F5 X1 F25 P90 = 2 P91 = 0 P92 = 1 P93 = 4 P94 = 2 P95 = 1 TANL C3 (See the explanation of the relative values TANL C.) G2 XC [P90] YC [P91] R [P92] X [P80] Y [P81] G1 X [P82] Y [P83] G2 XC4 YC2 X5 Y2 R1 G3 XC7 YC2 X9 Y2 R2 G1 Y5 X0 Y0 G65 X99 G40 G0 Z.1 M9 455

SECTION 7 - EXAMPLES OF PROGRAMS


N25 M5 Note: Lines with the N8 to N13 can be written as follows: N9 P90 = 2 P91 = 0 P92 = 1 P93 = P94 = 4 2 P95 = 1 Explanation of the program, EIA 3B N1 N2 Change the tool number 1 The choice of the correction on the cutting tool on the left, the activation of correction "D" tool number 1 and the inclusion of rotation of the spindle in a clockwise direction (3000 rev / min) Installation of a "point to puncture X0 Y99 Note: The machine does not perform the movement in this position. Installing the "point of puncture X0 Y0; movement in his adjusted point, as determined by the previous block Calling correction "H" number one tool, the positioning of Z in the 0.1 and the inclusion of coolant Submission of Z-0.375 at 5 inches / minute Moving the line X1 Y0 at 25 inches / minute Center for the first arc The radius of the first arc Center of the second arc Radius of second arc The function of the arc tangent The first arc with endpoints calculated The line tangent to both arcs The radius of an "arc in a clockwise direction with XC7 YC2 and endpoint X5 Y2 The radius of 2 "arc counterclockwise with XC7 YC2 and end points of X9 Y2 Moving the line X9 Y5

N3 N4 N5 N6 N7 N8, N9 N10 N11, N12 N13 N14 N15 N16 N17 N18 N19

456

SECTION 7 - EXAMPLES OF PROGRAMS


N20 N21 N22 N23 N24 N25 Moving the line X0 Y5 Moving the line X0 Y0 Installation of the "points after a puncture X99 Y0 Note: The machine does not perform the movement in this position. Turn off correction in the cutting tool Rapid traverse Z in 0.1 and off coolant Turn off the spindle An example of an interactive program 3B Event 0 out of 11 Installing the software The name of the program [EXAMPLE 3B] Dimensions [Absolute] Units [The English system] Working coordinate [---] Installation Notes: [] [] [] [] [] [] -------------------------------------------------- Event 1 of 11 Change of tool Tool The position tool changer [Turn] X [] Y [] Number of tools T [1] Description of instrument [ ] Number of the next tool [] Rotational speed of spindle S [3000] The direction of spindle rotation [clockwise] Coolant [irrigation] -------------------------------------------------- -

457

SECTION 7 - EXAMPLES OF PROGRAMS


Event 2 of 11 Puncture tool - Start cutting cycle The feed rate puncture Z Return point Gap The final depth of Z 1st depth Z The increment of Z The point of puncture X The point of puncture Y Correction X to the puncturing Y to puncture [5 ] [Gap] [.1 ] [- .375 ] [- .375 ] [1 ] X [0] Y [0] [left] [Cartesian] X [0] Y [99]

Options [---] -------------------------------------------------- Event 3 of 12 Geometrical parameters of milling - Line The feed rate Coordinates The X-axis The Y-axis The Z-axis End F [25] [Cartesian] X [1] Y[ ] Z [] [---]

Elongation in the opposite direction [off.] -------------------------------------------------- -

458

SECTION 7 - EXAMPLES OF PROGRAMS


Event 4 of 11 Connecting two arcs tangent line or arc in the plane [XY] Milling of the first arc in the direction [clockwise] R1 [1 ] XC1 [2] YC1 [0] The second arc is to calculate: R2 [2] XC2 [4 ] YC2 [2] The output of the 1st arc [left] Log in during the 2nd arc [Left] Connecting with [line] -------------------------------------------------- Event 5 of 11 Geometrical parameters of milling - Doug Plane [XY] The feed rate F [] Direction [Clockwise] Center [The absolute center] The radius of the arc R [1] Center of arc XC [4] YC [2] End point [Absolute] X [5] Y [2] Z []

The final option is [---] -------------------------------------------------- -

459

SECTION 7 - EXAMPLES OF PROGRAMS


Event 6 of 11 Geometrical parameters of milling - Doug Plane [XY] The feed rate F [] Direction [counter-clockwise] Center [The absolute center] The radius of the arc R [2] Center of arc XC [7] YC [2] End point [Absolute] X [9] Y [] Z []

The final option is [---] -------------------------------------------------- Event 7 of 11 Geometrical parameters of milling - Line The feed rate Coordinates The X-axis The Y-axis The Z-axis End F [] [Cartesian] X [] Y [5] Z [] [---]

Elongation in the opposite direction [off.] -------------------------------------------------- Event 8 of 11 Geometrical parameters of milling - Line The feed rate Coordinates The X-axis The Y-axis The Z-axis End F [] [Cartesian] X [0] Y[ ] Z [] [---]

Elongation in the opposite direction [off.] -------------------------------------------------- -

460

SECTION 7 - EXAMPLES OF PROGRAMS


Event 9 of 11 Geometrical parameters of milling - Line The feed rate Coordinates The X-axis The Y-axis The Z-axis End F [] [Cartesian] X [] Y [0] Z [] [---]

Elongation in the opposite direction [off.] -------------------------------------------------- Event 10 of 11 Removal of the instrument Complete cycle of milling The direction of the workpiece after the removal tool [Cartesian] X [99] Y [0] -------------------------------------------------- Event 11 of 11 End of program Turn off the spindle Disconnect coolant Z in the tool change [Yes] [Yes] [No] [ ] [ ]

The position of X (with respect to the reference point) The position of Y (with respect to the reference point)

461

SECTION 7 - EXAMPLES OF PROGRAMS


Sample 4A

POSITION piercing instruCops

N1 N2 N3 N4 N5 N6 N7 N8 N9 N10 N11 N12 N13 N14 N15 N16

The sample program EIA 4A T1 M6 G41 D01 S3000 M3 G65 X99 Y0 G0 X0 G43 H1 Z.1 M8 G1 Z-.375 F5 Y-2 F25 G2 XC0 YC-3 AB-45 R1 G3 XC2.1213 YC-2.2929 AB-45 R2 G2 XC4.2426 YC-3 AB90 R1 G1 Y0 X0 G65 Y-99 G40 G0 Z.1 M9 M5

462

SECTION 7 - EXAMPLES OF PROGRAMS


Explanation of the program, EIA 4A N1 N2 Change the tool number 1 The choice of the correction on the cutting tool on the left, the activation of correction "D" tool number 1 and the inclusion of rotation of the spindle in a clockwise direction (3000 rev / min) Installation of a "point to puncture X99 Y0 Note: The machine does not perform the movement in this position. Installing the "point of puncture X0 Y0; movement in his adjusted point, as determined by the previous block Calling correction "H" number one tool, the positioning of Z in the 0.1 and the inclusion of coolant Submission of Z-0.375 at 5 inches / minute Moving the line X1 Y0 at 25 inches / minute The radius of an "arc in a clockwise direction with XC0 YC-3 and the estimated posterior angle of -45 The radius of 2 "arc counterclockwise with XC2.1213 YC-2.2929 and the estimated posterior angle of -45 The radius of an "arc in a clockwise direction with XC4.2426 YC-3 and the rear angle of 90 Moving the line X4.2426 Y0 Moving the line X0 Y0 Installation of the "points after a puncture X0 Y99 Note: The machine does not perform the movement in this position. Cancel correction on the cutting tool Rapid traverse Z in 0.1 and off coolant Turn off the spindle

N3 N4 N5 N6 N7 N8 N9 N10 N11 N12 N13 N14 N15 N16

463

SECTION 7 - EXAMPLES OF PROGRAMS


An example of an interactive program 4A Event 0 of 10 Installing the software The name of the program [EXAMPLE 4A]

Dimensions [Absolute] Units [The English system] Working coordinate [---] Installation Notes: [] [] [] [] [] [] -------------------------------------------------- Event 1 of 10 Change of tool Tool The position tool changer [Turn] X [] Y [] Number of tools T [1] Description of instrument [ ] Number of the next tool [] Rotational speed of spindle S [3000] The direction of spindle rotation [clockwise] Coolant [irrigation] -------------------------------------------------- Event 2 of 10 Puncture Tool - Start cutting cycle The feed rate puncture Z Return point Gap The final depth of Z 1st depth Z The increment of Z The point of puncture X [5 ] [Gap] [.1 ] [- .375 ] [- .375 ] [1 ] X [0]

464

SECTION 7 - EXAMPLES OF PROGRAMS


The point of puncture Y Correction X to the puncturing Y to puncture Y [0] [left] [Cartesian] X [99] Y [0]

Options [---] -------------------------------------------------- Event 3 of 10 Geometrical parameters of milling - Line The feed rate Coordinates The X-axis The Y-axis The Z-axis End F [25] [Cartesian] X [] Y [-2] Z [] [---]

Elongation in the opposite direction [off.] -------------------------------------------------- Event 4 of 10 Geometrical parameters of milling - Doug Plane [XY] The feed rate F [] Direction [Clockwise] Center [The absolute center] The radius of the arc R [1] Center of arc XC [0] YC [-3] End point Clearance [The polar] AB [-45] Z []

The final option is [---] -------------------------------------------------- -

465

SECTION 7 - EXAMPLES OF PROGRAMS


Event 5 of 10 Geometrical parameters of milling - Doug Plane [XY] The feed rate F [] Direction [counter-clockwise] Center [The absolute center] The radius of the arc R [2] Center of arc XC [2.1213] YC [-2.2929] End point Clearance [Polar] AB [-45] Z []

The final option is [---] -------------------------------------------------- Event 6 of 10 Geometrical parameters of milling - Doug Plane [XY] The feed rate F [] Direction [Clockwise] Center [The absolute center] The radius of the arc R [1] Center of arc XC [4.2326] YC [-3] End point [The polar] Clearance AB [90] Z [] The final option is [---] -------------------------------------------------- Event 7 of 10 Geometrical parameters of milling - Line The feed rate Coordinates The X-axis The Y-axis The Z-axis End F [] [Cartesian] X [] Y [0] Z [] [---]

Elongation in the opposite direction [off.] -------------------------------------------------- -

466

SECTION 7 - EXAMPLES OF PROGRAMS


Event 8 of 10 Geometrical parameters of milling - Line The feed rate Coordinates The X-axis The Y-axis The Z-axis End F [] [Cartesian] X [0] Y[ ] Z [] [---]

Elongation in the opposite direction [off.] -------------------------------------------------- Event 9 of 10 Removal of the instrument Complete cycle of milling The direction of the workpiece after the removal tool [Cartesian] X [0] Y [-99] -------------------------------------------------- Event 10 of 10 End of program Turn off the spindle Disconnect coolant Z in the tool change [Yes] [Yes] [No] [ ] [ ]

The position of X (with respect to the reference point) The position of Y (with respect to the reference point)

467

SECTION 7 - EXAMPLES OF PROGRAMS


Sample 4B Programming of the arc with the formation of 3-point circle. The points X1, X2, X3 - a point used to program each axis.

POSITION Puncture a tool

N1 N2 N3 N4 N5 N6 N7 N8 N9 N10 N11 N12 N13 N14 N15 N16 N17 N18 N19

The sample program EIA 4B T1 M6 G41 D1 S3000 M03 G65 X99 Y0 X0 G43 H1 Z.1 M8 G1 Z-.375 F5 Y-2 F25 P90 = 0 P91 = -2 P92 = 1 P93 = -3 P94 = 0 P95 = -4 CGEN G2 XC [P80] YC [P81] R [P82] AB300 P90 = .1213 P91 = -2.2929 P92 = 2.1213 P93 = -4.2929

468

SECTION 7 - EXAMPLES OF PROGRAMS


N20 N21 N22 N23 N24 N25 N26 N27 N28 N29 N30 N31 N32 N33 N34 N35 N36 N37 P94 = 4.1213 P95 = -2.2929 CGEN G3 XC [P80] YC [P81] R [P82] AB300 P90 = 4.2426 P91 = -4 P92 = 3.2426 P93 = -3 P94 = 4.2426 P95 = -2 CGEN G2 XC [P80] YC [P81] R [P82] X [P94] Y [P95] G1 Y0 X0 G65 Y-99 G40 G0 Z.1 M9 M5 Explanation of the program, EIA 4B N1 N2 Change the tool number 1 The choice of the correction on the cutting tool on the left, the activation of correction "D" tool number 1 and the inclusion of rotation of the spindle in a clockwise direction (3000 rev / min) Installation of a "point to puncture X99 Y0 Note: The machine does not perform the movement in this position. Installing the "point of puncture X0 Y0; movement in his adjusted point, as determined by the previous block Calling correction "H" number one tool, the positioning of Z in the 0.1 and the inclusion of coolant Submission of Z-0.375 at 5 inches / minute Moving the line X1 Y0 at 25 inches / minute - The coordinates of three points on the first circle The calculation of the circumference on the basis of three points Team of the arc, moving a point in the calculated

N3 N4 N5 N6 N7 N8N13 N14 N15

469

SECTION 7 - EXAMPLES OF PROGRAMS


N16- - The coordinates of three points in the second circle N21 N22 N23 Calculation of the second circle on the basis of three points Team of the arc, moving a point in the calculated

N24- - The coordinates of three points in the third circle N29 N30 N31 N32 N33 N34 N35 N36 N37 The calculation of the third circle on the basis of three points Team of the arc, moving a point in the calculated Moving the line X4.2426 Y0 Moving the line X0 Y0 Setting a withdrawal after the X0 Y99 Note: The machine does not perform the movement in this position. Cancel correction on the cutting tool Rapid traverse Z in 0.1 and off coolant Turn off the spindle An example of an interactive program 4B Event 0 of 10 Installing the software The name of the program [EXAMPLE 4B] Dimensions [Absolute] Units [The English system] Working coordinate [---] Installation Notes: [] [] [] [] [] [] -------------------------------------------------- -

470

SECTION 7 - EXAMPLES OF PROGRAMS


Event 1 of 10 Change of tool Tool The position tool changer [Cut] X [] Y [] Number of tools T [1] Description of instrument [ ] Number of the next tool [] Rotational speed of spindle S [3000] The direction of spindle rotation [clockwise] Coolant [irrigation] -------------------------------------------------- Event 2 of 10 Puncture tool - Start cutting cycle The feed rate puncture Z Return point Gap The final depth of Z 1st depth Z The increment of Z The point of puncture X The point of puncture Y Correction X to the puncturing Y to puncture [5 ] [Gap] [.1 ] [- .375 ] [- .375 ] [1 ] X [0] Y [0] [left] [Cartesian] X [99] Y [0]

Options [---] -------------------------------------------------- Event 3 of 10 Geometrical parameters of milling - Line The feed rate Coordinates The X-axis The Y-axis The Z-axis End F [25] [Cartesian] X [] Y [-2] Z [] [---]

471

SECTION 7 - EXAMPLES OF PROGRAMS


Elongation in the opposite direction [off.] -------------------------------------------------- Event 4 of 10 Generator 3-point circle Plane [XY] Direction [Clockwise] X1 [0] Y1 [-2] X2 [a] Y2 [-3] X3 [0] Y3 [-4] Use the X3, Y3, as the end point [no] Clearance [300 ] -------------------------------------------------- Event 5 of 10 Generator 3-point circle Plane [XY] Direction [counter-clockwise] X1 [.1213] Y1 [-2.2929] X2 [2.1213] Y2 [-4.2929] X3 [4.1213] Y3 [-2.2929] Use the X3, Y3, as the end point [no] Clearance [300 ] -------------------------------------------------- Event 6 of 10 Generator 3-point circle Plane [XY] Direction [Clockwise] X1 [4.2426] Y1 [-4] X2 [3.2426] Y2 [-3] X3 [4.2426] Y3 [-2] Use the X3, Y3, as the end point [Yes] -------------------------------------------------- Event 7 of 10 Geometrical parameters of milling - Line The feed rate Coordinates The X-axis The Y-axis The Z-axis End F [] [Cartesian] X [] Y [0] Z [] [---]

472

SECTION 7 - EXAMPLES OF PROGRAMS


Elongation in the opposite direction [off.] -------------------------------------------------- Event 8 of 10 Geometrical parameters of milling - Line The feed rate Coordinates The X-axis The Y-axis The Z-axis End F [] [Cartesian] X [0] Y[ ] Z [] [---]

Elongation in the opposite direction [off.] -------------------------------------------------- Event 9 of 10 Removal of the instrument Complete cycle of milling The direction of the workpiece after the removal tool [Cartesian] X [0] Y [-99] -------------------------------------------------- Event 10 of 10 End of program Turn off the spindle Disconnect coolant Z in the tool change [Yes] [Yes] [No] [ ] [ ]

The position of X (with respect to the reference point) The position of Y (with respect to the reference point)

473

SECTION 7 - EXAMPLES OF PROGRAMS


Sample 5

HOME / END

N1 N2 N3 N4 N5 N6 N7 N8 N9 N10 N11 N12 N13 N14 N15 N1 N2

The sample program EIA 5 T1 M6 G42 D1 S3000 M03 G65 X99 Y0 G0 X0 G43 H1 Z.1 M8 G1 Z-.375 F5 Y2 F25 G2 XC2 YC2 AB45 R2, R.0001 X5 YC2 AB0 R2 G1 Y0 X0 G65 Y99 G40 G0 Z.1 M9 M5 Explanation of the EIA program 5 Change the tool number 1 The choice of the correction on the cutting tool on the right, the activation of correction "D" tool number 1 and the inclusion of rotation of the spindle in a clockwise direction (3000 rev / min) Installation of a "point to puncture X99 Y0 Note: The machine does not perform the movement in this position.

N3

474

SECTION 7 - EXAMPLES OF PROGRAMS


N4 N5 N6 N7 N8 Installing the "point of puncture X0 Y0; movement in his adjusted point, as determined by the previous block Calling correction "H" number one tool, the positioning of Z in the 0.1 and the inclusion of coolant Submission of Z-0.375 at 5 inches / minute Moving the line X1 Y0 at 25 inches / minute The radius of 2 "arc in a clockwise direction with XC2 YC2, the estimated posterior angle of 45 and the final option (rounded corner) radius of 0.0001" Note: The final option is the radius of 0.0001 leads to the intersection between the lines. The radius of 2 "arc in a clockwise direction with XC4.8284 YC2 and rear angle of 0 degrees Moving the line X6.8284 Y0 Moving the line X0 Y0 Setting a withdrawal after the X0 Y99 Note: The machine does not perform the movement in this position. Turn off correction in the cutting tool Rapid traverse Z in 0.1 and off coolant Turn off the spindle An example of an interactive program 5 0 of 9 Event Installing the software The name of the program [EXAMPLE 5] Dimensions [Absolute] Units [The English system] Working coordinate [---]

N9 N10 N11 N12 N13 N14 N15

475

SECTION 7 - EXAMPLES OF PROGRAMS


Installation Notes: [] [] [] [] [] [] -------------------------------------------------- Event 1 of 9 Change of tool Tool The position tool changer [Turn] X [] Y [] Number of tools T [1] Description of instrument [ ] Number of the next tool [] Rotational speed of spindle S [3000] The direction of spindle rotation [clockwise] Coolant [irrigation] -------------------------------------------------- Event 2 of 9 Puncture tool - Start cutting cycle The feed rate puncture Z Return point Gap The final depth of Z 1st depth Z The increment of Z The point of puncture X The point of puncture Y Correction X to the puncturing Y to puncture [5 ] [Gap] [.1 ] [- .375 ] [- .375 ] [1 ] X [0] Y [0] [right] [Cartesian] X [99] Y [0]

Options [---] -------------------------------------------------- -

476

SECTION 7 - EXAMPLES OF PROGRAMS


Event 3 of 9 Geometrical parameters of milling - Line The feed rate Coordinates The X-axis The Y-axis The Z-axis End F [25] [Cartesian] X [] Y [2] Z [] [---]

Elongation in the opposite direction [off.] -------------------------------------------------- Event 4 of 9 Geometrical parameters of milling - Doug Plane [XY] The feed rate F [] Direction [Clockwise] Center [The absolute center] The radius of the arc R [2] Center of arc XC [2] YC [2] End point [The polar] The final angle AB [45] Z [] The final option is [Rounded corner] Radius [.0001 ] -------------------------------------------------- Event 5 of 9 Geometrical parameters of milling - Doug Plane [XY] The feed rate F [] Direction [Clockwise] Center [The absolute center] The radius of the arc R [2] Center of arc XC [4.8284] YC [2] End point [The polar] The final angle AB [0] Z [] The final option is [---] -------------------------------------------------- -

477

SECTION 7 - EXAMPLES OF PROGRAMS


Event 6 of 9 Geometrical parameters of milling - Line The feed rate Coordinates The X-axis The Y-axis The Z-axis End F [] [Cartesian] X [] Y [0] Z [] [---]

Elongation in the opposite direction [off.] -------------------------------------------------- Event 7 of 9 Geometrical parameters of milling - Line The feed rate Coordinates The X-axis The Y-axis The Z-axis End F [] [Cartesian] X [0] Y[ ] Z [] [---]

Elongation in the opposite direction [off.] -------------------------------------------------- Event 8 of 9 Removal of the instrument Complete cycle of milling The direction of the workpiece after the removal tool [Cartesian] X [0] Y [99] -------------------------------------------------- Event 9 of 9 End of program Turn off the spindle Disconnect coolant Z in the tool change [Yes] [Yes] [No] [ ] [ ]

The position of X (with respect to the reference point) The position of Y (with respect to the reference point)

478

SECTION 7 - EXAMPLES OF PROGRAMS


Sample 6

Puncture POSITION TOOL

The sample program EIA 6 N1 N2 N3 N4 N5 N6 N7 N8 N9 N10 N11 N12 N13 N14 N15 N16 N17 N18 N1 N2 T1 M6 G42 D1 S3000 M3 G65 X0 Y0 X.5 Y1.5 G43 H1 Z.1 M8 G1 Z-.375 F5 X1 Y3 F25 X0 G3 XC-1.2689 YC2.2 X-3 R1.5 G1 X-4 X-6.1 Y.5 Y0 X0 X.5 Y1.5 G65 X1 Y3 G40 G0 Z.1 M30 Explanation of the EIA program, 6 Change the tool number 1 The choice of the correction on the cutting tool on the right, the activation of correction "D" tool number 1 and the inclusion of rotation of the spindle in a clockwise direction (3000 rev / min)

479

SECTION 7 - EXAMPLES OF PROGRAMS


N3 N4 N5 N6 N7 N8 N9 N10 N11 N12 N13 N14 N15 N16 N17 N18 Installation of a "point to puncture X0 Y0 Note: The machine does not perform the movement in this position. Installing the "point of puncture X.5 Y1.5; movement in his adjusted point, as determined by the previous block Calling correction "H" number one tool, the positioning of Z in the 0.1 and the inclusion of coolant Submission of Z-0.375 at 5 inches / minute Moving the line X1 Y3 at 25 inches / minute Moving the line to the calculated end point X0 The radius of 1.5 "arc counterclockwise with XC-1.2689 YC2.2 and calculated end point X-3 Move the line in the X-4 Y3 Moving the line in the X-6.1 Y.5 Moving the line in the X-6.1 Y0 Moving the line X0 Y0 Moving the line to X.5 Y1.5 Installation of the "points after a puncture X1 Y3 Note: The machine does not perform the movement in this position. Turn off correction in the cutting tool Rapid traverse Z in 0.1 Completion of the program off the spindle and coolant An example of an interactive program 6 Event 0 out of 11 Installing the software The name of the program [SAMPLE 6] Dimensions [Absolute] Units [The English system] Working coordinate [---]

480

SECTION 7 - EXAMPLES OF PROGRAMS


Installation Notes: [] [] [] [] [] [] -------------------------------------------------- Event 1 of 12 Change of tool Tool The position tool changer [Turn] X [] Y [] Number of tools T [1] Description of instrument [ ] Number of the next tool [] Rotational speed of spindle S [3000] The direction of spindle rotation [clockwise] Coolant [irrigation] -------------------------------------------------- Event 2 of 12 Puncture tool - Start cutting cycle The feed rate puncture Z Return point Gap The final depth of Z 1st depth Z The increment of Z The point of puncture X The point of puncture Y Correction [5 ] [Gap] [.1 ] [- .375 ] [- .375 ] [1 ] X [.5] Y [1.5] [Automatic, right]

Options [---] -------------------------------------------------- Event 3 of 12 Geometrical parameters of milling - Line The feed rate Coordinates F [25] [Cartesian]

481

SECTION 7 - EXAMPLES OF PROGRAMS


The X-axis The Y-axis The Z-axis End X [1] Y [3] Z [] [---]

Elongation in the opposite direction [off.] -------------------------------------------------- Event 4 of 12 Geometrical parameters of milling - Line The feed rate Coordinates The X-axis The Y-axis The Z-axis End F [] [Cartesian] X [0] Y[ ] Z [] [---]

Elongation in the opposite direction [off.] -------------------------------------------------- Event 5 of 12 Geometrical parameters of milling - Doug Plane [XY] The feed rate F [] Direction [counter-clockwise] Center [The absolute center] The radius of the arc R [1.5] Center of arc XC [-1.2689] YC [2.2] End point [Absolute] X [-3] Y [] Z [] The final option is [---] -------------------------------------------------- Event 6 of 12 Geometrical parameters of milling - Line The feed rate Coordinates The X-axis The Y-axis F [] [Cartesian] X [-4] Y[ ]

482

SECTION 7 - EXAMPLES OF PROGRAMS


The Z-axis End Z [] [---]

Elongation in the opposite direction [off.] ------------------------------------------------Event 7 of 12 Geometrical parameters of milling - Line The feed rate Coordinates The X-axis The Y-axis The Z-axis End F [] [Cartesian] X [-6.1] Y [.5] Z [] [---]

Elongation in the opposite direction [off.] -------------------------------------------------- Event 8 of 12 Geometrical parameters of milling - Line The feed rate Coordinates The X-axis The Y-axis The Z-axis End F [] [Cartesian] X [] Y [0] Z [] [---]

Elongation in the opposite direction [off.] -------------------------------------------------- Event 9 of 12 Geometrical parameters of milling - Line The feed rate Coordinates The X-axis The Y-axis The Z-axis End F [] [Cartesian] X [.5] Y [1.5] Z [] [---]

483

SECTION 7 - EXAMPLES OF PROGRAMS


Elongation in the opposite direction [off.] -------------------------------------------------- Event 10 of 12 Geometrical parameters of milling - Line The feed rate Coordinates The X-axis The Y-axis The Z-axis End F [] [Cartesian] X [0] Y[ ] Z [] [---]

Elongation in the opposite direction [off.] -------------------------------------------------- Event 11 of 12 Removal of the instrument Complete cycle of milling The direction of the workpiece after the removal tool [Automatic] -------------------------------------------------- Event 12 of 12 End of program Turn off the spindle Disconnect coolant Z in the tool change [Yes] [Yes] [No] [ ] [ ]

The position of X (with respect to the reference point) The position of Y (with respect to the reference point)

484

SECTION 7 - EXAMPLES OF PROGRAMS


Sample 7 In this example, the program uses the rotary axis. Axis "A" is programmed in decimal degrees format XXX.XXX. An example of programming the rotary axis, a sample of seven 03,119 G20 G90 N1 G0 Z.1 N2 X0 Y0 A0 N3 G1 F20 Z-.1 N4 F15 X-5 A90 N5 G0 Z.1 N6 X0 N7 G1 F20 Z-.1 N8 F15 X-5 A180 N9 G0 Z.1 N10 X0 N11 G1 F20 Z-.1 N12 F15 X-5 A270 N13 G0 Z.1 N14 X0 N15 G1 F20 Z-.1 N16 F15 X-5 A360 N17 G0 Z.1 N18 X0 (End of 03 119) Moving along the axis A - Screw 4 screw slots The positioning of the workpiece Z Positioning the X, Y and A in the starting point Submission to the depth Z Displacement interpolation XA The positioning of the workpiece Z Positioning the X back to the starting point The second groove

The third slot

The fourth slot

485

APPENDIX
Error Messages 001 Invalid function number (Invalid function number) Pay attention to what happened and call for technical support. It was non-existent function call to DOS. 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 File not found (File not found) The name of the file labeled as outdated, does not exist. Use the MENU. Path not found (Path not found) The specified disk or subdirectory does not exist. Too many open files (Too many open files) Check whether the Config.sys file setting FILES = 20. File access denied (access denied to file) The file can be opened only in read mode or on disk, write-protected. Invalid file handle (file is invalid feed) Memory control blocks destroyed (memory management units destroyed) Insufficient memory (Out of memory) The downloadable program is too large for available memory. Performed or verified the program is too large for the memory control unit. Try to DNC mode. Invalid memory block address (Invalid memory block address) Invalid environment (Wrong Wednesday) Invalid format (Invalid format) Invalid file access code (Invalid access code to the file) Invalid data (incorrect data) Invalid drive specified (Invalid Drive) The specified disc does not exist. Cannot remove current directory (Can not remove current directory) Pay attention to what happened and call for technical support. Cannot rename across drives (not to rename specify different drives) No more files (There are no more files) 486

009 010 011 012 013 015 016 017 018

APPENDIX

100

Disk read error (Error reading disk) An attempt was made to edit the file that was somehow damaged, possibly during the editing power loss occurred or an error 101. Try to edit another file to see whether the problem is only one particular file. In this case, the program must be restored. Note: This error occurs when you try to edit the dialog files created by the software SLS.

101

Disk write error - Parts memory is full (Error writing to disk - program memory to handle the full details) To avoid this error, remove the program from memory if they are not used (stored on a floppy disk). It is also necessary to monitor the amount of memory while programming. After deleting some programs from the program for the machining of parts is room for additional programs. The procedure for recovering from Error 101 (Error writing to disk - program memory to handle the full details) Enter the commands shown in CAPITALS, then click on the button ENT. 1) ENTER (should see the C :/ RAM) 2) CD .. (Change directory) 3) CD PARTS (change to the directory of programs for processing details) 4) DIR (transfer files PART) 5) DEL O # # # # (# # # # - Number of your details) NOTE: You can recover your file O # # # # of the file dialog (P # # # #), resending it. 6) Turn off the machine, then on again to reset the control unit. Use the UTILFILES-ERASE to erase the programs that are no longer needed.

NOTE: You can check how much memory programs for the machining of parts is available on the home page using the UTIL-INFO. 102 103 104 105 106 File not assigned (The file is not named) File not open (The file is not opened) File not open for input (The file is not open for input) File not open for output (The file is not open for output) Invalid numeric format (Invalid number format) 487

APPENDIX

150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162

Disk is write-protected (disk is write-protected) Check whether there is a write-protect sticker used on a floppy disk. Unknown unit (unit unknown) Drive not ready (The disc is not ready) Check whether there is a disc in the drive. Unknown command (Unknown command) CRC error in data (error in the source data) Read the disk is damaged. Bad drive request structure length (the length of the structure of the query is incorrect disk) Disk seek error (Error positioning drive) Check the wire from the control unit to the drive. Unknown media type (media type is unknown) Sector not found (Sector not found) Printer out of paper (the printer out of paper) Device write fault (error writing to the device) Device read fault (Error reading from device) Hardware failure (hardware failure) Invalid format on a floppy disk. Try using a different drive or reformat the disk. Verify proper wiring of the drive. Sharing Violation (Error Sharing) Obsolete controller software for this system (Legacy software controller for the system) Obsolete acroloop software for this system (Legacy software acroloop for this system) Obsolete keyboard software for this system (Legacy software keyboard for the system) Obsolete bit access for ncb controller (Obsolete radix selection for the 488

163 182 183 184 185

APPENDIX
controller unit controls the network) 186 It also appears as an error 954. Control (NCB card) not detected (control unit (ECU network card) is not detected) - occurs when power All CNC Centurion 6 and 7. The control unit is not recorded in the correct signature dual-port memory, pointing out that she attended. Reasons: A. Defective unit network management card. Two. The motherboard is installed incorrectly, so the dual-port memory is also not functioning properly. For example, a motherboard with nakristalnymi drives require a jumper at which the address of the firmware nakristalnogo drive is not stored in the address D0000 hex, such as a dual-port memory. It also appears as an error 955. Interface card not detected (interface card is not detected - there is a powerOnly Centurion 7 CNC Version of the NC 206 and later From the interface card has not been received by fiber-optic appropriate information which would indicate its performance. REASONS: A. Fiber optic cable is not attached at both ends. Two. Faulty interface board. Three. Defective unit network management cardBecause it must receive information from the interface board. 4. Defective fiber optic cable. It also appears as an error 956. Interface card communication failure (refusal of a communication channel interface card) Only Centurion 7 CNC Version of the NC 238 and later Built-in network control block 3.19 or later Not received any information from the interface board for 10 pulses of the control unit, about 0.01 seconds. REASONS: A. Fiber optic cable is weakened. Two. Faulty interface board. Three. Defective unit network management cardBecause it must receive information from the interface board. 4. Defective fiber optic cable. It also appears as an error 957. Watchdog Failure (Failure Watchdog) Only Centurion 7 CNC Version of the NC 238 and later 489

187

188

189

APPENDIX
Built-in network control block 3.19 or later Built-in interface 1.11 and later versions Interface board reported that it removed the guard circuit, since there was no information from the network management card unit for about 3 pulses of about 0.003 seconds. REASONS: A. Fiber optic cable is weakened. Two. Defective unit network management card. Three. Faulty interface card, as it should be informed of the board of the control unit by the network. 4. If the software does not support error number 194, the release of power to the interface board called it resets (interface card comes with watchdog disabled by the system). Five. At a minimum, it is possible that the link will work in one direction and does not work in another. Especially when each area has an independent channel, including a separate fiber-optic cable. It is assumed that this error will be very rare, especially when the "Reset Interface" will give a single error. 190 It also appears as an error 958. Unexpected control (NCB card) reset (Unexpected reset the control unit (ECU network card) Only Centurion 7 CNC Version of the NC 255 and later Built-in network control block 3.23 or later The board of the control unit network is sometimes reset after power up, it's the only time when it should be dropped. REASONS: A. emission power in the board of the control unit by the network. Two. Noise on the bus reset your PC that is connected to the bus control unit reset board network. Fees keyboard version PLD AC hex (instead of the current B0 hex) allowed displacement of the tire reset the PC, making it susceptible to interference. It also appears as an error 959. Unknown PLC (Hex file) failure (failure unidentified PLC (Hex-file)) Only Centurion 7 CNC Version of the NC 262 and later Built-in network control block 3.27 or later The tasks of the control unit is not serviced by a network of the last 256 pulses board unit, about 0.25 seconds. REASONS: A. The task of network management unit is stopped, which indicates that it was not properly recorded in our department software. This problem has been due to an earlier file, network control unit on a lathe Two. Some early versions of the firmware of the control unit processor network overloaded, leaving no time to complete tasks. 490

191

APPENDIX

192

It also appears as an error 960. Control (NCB card) Failure (Failure control unit (ECU network card) Centurion 6 and 7 Version of the NC 268 and later The board of network management unit did not respond for a long time. REASONS: A. Defective unit network management card. Two. NC 268-279 false versions caused this error if the key on and off the block pressed in rapid succession. Software Watchdog Error (Error Watchdog software) Only NC Centurion 8 - error described in this manual. Unexpected interface (card) reset (Unexpected reset (board) Interface) Only Centurion 7 CNC Version of the NC 289 and later Built-in network control block 3.30 or later Built-in interface 12.1 Interface board is sometimes reset after power up, it's the only time when it should be dropped. REASONS: A. Release of power on the interface board called it resets (interface card comes with watchdog disabled by the system). Division by zero (division by zero) Range check error (Error checking bounds) Stack overflow (stack overflow) Heap overflow - Insufficient RAM memory (heap overflow area - not enough memory) If you are a great program, try to execute it via RS-232 in RUN. Invalid pointer operation (operation with invalid pointer) Floating point overflow (overflow in floating point operations) Floating point underflow (disappearance of the order for floating point operations) Invalid floating point operation (invalid floating point operation) TP Overlay Error (Error rassovmescheniya TR)

193 194

200 201 202 203

204 205 206 207 208

491

APPENDIX
209 210 211 212 213 214 300 TP Overlay Error (Error rassovmescheniya TR) TP Object Error (Error object TR) TP Object Error (Error object TR) TP Object Error (Error object TR) TP Object Error (Error object TR) TP Object Error (Error object TR) Program already exists (program already exists) An attempt was made to use the name of an existing program. Use a different name. Invalid program number (program number is invalid) The actual number of programs are in the range from 1 to 9999. *Non-modeling programs range from 1 to 15. No programs to select from (No programs to choose from) This error can occur every time you create a menu to select the files when the file is not there. In the drive can be unformatted disk. Memory processing software components may be empty. Problem saving program (s) to disk (Problem when saving program (s) on disk) There is no disk in drive. A disk can not be a place to store additional files. In the drive can be unformatted disk. Problem loading program (s) from disk (Problem when loading program (s) to disk) The disk was removed from the drive after the installation files. Not formatted for conversational. Try text editor. (Do not formatted for interactive mode. Try to work in a text editor.) Conversational system has been corrupted (Interactive System has been damaged) Illegal event number (event number is invalid) Number of events in the interactive program is negative. Invalid tool number (Invalid number of tools) Tool number less than zero or greater than 99. Can't copy or rename a file to itself (can not rename or copy a file to itself) 492

301

302

303

304

305 306 307 308 309

APPENDIX
Try using a different file name. 310 File not formatted for conversational or parameters (The file is not formatted for the dialog mode or parameters) The problem in obtaining the file via RS-232. Check if there was sent the correct file. Parameter file not valid (invalid parameter file) The problem in obtaining the parameter file via RS-232. Check whether the parameters are sent. Insufficient parts storage (enough memory to store programs for processing details) Program memory is full of details to handle. Try to delete some programs from the catalog processing software components (UTILS-FILES-ERASE). Program on a floppy disk may be too large for the memory control unit. Insufficient storage for compression, unable to post the file (not enough memory for file compression, you can not send a file) Delete some programs from the program for processing details. Insufficient storage, post has been aborted (not enough memory to send interrupted) Delete some programs from the program for processing details. Out of storage space on the floppy (Going beyond the amount of memory on a floppy disk) A floppy disk is full, or there are too many programs. There is a limit to 224 files can be stored in the root directory on a floppy disk. On the drive, you can create a subdirectory, and change the path to the disk to store files in a subdirectory. This allows full use of disk space. Not enough storage to create a new file (not enough memory to create a new file) In the catalog of programs for the machining of parts is not enough space to create a new interactive program. Delete unnecessary programs to free up space. Simulator allows only 15 events (simulator only allows 15 events) Send file aborted (Sending a file is interrupted) Invalid PLC program. (Invalid PLC program) One of the files ACRO.HEX (or NCB.HEX) in the directory memory is corrupt. Error in program O. (The error in the program O.) Specialized M-code or G-code contains an error. 493

311

312

313

314

315

316

317 319 320 321

APPENDIX

322 323 324

or custom G code program not found. (Or a specialized program G-code not found) or custom M code program not found. (Or a program of specialized M-code not found) Invalid path or program not found for M6 tool change macro. (Path is invalid or not found a program for macro M6 tool change) In a macro tool change may include errors. Home required (Requires installation of the original position) The machine must be installed in its original position before it will happen any movement of the axes, ie MDI (manual data entry), JOG (Jog feed), HDW (flywheel), etc. X axis software limit overtravel (Move the X axis for the programmed limits) Y axis software limit overtravel (Move the Y axis for the programmed limits) Z axis software limit overtravel (Move the Z-axis for the programmed limits) A axis software limit overtravel (axis A for the transition preset limits) B axis software limit overtravel (Go B-axis for the programmed limits) C axis software limit overtravel (axis C of the transition-programmed limits) These errors are the result of reaching the limits of the programmed axis move. In the jog feed or flywheel reaches the limit of the axis of the control device will allow movement in one direction only. The program may be a mistake. You may need to modify the G92 and / or G54. Tool length is also a possible reason for the transition beyond the Z-axis.

400

401 402 403 404 405 406

407 408 409 410 411 412

X axis excess error condition (state the mismatch errors of the X axis) Y axis excess error condition (Condition mismatch error axis Y) Z axis excess error condition (Condition mismatch error axis Z) A axis excess error condition (Condition mismatch error axis A) B axis excess error condition (Condition mismatch error axis B) C axis excess error condition (Condition mismatch error axis C) These errors are caused by the fact that the axis can not keep up with the programmed movement of the programmed speed. This error occurs only when an accelerated move? Da__ Net__ If so, check the voltage on the bus and the parameters of the accelerated filing. Other reasons may include cutting of very thick material, worn tools, low voltage 15, the parameters of deceleration / acceleration or refusal fee disk.

494

APPENDIX
413 415 Attempted to move into safe zone (Trying to move into the security zone) Can't establish DNC link while program is running (can not connect to DNC during program execution) You must stop a running program before you connect DNC Out of position, arc end point is not on the arc (out of position, the end point of the arc is not on the arc) Can't edit parameters while program is running (You can not edit the parameters at run time) You must stop the program before you edit the settings. The program is in a block or stop the supply? Controller Card Error (Error controller board) Air Pressure Error. Check air hose connection (Error air pressure. Check air hose connection) Emergency stop: Axis drive fault. Reset servo drives or power down. (Emergency Stop: Do not drive axle. Restart actuators or power off) Emergency stop condition. Reset drives or press <ESC> to clear this message. (State of emergency stop. Restart drives or click on <ESC>, to remove this message) Lube fault, Check Waylube Level (Failure of lubrication system. Check lubricant level guides) Float switch for automatic lubrication pump indicates that it is necessary to add oil to the reservoir of the automatic lubrication. Tool not found in auto tool sequence (not found an instrument in a cycle of an automatic tool changer) Check the number of the instrument in UTIL-TLCHG-SLOTS. Tool pot not up during turret movement (socket tool is not directed upwards while moving turret) Check if the switch POT UP (jack up) properly. Not at tool change position (not in a position tool changer) Try to send a command before the command G32 M6. ATC arm is not out, axis movement not allowed (Hand of the automatic tool change is not outside, moving along the axes are not allowed) Can't process auto tool change after switching to manual (can not perform 495

416 417

418 448 449 450

451

452

453

454 455 456

APPENDIX
automatic tool change when you switch to manual mode) 457 458 459 460 501 Move length too great for control (length of the displacement is too large to manage) (Divided into smaller segments move) X axis is in the manual mode. Push reset to enable it (X-axis in manual mode. Click on Reset to activate it) Y axis is in the manual mode. Push reset to enable it (Y-axis in manual mode. Click on Reset to activate it) Feedrate too large for control. (The feed rate is too high to control) Illegal address "#" encountered (detected an invalid address "#") The symbol in quotes ("") is not a valid address, such as X, Y, Z, R, G, etc. The block in which the error occurred is shown on the screen unit. Check this box for invalid addresses. Undefined canned cycle (not a group defined cycle) Return without gosub (Return without gosub) See the information on the return and gosub page 412Section 5. Coincident points, the start point and end point are the same on an arc without a center (Coincidence points, starting and ending points are the same on the arc without a center) The starting and ending points are the same on the arc without a center. Radius too small to span given points (radius is too small for the connection of these points) The starting and ending points are separated by a distance greater than "R". After compensation, line to arc lacks intersection (after the correction is not crossing the line with the arc) After compensation, arcs lack intersection (after correction is no crossing arcs) Unexpected file size (Unexpected file size) The control unit reads the wrong size. Parameter out of range (beyond parameter) The parameter number is less than zero. For parameters with numbers over 699, use data mode (G10, G11). Illegal program statement (Invalid operator of the program) The command in the statement of the program is not considered valid. 496

502 503 504

505

507 509 515 517

518

APPENDIX

519

Feedrate out of range (feed rate beyond) The programmed feed rate exceeds the value of "maximum flow rate" in the settings of the machine. The programmed feed rate can be negative. Spindle speed out of range (Spindle speed goes outside) The programmed spindle speed exceeds the value of "a range of spindle speed" in settings of the machine. The programmed spindle speed can be negative. Negative arc radius (the radius of the arc negative) An attempt was made to generate a negative radius of the arc. Negative polar radius (the radius of the negative polarity) Polar radius must be specified as a positive value. Illegal tool number (Invalid number of tools) The actual numbers of T 0, from 0 to 99. Illegal radius number (Invalid number range) The actual numbers of D - from 0 to 99. Illegal length number (the number is invalid The actual numbers of H - from 0 to 99. Invalid access code (Invalid access code) The access code does not match the settings loaded into the machine. Invalid access level (access level is invalid) Valid levels are: 0 - 4. Duplicate address' encountered (detected duplicate address) The same address was found in the same block twice, for example, X0 Y0 X.5. Colinear line to line in round corner (Collinear line to line in a rounded corner) Colinear line to arc in round corner (Collinear line to an arc of the rounded corner) Colinear arc to line in round corner (Collinear arc to a line in the rounded corner) Colinear arc to arc in round corner (Collinear arc to arc in a rounded corner) Chamfer length is <0 (Chamfer length <0) The length of the bevel should be expressed as a positive number. 497

520

521 522 523 524 525 526 527 529 530 531 532 533 535

APPENDIX

536

Can't chamfer and round the same corner (can not be chamfered and round the same corner) Select a chamfer or round the corner from him. Can't chamfer to or from arcs (impossible with a chamfer arcs) Loop counter out of range (cycle counter is outside) The maximum number of cycles to call - 999. Dwell time out of range (Pause time beyond) Probably, it was indicated a negative number. Maximum time to pause 999999999 seconds. Illegal dwell time "#" encountered (found unacceptable pause "#") Try G4 F # #. # # # #; Specify X, P or F after the G4. No axis moves are allowed on a G31 or G32 block (movements along the axes are not allowed in block G31 and G32) G31 and G32 are intended only for the displacement Z. Move X and Y move to another block. G30 Illegal return to reference parameter on G30 block (G30 Invalid return to the basic setting in block G30) It should be P2, P3 or P4 for the second, third and fourth reference point. Illegal G10 statement (Invalid operator G10) Too many digits in number (too many digits in number) The number of digits exceeds the expected for a given address. For example, G100 should have only two digits. Illegal K value for number of holes (not valid for the number of K holes) K must be a number from 1 to 1000. Nested calls or gosubs too deep (level of nested calls or commands gosub too deep) Probably, the program calls itself. Limiting investments equal to 50 calls for the programs. Comment not closed (not closed Comment) Always use "()" (double parentheses) for comments on the program. Unrecognized G code (unidentified G-code) The observed G-code is not recognized by the control device.

537 538 539

540 541

542

543 544

545 546

547 549

498

APPENDIX
550 Bad numeric format (Invalid number format) Expected a numeric value or a parameter value enclosed in [], then enter X, Y, Z, R, etc. Multiple decimal points (a few decimal points) A few decimal points were found in a single numerical value. Missing "]" (missing "]") Always use brackets in pairs. Missing "[" (No "[") Always use brackets in pairs. Tangent function overflow (overflow function of tangent) Trying to find the tangent of a number close to 90 Missing "/" (There is no "/") The syntax of the arctangent "ATAN" - P # # = ATAN [# / #]. Negative SQRT argument (negative argument SQRT) Unknown function (unknown function) Illegal relational operator (Invalid relational operator) Unresolved call (Indefinite call) The called program does not exist (Call # # # #). Unresolved goto or gosub (Undefined command goto or gosub) N # # # # does not exist in the program (Goto # # # #). The tool is too large to cut inside the arc "Compensated radius is too small" (Tool for cutting too much inside the arc, "Adjusted the radius is too small") Remove the arc, or use a smaller tool. The tool is too large to cut inside the arc "1st compensated radius in arc to arc is <0" (Tool for cutting too much inside the arc, "1st corrected radius of the arc to the arc <0") Remove the arc, or use a smaller tool. The tool is too large to cut inside the arc "2nd compensated radius in arc to arc is <0" (Tool for cutting too much inside the arc, "2nd corrected radius of the arc to the arc <0") Remove the arc, or use a smaller tool.

551 552 553 554 555 556 557 560 567 568 569

570

571

499

APPENDIX
572 Pocket clear is not in a Start / End mill cycle -WHILE WEND loop(Cleaning the deep recesses is not in the loop Start / end milling) Cycle-WHILE WEND Use the START (Start) at the beginning of the cycle milling and END (End) to end the cycle of milling. Round wall is not in a Start / End mill cycle -WHILE WEND loop(Rounded wall is not located in a loop beginning / end milling) Cycle-WHILE WEND Use the START (Start) at the beginning of the cycle milling and END (End) to end the cycle of milling. Round wall radius will not span 1st Z depth and final Z depth (radius of the curved wall is not connecting the 1st depth Z with a final depth of Z) Tapered wall is not in a Start / End mill cycle -WHILE WEND loop(Conical wall is not located in a loop beginning / end milling) Cycle-WHILE WEND Use the START (Start) at the beginning of the cycle milling and END (End) to end the cycle of milling. Z increment is 0 (Increment of Z is equal to 0) Undefined text cycle (cycle of indefinite text) The symbol specified in the text command is not supported. Parameter Load Text Cycles (Download text of cycles) can not be installed in the PARMS-CTRL. Compensated arcs do not intersect (disjoint arcs Adjusted) Invalid floating point operation. The argument passed to the LN function was zero or negative. (Invalid floating point operation. Argument passed to the function LN, was negative or zero) Invalid floating point operation. The Operand passed to the "**" function was zero or negative (Invalid floating point operation. Operand passed to the function "**", was negative or zero) Can't set tool offsets for tool # 0 (not set correct for the tool number 0) Missing WHILE statement (Missing operator WHILE) Perhaps the end of the cycle without cutting cycle began milling.

573

574 575

576 578

579 580

581

588 601

500

APPENDIX
602 603 Missing WEND statement (Missing operator WEND) Perhaps the end of the cycle without cutting cycle began milling. Program N # # # # does not exist (Program N # # # # does not exist) The program, called as a subroutine does not exist. Check whether the called program in memory. Program N # # # # is empty (Program N # # # # empty) Performed or verified the program text is empty. Try to edit and resend the file dialog. Can't exit DNC run mode while program is running (can not exit the DNC run when the program is executed) DNC regime must be stopped before the release. 'P' expected in M98 block ("P" is expected to block M98) G20/21 not allowed in DNC Fast (G20/21 is not admissible in an accelerated mode DNC) Quill movement detected, reposition the quill to it's original position. (Moving quill was found, re-establishment of sleeve to its original position) Sampling error 800 Illegal probe block (the block is invalid sensor) Syntax error in file management. Check the format of the block. Blocks must begin with X, Y or Z, followed by one or two teams P. Missing end of pick (There is no end of instructions) The border is not closed indication. Entered the file does not complete the block boundary definition guidelines. Reversed scan segment (segment Scan Reverse) Multiple segments of the scan caused the change in the middle of the scan direction of the current scan. Missing end of scan (There is no end of scan) Segment directions was stopped before the end of the scan was determined. Must be at least two blocks determine the boundary between each scan directions. Reversed pick segment (segment reverse directions) Multiple segments indicate the direction of change caused instructions. Use multiple segments of the trial, if the desired goal.

606

607

608 609 666

801

802

803

804

501

APPENDIX
805 Invalid probe setup (Incorrect installation of the sensor) The input file does not begin a comment that contains three stars. Also, the following three blocks must be X, Y, Z or Y, X, Z, depending on the scanning plane. Scan origin expected (Waiting for the origin of scan) Multiple segments specifying started without specifying start scanning within a given segment. Probe file not found (File not found the sensor) Can not find the selected input file. Setup not selected (Setting is not selected) An attempt to measure without selecting a file input and output mode on the screen the sensor. Bad Z limits encountered (found unacceptable limits of Z) The maximum height of Z is less than the maximum value of depth Z. Stuck digitizing probe (probe for digitizing Jam) Digitization could reach a maximum height of Z, and contact with the workpiece still fixed. If the sensor does not actually affect the item, you may need to have it serviced. If it relates to the details, it can be omitted or increase the maximum height of Z. Input out of range (beyond entry) RS232 overrun error (The system sending data may not have the same baud rate as the CNC.) (Overflow error RS232 (The system sends the data can have the same baud rate as NC)) Check setting the baud rate with the RS-232 in the PARMS-CTRL. RS232 parity error (The system sending data may not have the same parity as the CNC.) (Parity Error RS232. (The system sends the data can have the same parity as NC)) Check the setting of parity for the RS-232 in the PARMS-CTRL. RS232 framing error (Remote system and CNC may not have the same line settings or a loose cable.) (Error crop RS232. Remote system and the CNC may not be the same configuration line or cable can be weakened)) Check the settings in the line of PARMS-CTRL for baud rate, parity and stop bits. RS232 break detected (RS232 cable may be loose.) (RS232 discovered the gap.RS232 cable can be weakened)) Check cable connections and connectors.

806

807 808

809 810

812 900

901

902

903

502

APPENDIX
950 951 952 953 954 955 956 957 958 959 960 Obsolete controller software for this system (Legacy software controller for the system) Obsolete acroloop software for this system (Legacy software acroloop for this system) Obsolete keyboard software for this system (Legacy software keyboard for the system) Obsolete bit access for ncb controller (Obsolete radix selection for the controller unit controls the network) Control not detected. (The control device is not detected) Interface not detected. (The interface is not found.) Interface communication failure (refusal to link interface) Watchdog failure (failure Watchdog) Unexpected Control Reset (Unexpected reset the control unit) Unknown PLC Failure (Unknown refusal to PLC) Control Failure (failure control devices) Byte parameters Parameter File Version (Version parameter file) Cartesian Inch Leading Digits (Senior level Cartesian coordinate system in imperial measurements) Cartesian Inch Trailing Digits (junior level Cartesian coordinate system in imperial measurements) Cartesian Metric Leading Digits (Senior level Cartesian coordinate system to the metric system of measurement) Cartesian Metric Trailing Digits (Junior ranks of Cartesian coordinates in the metric system of measurement) Angle Inch Leading Digits (senior level in a corner of the inch system of measurement) Angle Inch Trailing Digits (junior level in the corner of the inch system of measurement) Angle Metric Leading Digits (senior level of the angle in the metric system of measurement) Angle Metric Trailing Digits (junior level of the angle in the metric system of measurement)

000 016 017 018 019 020 021 022 023

503

APPENDIX
024 025 026 027 028 029 030 031 040 041 042 045 046 047 048 049 050 051 053 055 057 058 059 061 062 063 064 065 068 Spindle Inch Leading Digits (senior level in the spindle-inch system of measurement) Spindle Inch Trailing Digits (junior level in the spindle-inch system of measurement) Spindle Metric Leading Digits (Senior spindle discharges in the metric system of measurement) Spindle Metric Trailing Digits (Junior spindle discharges in the metric system of measurement) Feed Inch Leading Digits (senior level supply system in imperial measurements) Feed Inch Trailing Digits (Low level supply system in imperial measurements) Feed Metric Leading Digits (senior level supply in the metric system of measurement) Feed Metric Trailing Digits (Low level feeding in the metric system of measurement) RS-232 Change Line-Feed to Carriage Return Linefeed In (Changing the RS-232 line breaks to carriage return line feed) Send Carriage returns and Linefeeds at the end of each RS-232 block. (To send commands to the carriage return and line breaks after each block of the RS-232) Key-Board code (Code keyboard) Machine Version (Version of the machine) Force Front Panel Spindle (Spindle Gain from the front panel) Minimum Parts Space (minimum distance between parts) use G92 instead of G54 in the Hand-Wheel and Jog screens (using G92 instead of G54 on the screens of Hand-Wheel (flywheel) and Jog (Express delivery)) Extract programs with O # # # # # in RS-232 and Files Load (Check out the program with O # # # # # to RS-232 Files Load (Download file)) Spindle Range (Range of spindle speed) Number of ATC Pockets (The number of nests in the automatic tool changer) Resolve Programs in DNC (for GOTOs) (Identify program DNC (allows GOTO)) Disable 417 Errors (Deactivate Error 417) Door Open Switch (switch open the door) Use Small Soft Keys (Use a small soft keys) Load Tool Offsets (Download the tool offset) Use S Curves (Using S-curves) Primary Handwheel Encoder (primary flywheel sensor) Look Ahead in Run Mode (outrunning view at run time) Initial Units Inch or Metric (Proactive unit in inch or metric system of measurement) Number of Axis (Axis number) Spindle Axis (Spindle axis) 504

APPENDIX
069 070 071 072 073 075 076 077 078 079 080 081 082 083 085 086 087 088 089 090 091 092 093 094 096 097 099 100-109 110-119 120-129 130-145 146 160-175 176-183 188 189 190 200 201 Tool Change Type (Type of tool change) Run Rapid 100% (Running, accelerated the movement of 100%) Dry Run Rapid 100% (Idle, accelerated the movement of 100%) Spindle on in Dry Run (spindle turned on at idle) Tool Table Diameters \ Radius (Diameter / Radius tool table) Load Engraving Cycles (cycles Download engraving) Load Canned Cycles (Load group cycles) Check Spindle up to Speed (Check the spindle acceleration signal) Check Spindle Zero Speed (Check zero spindle speed) G18 is ZX or XZ plane (G18 - a ZX plane or XZ) Cad Type DXF or CDL (Type Cad DXF or CDL) Special Flags (Special flags) Offset Round and Tapered Walls (Correction of curved walls and conical) Full Dos File Names (The full file names DOS) Primary Serial Port (Primary serial port) COM1 Baud Rate; (COM1, baud rate in baud) COM1 Data / Stop Bits and Parity (COM1, parity and stop bits of information) COM2 Baud Rate; (COM2, baud rate in baud) COM2 Data / Stop Bits and Parity (COM2, parity and stop bits of information) Tape Start Character (The symbol starting tape) Tape Stop Character (The symbol stop tape) RS-232 Buffer Size (The size of the buffer RS232) Secondary Serial Port (The secondary serial port) RS-232_End of file character (RS-232_Konets symbol file) Power up with Block Skip On (Turn on the power when activated, blocks passage of) Power up with Optional Stop On (Power is activated when an optional stop) Display Multiple Block Lines (Show a few lines of blocks) Post M-code Table (Table future M-code) Custom G-code Table (Table specialized G-code) Custom M-code Table (Table specialized M-codes) M6 Macro File Name (file name in the macro M6) Drive on Menus (Disk menu) Report File Name (The name of the log file) Thermo Comp Axes (Temperature compensation of axles) Rapid S Curves (S-curves at an accelerated movement) Tap Up Double RPM (Cut the thread with double the number of revolutions per minute) Check Air Pressure (Check the air pressure) ATC Clockwise Coast (Movement of the tool changer to inertia in a clockwise direction) ATC Clockwise Brake (Braking device tool changer clockwise) 505

APPENDIX
202 203 204 206 209 212 213 214 215 218 219 220 221 222 223 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 275-291 294 295 296 298 300-315 320-335 338-353 354-369 370 ATC Counter Clockwise Coast (Movement of the tool changer of inertia counter-clockwise) ATC Counter Clockwise Brake (Braking device tool changer counterclockwise) Electronic Spindle Gears (electronic transmission of spindle) Show current position in E-Stop (Display the current position during emergency stop) Spindle Dac Value (value of the DAC spindle) Second Hand-Wheel Axis (The second axis of the handwheel) Probe Axis (The axis of the sensor) Probe Input (Sensor input) Cranking Factor (for hand-wheeling thru a program) (Ratio at start) (for manual movement of the program) Serial Key board (Keyboard with serial connection) European Code (European code) Door Open Axis (The axis of the door opening) Door Open Input (Log in opening the door) Door Over-Ride Axis (The axis of the abolition of the door opening) Door Over-Ride Input (Log cancel opening the door) End of Cycle Axis = 227; (The axis of the end of the cycle = 227) End of Cycle Output = 228; (The output end of the cycle = 228) Yaskawa Axis Drives (Axes drives Yaskawa) Third Hand-Wheel Axis (The third axis of the handwheel) Inverse Feed-rate in 1/Seconds or 1/Minutes (The reverse flow rate of 1/sec or 1/min) Video Mode (Video mode) Screen Blank Back Light (Lights turn off the display back) Enable Three Hand-Wheels when Conversational Programming (To activate the flywheel when the three dialog programming) Always Stop on Angles Greater Than 60 (Always stop at angles greater than 60 ) Dual Master Axis (Dual drive axle) Run Look Ahead Blocks (Blocks Perform advanced view) Foreign Extension (Foreign expansion) Blocks of Look Ahead in Fast DNC (units ahead is rooted in the view mode, DNC) Reverse Spindle in Back-Gear (reversed spindle gear looping) Check control over temperature (Check the temperature control) Remove tool lengths from graphics (Remove tool length of the charts) Utility Command (Command Center) Machine Type (Type of the machine) Mechanical Version (Version of the mechanical system) Electrical Version (Version of the electrical system) Ignore Rapids in Auto-Scale (Ignore the accelerated movement of the automatic scaling)

506

APPENDIX
371 374 375 376-391 392 394 395 396 397 398 399 400 404 405 406 410 411 413 415 416 417 418 419 Safe Zone on at Power Up (Safe area is activated when power is turned on) New Remote Hand-Wheel (The new remote handwheel) Sub Work-Coordinate System (auxiliary working system of coordinates) Machine Serial Number (Serial number of the machine) High Tool Change on Pick and Place (High tool change position in the capture and distribution) Acceleration Settling Time (Setup time overclocking) Deceleration Settling Time (Setting time of inhibition) Z Axis Scale Feed-back (Mitutoyo) (Feedback on the scale of the axis Z (Mitutoyo)) Auto Rotary Brake (Automatic rotary brake) Sort Directories by Name (Sort directories by name) Manual Pocket Clear Tool Number (number of tools to clean the deep recesses manually) Ignore Tool Radius to Large Errors (Ignore "Tool radius is too large") Front Panel Type (Type of the front panel) Aux Auger Button (Additional button for auger) Aux Setup Button (additional button to install) FeedBack on Quill Scale (feedback line sleeve) Tool Setting Any Tool, Current Tool (Set tool in any tool, the current tool) Pre Check Software Limits 0 = Run Only 1 = Always 2 = Never (Preprogrammed test limits 0 = 1 = Execute only 2 = Always Never) Remote HDW Encoder (Remote sensor wheel) Quill Scale Encoder (The sensor bar sleeve) Sharp Corners (Sharp edges) Tool Load Flag Limit Exceeded, Limit not Exceeded (Going beyond the flag download the tool, going beyond the limits do not exist) Tool Load Monitor 0 = Off 1 = E-Stop 2 = Feed Hold 3 = Block Mode On 4 = Set Flag - No Message 5 = Message Only (Download the tool sensor 0 = Disabled, 1 = 2 = Emergency Stop Stop feeding 3 = Enabled 4 = block mode Checking - No message = Only 5 posts) Tool Load Limits (Limits loading tool) Tool Load Maximums (Maximum loading tool) Cylinder Parked Axis (Cylindrical axis of the map in the original position) Cylinder Rotary Axis (Cylindrical rotary axis display) Check Spindle Gear Mismatch (Check the transmission spindle misalignment) Laser Tool Setter Pulse Length (length of a pulse laser device to adjust the tool) Tool Setting Use Work Offsets (Using the working set of corrections for the instrument) Feedhold G1 and No Spindle (Stop feeding the G1 and the absence of spindle) 507

420-444 445-470 471 472 473 474 475 476

APPENDIX
477 478 479 480 489 490 491 495 496 530 532 533 534 535 536 537 538 540 541 542 543 544 545 Watch Spindle up to Speed (Track spindle acceleration signal) Chiller Fault Axis (Axis cooling malfunction) Chiller Fault Input (Input malfunction of cooling) Tool Carousel Index Button (Button indexing rotary tool magazine) Handwheel G54-Z (flywheel G54-Z) E-Stop Option on Conversational End of Program Event (Optional emergency-stop dialog with the completion of the event program) 6 Cent RW30 Remote Handwheel Option (Optional remote flywheel Cent 6 RW30) 90 Degree Cutter Compensation (90-degree correction of the cutting tool) Restrictive Edit Key (Restrictions editing keys) Auger On Time (On Time auger) Wash-Down on Time (Closing time washing) Wash-Down off Time (Time off washing) Check Tool Door Open (Check tool at the door is open) Spindle Cool Down Time (spindle cooling time) Spindle Lube Cycle Time (cycle time lubrication of spindle) Yaskawa2 Drives (Drives Yaskawa2) Put Pot Down on Swing Arm Tool Changers (Lowering the slot in the tool changer with swinging arm) 2GearwithGearBox (2 transmission with a gear box) Check Drawbar Prox (Check the proximity switch traction rod) Yaskawa M5 drive (Drive Yaskawa M5) Machine State 0 = Nothing 1 = Verifying 2 = Program Running (State Machine 0 = None 1 = 2 = Running test program) Check Spindle in Gear (Check spindle gearing) Front Panel Flags (Flags front panel) -Definitions of bits FPFLAGS_HOLD_TOOL_CHANGE $ 01; (To stop the tool change) FPFLAGS_NOT_OVERRIDE_SWITCH $ 02; (Do not switch the feed rate) FPFLAGS_RAPID_OVERRIDE $ 04; (Rapid correction) FPFLAGS_LEDS $ 08; (LEDs) FPFLAGS_NOT_MANUAL_PANEL $ 10; (Do not hand panel) Changer Type (Device type tool changer) Pump Delay - Used on coolant through spindle (delay pump - used when applying coolant through the spindle) Check Up-to-speed2 - Copy of PB77 for use in NCB files (Check the signal razgona2 - Copy PB77 files for use in network management unit) Rotary Brake Delay - Copy of R_RotaryBrakeDelay for the NCB (Rotational latency brakes - copy R_RotaryBrakeDelay for control network) Up-to-speed Axis (The axis of acceleration) 508

547 548 549 550 551

APPENDIX
552 554 555 Up-to-speed Input (Signal input acceleration) Coolant Through Code - Used in NCB files for coolant through spindle (ID Coolant - Use file control block chain for the coolant through the spindle) Auto Rotary Brake2 - Copy of PB397 (Automatic rotary brake 2 - A copy of the PB397)

509

The actual parameters It should be very careful when writing to any settings other than Custom parameters P00P99. P00-P99 User Parameters (Custom Settings) P100P111 P112P139 Probe Parameters (Parameters of the sensor) Unassigned (Not assigned) P160P170 Unassigned (not assigned)

P140 R plane (plane R) P141 Final Z depth (final depth of Z) P142 Z initial level (initial level Z) P143 Z increment (Increment of Z) P144 First Z depth (The first depth Z) P145 Z feedrate (feed speed Z) P146 Peck up increment (Step periodic output bits) P147 Peck clearance (gap periodic output bits) P148 Dwell 1 (a pause) P149 Dwell 2 (Pause 2) P150 Pocket radius (radius of the deep recesses) P151 X pocket dimension (size deep groove X) P152 Y pocket dimension (size deep groove Y) P153 XY finish stock (Finishing allowance XY) P154 Z finish stock (Finishing allowance Z) P155 Cut width (width of cut) P156 Bolthole radius (radius of the bolt holes) P157 Bolthole start angle (the angle of initial bolt holes) P158 #holes in 360 degrees (number of holes at 360 degrees) P159 #holes to be made in Bolthole (number of holes that needed to be done in a hole under the bolt)

P171 Holes to be made in drill cycles "K" (The holes that need to be run in cycles of drilling) P172 Mirror position axis 1 (X) (mirroring the position of an axis (X)) P173 Mirror position axis 2 (Y) (Mirror 2 position of the axis (Y)) P174 Mirror position axis 3 (Z) (Mirror 3 position of the axis (Z)) P175 Mirror position axis 4 (A) (mirroring the position of the axis 4 (A)) P176 Mirror position axis 5 (B) (mirroring the position of the axis 5 (B)) P177 Mirror pos. optional axis (the axis of mirror position optional) P178 Mirror pos. optional axis (the axis of mirror position optional) P179 Mirror pos. optional axis (the axis of mirror position optional) P180 Scale position axis 1 (X) (Regulation scaling axis 1 (X)) P181 Scale position axis 2 (Y) (Regulation scaling axis 2 (Y)) P182 Scale position axis 3 (Z) (3-axis position of the zoom (Z)) P183 Scale posiiton axis 4 (A) (4-axis position of the zoom (A)) P184 Scale position axis 5 (B) (5-axis position of the zoom (B)) P185 Scale position opt. axis (the axis position of the zoom optional) P186 Scale position opt. axis (the axis position of the zoom optional) P187 Scale position opt.axis (optional axis position of the zoom) P188 Scale factor axis 1 (X) (scale factor 1 axis (X))

510

APPENDIX
P189 Scale factor axis 2 (Y) (2-axis scaling factor (Y)) P190 Scale factor axis 3 (Z) (3-axis scaling factor (Z)) P191 Scale factor axis 4 (A) (4-axis scaling factor (A)) P192 Scale factor axis 5 (B) (5-axis scaling factor (B)) P193 Scale factor opt. axis (the axis scaling factor optional) P194 Scale factor opt. axis (the axis scaling factor optional) P195 Scale factor opt. axis (the axis scaling factor optional) P196 Rotate I position (Rotate position I) P197 Rotate J position (Rotate position J) P198 Angle of rotation (Angle) P199 Auto Routines Plunge / Ramp (Automatic standardized incision / overclocking) P200 Previous position (X) (Previous position (X)) P201 Previous position (Y) (Previous position (Y)) P202 Previous position (Z) (Previous position (Z)) P203 Previous position (A) (Previous position (A)) P204 Previous position (B) (Previous position (B)) P205 Previous pos. opt. axis (axis of the previous position optional) P206 Previous pos. opt. axis (axis of the previous position optional) P207 Previous pos. opt. axis (axis of the previous position optional) P208 Current position (X) (current position (X)) P209 Current position (Y) (The current position (Y)) P210 Current position (Z) (The current position (Z)) P211 Current position (A) (The current position (A)) P212 Current position (B) (The current position (B)) P213 Current pos. opt. axis (axis of the current situation optional) P214 Current pos. opt. axis (axis of the current situation optional) P215 Current pos. opt. axis (axis of the current situation optional) P216 Previous machine (X) (Previous machine (X)) P217 Previous machine (Y) (Previous machine (Y)) P218 Previous machine (Z) (The previous machine (Z)) P219 Previous machine (A) (The previous machine (A)) P220 Previous mach. opt. axis (the axis of the previous machine optional) P221 Previous mach. opt. axis (the axis of the previous machine optional) P222 Previous mach. opt. axis (the axis of the previous machine optional) P223 Previous mach. opt. axis (the axis of the previous machine optional) P224 Current machine (X) (Current machine (X)) P225 Current machine (Y) (Current Machine (Y)) P226 Current machine (Z) (Current machine (Z)) P227 Current machine (A) (Current Machine (A)) P228 Current machine (B) (Current Machine (B)) P229 Current machine opt. axis (the axis of the current machine optional) P230 Current machine opt. axis (the axis of the current machine optional) P231 Current machine opt. axis (the axis of the current machine optional) P232 Work offset axis 1 (X) (Operating a correction of the axis (X)) P233 Work offset axis 2 (Y) (Working Correction axis 2 (Y)) P234 Work offset axis 3 (Z) (Working Correction axis 3 (Z)) 511

APPENDIX
P235 Work offset axis 4 (A) (Working Correction axis 4 (A)) P236 Work offset axis 5 (B) (Correction Working axle 5 (B)) P237 Work offset optional axis (the axis of the Working correction optional) P238 Work offset optional axis (the axis of the Working correction optional) P239 Work offset optional axis (the axis of the Working correction optional) P240 Tool offset axis 1 (X) (Correction to the tool axis 1 (X)) P241 Tool offset axis 2 (Y) (Correction to the tool axis 2 (Y)) P242 Tool offset axis 3 (Z) (Correction to the tool axis 3 (Z)) P243 Tool offset axis 4 (A) (Correction to the tool axis 4 (A)) P244 Tool offset axis 5 (B) (Correction to the tool axis 5 (B)) P245 Tool offset optional axis (correction to the tool axis optional) P246 Tool offset optional axis (correction to the tool axis optional) P247 Tool offset optional axis (correction to the tool axis optional) P248 Arc radius (radius of the arc) P149 Arc I value (The quantity I arc) P250 Arc J value (The value of J arc) P251 Feedrate (feed rate) P252 Dwell (Pause) P253 Spindle speed (RPM spindle) P254 Temporary X position (the position of Interim X) P255 Temporary Y position (the position of Interim Y) P256 Temporary Z position (Temporary Regulation Z) P257 Temporary A position (temporary position A) P258 Temporary axis position (the position of Interim axis) P259 Temporary axis position (the position of Interim axis) P260 Active tool number (number of active tool) 512 P261 Active tool radius (radius of the active tool) P262 Active tool length (length of the active tool) P263 Active radius offset number (number correction to the radius of the active tool) P264 Active length offset number (number correction to the length of the active tool) P265 Canned cycle active (The group is active cycle) P266 Zone status (status area) P267 Unit ratio (ratio of units) P268 Pending tool (expected tool) P269 Unused (not used) P270 Temporary I (Temporary I) P271 Temporary J (Temporary J) P272 Temporary K (Temporary K) P273 Third axis rotation angle (Angle of rotation of the third axis) P274P282 P283P285 Rotation table (Turntable) Unused (not used)

P286- Rotation coordinates (The coordinates of the rotation) P292 P293P299 Unassigned (not assigned)

P300 Modal 00 (modal 00) P301 Modal 01 (modal 01) P302 Modal 02 (modal 02) P303 Modal 03 (modal 03) P304 Data mode (Data Mode) P305 H offset direction (direction of the correction H) P306 Interpolate (Interpolation) P307 Coordinates (coordinates) P308 Active plane (active plane)

APPENDIX
P309 Cutter compensation (correction to the cutting tool) P310 Canned cycle (Group cycle) P311 Dimension (Size) P312 Feed unit (Supply unit) P313 Spindle unit (Knot Spindle) P314 Spindle direction (direction of rotation of the spindle) P315 Linear unit (Linear node) P316 Scale (Scale) P317 Rotate (turn) P318 Mirror (Mirror) P319 Work system (Operating System) P320 Primary (Primary) P321 Secondary (Secondary) P322 Tertiary (Tertiary) P323 Return plane (plane of the return) P324 Tapping (Tapping) P325 Custom code (custom code) P326 Custom M-code (Specialized Mcode) P327 Custom G-code (specialized Gcode) P328 Feed per Rev (wait for marker) (feed per revolution (waiting for the token)) P329 Feedrate override Lock (Lock feedrate) P330 Spindle override Lock (Lock correct spindle speed) P331P334 Unassigned (not assigned)

P348P349 P350P361 tool) P362P363 P364 P365 P366 P367P368 P369 P370 P371P399

Unassigned (Not assigned) Used in tool setting software (Used in the software configuration Unassigned (not assigned) Draw Bar Delay used in tool change macros (delay pulling the rod used in a macro tool change) Feed per Minute Feedrate (feed rate, feed per minute) Feed per Rev Feedrate (feed rate, feed per revolution) Unassigned (not assigned) Job time (time of manufacturing one piece) True tool number (the true number of tools) Unassigned (not assigned)

P335 Hard Tap Fudge Factor (The configuration parameter rigid tapping) P336P343 Unassigned (not assigned)

P344 Inverse Time Feedrate (feed rate with time delay) P345 Bore Type (Type of Boring) P346 G76 Orient Bore Angle (G76 angle orientation bore) P347 G76 Orient Bore Distance (G76 Distance orientation boring) 513

P400 Work G92 axis 1 (X) (Working one axis (X) G92) P401 Work G92 axis 2 (Y) (working Axis 2 (Y) G92) P402 Work G92 axis 3 (Z) (working 3 axis (Z) G92) P403 Work G92 axis 4 (A) (Working Axis 4 (A) G92) P404 Work G92 axis 5 (B) (Working axis 5 (B) G92) P405 Work G92 optional axis (Working optional axis) P406 Work G52 axis 1 (X) (Working one axis (X) G52) P407 Work G52 axis 2 (Y) (working Axis 2 (Y) G52)

APPENDIX
P408 Work G52 axis 3 (Z) (working 3 axis (Z) G52) P409 Work G52 axis 4 (A) (Working axis 4 (A) G52) P410 Work G52 axis 5 (B) (Working axis 5 (B) G52) P411 Work G52 optional axis (Working optional axis) P412 Work coordinate a (X) (Operating a coordinate (X)) P413 Work coordinate a (Y) (Operating a coordinate (Y)) P414 Work coordinate a (Z) (the coordinate of a Working (Z)) P415 Work coordinate 1 (A) (Working coordinate 1 (A)) P416 Work coordinate 1 (B) (Working coordinate 1 (B)) P417 Work coordinate an opt. axis (Working a coordinate axis optional) P418 Work coordinate 2 (X) (Working coordinate 2 (X)) P419 Work coordinate 2 (Y) (2 Working coordinate (Y)) P420 Work coordinate 2 (Z) (Working coordinate 2 (Z)) P421 Work coordinate 2 (A) (Working coordinate 2 (A)) P422 Work coordinate 2 (B) (Working coordinate 2 (B)) P423 Work coordinate two opt. axis (Working two coordinate axis optional) P424 Work coordinate 3 (X) (Working coordinate 3 (X)) P425 Work coordinate 3 (Y) (Working three coordinate (Y)) P426 Work coordinate 3 (Z) (Working coordinate 3 (Z)) P427 Work coordinate 3 (A) (Working coordinate 3 (A)) P428 Work coordinate 3 (B) (Working coordinate 3 (B)) P429 Work coordinate 3 opt. axis (Working three coordinate axis optional) P430 Work coordinate 4 (X) (Working coordinate 4 (X)) 514 P431 Work coordinate 4 (Y) (4 Working coordinate (Y)) P432 Work coordinate 4 (Z) (Working coordinate 4 (Z)) P433 Work coordinate 4 (A) (Working coordinate 4 (A)) P434 Work coordinate 4 (B) (Working coordinate 4 (B)) P435 Work coordinate 4 opt. axis (Working optional 4-axis coordinate) P436 Work coordinate 5 (X) (Working coordinate 5 (X)) P437 Work coordinate 5 (Y) (5 Working coordinate (Y)) P438 Work coordinate 5 (Z) (Working coordinate 5 (Z)) P439 Work coordinate 5 (A) (Working coordinate 5 (A)) P440 Work coordinate 5 (B) (Working coordinate 5 (B)) P441 Work coordinate 5 opt. axis (Working optional five-axis coordinate) P442 Work coordinate 6 (X) (Working coordinate 6 (X)) P443 Work coordinate 6 (Y) (6 Operating coordinate (Y)) P444 Work coordinate 6 (Z) (Working coordinate 6 (Z)) P445 Work coordinate 6 (A) (Working coordinate 6 (A)) P446 Work coordinate 6 (B) (Working coordinate 6 (B)) P447 Work coordinate 6 opt. axis (Working optional 6-axis coordinate) P448 Tool change offset (X) (Correction tool change (X)) P449 Tool change offset (Y) (Correction tool changer (Y)) P450 Tool change offset (Z) (Correction tool changer (Z)) P451 Tool change offset (A) (Correction tool change (A)) P452 Tool change offset (B) (Correction tool change (B)) P453 Tool chg. offset opt.axis (Correction tool changer optional axis)

APPENDIX
P454 Positive safe zone (X) (Positive safety zone (X)) P455 Positive safe zone (Y) (A positive safety zone (Y)) P456 Positive safe zone (Z) (Positive safety zone (Z)) P457 Positive safe zone (A) (positive safety zone (A)) P458 Positive safe zone (B) (positive safety zone (B)) P459 Positive safe zone opt. (A positive safety zone axis optional) P460 Negative safe zone (X) (negative safety zone (X)) P461 Negative safe zone (Y) (negative safety zone (Y)) P462 Negative safe zone (Z) (negative safety zone (Z)) P463 Negative safe zone (A) (Negative safe zone (A)) P464 Negative safe zone (B) (negative safety zone (B)) P465 Negative safe zone opt. (The negative safety zone axis optional) P466 Text Rotation Angle (angle of rotation of the text) P467P473 Unassigned (not assigned) P512 P513 P514 milling) P515 cut) P516 CutIncrement (increment of cut) RufCutType (type rough cut) Start Mill Options (Options start RufCutDepth (roughing depth of Island (Island)

P517- Used in Autoroutines P527 (Used in automatic standard programs) P522 Ramp Angle in Autoroutines (canting angle standard in automatic programs) P528P697 Unassigned (not assigned)

P698 Parts Counter Increment (step counter parts) P699 Parts Counter (Counter parts) P700P703 Unassigned (not assigned)

P704 Power on Feedrate (The inclusion of the feed rate) P705P789 Unassigned (not assigned)

P474 Current Max Feedt (current maximum flow rate) P475 R_LogBeatsSkip (Skipping R_LogBeats) P476P494 Unassigned (not assigned)

P495 ToolChangeSpacing (tool change intervals) P496P509 P510 P511 Unassigned (not assigned) StartBlock (Top of unit) EndBlock (end unit) 515

P790 Spindle range 1 (Range of spindle 1) P791 Spindle range 2 (Range of spindle speed 2) P792 Spindle range 3 (range of rotation of the spindle 3) P793 Spindle Range 4 (Range of spindle 4) P794 Spindle Range 5 (range of rotation of the spindle 5) P795 Spindle Range 6 (range spindle 6) P796 Spindle Range 7 (range spindle 7) P797 Spindle Range 8 (Range of spindle speed 8)

APPENDIX
P798 Max Graph Size (Maximum Graphics) P799P811 P812 P814 P815P816 Unassigned (not assigned) Block Rate (frequency blocks) Cad Epsilon (Epsilon Cad) Unassigned (not assigned) P893 Soft Start Delay (Delayed soft start) P894 Clamped Feedrate (fixed flow rate) P895 Cranking Max ipm (Maximum number of inches / rev at startup) P896 Handwheel Encoder PPU (The number of pulses / rev encoder wheel) P897 Cranking Minutes Per Turn (The number of minutes / v at startup) P898 Screen Blank Time (Time to turn off the screen) P899 Digitizing Enable (Activating otsifroki) P900P962 Unassigned (Not assigned)

P817 Spindle Encoder PPU1 (The number of pulses / rev encoder spindle 1) P818 Actual Spindle RPM (actual spindle speed) P819P839 Unassigned (not assigned)

P840 Pulse Delay (Delay time pulse) P841 Max Spindle RPM (Maximum spindle speed) P842 Tapping Ramp Low Gear (first linear channel for tapping) P843 Spindle Acceleration Ramp (linear acceleration of the spindle) P844 Spindle Deceleration Ramp (linear deceleration of spindle) P845P849 Unassigned (not assigned)

P850 ADC Sample (Sample ADC) P851 ADC Scale (Scale ADC) P852 ADC Value (value of the ADC) P853 ADC Trigger (Trigger ADC) P854 Tapping Ramp High Gear (upper linear channel with tapping) P855 Spindle Encoder PPU2 (The number of pulses / rev encoder spindle 2) P856P892 Unassigned (not assigned)

P963 Max Corner Deviation (Maximum deviation angle) P964 Unassigned (Not assigned) P965 SpindleScale (Fraction of full spindle dac) (Scaling the spindle (the spindle part of the full DAC)) P966 Minimum Block Time (seconds, min time when not in fast DNC) (Minimum time unit (seconds, minutes. Time is not in an accelerated mode DNC)) P967 Unassigned (not assigned) P968 Minimum Linear Feed AccDec (Min. Speed / acceleration line feed) P969 Minimum Rotary Feed AccDec (Min. speed / acceleration rotating feed) P970 Minimum Linear Rapid AccDec (Min. speed / acceleration of the linear accelerated movements) P971 Minimum Rotary Rapid AccDec (Min. speed / acceleration rotating fast movement) P972 Quill Epsilon (Epsilon sleeve) P973 Front Panel Base Port (main port of the front panel) P974 Quill Scale PPU (The number of pulses / inch ruler sleeve) 516

APPENDIX
P1012 Velocity away from home (X) (The speed in the direction from the initial position (X)) P1013 Velocity toward marker (X) (The rate of momentum in the direction of the marker (X)) P1014 Encoder multiplier (X) (Multiplier detector (X)) P1015 Slow jog velocity (X) (Jog at a slow flow rate (X)) P1016 Slow jog acc / dec (X) (Acceleration / deceleration jog feed at a slow speed (X)) P1017 Rapid jog velocity (X) (Jog feed at high speed (X)) P1018 Rapid jog acc / dec (X) (Acceleration / deceleration jog feed at high speed (X)) P1019 In position (X) (The position (X)) P1020 G00 unidirectional (X) (G00 Unidirectional (X)) P1021 G60 unidirectional (X) (G60 Unidirectional (X)) P1022 Backlash (X) (The gap (X)) P1023 Excess error (X) (Error error (X)) P1024 Rotary = 0 Linear = 1 (X) (Pie = 0, linear = 1 (X)) P1025 English Lead (X) (Senior level, the English system (X)) P1026 English Trail (X) (Least significant bit, the English system (X)) P1027 Metric Lead (X) (Senior level, the metric system (X)) P1028 Metric Trail (X) (Least significant bit, the metric system (X)) P1029 Jog Key Direction (X) (Direction buttons jog feed (X)) P1030- Unassigned (X) (not assigned) P1040 P1041 Home Marker Switch (X) (Home Switch = 0, Marker = 1) (Switch the starting position marker pulse (X)) (switch initial position = 0, a marker 517

P975P999

Unassigned (not assigned)

P1000- Axis 1 Address (X) P1099 (Address 1 axis (X)) P1100- Axis 2 Address (Y) P1199 (Address of axis 2 (Y)) P1200- Axis 3 Address (Z) P1299 (Address the 3 axis (Z)) P1300- Axis 4 Address (A) P1399 (Address of axis 4 (A)) P1400- Axis 5 Address (B) P1499 (Address 5-axis (B)) P1000 Axis address label (X) (address label axis (X)) P1001 Pulses per unit (X) (number of pulses per unit (X)) P1002 Home position (X) (Starting position (X)) P1003 Home direction (X) (initial direction (X)) P1004 Positive limit (X) (positive limit (X)) P1005 Negative limit (X) (negative limit (X)) P1006 Maximum feed (X) (maximum feed rate (X)) P1007 Dry run feed (X) (Filing at idle (X)) P1008 Rapid velocity (X) (for fast moving speed (X)) P1009 Rapid acc / dec (X) (acceleration / acceleration when moving fast (X)) P1010 Home sequence (X) (loop back to the original position (X)) P1011 Velocity toward home (X) (The speed in the direction of the initial position (X))

APPENDIX
pulse = 1) P1042 G28 reference point (X) (G28 reference point (X)) P1043 G30 reference point 2 (X) (G30 control point 2 (X)) P1044 G30 reference point 3 (X) (G30 reference point 3 (X)) P1045 G30 reference point 4 (X) (G30 reference point 4 (X)) P1046 Max Handwheel Error (X) (Maximum error of the flywheel (X)) P1047- Unassigned (X) (not assigned) P1048 P1049 P1050 Feed Back (X) (Feedback (X)) Invert Handwheel (X) (non-zero = invert handwheel direction) (Check the flywheel (X)) (non-zero value is the inverse direction of the flywheel) P1051 Gain Proportional (X) (Proportional gain (X)) P1052 Gain Velocty (X) (Growth rate (X)) P1053 Gain Acceleration (X) (growth acceleration (X)) P1054 Gain Handwheel (X) (Enhancement of the flywheel (X)) P1055 Feed S-Curve Acc \ Dec (X) (Scurve acceleration and deceleration when applying (X)) P1056 Rapid S-Curve Acc \ Dec (X) (Scurve acceleration and deceleration at the accelerated movement (X)) P1057- Unassigned (X) (not assigned) P1099 P1100- Same as above only for (Y) axis P1199 (Same as the above parameters, only the axis (Y)) P1200- Same as above only for (Z) axis P1299 (Same as the above parameters, only the axis (Z)) 518

P1300- Same as above only for (A) axis P1399 (Same as the above parameters, only the axis (A)) P1400- Same as above only for (B) axis P1499 (Same as the above parameters, only the axis (B)) P1500 Unassigned (not assigned) P1501 Software Version (Software Version) P1502- Unassigned (not assigned) P1503 P1504 Turret Pocket Count (Count of nests in the turret) P1505- Unassigned (not assigned) P1554 P1555 Current Pocket (Time slot)

P1556- Tool Slots for swing arm style tool P1595 changers (Hole tool tool changer with swinging arm) P1596- Unassigned (not assigned) P1598 P1599 Spindle Orient Delay (Delay of spindle orientation) P1600- Thermo Degrees per Volt P1607 (The number of thermal degrees per volt) P1608- Thermo Inches per Volt P1615 (The number of thermal inches per volt) P1616- Thermo Inverse Growth per P1623 Degree (volume growth in the reverse thermal degrees)

APPENDIX
P1624- Thermo Position Sensor P1631 (The thermal position sensor) P1632- Thermo Voltage Reference P1639 (Thermal voltage reference) P1640- Thermo Position Reference P1647 (The thermal reference point position) P1648- Unassigned (Not assigned) P1699 P1700- Security Codes P1799 (Security codes) P1800- Unassigned (not assigned) P1999 P2000P2099 P2100P2199 Tool Radii 0 .. 99 (The radii of the tool 0 .. 99) Tool Lengths 0 .. 99 (Tool length 0 .. 99)

519